2017 F-150 Owner's Manual - Dealer E Process

August 2016 First Printing

Owner’s Manual F-150

Litho in U.S.A.

HL3J 19A321 AA

2017 F-150 Owner’s Manual

owner.ford.com ford.ca Ow

ner’s Manual

2017 F-150

The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest ofcontinuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any timewithout notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in aretrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.Errors and omissions excepted.© Ford Motor Company 2016

All rights reserved.Part Number: 20160705174347

IntroductionAbout This Manual...........................................7Symbols Glossary.............................................7Data Recording..................................................9California Proposition 65..............................11Perchlorate.........................................................11Ford Credit..........................................................11Replacement Parts

Recommendation.......................................12Special Notices................................................12Mobile Communications

Equipment.....................................................13Export Unique Options.................................14

EnvironmentProtecting the Environment........................15

Child SafetyGeneral Information.......................................16Installing Child Restraints.............................17Booster Seats..................................................29Child Restraint Positioning..........................31Child Safety Locks..........................................32

SeatbeltsPrinciple of Operation..................................34Fastening the Seatbelts...............................35Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................39Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator

Chime.............................................................39Seatbelt Reminder........................................40Child Restraint and Seatbelt

Maintenance................................................42Seatbelt Extension........................................42

Personal Safety System™Personal Safety System™..........................44

Supplementary RestraintsSystem

Principle of Operation..................................45Driver and Passenger Airbags...................46Front Passenger Sensing System............47Side Airbags.....................................................49Safety Canopy™............................................50Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.........51Airbag Disposal...............................................52

Keys and Remote ControlsGeneral Information on Radio

Frequencies..................................................53Remote Control..............................................53Replacing a Lost Key or Remote

Control...........................................................58

MyKey™Principle of Operation..................................59Creating a MyKey...........................................60Clearing All MyKeys......................................60Checking MyKey System Status................61Using MyKey With Remote Start

Systems.........................................................62MyKey Troubleshooting...............................62

Doors and LocksLocking and Unlocking................................64Keyless Entry...................................................66

TailgateTailgate Lock....................................................69Manual Tailgate..............................................69Electronic Tailgate.........................................69Removing the Tailgate.................................70Tailgate Step.....................................................71Bed Extender....................................................72

SecurityPassive Anti-Theft System.........................74

1

F-150 (TFC) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, First Printing

Table of Contents

Anti-Theft Alarm............................................76

Power Running BoardsUsing Power Running Boards....................78

Steering WheelAdjusting the Steering Wheel...................80Audio Control...................................................81Voice Control...................................................82Cruise Control..................................................82Information Display Control.......................83

PedalsAdjusting the Pedals....................................84

Wipers and WashersWindshield Wipers........................................85Autowipers.......................................................85Windshield Washers.....................................86

LightingLighting Control..............................................87Autolamps........................................................87Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................88Daytime Running Lamps............................89Automatic High Beam Control.................89Front Fog Lamps.............................................91Direction Indicators........................................91Spot Lamps.......................................................91Interior Lamps.................................................92Ambient Lighting...........................................94

Windows and MirrorsPower Windows.............................................95Exterior Mirrors................................................96Interior Mirror...................................................99Sliding Windows..........................................100Sun Visors.......................................................100Moonroof........................................................100

Instrument ClusterGauges..............................................................102Warning Lamps and Indicators...............105Audible Warnings and Indicators...........108

Information DisplaysGeneral Information.....................................110Information Messages................................126

Climate ControlManual Climate Control..............................141Automatic Climate Control.......................143Hints on Controlling the Interior

Climate.........................................................144Heated Windows and Mirrors...................147Cabin Air Filter................................................147Remote Start.................................................148

SeatsSitting in the Correct Position..................149Head Restraints............................................149Manual Seats..................................................151Power Seats....................................................152Memory Function.........................................154Rear Seats.......................................................156Heated Seats.................................................156Climate Controlled Seats...........................157Front Seat Armrest......................................159Rear Seat Armrest........................................159

Universal Garage DoorOpener

Universal Garage Door Opener...............160

Auxiliary Power PointsAuxiliary Power Points................................164

Storage CompartmentsCenter Console..............................................166

2


Table of Contents

Overhead Console........................................167

Starting and Stopping theEngine

General Information....................................168Ignition Switch...............................................168Keyless Starting............................................168Steering Wheel Lock...................................169Starting a Gasoline Engine.......................169Engine Block Heater.....................................172

Unique Driving Character-istics

Auto-Start-Stop............................................174

Fuel and RefuelingSafety Precautions.......................................176Fuel Quality - E85.........................................177Fuel Quality - Gasoline...............................178Fuel Filler Funnel Location - Regular

Cab.................................................................178Fuel Filler Funnel Location - SuperCab/

SuperCrew..................................................179Running Out of Fuel.....................................179Refueling.........................................................180Fuel Consumption........................................182Emission Control System..........................183

TransmissionAutomatic Transmission...........................186

Four-Wheel DriveUsing Four-Wheel Drive.............................193

Rear AxleElectronic Locking Differential................201

BrakesGeneral Information...................................203

Hints on Driving With Anti-LockBrakes..........................................................203

Parking Brake................................................204Electric Parking Brake................................204Hill Start Assist............................................206

Traction ControlPrinciple of Operation...............................208Using Traction Control..............................208

Stability ControlPrinciple of Operation...............................209Using Stability Control...............................210

Hill Descent ControlPrinciple of Operation.................................212Using Hill Descent Control........................212

Parking AidsPrinciple of Operation.................................213Rear Parking Aid............................................213Active Park Assist.........................................214Rear View Camera.......................................218360 Degree Camera....................................221

Cruise ControlPrinciple of Operation................................224Using Cruise Control...................................224Using Adaptive Cruise Control................225

Driving AidsDriver Alert......................................................232Lane Keeping System.................................232Blind Spot Information System.............236Cross Traffic Alert........................................240Steering...........................................................243Collision Warning System........................244Drive Control.................................................246

3


Table of Contents

Load CarryingLoad Retaining Fixtures.............................247Load Limit......................................................248Bed Access.....................................................252Bed Ramps.....................................................253

TowingTowing a Trailer............................................256Trailer Reversing Aids..................................257Trailer Sway Control....................................267Recommended Towing Weights............267Essential Towing Checks..........................278Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels......285

Driving HintsBreaking-In....................................................288Economical Driving.....................................288Driving Through Water..............................289Floor Mats......................................................289Snowplowing................................................290

Roadside EmergenciesRoadside Assistance..................................293Hazard Warning Flashers.........................294Fuel Shutoff...................................................294Jump Starting the Vehicle........................295Post-Crash Alert System..........................297Transporting the Vehicle...........................297Towing Points...............................................298

Customer AssistanceGetting the Services You Need..............300In California (U.S. Only).............................301The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto

Line Program (U.S. Only).....................302Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration

Program (Canada Only).......................303Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and

Canada........................................................303

Ordering Additional Owner'sLiterature....................................................304

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.Only)............................................................305

Reporting Safety Defects (CanadaOnly)............................................................305

FusesFuse Specification Chart..........................307Changing a Fuse............................................315

MaintenanceGeneral Information.....................................317Opening and Closing the Hood...............317Under Hood Overview - 2.7L

EcoBoost™.................................................318Under Hood Overview - 3.5L....................319Under Hood Overview - 3.5L

Ecoboost™................................................320Under Hood Overview - 5.0L....................321Engine Oil Dipstick.......................................322Engine Oil Check..........................................322Oil Change Indicator Reset.......................323Engine Coolant Check................................323Automatic Transmission Fluid

Check............................................................327Transfer Case Fluid Check........................328Brake Fluid Check........................................328Power Steering Fluid Check.....................328Washer Fluid Check....................................329Fuel Filter........................................................329Changing the 12V Battery.........................329Checking the Wiper Blades.......................331Changing the Wiper Blades......................331Adjusting the Headlamps.........................332Changing a Bulb...........................................333Bulb Specification Chart...........................337Changing the Engine Air Filter................339

Vehicle CareGeneral Information...................................340

4


Table of Contents

Cleaning Products......................................340Cleaning the Exterior...................................341Waxing.............................................................342Cleaning the Engine....................................342Cleaning the Windows and Wiper

Blades..........................................................343Cleaning the Interior...................................343Cleaning the Instrument Panel and

Instrument Cluster Lens.......................344Cleaning Leather Seats.............................344Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............345Cleaning the Wheels..................................346Vehicle Storage............................................346

Wheels and TiresGeneral Information...................................349Tire Care...........................................................351Using Snow Chains.....................................366Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........367Changing a Road Wheel............................372Technical Specifications..........................380

Capacities and Specific-ations

Engine Specifications - 2.7LEcoBoost™.................................................381

Engine Specifications - 3.5L.....................381Engine Specifications - 3.5L

Ecoboost™................................................382Engine Specifications - 5.0L...................383Motorcraft Parts - 2.7L EcoBoost™......383Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L..............................384Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Ecoboost™......385Motorcraft Parts - 5.0L.............................385Vehicle Identification Number...............386Vehicle Certification Label.......................387Transmission Code Designation............387Capacities and Specifications - 2.7L

EcoBoost™...............................................388Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L....392

Capacities and Specifications - 3.5LEcoboost™................................................396

Capacities and Specifications -5.0L..............................................................400

Audio SystemGeneral Information...................................405Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM......406Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/

CD.................................................................408Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/

SYNC..............................................................411Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/

SYNC/Satellite Radio.............................413Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/FM/

CD...................................................................415Digital Radio...................................................417Satellite Radio...............................................419USB Port..........................................................422Media Hub......................................................422

SYNC™General Information...................................423Using Voice Recognition...........................425Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............427SYNC™ Applications and Services......439Using SYNC™ With Your Media

Player...........................................................444SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................453

SYNC™ 3General Information....................................461Home Screen.................................................472Using Voice Recognition............................473Entertainment..............................................480Climate...........................................................490Phone...............................................................492Navigation......................................................498Apps.................................................................506Settings...........................................................509SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting.......................521

5


Table of Contents

AccessoriesAccessories....................................................534

Ford ProtectFord Protect...................................................537

Scheduled MaintenanceGeneral Maintenance Information.......539Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........542Special Operating Conditions Scheduled

Maintenance.............................................545Scheduled Maintenance Record...........548

AppendicesEnd User License Agreement.................558Type Approvals............................................582

6


Table of Contents

ABOUT THIS MANUALThank you for choosing Ford. Werecommend that you take some time toget to know your vehicle by reading thismanual. The more that you know aboutyour vehicle, the greater the safety andpleasure you will get from driving it.

WARNINGDriving while distracted can result inloss of vehicle control, crash andinjury. We strongly recommend that

you use extreme caution when using anydevice that may take your focus off theroad. Your primary responsibility is the safeoperation of your vehicle. We recommendagainst the use of any hand-held devicewhile driving and encourage the use ofvoice-operated systems when possible.Make sure you are aware of all applicablelocal laws that may affect the use ofelectronic devices while driving.

Note: This manual describes productfeatures and options available throughoutthe range of available models, sometimeseven before they are generally available. Itmay describe options not fitted to thevehicle you have purchased.Note: Some of the illustrations in thismanual may show features as used indifferent models, so may appear differentto you on your vehicle.Note: Always use and operate your vehiclein line with all applicable laws andregulations.Note: Pass on this manual when sellingyour vehicle. It is an integral part of yourvehicle.This manual may qualify the location of acomponent as left-hand side or right-handside. The side is determined when facingforward in the seat.

E154903

Right-hand side.ALeft-hand side.B

SYMBOLS GLOSSARYThese are some of the symbols you maysee on your vehicle.

E162384

Air conditioning system

E231157

Air conditioning system lubricanttype

Anti-lock braking system

Avoid smoking, flames or sparks

Battery

Battery acid

Brake fluid - non petroleumbased

Brake system

7


Introduction

Cabin air filter

Check fuel cap

Child safety door lock or unlock

Child seat lower anchor

Child seat tether anchor

E71340

Cruise control

Do not open when hot

Engine air filter

Engine coolant

Engine coolant temperature

Engine oil

Explosive gas

Fan warning

Fasten seatbelt

E231160

Flammable

Front airbag

Front fog lamps

Fuel pump reset

Fuse compartment

Hazard warning flashers

Heated rear window

Heated windshield

Interior luggage compartmentrelease

Jack

E161353

Keep out of reach of children

Lighting control

Low tire pressure warning

Maintain correct fluid level

Note operating instructions

Panic alarm

8


Introduction

E139213

Parking aid

Parking brake

Power steering fluid

Power windows front/rear

Power window lockout

E231159

Requires registered technician

Safety alert

See Owner's Manual

E231158

See Service Manual

Service engine soon

Side airbag

E167012

Shield the eyes

E138639

Stability control

Windshield wash and wipe

DATA RECORDINGService Data RecordingService data recorders in your vehicle arecapable of collecting and storingdiagnostic information about your vehicle.This potentially includes information aboutthe performance or status of varioussystems and modules in the vehicle, suchas engine, throttle, steering or brakesystems. In order to properly diagnose andservice your vehicle, Ford Motor Company(Ford of Canada in Canada), and serviceand repair facilities may access or shareamong them vehicle diagnosticinformation received through a directconnection to your vehicle whendiagnosing or servicing your vehicle.Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Fordof Canada, in Canada) may, wherepermitted by law, use vehicle diagnosticinformation for vehicle improvement orwith other information we may have aboutyou, (for example, your contactinformation), to offer you products orservices that may interest you. Data maybe provided to our service providers suchas part suppliers that may help diagnosemalfunctions, and who are similarlyobligated to protect data. We retain thisdata only as long as necessary to performthese functions or to comply with law. Wemay provide information where requiredin response to official requests to lawenforcement or other governmentauthorities or third parties acting withlawful authority or court order, and suchinformation may be used in legalproceedings. For U.S. only (if equipped), ifyou choose to use connected apps andservices, such as SYNC Vehicle HealthReport or MyFord Mobile App, you consentthat certain diagnostic information mayalso be accessed electronically by FordMotor Company and Ford authorizedservice facilities, and that the diagnosticinformation may be used to provide

9


Introduction

services to you, personalizing yourexperience, troubleshoot, and to improveproducts and services and offer youproducts and services that may interestyou, where permitted by law. For Canadaonly, for more information, please reviewthe Ford of Canada privacy policy atwww.ford.ca, including our U.S. datastorage and use of service providers inother jurisdictions who may be subject tolegal requirements in Canada, the UnitedStates and other countries applicable tothem, for example, lawful requirements todisclose personal information togovernmental authorities in thosecountries. See SYNC™ (page 423).

Event Data RecordingThis vehicle has an event data recorder.The main purpose of an event datarecorder is to record, in certain crash ornear crash-like situations, such as anairbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle; this data will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’s systemsperformed. The event data recorder isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safety systemsfor a short period of time, typically 30seconds or less.The event data recorder in this vehicleis designed to record such data as:• How various systems in your vehicle

were operating.• Whether or not the driver and

passenger seatbelts were buckledor fastened.

• How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/or thebrake pedal.

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.• Where the driver was positioning

the steering wheel.

This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstances inwhich crashes and injuries occur.Note: Event data recorder data isrecorded by your vehicle only if anon-trivial crash situation occurs; no datais recorded by the event data recorderunder normal driving conditions and nopersonal data or information (forexample, name, gender, age, and crashlocation) is recorded (see limitationsregarding 911 Assist and Traffic,directions and Information privacybelow). However, parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine the eventdata recorder data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.To read data recorded by an event datarecorder, special equipment is required,and access to the vehicle or the eventdata recorder is needed. In addition tothe vehicle manufacturer, otherparties, such as law enforcement, thathave such special equipment, can readthe information if they have access tothe vehicle or the event data recorder.Ford Motor Company and Ford ofCanada do not access event datarecorder information without obtainingconsent, unless pursuant to court orderor where required by law enforcement,other government authorities or otherthird parties acting with lawfulauthority. Other parties may seek toaccess the information independentlyof Ford Motor Company and Ford ofCanada.

10


Introduction

Note: Including to the extent that anylaw pertaining to Event Data Recordersapplies to SYNC or its features, pleasenote the following: Once 911 Assist (ifequipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assistmay, through any paired and connectedcell phone, disclose to emergencyservices that the vehicle has been in acrash involving the deployment of anairbag or, in certain vehicles, theactivation of the fuel pump shut-off.Certain versions or updates to 911 Assistmay also be capable of being used toelectronically or verbally provide to 911operators the vehicle location (such aslatitude and longitude), and/or otherdetails about the vehicle or crash orpersonal information about theoccupants to assist 911 operators toprovide the most appropriate emergencyservices. If you do not want to disclosethis information, do not activate the 911Assist feature. See SYNC™ (page 423).Additionally, when you connect toTraffic, Directions and Information (ifequipped, U.S. only), the service usesGPS technology and advanced vehiclesensors to collect the vehicle’s currentlocation, travel direction, and speed(vehicle travel information), only tohelp provide you with the directions,traffic reports, or business searchesthat you request. If you do not wantFord or its vendors to receive thisinformation, do not activate theservice. For more information, seeTraffic, Directions and Information,Terms and Conditions. See SYNC™(page 423).

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNINGSSome constituents of engineexhaust, certain vehicle components,certain fluids contained in vehicles

and certain products of component wearcontain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive harm.

Battery posts, terminals and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds, chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer andreproductive harm. Batteries also containother chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer. Wash yourhands after handling.

PERCHLORATECertain components in your vehicle suchas airbag modules, seatbelt pretensionersand remote control batteries may containperchlorate material. Special handlingmay apply for service or vehicle end of lifedisposal.

For more information visit:

Web Address

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-ouswaste/perchlorate

FORD CREDITUS OnlyFord Credit offers a full range of financingand lease plans to help you acquire yourvehicle. If you have financed or leased yourvehicle through Ford Credit, thank you foryour business.

11


Introduction

We offer a number of convenient ways foryou to contact us, and to manage youraccount.Call 1-800-727-7000.For more information about Ford Creditand access to the Account Manager, go towww.fordcredit.com.

REPLACEMENT PARTSRECOMMENDATIONWe have built your vehicle to the higheststandards using quality parts. Werecommend that you demand the use ofgenuine Ford and Motorcraft partswhenever your vehicle requires scheduledmaintenance or repair. You can clearlyidentify genuine Ford and Motorcraft partsby looking for the Ford, FoMoCo orMotorcraft branding on the parts or theirpackaging.

Scheduled Maintenance andMechanical RepairsOne of the best ways for you to make surethat your vehicle provides years of serviceis to have it maintained in line with ourrecommendations using parts thatconform to the specifications detailed inthis Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford andMotorcraft parts meet or exceed thesespecifications.

Collision RepairsWe hope that you never experience acollision, but accidents do happen.Genuine Ford replacement collision partsmeet our stringent requirements for fit,finish, structural integrity, corrosionprotection and dent resistance. During

vehicle development we validate thatthese parts deliver the intended level ofprotection as a whole system. A great wayto know for sure you are getting this levelof protection is to use genuine Fordreplacement collision parts.

Warranty on Replacement PartsGenuine Ford and Motorcraft replacementparts are the only replacement parts thatbenefit from a Ford Warranty. The FordWarranty may not cover damage causedto your vehicle as a result of failednon-Ford parts. For additional information,refer to the terms and conditions of theFord Warranty.

SPECIAL NOTICESNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyFor a detailed description of what iscovered and what is not covered by yourvehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty,refer to the Warranty Guide that isprovided to you along with your Owner’sManual.

Special InstructionsFor your added safety, your vehicle is fittedwith sophisticated electronic controls.

WARNINGSYou risk death or serious injury toyourself and others if you do notfollow the instruction highlighted by

the warning symbol. Failure to follow thespecific warnings and instructions couldresult in personal injury.

Never place front seat mountedrear-facing child or infant seats infront of an active passenger airbag.

12


Introduction

On Board Diagnostics Data LinkConnector

WARNINGUse of wireless plug-in devices in theOBD Data Link Connector (DLC) mayallow unauthorized third parties to

gain access to vehicle systems and datawhich could impair the function of variousvehicle systems, including safety-relatedsystems. The DLC should only be used bya repair facility that operates in accordancewith Ford’s service and repair instructions.

Your vehicle has an OBD Data LinkConnector (DLC) that is used inconjunction with a diagnostic scan tool forvehicle diagnostics, repairs andreprogramming services. Installing anaftermarket device that uses the DLCduring normal driving for purposes such asremote insurance company monitoring,transmission of vehicle data to otherdevices or entities, or altering theperformance of the vehicle, may causeinterference with or even damage tovehicle systems. We do not recommendor endorse the use of aftermarket plug-indevices unless approved by Ford. Thevehicle Warranty will not cover damagecaused by an aftermarket plug-in device.

Notice to owners of pickup trucks andutility type vehicles

WARNINGUtility vehicles have a significantlyhigher rollover rate than other typesof vehicles.

Before you drive your vehicle, please readthis Owner’s Manual carefully. Your vehicleis not a passenger car. As with othervehicles of this type, failure to operate yourvehicle correctly may result in loss ofvehicle control, vehicle rollover, personalinjury or death.

Using your vehicle with a snowplowSee Snowplowing (page 290).

Using your vehicle as an ambulanceDo not use this vehicle as an ambulance.Your vehicle is not equipped with the FordAmbulance Preparation Package.

MOBILE COMMUNICATIONSEQUIPMENT



Using mobile communications equipmentis becoming increasingly important in theconduct of business and personal affairs.However, you must not compromise yourown or others’ safety when using suchequipment. Mobile communications canenhance personal safety and security whenappropriately used, particularly inemergency situations. Safety must beparamount when using mobilecommunications equipment to avoidnegating these benefits. Mobilecommunication equipment includes, butis not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,portable email devices, text messagingdevices and portable two-way radios.

13


Introduction

EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONSFor your particular global region, yourvehicle may be equipped with features andoptions that are different from the featuresand options that are described in thisOwner’s Manual. A market uniquesupplement may be supplied thatcomplements this book. By referring to themarket unique supplement, if provided,you can properly identify those features,recommendations and specifications thatare unique to your vehicle. This Owner’sManual is written primarily for the U.S. andCanadian Markets. Features or equipmentlisted as standard may be different on unitsbuilt for export. Refer to this Owner’sManual for all other requiredinformation and warnings.

14


Introduction

PROTECTING THEENVIRONMENTYou must play your part in protecting theenvironment. Correct vehicle usage andthe authorized disposal of waste, cleaningand lubrication materials are significantsteps toward this aim.

15


Environment

GENERAL INFORMATIONSee the following sections for directionson how to properly use safety restraintsfor children.

WARNINGSAlways make sure your child issecured properly in a device that isappropriate for their height, age and

weight. Child safety restraints must bebought separately from your vehicle.Failure to follow these instructions andguidelines may result in an increased riskof serious injury or death to your child.

All children are shaped differently.The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and other safety

organizations, base their recommendationsfor child restraints on probable child height,age and weight thresholds, or on theminimum requirements of the law. Werecommend that you check with a NHTSACertified Child Passenger Safety

WARNINGSTechnician (CPST) to make sure that youproperly install the child restraint in yourvehicle and that you consult yourpediatrician to make sure you have a childrestraint appropriate for your child. Tolocate a child restraint fitting station andCPST, contact NHTSA toll free at1-888-327-4236 or go towww.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contactTransport Canada toll free at1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca tofind a Child Car Seat Clinic in your area.Failure to properly restrain children in childrestraints made especially for their height,age and weight, may result in an increasedrisk of serious injury or death to your child.

On hot days, the temperature insidethe vehicle can rise very quickly.Exposure of people or animals to

these high temperatures for even a shorttime can cause death or serious heatrelated injuries, including brain damage.Small children are particularly at risk.

16


Child Safety

Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children

Recommended restrainttype

Child size, height, weight, or ageChild

Use a child safety seat(sometimes called an

infant carrier, convertibleseat, or toddler seat).

Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less(generally age four or younger).

Infants ortoddlers

Use a belt-positioningbooster seat.

Children who have outgrown or no longerproperly fit in a child safety seat (gener-ally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in.(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four

and less than age 12, and between 40 lb(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your

child restraint manufacturer).

Small children

Use a vehicle safety belthaving the lap belt snugand low across the hips,shoulder belt centered

across the shoulder andchest, and seatback

upright.

Children who have outgrown or no longerproperly fit in a belt-positioning boosterseat (generally children who are at least

4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recom-mended by child restraint manufacturer).

Larger children

• You are required by law to properly usesafety seats for infants and toddlers inthe United States and Canada.

• Many states and provinces require thatsmall children use approved boosterseats until they reach age eight, aheight of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your localand state or provincial laws for specificrequirements about the safety ofchildren in your vehicle.

• When possible, always properlyrestrain children 12 years of age andunder in a rear seating position of yourvehicle. Accident statistics suggest thatchildren are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seating positionsthan in a front seating position. SeeFront Passenger Sensing System(page 47).

INSTALLING CHILDRESTRAINTSChild Seats

E142594

17


Child Safety

Use a child safety seat (sometimes calledan infant carrier, convertible seat, ortoddler seat) for infants, toddlers, orchildren weighing 40 pounds (18kilograms) or less (generally age four oryounger).

Using Lap and Shoulder Belts(Except Front Center Position ofSuper Cab and Crew Cab)

WARNINGSAirbags can kill or injure a child in achild restraint. Never place arear-facing child restraint in front of

an active airbag. If you must use aforward-facing child restraint in the frontseat, move the seat upon which the childseat is installed all the way back.

Airbags can kill or injure a child in achild restraint. Properly restrainchildren 12 and under in the rear seat

whenever possible.Depending on where you secure achild restraint, and depending on thechild restraint design, you may block

access to certain seatbelt buckleassemblies and LATCH lower anchors,rendering those features potentiallyunusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupantsshould only use seating positions wherethey are able to be properly restrained.

When installing a child safety seat withcombination lap and shoulder belts:• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that

seating position.• Insert the belt tongue into the proper

buckle until you hear a snap and feel itlatch. Make sure the tongue is securelyfastened in the buckle.

• Keep the buckle release buttonpointing up and away from the safetyseat, with the tongue between the childrestraint and the release button, toprevent accidental unbuckling.

• Place the vehicle seat upon which thechild restraint will be installed in theupright position.

• Put the seatbelt in the automaticlocking mode. This vehicle does notrequire the use of a locking clip.

Perform the following steps wheninstalling the child restraint withcombination lap and shoulder belts:Note: Although the child restraintillustrated is a forward facing child restraint,the steps are the same for installing a rearfacing child restraint.

E142528

1. Position the child safety seat in a seatwith a combination lap and shoulderbelt.

E142529

2. Pull down on the shoulder belt andthen grasp the shoulder belt and lapbelt together.

18


Child Safety

E142530

3. While holding the shoulder and lap beltportions together, route the tonguethrough the child restraint accordingto the child restraint manufacturer'sinstructions. Make sure the beltwebbing is not twisted.

E142531

4. Insert the belt tongue into the properbuckle (the buckle closest to thedirection the tongue is coming from)for that seating position until you heara snap and feel the latch engage. Makesure the tongue is latched securely bypulling on it.

E142875

5. To put the retractor in the automaticlocking mode, grasp the shoulderportion of the belt and pull downwarduntil you pull all of the seatbelt out.

Note: The automatic locking mode isavailable on the front passenger and rearseats. This vehicle does not require the useof a locking clip.6. Allow the belt to retract to remove

slack. The belt will click as it retractsto indicate it is in the automatic lockingmode.

7. Try to pull the seatbelt out of theretractor to make sure the retractor isin the automatic locking mode (youshould not be able to pull more beltout). If the retractor is not locked,unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5and 6.

E142533

19


Child Safety

8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.Force the seat down with extra weight,for example, by pressing down orkneeling on the child restraint whilepulling up on the shoulder belt in orderto force slack from the belt. This isnecessary to remove the remainingslack that will exist once the extraweight of the child is added to the childrestraint. It also helps to achieve theproper snugness of the child restraintto your vehicle. Sometimes, a slightlean toward the buckle helps to removeremaining slack from the belt.

9. Attach the tether strap (if the childrestraint is equipped).

E142534

10. Before placing the child in the seat,forcibly move the seat forward andback to make sure the seat is securelyheld in place.

To check this, grab the seat at the belt pathand attempt to move it side to side andforward and back. There should be nomore than 1 inch (2.5 centimeters) ofmovement for proper installation.We recommend checking with a NHTSACertified Child Passenger SafetyTechnician to make certain the childrestraint is properly installed. In Canada,check with Transport Canada for referralto a Child Car Seat Clinic.

Using Lap and Shoulder Belts(Front Center Position of SuperCab and Crew Cab)

WARNINGSAirbags can kill or injure a child in achild restraint. Never place arear-facing child restraint in front of

an active airbag. If you must use aforward-facing child restraint in the frontseat, move the seat upon which the childseat is installed all the way back.

Always use both the lap andshoulder portion of the seatbelt inthe center seating position.

The belt webbing below the tongue is thelap portion of the combination lap andshoulder belt. The seatbelt webbing abovethe tongue is the shoulder belt portion ofthe combination lap and shoulder belt.

E142528

1. Position the child safety seat in thefront center seat.

20


Child Safety

E162708

2. Slide the tongue up the webbing.

E142530

3. While holding both shoulder and lapportions next to the tongue, route thetongue and webbing through the childrestraint according to the child restraintmanufacturer's instructions. Be surethat the belt webbing is not twisted.

E142531


E142533

5. While pushing down with your knee onthe child restraint, pull up on theshoulder belt portion to tighten the lapbelt portion of the combination lap andshoulder belt.

6. Allow the seatbelt to retract andremove any slack in the belt to securelytighten the child safety seat in thevehicle.


E142534

21


Child Safety

8. Before placing the child in the seat,forcibly move the seat forward andback to make sure the seat is securelyheld in place. To check this, grab theseat at the belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and forward andback. There should be no more than 1inch (2.5 centimeters) of movementfor proper installation.

9. Check from time to time to be sure thatthere is no slack in the lap and shoulderbelt. The shoulder belt must be snugto keep the lap belt tight during a crash.

We recommend checking with a NHTSACertified Child Passenger SafetyTechnician to make certain the childrestraint is properly installed. In Canada,check with Transport Canada for referralto a Child Car Seat Clinic.

Using Inflatable Seatbelts (RearSeat Outboard Positions) (If Equipped)

E142528

1. Position the child safety seat in a seatwith a combination lap and shoulderbelt.

E146522

2. After positioning the child safety seatin the proper seating position, grasp theshoulder belt and lap belt togetherbehind the belt tongue.

E142530

3. While holding the shoulder and lap beltportions together, route the tonguethrough the child restraint accordingto the child restraint manufacturer'sinstructions. Be sure the belt webbingis not twisted.

22


Child Safety

E146523


E146524

5. To put the retractor in the automaticlocking mode, grasp the lap portion ofthe inflatable seatbelt and pull upwarduntil you pull all of the belt out.

Note: The automatic locking mode isavailable on the front passenger and rearseats.

Note: Unlike the standard seatbelt, theinflatable seatbelt's unique lap portion locksthe child restraint for installation. The abilityfor the shoulder portion of the belt to movefreely is normal, even after the lap belt hasbeen put into the automatic locking mode.Note: The lock-off device on some childrestraints may not accommodate theshoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt.Follow all instructions provided by themanufacturer of the child restraint regardingthe necessary and proper use of the lock-offdevice. In some instances, these deviceshave been provided only for use in vehicleswith seatbelt systems that would otherwiserequire a locking clip.6. Allow the belt to retract to remove

slack. The belt will click as it retractsto indicate it is in the automatic lockingmode.

7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractorto make sure the retractor is in theautomatic locking mode (you shouldnot be able to pull more belt out). If theretractor is not locked, unbuckle thebelt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.

E146525

8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.Force the seat down with extra weight,for example, by pressing down orkneeling on the child restraint whilepulling down on the lap belt in order toforce slack from the belt. This is

23


Child Safety

necessary to remove the remainingslack that will exist once the extraweight of the child is added to the childrestraint. It also helps to achieve theproper snugness of the child restraintto your vehicle. Sometimes, a slightlean toward the buckle will additionallyhelp to remove remaining slack fromthe belt.


E142534

10. Before placing the child in the seat,forcibly move the seat forward andback to make sure the seat is securelyheld in place. To check this, grab theseat at the belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and forward andback. There should be no more than1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of movementfor proper installation.

We recommend checking with a NHTSACertified Child Passenger SafetyTechnician to make certain the childrestraint is properly installed. In Canada,check with Transport Canada for referralto a Child Car Seat Clinic.

Using Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren (LATCH)

WARNINGSDo not attach two child safetyrestraints to the same anchor. In acrash, one anchor may not be strong

enough to hold two child safety restraintattachments and may break, causingserious injury or death.

Depending on where you secure achild restraint, and depending on thechild restraint design, you may block

access to certain seatbelt buckleassemblies and LATCH lower anchors,rendering those features potentiallyunusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupantsshould only use seating positions wherethey are able to be properly restrained.

The LATCH system is composed of threevehicle anchor points: two lower anchorswhere the vehicle seat back and seatcushion meet (called the seat bight) andone top tether anchor behind that seatingposition.LATCH compatible child safety seats havetwo rigid or webbing mountedattachments that connect to the two loweranchors at the LATCH equipped seatingpositions in your vehicle. This type ofattachment method eliminates the needto use seatbelts to attach the childrestraint, however the seatbelt can still beused to attach the child restraint if thelower anchors are not used. Forforward-facing child restraints, the toptether strap must also be attached to theproper top tether anchor, if a top tetherstrap has been provided with your childrestraint.Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors forchild restraint installation at the followingseating positions (LATCH is not availableon Regular Cab):

24


Child Safety

Crew Cab and Super Cab

E166694

E166695

The lower LATCH anchors are at the rearsection of the rear seat between thecushion and seatback. Follow the childrestraint manufacturer's instructions toproperly install a child restraint with LATCHattachments.Follow the instructions later in this chapteron attaching child safety seats with tetherstraps.Attach LATCH lower attachments of thechild restraint only to the anchors shown.

Use of Inboard Lower Anchorsfrom the Outboard SeatingPositions (Center Seating Use)

WARNINGThe standardized spacing for LATCHlower anchors is 11 in (280 mm)center to center. Do not use LATCH

lower anchors for the center seatingposition unless the child restraintmanufacturer's instructions permit andspecify using anchors spaced at least asfar apart as those in this vehicle.

The lower anchors at the center of thesecond row rear seat are spaced 25.7inches (652 millimeters) apart. Thestandardized spacing for LATCH loweranchors is 11 inches (280 millimeters)center to center. A child restraint with rigidLATCH attachments cannot be installedat the center seating position. LATCHcompatible child restraints (withattachments on belt webbing) can only beused at this seating position provided thatthe child restraint manufacturer'sinstructions permit use with the anchorspacing stated. Do not attach a childrestraint to any lower anchor if an adjacentchild restraint is attached to that anchor.

25


Child Safety

Each time you use the safety seat, checkthat the seat is properly attached to thelower anchors and tether anchor, ifapplicable. Tug the child restraint from sideto side and forward and back where it issecured to the vehicle. The seat shouldmove less than one inch when you do thisfor a proper installation.If the safety seat is not anchored properly,the risk of a child being injured in a crashgreatly increases.

Combining Seatbelt and LATCHLower Anchors for Attaching ChildSafety SeatsWhen used in combination, either theseatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors maybe attached first, provided a properinstallation is achieved. Attach the tetherstrap afterward, if included with the childrestraint.

Using Tether StrapsMany forward-facing child safety seatsinclude a tether strap which extends fromthe back of the child safety seat and hooksto an anchoring point called the top tetheranchor. Tether straps are available as anaccessory for many older safety seats.

Contact the manufacturer of your childrestraint for information about ordering atether strap, or to obtain a longer tetherstrap if the tether strap on your safety seatdoes not reach the appropriate top tetheranchor in the vehicle.The passenger seats of your vehicle mayhave built-in tether strap anchors behindthe seats.The tether anchors in your vehicle may beloops of webbing above the seatback oran anchor bracket behind the seat on therear edge of the seat cushion.The rear seat in the Crew Cab and SuperCab has three straps along the top of theseat back that function as both routingloops for the tether straps and anchorloops.The tether strap anchors in your vehicleare in the following positions (shown fromtop view):Regular Cab

E166696

26


Child Safety

Crew Cab and Super Cab

E166697

Attach the tether strap only to theappropriate tether anchor as shown. Thetether strap may not work properly ifattached somewhere other than thecorrect tether anchor.If you install a child restraint with rigidLATCH attachments, do not tighten thetether strap enough to lift the childrestraint off the vehicle seat cushion whenthe child is seated in it. Keep the tetherstrap just snug without lifting the front ofthe child restraint. Keeping the childrestraint just touching the vehicle seatgives the best protection in a severe crash.Once the child safety seat has beeninstalled using either the seatbelt, thelower anchors of the LATCH system, orboth, you can attach the top tether strap.

Front Seat Tether StrapAttachment (Regular Cab)1. Route the child safety seat tether strap

over the back of the seat and under thehead restraint.

Note: For vehicles with adjustable headrestraints, route the tether strap under thehead restraint and between the headrestraint posts, otherwise route the tetherstrap over the top of the seat back.

2. Locate the correct anchor for theselected seating position. You mayneed to pull the seatback forward toaccess the tether anchors. Make surethe seat is locked in the upright positionbefore installing the child restraint.

3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor.4. Tighten the child safety seat tether

strap according to the manufacturer'sinstructions.

Regular Cab passenger and centerseats (on back panel)

E175295

If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, thechild safety seat may not be retainedproperly in the event of a crash.If the safety seat is not anchored properly,the risk of a child being injured in a crashgreatly increases.

27


Child Safety

If your child restraint system has a tetherstrap, and the child restraint manufacturerrecommends its use, we also recommendits use.

Rear Seat Tether StrapAttachment (Crew Cab and SuperCab)

E167009

There are three loops of webbing justabove the back of the rear seat (along thebottom edge of the rear window). Usethese loops as both routing loops andanchor loops for up to three child safetyseat tether straps.For example, the center loop can be usedas a routing loop for a child safety seat inthe center rear seat and as an anchoringloop for child restraints installed in theoutboard rear seats.Many tether straps cannot be tightened ifthe tether strap is hooked to the loopdirectly behind the child restraint. Toprovide a tight tether strap:

E162714

1. Route the tether strap under the headrestraint and through the loop directlybehind the child restraint.

E162715

2. Route the tether strap behind the headrestraint supports to a loop behind anadjacent seating position, and hook thestrap hook onto the loop. If using thedriver side, pass the strap behind theshoulder belt for the center seat.Always put the tether strap through therouting loop. The head restraintsupport post will hold the childrestraint tightly, but the head restraintpost is not strong enough to hold thechild restraint during a crash.

3. Tighten the tether strap according tothe child restraint manufacturer'sinstructions.

28


Child Safety

If the safety seat is not anchored properly,the risk of a child being injured in a crashgreatly increases.If your child restraint system has a tetherstrap, and the child restraint manufacturerrecommends its use, we also recommendits use.

BOOSTER SEATS

WARNINGNever place, or allow a child to place,the shoulder belt under a child's armor behind the back because it

reduces the protection for the upper partof the body and may increase the risk ofinjury or death in a crash.

Note: Some booster seat safety belt guidesmay not accommodate the shoulder portionof the inflatable safety belt.Use a belt-positioning booster seat forchildren who have outgrown or no longerproperly fit in a child safety seat (generallychildren who are less than 4 feet 9 inches(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four(4) and less than age twelve (12), andbetween 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to100 pounds (45 kilograms) ifrecommended by your child restraintmanufacturer). Many state and provinciallaws require that children use approvedbooster seats until they reach age eight, aheight of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall,or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).Booster seats should be used until you cananswer YES to ALL of these questionswhen seated without a booster seat:

E142595

• Can the child sit all the way backagainst their vehicle seat back withknees bent comfortably at the edge ofthe seat cushion?

• Can the child sit without slouching?• Does the lap belt rest low across the

hips?• Is the shoulder belt centered on the

shoulder and chest?• Can the child stay seated like this for

the whole trip?Always use booster seats in conjunctionwith your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.

Types of Booster Seats

E68924

• Backless booster seats

29


Child Safety

If your backless booster seat has aremovable shield, remove the shield. If avehicle seating position has a low seatback or no head restraint, a backlessbooster seat may place your child's head(as measured at the tops of the ears)above the top of the seat. In this case,move the backless booster to anotherseating position with a higher seat back orhead restraint and lap and shoulder belts,or consider using a high back booster seat.

E70710

• High back booster seatsIf, with a backless booster seat, you cannotfind a seating position that adequatelysupports your child's head, a high backbooster seat would be a better choice.Children and booster seats vary in size andshape. Choose a booster that keeps thelap belt low and snug across the hips,never up across the stomach, and lets youadjust the shoulder belt to cross the chestand rest snugly near the center of theshoulder. The following drawings comparethe ideal fit (center) to a shoulder beltuncomfortably close to the neck and ashoulder belt that could slip off theshoulder. The drawings also show how thelap belt should be low and snug across thechild's hips.

E142596

30


Child Safety

E142597

If the booster seat slides on the vehicleseat upon which it is being used, placing arubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpetliner under the booster seat may improvethis condition. Do not introduce any itemthicker than this under the booster seat.Check with the booster seatmanufacturer's instructions.

CHILD RESTRAINTPOSITIONING

WARNINGSAirbags can kill or injure a child in achild seat. Never place a rear-facingchild seat in front of an active airbag.

If you must use a forward-facing child seatin the front seat, move the vehicle seatupon which the child seat is installed allthe way back. When possible, all childrenage 12 and under should be properlyrestrained in a rear seating position. If allchildren cannot be seated and restrainedproperly in a rear seating position, properlyrestrain the largest child in the front seat.

Always carefully follow theinstructions and warnings providedby the manufacturer of any child

restraint to determine if the restraint deviceis appropriate for your child's size, height,weight, or age. Follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructions and warnings

WARNINGSprovided for installation and use inconjunction with the instructions andwarnings provided by your vehiclemanufacturer. A safety seat that isimproperly installed or utilized, isinappropriate for your child's height, age,or weight or does not properly fit the childmay increase the risk of serious injury ordeath.

Never let a passenger hold a child onhis or her lap while your vehicle ismoving. The passenger cannot

protect the child from injury in a crash,which may result in serious injury or death.

Never use pillows, books, or towelsto boost a child. They can slidearound and increase the likelihood

of injury or death in a crash.Always restrain an unoccupied childseat or booster seat. These objectsmay become projectiles in a crash or

sudden stop, which may increase the riskof serious injury.

Never place, or allow a child to place,the shoulder belt under a child's armor behind the back because it

reduces the protection for the upper partof the body and may increase the risk ofinjury or death in a crash.

31


Child Safety

WARNINGSTo avoid risk of injury, do not leave

WARNINGSchildren or pets unattended in your vehicle.

Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children

Use any attachment method as indicated below by X

Combinedweight ofchild andchild seat

RestraintType

Safety beltonly

Safety beltand LATCH

(loweranchorsand toptether

anchor)

Safety beltand toptether

anchor

LATCH(lower

anchorsonly)

LATCH(lower

anchorsand toptether

anchor)

XXUp to 65 lb(29.5 kg)

Rear facingchild seat

XOver 65 lb(29.5 kg)

Rear facingchild seat

XXXUp to 65 lb(29.5 kg)

Forwardfacing

child seat

XXOver 65 lb(29.5 kg)

Forwardfacing

child seat

Note: The child seat must rest tightlyagainst the vehicle seat upon which it isinstalled. It may be necessary to lift orremove the head restraint. See Seats (page149).

CHILD SAFETY LOCKS (If Equipped)

When these locks are set, the rear doorscannot be opened from the inside.

32


Child Safety

E112197

The childproof locks are located on therear edge of each rear door and must beset separately for each door.

Left-Hand SideTurn counterclockwise to lock andclockwise to unlock.

Right-Hand SideTurn clockwise to lock andcounterclockwise to unlock.

33


Child Safety

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

WARNINGSAlways drive and ride with yourseatback upright and the lap beltsnug and low across the hips.To reduce the risk of injury, makesure children sit where they can beproperly restrained.Never let a passenger hold a child onhis or her lap while the vehicle ismoving. The passenger cannot

protect the child from injury in a crash,which may result in serious injury or death.

All occupants of the vehicle,including the driver, should alwaysproperly wear their safety belts, even

when an airbag supplemental restraintsystem is provided. Failure to properly wearyour safety belt could seriously increasethe risk of injury or death.

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of avehicle. In a crash, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and safety belts. Besure everyone in your vehicle is in a seatand using a safety belt properly.

In a rollover crash, an unbeltedperson is significantly more likely todie than a person wearing a safety

belt.Each seating position in your vehiclehas a specific safety belt assemblywhich is made up of one buckle and

one tongue that are designed to be usedas a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on theoutside shoulder only. Never wear theshoulder belt under the arm. 2) Neverswing the safety belt around your neck overthe inside shoulder. 3) Never use a singlebelt for more than one person.

WARNINGSWhen possible, all children 12 yearsold and under should be properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.

Failure to follow this could seriouslyincrease the risk of injury or death.

Safety belts and seats can becomehot in a vehicle that has been closedup in sunny weather; they could burn

a small child. Check seat covers andbuckles before you place a child anywherenear them.

Front and rear seat occupants,including pregnant women, shouldwear safety belts for optimum

protection in an accident.

All seating positions in this vehicle havelap and shoulder safety belts. Alloccupants of the vehicle should alwaysproperly wear their safety belts, even whenan airbag supplemental restraint systemis provided.The safety belt system consists of:• Lap and shoulder safety belts.• Shoulder safety belt with automatic

locking mode, (except driver safetybelt).

• Height adjuster at the front outboardseating positions.

• Safety belt pretensioner at the frontoutboard seating positions.

• Safety belt warning light and chime.

• Crash sensors and monitoring systemwith readiness indicator.

34


Seatbelts

The safety belt pretensioners at the frontseating positions are designed to tightenthe safety belts when activated. In frontaland near-frontal crashes, the safety beltpretensioners may be activated alone or,if the crash is of sufficient severity, togetherwith the front airbags. In side crashes androllovers, the pretensioners will beactivated when the Safety Canopy isactivated.

FASTENING THE SEATBELTSStandard belts shown, inflatable beltssimilarThe front outboard and rear safetyrestraints in the vehicle are combinationlap and shoulder belts.

E142587

1. Insert the belt tongue into the properbuckle (the buckle closest to thedirection the tongue is coming from)until you hear a snap and feel it latch.Make sure you securely fasten thetongue in the buckle.

E142588

2. To unfasten, press the release buttonand remove the tongue from thebuckle.

Using the Seatbelt with CinchTongue (Front Center Seat)The cinch tongue slides up and down theseatbelt webbing when you stow the beltor when you put the seatbelts on. Whenyou buckle the lap and shoulder seatbelt,the cinch tongue allows you to shorten thelap portion, but pinches the webbing tokeep the lap portion from getting longer.The cinch tongue is designed to slip duringa crash, so always wear the shoulder beltproperly and do not allow any slack ineither the lap or shoulder portions.Before you can reach and latch a lap andshoulder belt having a cinch tongue intothe buckle, you may have to lengthen thelap belt portion of it.

35


Seatbelts

E162708

1. To lengthen the lap belt, pull someseatbelt webbing out of the shoulderbelt retractor.

2. While holding the webbing below thetongue, grasp the tip (metal portion)of the tongue so that it is parallel to thewebbing and slide the tongue upward.

3. Provide enough lap belt length so thatthe tongue can reach the buckle.

Fastening the Cinch TongueWARNING

Always drive and ride with yourseatback upright and the lap beltsnug and low across the hips.

1. Pull the lap and shoulder belt from theretractor so that the shoulder beltportion of the seatbelt crosses yourshoulder and chest.

2. Be sure the belt is not twisted. If thebelt is twisted, remove the twist.

3. Insert the belt tongue into the properbuckle for your seating position untilyou hear a snap and feel it latch.

4. Make sure you securely fasten thetongue to the buckle by pulling on thetongue.

While you are fastened in the seatbelt, thelap and shoulder belt with a cinch tongueadjusts to your movement. However, if youbrake hard, turn hard, or if your vehiclereceives an impact of 5 mph (8 km/h) ormore, the seatbelt locks and helps reduceyour forward movement.

Using Seatbelts During PregnancyWARNING

Always ride and drive with yourseatback upright and properly fastenyour seatbelt. Fit the lap portion of

the seatbelt snugly and low across thehips. Position the shoulder portion of theseatbelt across your chest. Pregnantwomen must follow this practice. See thefollowing figure.

E142590

Pregnant women should always wear theirseatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of acombination lap and shoulder belt lowacross the hips below the belly and wornas tight as comfort allows. Position theshoulder belt to cross the middle of theshoulder and the center of the chest.

36


Seatbelts

Seatbelt Locking ModesWARNING

After a crash, have a qualifiedtechnician check all the seatbelts tomake sure the seatbelts including

the automatic locking retractor feature forchild restraints operate properly. Werecommend replacing any system that hasdamage or does not operate properly.Failure to do so can result in personal injuryor death in the event of a sudden stop oranother crash.

All safety restraints in the vehicle arecombination lap and shoulder belts. Thedriver seatbelt has the first type of lockingmode, and the front outboard passengerand rear seat seatbelts have both types oflocking modes described as follows:

Vehicle Sensitive ModeThis is the normal retractor mode, whichallows free shoulder belt lengthadjustment to your movements andlocking in response to vehicle movement.For example, if the driver brakes suddenly,turns a corner sharply, or the vehiclereceives an impact of about 5 mph(8 km/h) or more, the combinationseatbelts lock to help reduce forwardmovement of the driver and passengers.In addition, the retractor is designed to lockif you pull the webbing out too quickly. Ifthis occurs, let the belt retract slightly andpull the webbing out again in a slow andcontrolled manner.

Automatic Locking ModeIn this mode, the shoulder beltautomatically pre-locks. The belt stillretracts to remove any slack in theshoulder belt. The automatic locking modeis not available on the driver seatbelt.

When to Use the Automatic LockingModeUse this mode any time you install a childsafety seat in a front outboard passengerseating position in a Regular Cab,SuperCab, SuperCrew or any rear seatingposition of a SuperCab or SuperCrew. Theoptional front seat center seatbelt has acinch mechanism. Properly restrainchildren 12 years old and under in a rearseat whenever possible. See Child Safety(page 16).

How to Use the Automatic LockingModeNon-inflatable seatbelts

E142591

1. Buckle the combination lap andshoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pulldownward until you pull the entire beltout.

3. Allow the belt to retract. As the beltretracts, you will hear a clicking sound.This indicates the seatbelt is now in theautomatic locking mode.

37


Seatbelts

Rear outboard inflatable seatbelts(second row only– if equipped)

E146363

1. Buckle the combination lap andshoulder belt.

2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt andpull upward until you pull the entirebelt out.

3. Allow the belt to retract. As the beltretracts, you will hear a clicking sound.This indicates the seatbelt is now in theautomatic locking mode.

How to Disengage the AutomaticLocking ModeUnbuckle the combination lap andshoulder belt and allow it to retractcompletely to disengage the automaticlocking mode and activate the vehiclesensitive (emergency) locking mode.

Rear Inflatable Seatbelt (If Equipped)

WARNINGDo not attempt to service, repair, ormodify rear inflatable seatbelts.

The rear inflatable seatbelts are in theshoulder portion of the seatbelts of thesecond-row outboard seating positions.

Note: The rear inflatable seatbelts arecompatible with most infant and childsafety car seats and belt positioning boosterseats when properly installed. This isbecause they are designed to fill with acooled gas at a lower pressure and at aslower rate than traditional airbags. Afterinflation, the shoulder portion of theseatbelt remains cool to the touch.The rear inflatable seatbelt consists of thefollowing:• An inflatable bag in the shoulder

seatbelt webbing.• Lap seatbelt webbing with automatic

locking mode.• The same warning light, electronic

control and diagnostic unit as used forthe front seatbelts.

• Impact sensors in various parts of thevehicle.

How does the rear inflatable seatbeltsystem work?

WARNINGIf the rear inflatable seatbelt hasdeployed, it will not function againand must be replaced immediately.

If the seatbelt is not replaced, theunrepaired area will increase the risk ofinjury in a crash.

The rear inflatable seatbelts function likestandard restraints in everyday usage.

38


Seatbelts

E146364

During a crash of sufficient force, theinflatable belt inflates from inside thewebbing.

E146365

The fully inflated belt's increased diametermore effectively holds the occupant in theappropriate seating position, and spreadscrash forces over more area of the bodythan regular seatbelts. This helps reducepressure on the chest and helps controlhead and neck motion for passengers.The rear inflatable seatbelts are designedto inflate in frontal or near-frontal crashes,rollovers and some side impact crashes.The fact that the rear inflatable seatbeltdid not inflate in a crash does not meanthat something is wrong with the system.Rather, it means the forces were not of thetype sufficient to cause activation.

SEATBELT HEIGHTADJUSTMENT

WARNINGPosition the safety belt heightadjuster so that the belt rests acrossthe middle of your shoulder. Failure

to adjust the safety belt properly couldreduce the effectiveness of the safety beltand increase the risk of injury in a crash.

E145664

Adjust the height of the shoulder belt sothe belt rests across the middle of yourshoulder.To adjust the shoulder belt height:1. Pull the button and slide the height

adjuster up or down.2. Release the button and pull down on

the height adjuster to make sure it islocked in place.

SEATBELT WARNING LAMPAND INDICATOR CHIME

This lamp illuminates and anaudible warning will sound if thedriver's safety belt has not been

fastened when the vehicle's ignition isturned on.

39


Seatbelts

Conditions of operation

Then...If...

The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-2 minutes and the warning chime sounds

4-8 seconds.

The driver's safety belt is not buckledbefore the ignition switch is turned to the

on position...

The safety belt warning light and warningchime turn off.

The driver's safety belt is buckled while theindicator light is illuminated and the

warning chime is sounding...

The safety belt warning light and indicatorchime remain off.

The driver's safety belt is buckled beforethe ignition switch is turned to the on posi-

tion...

SEATBELT REMINDERBelt-Minder™This feature supplements the safety beltwarning function by providing additionalreminders that intermittently sound a toneand illuminate the safety belt warning lightwhen you are in the driver seat or you havea front seat passenger and a safety belt isunbuckled.

The system uses information from thefront passenger sensing system todetermine if a front seat passenger ispresent and therefore potentially in needof a warning. To avoid activating theBelt-Minder feature for objects you placein the front passenger seat, only the frontseat passengers receive warnings asdetermined by the front passenger sensingsystem.If the Belt-Minder warnings expire(warnings for about five minutes) for onepassenger (driver or front passenger), theother passenger can still cause theBelt-Minder feature to turn on.

40


Seatbelts

Then...If...

The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.You and the front seat passenger buckleyour safety belts before you switch the

ignition on or less than 1-2 minutes elapseafter you switch the ignition on...

The Belt-Minder feature activates, thesafety belt warning light illuminates and awarning tone sounds for 6 seconds every

25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutesor until you and the front seat passenger

buckle your safety belts.

You or the front seat passenger do notbuckle your safety belts before your vehiclereaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1-2minutes elapse after you switch the ignition

on...

The Belt-Minder feature activates, thesafety belt warning light illuminates and awarning tone sounds for 6 seconds every

25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutesor until you and the front seat passenger

buckle your safety belts.

The safety belt for the driver or frontpassenger is unbuckled for about 1 minutewhile the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph

(9.7 km/h) and more than 1-2 minuteselapse after you switch the ignition on...

Deactivating and Activating theBelt-Minder Feature

WARNINGWhile the system allows you todeactivate it, this system is designedto improve your chances of being

safely belted and surviving an accident.We recommend you leave the systemactivated for yourself and others who mayuse the vehicle.

Note: The driver and front passengerwarnings switch on and off independently.When you perform this procedure for oneseating position, do not buckle the otherposition as this will terminate the process.Note: If you are using MyKey, you cannotdisable the Belt-Minder. Also, if theBelt-Minder has been previously disabled,it will be re-enabled during the use ofMyKey. See MyKey™ (page 59).

Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly beforeproceeding with the programmingprocedure.Before following the procedure, make surethat:• The parking brake is set.• The transmission is in park (P).• The ignition is off.• The driver and front passenger safety

belt is unbuckled.1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the

engine.2. Wait until the safety belt warning light

turns off (about one minute). AfterStep 2, wait an additional 5 secondsbefore proceeding with Step 3. Onceyou start Step 3, you must completethe procedure within 30 seconds.

41


Seatbelts

3. For the seating position you areswitching off, buckle then unbuckle thesafety belt three times at a moderatespeed, ending in the unbuckled state.After Step 3, the safety belt warninglight turns on.

4. While the safety belt warning light ison, buckle then unbuckle the safetybelt. After Step 4, the safety beltwarning light flashes for confirmation.

• This will switch the feature off for thatseating position if it is currently on.

• This will switch the feature on for thatseating position if it is currently off.

CHILD RESTRAINT ANDSEATBELT MAINTENANCEInspect the vehicle safety belts and childsafety seat systems periodically to makesure they work properly and are notdamaged. Inspect the vehicle and childseat safety belts to make sure there are nonicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary.All vehicle safety belt assemblies, includingretractors, buckles, front safety belt buckleassemblies, buckle support assemblies(slide bar-if equipped), shoulder beltheight adjusters (if equipped), shoulderbelt guide on seat back (if equipped), childsafety seat LATCH and tether anchors, andattaching hardware, should be inspectedafter a crash. Read the child restraintmanufacturer's instructions for additionalinspection and maintenance informationspecific to the child restraint.

Ford Motor Company recommends thatall safety belt assemblies in use in vehiclesinvolved in a crash be replaced. However,if the crash was minor and an authorizeddealer finds that the belts do not showdamage and continue to operate properly,they do not need to be replaced. Safetybelt assemblies not in use during a crashshould also be inspected and replaced ifeither damage or improper operation isnoted.Properly care for safety belts. See VehicleCare (page 340).

SEATBELT EXTENSION

WARNINGSPersons who fit into the vehicle'sseatbelt should not use an extension.Unnecessary use could result in

serious personal injury in the event of acrash.

Only use extensions provided free ofcharge by Ford Motor Companydealers. The dealer will provide an

extension designed specifically for thisvehicle, model year and seating position.The use of an extension intended foranother vehicle, model year or seatingposition may not offer you the fullprotection of your vehicle’s seatbeltrestraint system.

Never use seatbelt extensions toinstall child restraints.Do not use a seatbelt extension withan inflatable seatbelt.Do not use extensions to change thefit of the belt across the torso, overthe lap or to make the seatbelt

buckle easier to reach.

42


Seatbelts

If, because of body size or driving position,it is not possible to properly fasten theseatbelt over your lap and shoulder, anextension that is compatible with theseatbelts is available free of charge fromFord Motor Company dealers. Only Fordseatbelt extensions made by the originalequipment seatbelts manufacturer shouldbe used with Ford seatbelts. Ask yourauthorized dealer if your extension iscompatible with your Ford vehicle restraintsystem.

43


Seatbelts

The Personal Safety System provides animproved overall level of frontal crashprotection to front seat occupants and isdesigned to help further reduce the risk ofairbag-related injuries. The system is ableto analyze different occupant conditionsand crash severity before activating theappropriate safety devices to help betterprotect a range of occupants in a varietyof frontal crash situations.The Vehicle Personal Safety Systemconsists of:• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag

supplemental restraints.• Front seat outboard safety belts with

pretensioners, energy managementretractors and safety belt usagesensors.

• Driver seat position sensor.• Front passenger sensing system.• Passenger airbag off and on indicator

lamp.• Front crash severity sensors.• Restraints control module with impact

and safing sensors.• Restraint system warning light and

backup tone.• The electrical wiring for the airbags,

crash sensors, safety beltpretensioners, front safety belt usagesensors, driver seat position sensor,front passenger sensing system andindicator lights.

How Does the Personal SafetySystem Work?The Personal Safety System can adapt thedeployment strategy of the safety devicesaccording to crash severity and occupantconditions. A collection of crash andoccupant sensors provides information tothe restraints control module. During acrash, the restraints control module maydeploy the safety belt pretensioners, oneor both stages of the dual-stage airbagsbased on crash severity and occupantconditions.

44


Personal Safety System™


WARNINGSAirbags do not inflate slowly orgently, and the risk of injury from adeploying airbag is the greatest close

to the trim covering the airbag module.All occupants of your vehicle,including the driver, should alwaysproperly wear their safety belts, even

when an airbag supplemental restraintsystem is provided. Failure to properly wearyour safety belt could seriously increasethe risk of injury or death.

Always transport children 12 yearsold and under in the back seat andalways properly use appropriate

child restraints. Failure to follow this couldseriously increase the risk of injury or death.

Never place your arm over the airbagmodule as a deploying airbag canresult in serious arm fractures or

other injuries.Airbags can kill or injure a child in achild seat. Never place a rear-facingchild seat in front of an active airbag.

If you must use a forward-facing child seatin the front seat, move the seat upon whichthe child seat is installed all the way back.

Do not attempt to service, repair, ormodify the airbag supplementalrestraint systems or its fuses as you

could be seriously injured or killed. Contactyour authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Several airbag system componentsget hot after inflation. To avoid riskof injury, do not touch them after

inflation.If the airbag has deployed, the airbagwill not function again and must bereplaced immediately. If the airbag

is not replaced, the unrepaired area willincrease the risk of injury in a crash.

The airbags are a supplemental restraintsystem and are designed to work with thesafety belts to help protect the driver andright front passenger from certain upperbody injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;there is a risk of injury from a deployingairbag.Note: You will hear a loud bang and see acloud of harmless powdery residue if anairbag deploys. This is normal.The airbags inflate and deflate rapidlyupon activation. After airbag deployment,it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powderyresidue or smell the burnt propellant. Thismay consist of cornstarch, talcum powder(to lubricate the bag) or sodiumcompounds (for example, baking soda)that result from the combustion processthat inflates the airbag. Small amounts ofsodium hydroxide may be present whichmay irritate the skin and eyes, but none ofthe residue is toxic.While the system is designed to helpreduce serious injuries, contact with adeploying airbag may also cause abrasionsor swelling. Temporary hearing loss is alsoa possibility as a result of the noiseassociated with a deploying airbag.Because airbags must inflate rapidly andwith considerable force, there is the risk ofdeath or serious injuries such as fractures,facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,particularly to occupants who are notproperly restrained or are otherwise out ofposition at the time of airbag deployment.Thus, it is extremely important thatoccupants be properly restrained as faraway from the airbag module as possiblewhile maintaining vehicle control.Routine maintenance of the airbags is notrequired.

45


Supplementary Restraints System

DRIVER AND PASSENGERAIRBAGS

WARNINGSNever place your arm or any objectsover an airbag module. Placing yourarm over a deploying airbag can

result in serious arm fractures or otherinjuries. Objects placed on or over theairbag inflation area may cause thoseobjects to be propelled by the airbag intoyour face and torso causing serious injury.

Airbags can kill or injure a child in achild seat. Never place a rear-facingchild seat in front of an active airbag.

If you must use a forward-facing child seatin the front seat, move the vehicle seatupon which the child seat is installed allthe way back.

E151127

The driver and front passenger airbags willdeploy during significant frontal and nearfrontal crashes.The driver and passenger front airbagsystem consists of:• driver and passenger airbag modules.• front passenger sensing system.

· crash sensors and monitoringsystem with readiness indicator.See Crash Sensors and Airbag

Indicator (page 51).

Proper Driver and Front PassengerSeating Adjustment

WARNINGThe National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration recommends aminimum distance of at least 10

inches (25 centimeters) between anoccupant’s chest and the driver airbagmodule.

To properly position yourself away fromthe airbag:• Move your seat to the rear as far as you

can while still reaching the pedalscomfortably.

• Recline the seat slightly (one or twodegrees) from the upright position.

After all occupants have adjusted theirseats and put on safety belts, it is veryimportant that they continue to sitproperly. Properly seated occupants situpright, lean against the seat back, andcenter themselves on the seat cushion,with their feet comfortably extended onthe floor. Sitting improperly can increasethe chance of injury in a crash event. Forexample, if an occupant slouches, liesdown, turns sideways, sits forward, leansforward or sideways, or puts one or bothfeet up, the chance of injury during a crashis greatly increased.

Children and AirbagsWARNING

Airbags can kill or injure a child in achild seat. Never place a rear-facingchild seat in front of an active airbag.

If you must use a forward-facing child seatin the front seat, move the seat all the wayback.

46



E142846

Children must always be properlyrestrained. Accident statistics suggest thatchildren are safer when properly restrainedin the rear seating positions than in thefront seating position. Failure to followthese instructions may increase the risk ofinjury in a crash.If two adults and a child occupy a RegularCab, properly restrain the child in thecenter front unless doing so would interferewith driving your vehicle. This provides lapand shoulder belt protection for alloccupants, and airbag protection for theadults. A child or infant properly restrainedin the center front seat should not incurrisk of serious injury from the airbags.

FRONT PASSENGER SENSINGSYSTEM

WARNINGSEven with Advanced RestraintsSystems, children 12 and undershould be properly restrained in a

rear seating position. Failure to follow thiscould seriously increase the risk of injury ordeath.

WARNINGSSitting improperly out of position orwith the seatback reclined too farcan take off weight from the seat

cushion and affect the decision of the frontpassenger sensing system, resulting inserious injury or death in a crash. Alwayssit upright against your seatback, with yourfeet on the floor.

Any alteration or modification to thefront passenger seat may affect theperformance of the front passenger

sensing system which could seriouslyincrease the risk of injury or death.

E181984

The front passenger sensing system usesa passenger airbag status indicator whichwill illuminate indicating that the frontpassenger frontal airbag is either ON(enabled) or OFF (disabled). The indicatorlamp is located in the center stack of theinstrument panel.Note: When the ignition is first turned on,the passenger airbag status indicator OFFand ON lamps will illuminate for a shortperiod to confirm it is functional.The front passenger sensing system isdesigned to disable (will not inflate) thefront passenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions:• The front passenger seat is

unoccupied.• The system determines an infant is

present in a child restraint.

47



• A passenger takes their weight off ofthe seat for a period of time.

• If there is a problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensingsystem.

Even with this technology, parents arestrongly encouraged to always properlyrestrain children in the rear seat.• When the front passenger sensing

system disables (will not inflate) thefront passenger frontal airbag, thepassenger airbag status indicator willilluminate the OFF lamp and stay lit toremind you that the front passengerfrontal airbag is disabled.

• If the child restraint has been installedand the passenger airbag statusindicator illuminates the ON lamp, thenturn your vehicle off, remove the childrestraint from your vehicle and reinstallthe restraint following the childrestraint manufacturer's instructions.

The front passenger sensing system workswith sensors that are part of the frontpassenger seat and safety belt. Thesensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly seated occupantand determine if the front passengerfrontal airbag should be enabled.• When the front passenger sensing

system enables the front passengerfrontal airbag (may inflate), thepassenger airbag status indicator willilluminate the ON lamp and remainilluminated.

If a person of adult size is sitting in the frontpassenger seat, but the passenger airbagstatus indicator OFF lamp is lit, it ispossible that the person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens:• Turn your vehicle off and ask the

person to place the seatback in the fullupright position.

• Have the person sit upright in the seat,centered on the seat cushion, with theperson's legs comfortably extended.

• Restart your vehicle and have theperson remain in this position for abouttwo minutes. This will allow the systemto detect that person and enable thepassenger's frontal airbag.

• If the indicator OFF lamp remains liteven after this, you should advise theperson to ride in the rear seat.

Note: When the passenger airbag statusindicator OFF lamp is illuminated, thepassenger side airbag (seat mounted) maybe disabled to avoid the risk of airbagdeployment issues.After all occupants have adjusted theirseats and put on safety belts, it is veryimportant that they continue to sitproperly. A properly seated occupant sitsupright, leaning against the seatback, andcentered on the seat cushion, with theirfeet comfortably extended on the floor.Sitting improperly can increase the chanceof injury in a crash event. For example, ifan occupant slouches, lies down, turnssideways, sits forward, leans forward orsideways, or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash is greatlyincreased.If you think that the state of the passengerairbag status indicator lamp is incorrect,check for the following:• Objects lodged underneath the seat.• Objects between the seat cushion and

the center console.

48



• Objects hanging off the seatback.• Objects stowed in the seatback map

pocket.• Objects placed on the occupant's lap.• Cargo interference with the seat• Other passengers pushing or pulling on

the seat.• Rear passenger feet and knees resting

or pushing on the seat.The conditions listed above may cause theweight of a properly seated occupant tobe incorrectly interpreted by the frontpassenger sensing system. The person inthe front passenger seat may appearheavier or lighter due to the conditionsdescribed in the previous list.

Make sure the front passengersensing system is operatingproperly. See Crash Sensors

and Airbag Indicator (page 51).

If the airbag readiness light is lit, do thefollowing:The driver and adult passengers shouldcheck for objects lodged underneath thefront passenger seat or cargo interferingwith the seat.If objects are lodged or cargo is interferingwith the seat, please take the followingsteps to remove the obstruction:• Pull your vehicle over.• Turn your vehicle off.• Driver or adult passengers should

check for any objects lodgedunderneath the front passenger seator cargo interfering with the seat.

• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).• Restart your vehicle.

• Wait at least two minutes and verifythat the airbag readiness light in theinstrument cluster is no longerilluminated.

• If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument cluster remains illuminated,this may or may not be a problem dueto the front passenger sensing system.

Do not attempt to repair or service thesystem. Take your vehicle immediately toan authorized dealer.If it is necessary to modify an advancedfront airbag system to accommodate aperson with disabilities, contact the FordCustomer Relationship Center.

SIDE AIRBAGS

WARNINGSDo not place objects or mountequipment on or near the airbagcover, on the side of the seatbacks

(of the front seats), or in front seat areasthat may come into contact with adeploying airbag. Failure to follow theseinstructions may increase the risk ofpersonal injury in the event of a crash.

Do not use accessory seat covers.The use of accessory seat coversmay prevent the deployment of the

side airbags and increase the risk of injuryin an accident.

Do not lean your head on the door.The side airbag could injure you as itdeploys from the side of the

seatback.Do not attempt to service, repair, ormodify the airbag, its fuses or theseat cover on a seat containing an

airbag as you could be seriously injured orkilled. Contact your authorized dealer assoon as possible.

49



WARNINGSIf the side airbag has deployed, theairbag will not function again. Theside airbag system (including the

seat) must be inspected and serviced byan authorized dealer. If the airbag is notreplaced, the unrepaired area will increasethe risk of injury in a crash.

The side airbags are located on theoutboard side of the seatbacks of the frontseats. In certain sideways crashes, theairbag on the side affected by the crashwill be inflated. The airbag was designedto inflate between the door panel andoccupant to further enhance the protectionprovided occupants in side impact crashes.

E152533

The system consists of the following:• A label or embossed side panel

indicating that side airbags are fittedto your vehicle.

• Side airbags located inside the driverand front passenger seatbacks.

• Front passenger sensing system.

• Crash sensors and monitoring systemwith readiness indicator. See CrashSensors and Airbag Indicator (page51).

Note: The passenger sensing system willdeactivate the passenger seat-mountedside airbag if it detects an empty passengerseat.The design and development of the sideairbag system included recommendedtesting procedures that were developedby a group of automotive safety expertsknown as the Side Airbag TechnicalWorking Group. These recommendedtesting procedures help reduce the risk ofinjuries related to the deployment of sideairbags.

SAFETY CANOPY™

WARNINGSDo not place objects or mountequipment on or near the headlinerat the siderail that may come into

contact with a deploying curtain airbag.Failure to follow these instructions mayincrease the risk of personal injury in theevent of a crash.

Do not lean your head on the door.The curtain airbag could injure youas it deploys from the headliner.Do not attempt to service, repair, ormodify the curtain airbagsupplemental restraint system, its

fuses, the A, B, or C pillar trim, or theheadliner on a vehicle containing curtainairbags as you could be seriously injuredor killed. Contact your authorized dealeras soon as possible.

All occupants of your vehicle,including the driver, should alwaysproperly wear their seatbelts, even

when an airbag supplemental restraintsystem is provided. Failure to properly wearyour seatbelt could seriously increase therisk of injury or death.

To reduce risk of injury, do notobstruct or place objects in thedeployment path of the airbag.

50



WARNINGSIf the curtain airbags have deployed,the curtain airbags will not functionagain. The curtain airbags (including

the A, B and C pillar trim and headliner)must be inspected and serviced as soonas possible. If the curtain airbag is notreplaced, the unrepaired area will increasethe risk of injury in a crash.

The Safety Canopy deploys duringsignificant side crashes or when a certainlikelihood of a rollover event is detectedby the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopyis mounted to the roof side-rail sheetmetal, behind the headliner, above eachrow of seats. In certain sideways crashesor rollover events, the Safety Canopy willbe activated, regardless of which seats areoccupied. The Safety Canopy is designedto inflate between the side window areaand occupants to further enhanceprotection provided in side impact crashesand rollover events.

E75004

The system consists of the following:• Safety Canopy curtain airbags located

above the trim panels over the frontand rear side windows identified by alabel or wording on the headliner orroof-pillar trim.

• A flexible headliner which opens abovethe side doors to allow air curtaindeployment

· Crash sensors and monitoringsystem with a readinessindicator. See Crash Sensors

and Airbag Indicator (page 51).

Properly restrain children 12 years old andunder in the rear seats. The Safety Canopywill not interfere with children restrainedusing a properly installed child or boosterseat because it is designed to inflatedownward from the headliner above thedoors along the side window opening.The design and development of the SafetyCanopy included recommended testingprocedures that were developed by agroup of automotive safety experts knownas the Side Airbag Technical WorkingGroup. These recommended testingprocedures help reduce the risk of injuriesrelated to the deployment of side airbags(including the Safety Canopy).

CRASH SENSORS ANDAIRBAG INDICATOR

WARNINGModifying or adding equipment tothe front end of the vehicle (includingframe, bumper, front end body

structure and tow hooks) may affect theperformance of the airbag system,increasing the risk of injury. Do not modifythe front end of the vehicle.

51



Your vehicle has a collection of crash andoccupant sensors which provideinformation to the restraints controlmodule which deploys (activates) thefront safety belt pretensioners, optionalrear inflatable safety belts, driver airbag,passenger airbag, seat mounted sideairbags, and the Safety Canopy®. Basedon the type of crash (frontal impact, sideimpact or rollover), the restraints controlmodule will deploy the appropriate safetydevices.The restraints control module alsomonitors the readiness of the above safetydevices plus the crash and occupantsensors. The readiness of the safetysystem is indicated by a warning indicatorlight in the instrument cluster or by abackup tone if the warning light is notworking. See Instrument Cluster (page102). Routine maintenance of the airbag isnot required.A difficulty with the system is indicated byone or more of the following:

The readiness light will notilluminate immediately after theignition is turned on.

• The readiness light will either flash orstay lit.

• A series of five beeps will be heard. Thetone pattern will repeat periodicallyuntil the problem, the light or both arerepaired.

If any of these things happen, evenintermittently, have the supplementalrestraint system serviced at an authorizeddealer immediately. Unless serviced, thesystem may not function properly in theevent of a crash.

The fact that the safety belt pretensionersor front airbags did not activate for bothfront seat occupants in a crash does notmean that something is wrong with thesystem. Rather, it means the restraintscontrol module determined the accidentconditions (crash severity, belt usage)were not appropriate to activate thesesafety devices.• The design of the front airbags is to

activate only in frontal and near-frontalcrashes (not rollovers, side impacts orrear impacts unless the crash causessufficient frontal deceleration).

• The design of the safety beltpretensioners and optional rearinflatable safety belts is to activate infrontal, near-frontal and side crashes,and in rollovers.

• The design of the side airbags is toinflate in certain side impact crashes.Side airbags may activate in othertypes of crashes if the vehicleexperiences sufficient sideways motionor deformation.

• The design of the Safety Canopy is toinflate in certain side impact crashesor rollover events. The Safety Canopymay activate in other types of crashesif the vehicle experiences sufficientsideways motion or deformation, or acertain likelihood of rollover.

AIRBAG DISPOSALContact your authorized dealer as soon aspossible. Airbags must be disposed of byqualified personnel.

52



GENERAL INFORMATION ONRADIO FREQUENCIESThis device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with Industry Canadalicense-exempt RSS standard(s).Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) This devicemust accept any interference received,including interference that may causeundesired operation.Note: Changes or modifications notexpressively approved by the partyresponsible for compliance could void theuser's authority to operate the equipment.The term IC before the radio certificationnumber only signifies that Industry Canadatechnical specifications were met.The typical operating range for yourtransmitter is approximately 33 feet (10meters). Vehicles with the remote startfeature will have a greater range. One ofthe following could cause a decrease inoperating range:• weather conditions• nearby radio towers• structures around the vehicle• other vehicles parked next to your

vehicleOther short-distance radio transmitters,such as amateur radios, medicalequipment, wireless headphones, remotecontrols and alarm systems may operateon the same frequency as your remotecontrol. If other transmitters are operatingon those frequencies, you may not be ableto use your remote control. Using yourremote control near some types ofelectronic equipment, such as USB devices,

computers or cell phones can interfere withremote operation. Operating your remotecontrol near metal or metallic-finishedpurses, bags or clothing can interfere withremote operation. You can lock and unlockthe doors with the key.Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle beforeleaving it unattended.Note: If you are in range, the remote controlwill operate if you press any buttonunintentionally.

Intelligent AccessThe system uses a radio frequency signalto communicate with your vehicle andauthorize your vehicle to unlock when oneof the following conditions are met:• You touch the inside of the front

exterior door handle within 3 ft (1 m)proximity of an intelligent access key.

• You press the tailgate release button.• You press a button on the transmitter.If excessive radio frequency interferenceis present in the area or if the transmitterbattery is low, you may need tomechanically unlock your door. You canuse the mechanical key blade in yourintelligent access key to open the driverdoor in this situation. See RemoteControl (page 53).

REMOTE CONTROLIntegrated Keyhead Transmitters(If Equipped)

Use the key blade to start your vehicle andunlock or lock the driver door from outsideyour vehicle. The transmitter portionfunctions as the remote control.

53


Keys and Remote Controls

E191532

Press the button to release the key. Pressand hold the button to fold the key backin when not in use.

E151795

Note: Your vehicle’s keys came with asecurity tag that provides important vehiclekey cut information. Keep the tag in a safeplace for future reference.

Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped)

E191531

Your intelligent access keys operate thepower locks and the remote start system.The key must be in your vehicle to activatethe push-button start system.

Removable Key BladeThe intelligent access key also contains aremovable mechanical key blade that youcan use to unlock the driver door.

E176269

Slide the release on the back of the remotecontrol and pivot the cover off to accessthe key blade.

E151795

Note: Your vehicle’s backup keys came witha security tag that provides importantvehicle key cut information. Keep the tag ina safe place for future reference.

Replacing the BatteryNote: Refer to local regulations whendisposing of transmitter batteries.

54



Note: Do not wipe off any grease on thebattery terminals or on the back surface ofthe circuit board.Note: Replacing the battery does not deletethe transmitter from the vehicle. Thetransmitter should operate normally.A message appears in the informationdisplay when the remote control batteryis low. See General Information (page110).

Integrated Keyhead TransmitterThe remote control uses one coin-typethree-volt lithium battery CR2032 orequivalent.Press the button to release the key beforebeginning the procedure.

E191533

1. Insert a screwdriver in the positionshown and gently push the clip.

2. Press the clip down to release thebattery cover.

E151799

3. Carefully remove the cover.

E151800

Note: Do not touch the battery contacts orthe printed circuit board with thescrewdriver.4. Insert a screwdriver as shown to

release the battery.

E151801

5. Remove the battery.

55



6. Install a new battery with the + facingup.

7. Replace the battery cover.

Intelligent Access TransmitterThe remote control uses two coin-typethree-volt lithium batteries CR2025 orequivalent.

E151796

1. Slide the release on the back of theremote control and pivot the cover off.

E153890

2. Insert a coin into the slot and twist toseparate the housing.

E176226

3. Remove the batteries.4. Install new batteries with the + facing

each other.Note: Make sure to replace the labelbetween the two batteries.5. Reinstall the housing and cover.

Memory Feature (If Equipped)

You can use the remote control to recallmemory positions.Press the unlock button on a linked remotecontrol to recall the memory positions. Ifyou enable the easy-entry-and-exitfeature, the seat moves to the easy-entryposition. The seat moves to the drivermemory position when you put the key inthe ignition.

Linking a Preset Position to yourRemote Control or Intelligent AccessKey FobSee Memory Function (page 154).

Car Finder

E138623

Press the button twice withinthree seconds. The horn soundsand the direction indicators

flash. We recommend you use this methodto locate your vehicle, rather than usingthe panic alarm.

56



Sounding a Panic AlarmNote: The panic alarm only operates whenthe ignition is off.

E138624

Press the button to activate thealarm. Press the button again orswitch the ignition on to

deactivate.

Remote Start (If Equipped)

WARNINGTo avoid exhaust fumes, do not useremote start if your vehicle is parkedindoors or in areas that are not well

ventilated.

Note: Do not use remote start if your vehicleis low on fuel.

E138625

The remote start button is on thetransmitter.

This feature allows you to start yourvehicle from outside the vehicle. Thetransmitter has an extended operatingrange.You can configure vehicles with automaticclimate control to turn on the automaticclimate control when you remote start yourvehicle. See Automatic Climate Control(page 143). A manual climate controlsystem runs at the setting you set it towhen you switched off the vehicle.Many states and provinces restrict the useof remote start. Check your local and stateor provincial laws for specific requirementsregarding remote start systems.The remote start system does not work if:• The ignition is on.• The alarm system triggers.• You disable the feature.• The hood is open.• The transmission is not in P.

• The vehicle battery voltage is too low.• The service engine soon light is on.

Remote Control FeedbackAn LED on the remote control providesstatus feedback of remote start or stopcommands.

StatusLED

Remote start orextensionsuccessful

Solid green

Remote stopsuccessful; vehicle

off

Solid red

Remote start orstop failed

Blinking red

Waiting for statusupdate

Blinking green

Remote Starting the VehicleNote: You must press each button withinthree seconds of each other. Your vehicleremote starts only if you follow thissequence.

E138626

The tag with your transmitter details thestarting procedure.To remote start your vehicle:1. Press the lock button.2. Press the remote start button twice.

The exterior lamps flash twice.

57



The horn sounds if the system fails to start,unless quiet start is on. Quiet start runs theblower fan at a slower speed to reducenoise. You can switch it on or off in theinformation display. See GeneralInformation (page 110).Note: If you have remote started yourvehicle with an integrated keyheadtransmitter, you must switch on the ignitionbefore driving your vehicle. With anintelligent access transmitter, you mustpress the brake pedal before driving yourvehicle.The power windows do not work duringthe remote start and the radio does notturn on automatically.The parking lamps remain on and thevehicle runs for 5, 10 or 15 minutesdepending on the setting.

Extending the Vehicle Run TimeRepeat Steps 1 and 2 with the vehicle stillrunning to extend the run time for anotherremote start period. If you programmedthe periods to last 10 minutes, the second10 minutes begins after what is left of thefirst activation time. For example, if thevehicle has run from the first remote startfor five minutes, the vehicle continues torun now for a total of 20 minutes. You canextend the remote start up to a maximumof 35 minutes.Wait at least five seconds before remotestarting after a vehicle shutdown.

Turning the Vehicle Off After RemoteStarting

E138625

Press the button once. Theparking lamps turn off.You may have to be closer to the

vehicle than when starting due to groundreflection and the added noise of therunning vehicle.

You can disable or enable the remote startsystem through the information display.See General Information (page 110).

REPLACING A LOST KEY ORREMOTE CONTROLReplacement keys or remote controls canbe purchased from an authorized dealer.Authorized dealers can program remotecontrols for your vehicle. See PassiveAnti-Theft System (page 74).

58



PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONMyKey allows you to program keys withrestricted driving modes to promote gooddriving habits. All but one of the keysprogrammed to the vehicle can beactivated with these restricted modes.Any keys that have not been programmedare referred to as administrator keys oradmin keys. They can be used to:• Create a MyKey.• Program configurable MyKey settings.• Clear all MyKey features.When you have programmed a MyKey, youcan access the following information usingthe information display:• How many admin keys and MyKeys are

programmed to your vehicle.• The total distance your vehicle has

traveled using a MyKey.Note: All MyKeys are programmed to thesame settings. You cannot program themindividually.Note: For vehicles equipped with apush-button start switch: When both aMyKey and an admin key are present whenyou start your vehicle, the system recognizesthe admin key only.

Non-configurable SettingsThe following settings cannot be changedby an admin key user:• Belt-Minder or safety belt reminder.

You cannot disable this feature. Theaudio system will mute when the frontseat occupants’ safety belts are notfastened.

• Early low fuel. The low fuel warning isactivated earlier, giving the MyKey usermore time to refuel.

• Driver assist features, if equipped onyour vehicle, are forced on: parking aid,blind spot information system (BLIS),cross traffic alert, lane departurewarning and forward collision warningsystem.

• Satellite radio adult contentrestrictions (available only in somemarkets).

Note: When you switch lane departurewarning off temporarily, it turns on at thenext ignition cycle.

Configurable SettingsWith an admin key, you can configurecertain MyKey settings when you firstcreate a MyKey and before you recycle thekey or restart the vehicle. You can alsochange the settings afterward with anadmin key:• A vehicle speed limit can be set.

Warnings will be shown in the display,followed by an audible tone when yourvehicle reaches the set speed. Youcannot override the set speed by fullydepressing the accelerator pedal or bysetting cruise control.

WARNINGDo not set MyKey maximum speedlimit to a limit that will prevent thedriver from maintaining a safe speed

considering posted speed limits andprevailing road conditions. The driver isalways responsible to drive in accordancewith local laws and prevailing conditions.Failure to do so could result in accident orinjury.

59


MyKey™ (If Equipped)

• Various vehicle speed reminders so youknow when your vehicle approachesthe limits. Warnings appear in theinformation display and an audiblewarning sounds when you exceed thelimit.

• Audio system maximum volume of45%. A message will be shown in thedisplay when you attempt to exceedthe limited volume. Also, thespeed-sensitive or compensatedautomatic volume control will bedisabled.

• Always on setting. When this isselected, you will not be able to turnoff Advance Trac or traction control,911 Assist or Emergency Assistance, orDo Not Disturb (if your vehicle isequipped with these features).

CREATING A MYKEYUse the information display to create aMyKey.To create a MyKey:1. Place your key into the ignition or, if

your vehicle is equipped with keylessstart, place your transmitter into thebackup position. Details on the backupposition's location are in anotherchapter. See Starting a GasolineEngine (page 169).

2. Switch the ignition on.3. Access the main menu using your

left-hand-side steering wheel controls.4. Depending on your display options,

select either Settings or AdvancedSettings, then MyKey and finallyCreate MyKey.

5. When the menu reads Hold OK toCreate MyKey, press and hold the OKbutton to program a MyKey.

6. The display then prompts you toprogram the Configurable settings.

You can program the configurable featuresnow or at any time. You can advancethrough the settings without programmingthem by pressing the OK button. MyKeythen keeps all of the default settings.When you finish programming your MyKey,the Type 3 information display adds aconfirmation screen, New MyKey HasBeen Created.

Programming/ChangingConfigurable SettingsUse the information display to program orchange your configurable MyKey settings.1. Place your admin key into the ignition

or, if your vehicle is equipped withkeyless start, place your admintransmitter into the backup position.Details on the backup position'slocation are in another chapter. SeeStarting a Gasoline Engine (page169).

2. Depending on your display options,select either Settings or AdvancedSettings, then MyKey and finally tovarious configurable features.

3. Scroll down through the choices, andthen highlight the feature you want toconfigure.

Note: You can clear or change your MyKeysettings at any time during the same keycycle as you created the MyKey. Once youhave switched the engine off, however, youwill need an admin key to change or clearyour MyKey settings.

CLEARING ALL MYKEYSYou can clear all MyKeys within the samekey cycle as you created the MyKey. If youswitch your ignition off, however, you willneed to use an admin key to clear yourMyKeys.

60



Note: When you clear your MyKeys, youremove all restrictions and return all MyKeysto their original admin key status at once.To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings,use the information display and theleft-hand-side steering wheel controls:1. Access the main menu and select

Settings, then MyKey and finallyClear MyKeys.

2. Press and hold OK.3. When you finish clearing all MyKeys,

the Type 3 information display adds aconfirmation screen, MyKey Cleared.

CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEMSTATUSYou can find information on programmedMyKey(s) using the information displaycontrol on the steering wheel. SeeInformation Displays (page 110).

To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button toaccess the main menu and scroll to:

DescriptionMessage

Press the OK button.Settings

Press the OK button.MyKey

Select one of the following:

Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only wayto delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin keyto clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate asexpected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, oran admin key user recently cleared and then recreated aMyKey.

MyKey Dist.

Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle.Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have foryour vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.

{0} MyKeys

Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to yourvehicle. Use this feature to determine how many unrestrictedkeys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additionalMyKey has been programmed.

{0} Admin Keys

61



USING MYKEY WITH REMOTESTART SYSTEMSMyKey is not compatible with non

Ford-approved, aftermarket remote startsystems. If you choose to install a remotestart system, see an authorized dealer fora Ford-approved remote start system.

MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING

Potential CausesCondition

I cannot create a MyKey. • The key or transmitter used to start thevehicle does not have admin privileges.

• The key or transmitter used to start thevehicle is the only admin key (there alwayshas to be at least one admin key).

• Vehicles with keyless start: The keylessstart transmitter is not placed in the backupposition. See Starting a Gasoline Engine(page 169).

• SecuriLock passive anti-theft system isdisabled or in unlimited mode.

• The key or transmitter used to start yourvehicle does not have admin privileges.

• No MyKeys are created. See Creating aMyKey (page 60).

I cannot program the configurablesettings.

• The key or transmitter used to start yourvehicle does not have admin privileges.


I cannot clear the MyKeys.

Purchase a new key from an authorized dealer.I lost the only admin key.

62



Potential CausesCondition

Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-TheftSystem (page 74).

I lost a key.

MyKey distances do not accumulate. • The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.• An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys

and created new MyKeys.• The key system has been reset.

• An admin transmitter is present at vehiclestart.


No MyKey functions with the keylessentry transmitter.

63



LOCKING AND UNLOCKINGYou can use the power door lock controlor the remote control to lock and unlockyour vehicle.See Electronic Tailgate (page 69).

Power Door Locks (If Equipped)

The power door lock control is on the driverand front passenger door panels.

E138628

Unlock.ALock.B

Remote Control (If Equipped)

You can use the remote control at any timeyour vehicle is not running.

Unlocking the Vehicle (Two-StageUnlock)

E138629

Press the button to unlock thedriver door. Press the buttonagain within three seconds to

unlock all doors. The direction indicatorsflash.

Press and hold both the lock and unlockbuttons on the remote control for fourseconds to disable or enable two-stageunlocking. Disabling two-stage unlockingallows your entire vehicle to unlock withone press of the button. The directionindicators flash twice to indicate a changeto the unlocking mode. The unlockingmode applies to the remote control andkeyless entry keypad.Intelligent access at the driver door willunlock your entire vehicle when you disabletwo-stage unlocking.

Locking the Vehicle

E138623

Press the button to lock alldoors. The direction indicatorsflash.

Press the button again within threeseconds to confirm that all the doors areclosed. The doors lock again, the hornsounds and the direction indicators flashif all the doors are closed.

MislockIf any door is open, or if the hood is openon vehicles with an anti-theft alarm orremote start, the horn will sound twice andthe direction indicators will not flash.

Activating Intelligent Access (If

Equipped)

The intelligent access key must be within3 ft (1 m) of the door or tailgate you intendto lock or unlock.

At the Front DoorsPull a front exterior door handle to unlockand open the door. The unlock sensor is onthe back of the handle. Make sure not totouch the lock sensor area on the front ofthe handle.

64


Doors and Locks

E190690

Press and hold the lock sensor area forabout a second to lock your vehicle. Toavoid unlocking the door inadvertently,make sure you only touch the lock sensorand not other areas of the door handle.After locking the doors with the locksensor, there is a brief delay before you canunlock your vehicle. This delay lets you pullthe handle to make sure it locked.Note: Keep the door handle surface cleanto avoid issues with operation.

At the Electronic Tailgate

E187693

Press the exterior tailgate release buttoninside of the tailgate handle. The tailgatewill unlock and open. See ElectronicTailgate (page 69).

Smart Unlock (If Equipped)

This feature helps to prevent you fromlocking your intelligent access key insideyour vehicle’s passenger compartment orrear cargo area.If you leave your key in the ignition, whenyou open the driver door and lock yourvehicle with the power door lock control,the doors lock then unlock.You can still lock your vehicle with the keyin the ignition by:• Using the manual lock on the inside of

the door.• Locking the driver door with a key.• Using the keyless entry keypad.• Using the lock button on the remote

control.

Smart Unlocks for IntelligentAccess Keys (If Equipped)

This feature helps to prevent you fromlocking your intelligent access key insideyour vehicle’s passenger compartment orrear cargo area.When you lock your vehicle using thepower door lock control (with the dooropen, vehicle in park and ignition off), yourvehicle will search for an intelligent accesskey in the passenger compartment afteryou close the door. If your vehicle finds akey, all of the doors will immediatelyunlock.In order to override the smart unlockfeature and intentionally lock theintelligent access key inside your vehicle,you can lock your vehicle after all doorsare closed by using the keyless entrykeypad, pressing the lock button onanother intelligent access key or touchingthe locking area on the handle with anotherintelligent access key in your hand.

65


Doors and Locks

When you open one of the front doors andlock your vehicle using the power door lockcontrol, all doors will lock then unlock ifthe ignition is on.

Autolock and Autounlock (If Equipped)

The autolock feature locks all the doorswhen your doors are closed, the ignition ison, and your vehicle reaches a speedgreater than 12 mph (20 km/h).When your doors autolock while driving,stopping the vehicle then switching theignition off or to accessory and openingthe driver door unlocks all your doors. Thisautounlock feature remains active for 10minutes after stopping.Note: The doors do not autounlock if youhave electronically locked them beforeopening the driver door.

Enabling or DisablingYou can enable or disable these featuresindependently of each other using theinformation display. An authorized dealercan also help you enable or disable thesefeatures. See General Information (page110).

Illuminated EntryThe interior lamps and select exteriorlamps illuminate when you unlock thedoors with the remote entry system.The illuminated entry system turns off thelights if:• The ignition is on.• You press the remote control lock

button.• After 25 seconds of illumination.The dome lamp does not turn on if thecontrol is set to the off position.

The lights do not turn off if:• You switch them on with the dimmer

control.• Any door is open.

Battery SaverThe battery saver turns off the interiorlamps 30 minutes after you switch off theignition if a door is open and the domelamp switch is on. It turns off the interiorlamps after 10 minutes if the dome lampswitch is off.

Accessory Mode Battery Saver forIntelligent Access Keys (If Equipped)If you leave the ignition on after leavingyour vehicle, it turns off 15 minutes afteryou close all of the doors.

KEYLESS ENTRY (If Equipped)

SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRYKEYPADThe keypad is near the driver window andilluminates when you touch it.Note: If you enter your entry code too faston the keypad, the unlock function may notwork. Re-enter your entry code more slowly.

E190936

66


Doors and Locks

You can use the keypad to:• Lock or unlock the doors and liftgate.• Program and erase user codes.• Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.You can operate the keypad with thefactory-set five-digit entry code. The codeis located on the owner’s wallet card in theglove box and is available from anauthorized dealer. You can also create upto five of your own five-digit personal entrycodes.

Programming a Personal Entry CodeTo create your own personal entry code:1. Enter the factory-set code.2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five

seconds.3. Enter your personal five-digit code. You

must enter each number within fiveseconds of each other.

4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to savepersonal code one.

The doors will lock then unlock to confirmthat programming was successful.To program additional personal entrycodes, repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step 4:• Press 3·4 to save personal code two.• Press 5·6 to save personal code three.• Press 7·8 to save personal code four.• Press 9·0 to save personal code five.Tips:• Do not set a code that uses five of the

same number.• Do not use five numbers in sequential

order.• The factory-set code will work even if

you have set your own personal code.

Erasing a Personal Code1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.

2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypadwithin five seconds.

3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds.This must be done within five secondsof completing Step 2.

All personal codes erase and only thefactory-set five-digit code will work.

Recalling Memory Positions (IfEquipped)The programmed entry codes will recalldriver memory positions as follows:• Entry code one will recall driver 1

memory positions.• Entry code two will recall driver 2

memory positions.• Entry code three will recall driver 3

memory positions.Note: Personal entry codes four and fivewill not recall memory positions

Anti-Scan FeatureThe keypad will go into an anti-scan modeif you enter the wrong code seven times(35 consecutive button presses). Thismode disables the keypad for one minuteand the keypad lamp will flash.The anti-scan feature will turn off after:• One minute of keypad inactivity.• Pressing the unlock button on the

remote control.• Switching the ignition on.• Unlocking the vehicle using intelligent

access.

Unlocking and Locking the Doors

To Unlock the Driver DoorEnter the factory-set five-digit code or yourpersonal code. You must press eachnumber within five seconds of each other.The interior lamps illuminate.

67


Doors and Locks

Note: All doors unlock if you disable thetwo-stage unlocking feature. See GeneralInformation (page 110).

To Unlock All DoorsEnter the factory-set code or your personalcode, then press 3·4 control within fiveseconds.

To Lock All DoorsPress and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the sametime with the driver door closed. You donot need to enter the keypad code first.

68


Doors and Locks

TAILGATE LOCKThe tailgate lock can help prevent theft ofthe tailgate.

E224958

Insert the ignition key into the tailgate lock.Turn it to the left to lock the tailgate. Turnit to the right to unlock the tailgate.

MANUAL TAILGATE (If Equipped)

E187692

1. Unlock the tailgate.2. Pull up on the manual tailgate handle

to release the tailgate.

ELECTRONIC TAILGATE (If

Equipped)

WARNINGIt is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of avehicle. In a crash, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and safety belts. Makesure everyone in your vehicle is in a seatand properly using a safety belt. Failure tofollow this warning could result in seriouspersonal injury or death.

The electronic tailgate release will notoperate when:• The battery voltage is below the

minimum operating voltage.• The vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph

(5 km/h).

With the Remote Control

E191530

Press the remote control buttontwice within three seconds.

With the Outside Control Button1. Unlock the vehicle with the remote

control or power door unlock control.If an intelligent access transmitter iswithin 3 ft (1 m) of the tailgate, thetailgate will unlock when you press thetailgate release button.

69


Tailgate

E187693

2. Press the button in the top of thetailgate handle.

3. Push the tailgate up to close thetailgate.

Note: The electronic tailgate is not apowered tailgate. The use of a tonneaucover or other aftermarket accessories,freezing conditions or being parked downhillmay stop your tailgate from openingautomatically after it is unlatched. You mayneed to pull the handle to open the tailgateif the tailgate does not automatically lowerafter being unlatched.

REMOVING THE TAILGATE

WARNINGAlways properly secure cargo toprevent shifting cargo or cargo fallingfrom vehicle, which could result in

compromised vehicle stability and seriouspersonal injury to vehicle occupants orothers.

You can remove the tailgate for moreloading room.Note: Skip to Step 4 if your vehicle doesnot have a rearview camera.

E189556

1. Locate and disconnect the rearviewcamera in-line connector. It is underthe pickup box on the right-hand sideof the vehicle near the spare tire.

2. There is a protective cap in the glovebox. Install it on the in-line connectorthat remains under the pickup box.

3. Partially lower the tailgate. Carefullyfeed the tailgate harness up throughthe gap between the pickup box andthe bumper and place it out of the wayunder the pickup box.

4. Lower the tailgate.

E163092

5. Use a screwdriver to gently pry thespring clip on each connector past thehead of the support screw. Disconnectthe cable.

6. Disconnect the other cable.7. Lift the tailgate to 45° from horizontal.

70


Tailgate

8. Lift the right side off its hinge.9. Lift the tailgate to 80° from horizontal.10. Remove the tailgate from the left side

hinge by sliding it to the right.Reverse the steps to reinstall the tailgate.

TAILGATE STEP (If Equipped)

Use the step to make entering the truckbed easier.To reduce the risk of falling:• Only operate the step when your

vehicle is on a level surface.• Only operate the step in areas with

sufficient lighting.• Always open the step panel to widen

the step.• Always use the grab handle when

climbing on the step.• Do not use the step with bare feet.• Make sure the step is clean before use.• Keep the step load, you plus the load,

below 350 lb (159 kg).

Opening the StepNote: Make sure to close and fully latch thestep before moving your vehicle. Never drivewith the step or grab handle open.1. Lower the tailgate.2. Push the button in the center of the

step molding. The step will pop outslightly.

E187718

3. Pull the step out fully. Lower the stepto its lowest position.

E189557

4. Pull the yellow handle stop backwardout of the tailgate.

5. Rotate the handle up from horizontalto vertical until you hear a click. Youhave locked the handle in place.

Note: Do not tow with the step or grabhandle.Replace the slip resistance tape or grabhandle molding if it appears worn ordamaged.

Closing the Step1. Press handle button 1 to lower the

telescoping handle extension, and thenpress button 2 to release the handle.Rotate the handle down from verticalto horizontal.

71


Tailgate

2. Push the handle back into the tailgate.3. Rotate the step up until it is horizontal,

then push it back into the tailgate untilthe step is secure.

BED EXTENDER (If Equipped)

Note: Do not use the bed extender whendriving off road.Note: Make sure to engage the locking pinsand knobs fully before driving your vehicle.Note: Make sure to secure all cargo.Note: Do not exceed 150 lb (68 kg) on thetailgate when your vehicle is moving.Note: Do not keep the bed extender in thetailgate mode when you are not using it forrestraining cargo. Always keep the bedextender in the grocery mode or the stowedposition with the tailgate closed.

Tailgate Mode

E163095

1. Pull the locking pin toward the centerof your vehicle.

E163096

2. Open the latches to release the panels.

E163097

3. Rotate the panels toward the tailgate.Repeat Steps 1-3 on the other side ofyour vehicle.

E163098

4. Connect the two panels. Rotate bothknobs one-quarter turn clockwise tosecure the panels.

72


Tailgate

E163099

5. Make sure to insert the latch rod intothe tailgate hole. Make sure to engageboth sides of the locking pins into theirholes in the pick-up box.

Reverse the steps to store the bedextender.

Grocery Mode

E163100

Follow Steps 1-4 of the Tailgate Modeinstructions by rotating the panels awayfrom the tailgate. Close the tailgate.

73


Tailgate

PASSIVE ANTI-THEFTSYSTEM (If Equipped)

Note: The system is not compatible withnon-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.Use of these systems may result in vehiclestarting problems and a loss of securityprotection.Note: Metallic objects, electronic devicesor a second coded key on the same keychain may cause vehicle starting problemsif they are too close to the key when startingthe engine. Prevent these objects fromtouching the coded key while starting theengine. Switch the ignition off, move allobjects on the key chain away from thecoded key and restart the engine if aproblem occurs.Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded keyin the vehicle. Always take your keys andlock all doors when leaving the vehicle.

SecuriLock™The system is an engine immobilizationsystem. It helps prevent the engine fromstarting unless you use a coded keyprogrammed to your vehicle. Using thewrong key may prevent the engine fromstarting. A message may appear in theinformation display.If you are unable to start the engine with acorrectly coded key, the system hasmalfunctioned. A message may appear inthe information display.

Automatic ArmingThe system arms immediately after youswitch the ignition off.

Automatic DisarmingSwitching the ignition on with a coded keydisarms the system.

Replacement KeysNote: Your vehicle may have two integratedkeyhead transmitters.The integrated keyhead transmitterfunctions as a programmed ignition key. Itoperates all the locks, starts the vehicleand acts as a remote control.If your programmed transmitters orstandard SecuriLock coded keys are lostor stolen and you do not have an extracoded key, you need to have your vehicletowed to an authorized dealer. You needto erase the key codes from your vehicleand program new coded keys.Store an extra programmed key away fromyour vehicle in a safe place to help preventany inconveniences. Contact an authorizeddealer to purchase additional spare orreplacement keys.

Programming a Spare IntegratedKeyhead TransmitterNote: You can program a maximum ofeight coded keys to your vehicle. All eightcan be integrated keyhead transmitters.You can program your own integratedkeyhead transmitter or standardSecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. Thisprocedure programs both the engineimmobilizer keycode and the remote entryportion of the remote control to yourvehicle.Only use integrated keyhead transmittersor standard SecuriLock keys.You must have two previouslyprogrammed coded keys and the newunprogrammed key readily accessible.Contact an authorized dealer to have thespare key programmed if two previouslyprogrammed coded keys are not available.Read and understand the entire procedurebefore you begin.

74


Security

1. Insert the first previously programmedcoded key into the ignition.

2. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keepthe ignition on for at least threeseconds, but no more than 10 seconds.

3. Switch the ignition off and remove thefirst coded key from the ignition.

4. After three seconds but within 10seconds of switching the ignition off,insert the second previously coded keyinto the ignition.

5. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keepthe ignition on for at least threeseconds, but no more than 10 seconds.

6. Switch the ignition off and remove thesecond previously programmed codedkey from the ignition.

7. After three seconds but within 10seconds of switching the ignition offand removing the previouslyprogrammed coded key, insert the newunprogrammed key into the ignition.

8. Switch the ignition from off to on. Keepthe ignition on for at least six secondsuntil you hear the door locks cycle.

9. Remove the newly programmed codedkey from the ignition.

The key starts the engine if programmingis successful. You can operate the remoteentry system if the new key is an integratedkeyhead transmitter.If programming was not successful, wait20 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8.If you are still unsuccessful, take yourvehicle to an authorized dealer.

Programming a Spare IntelligentAccess KeyNote: You can program a maximum of fourintelligent access keys to your vehicle.

Note: If your programmed transmitters arelost or stolen and you do not have an extracoded key, you need to have your vehicletowed to an authorized dealer. You need toerase the key codes from your vehicle andprogram new coded keys. Store an extraprogrammed key away from your vehicle ina safe place to help prevent anyinconvenience. Contact an authorized dealerto purchase additional spare or replacementkeys.You must have two previouslyprogrammed intelligent access keys insideyour vehicle and the new unprogrammedintelligent access keys readily accessible.Contact an authorized dealer to have thespare key programmed if two previouslyprogrammed keys are not available.Make sure that your vehicle is off beforebeginning this procedure. Make sure thatyou close all the doors before beginningand that they remain closed throughoutthe procedure. Perform all steps within 30seconds of starting the sequence. Stopand wait for at least one minute beforestarting again if you perform any steps outof sequence.Read and understand the entire procedurebefore you begin.Type One

E187576

75


Security

Type Two

E187577

1. Place the first programmed key in thebackup slot (A) in the center console,then press the push button ignitionswitch. Insert the first previouslyprogrammed coded key into theignition.

2. Wait five seconds and then press thepush button ignition switch again.Switch the ignition from off to on. Keepthe ignition on for at least threeseconds, but no more than 10 seconds.

3. Remove the intelligent access key.Switch the ignition off and remove thefirst coded key from the ignition.

4. Within 10 seconds, place a secondprogrammed intelligent access key inthe backup slot. Press the push buttonignition switch. After three seconds butwithin 10 seconds of switching theignition off, insert the second previouslycoded key into the ignition.

5. Wait five seconds and then press thepush button ignition switch again.Switch the ignition from off to on. Keepthe ignition on for at least threeseconds, but no more than 10 seconds.

6. Remove the intelligent access key.Switch the ignition off and remove thesecond previously programmed codedkey from the ignition.

7. Place the unprogrammed intelligentaccess key in the backup slot and pressthe push button ignition switch. Afterthree seconds but within 10 secondsof switching the ignition off andremoving the previously programmedcoded key, insert the newunprogrammed key into the ignition.

Programming is now complete. Verify theremote control functions operate and yourvehicle starts with the new intelligentaccess key.If programming was not successful, wait10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 7.If you are still unsuccessful, take yourvehicle to an authorized dealer.

ANTI-THEFT ALARM (If Equipped)

The active anti-theft system is designedto warn you in the event of unauthorizedvehicle entry and is also designed to helpprevent unwanted towing of your vehicle.You can choose what is monitored byarming the system in different ways. SeeInformation Displays (page 110).The direction indicators flash and the hornsounds if the system triggers while thealarm is armed.Take all remote controls to an authorizeddealer if there is any potential alarmproblem with your vehicle.

Reduced Guard (If Equipped)

To monitor the following:• Doors.• Hood.• Tailgate.Lock your vehicle using the key in the driverdoor lock cylinder.

76


Security

Full Guard (If Equipped)

To monitor the following:• Doors.• Hood.• Tailgate.• Movement inside your vehicle.• Change in vehicle inclination, for

example, unwanted towing.Lock your vehicle using the remote controlor the power door lock control with theaccompanying door open and then closeall doors.Note: Do not choose full monitor mode ifmovement within the vehicle is likely tooccur or when the vehicle is in transport.Note: For correct operation of the interiormotion detection system, make sure allwindows are closed prior to arming thesystem. This helps prevent accidental alarmactivation due to external influences andmake sure of correct interior motiondetection. Additionally, the interior motionsensing system will not arm if any door isajar.

Arming the AlarmThe alarm is ready to arm when there isnot a key in the ignition. Lock your vehicleto arm the alarm.The direction indicators flash once afteryou lock your vehicle. This indicates thealarm is in the pre-armed mode. It fullyarms after 20 seconds.

Disarming the AlarmDisarm the alarm by any of the followingactions:• Press the power door unlock button

within the 20-second pre-armed mode.• Unlock the doors with the remote

control or keyless entry keypad.

• Switch the ignition on or start yourvehicle.

• Use a key in the driver door lockcylinder to unlock your vehicle, thenswitch the ignition on within 12seconds.

Note: Pressing the panic button on theremote control stops the horn and directionindicators, but will not disarm the system.

77


Security

USING POWER RUNNINGBOARDS

WARNINGSIn extreme climates, excessive icebuildup may occur, causing therunning boards not to deploy. Make

sure that the running boards havedeployed, and have finished moving beforeattempting to step on them. The runningboards will resume normal function oncethe blockage is cleared.

Turn off the running boards beforejacking or placing any object underyour vehicle. Never place your hand

between the extended running board andyour vehicle. A moving running board maycause injury.

Note: Do not use the running boards, frontand rear hinge assemblies, running boardmotors, or the running board underbodymounts to lift your vehicle when jacking.Always use proper jacking points.Note: The running boards may operatemore slowly in cool temperatures.Note: The running board mechanism maytrap debris such as mud, dirt, snow, ice andsalt. This may cause unwanted noise. If thishappens, manually set the running boardsto the deployed position. Then, wash thesystem, in particular the front and rear hingearms, with a high-pressure car wash wand.

Automatic Power Deploy

E166682

The running boards automatically extenddown and out when you open the door.This can help you enter and exit yourvehicle.

Automatic Power StowWhen you close the doors, the runningboards return to the stowed position aftera two-second delay.

Manual Power DeployYou can manually operate the runningboards in the information display. SeeGeneral Information (page 110).Set the running boards in the deployedposition to access the roof.The running boards return to the stowedposition and enter automatic mode whenthe vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h).

Enabling and DisablingYou can enable and disable the powerrunning board feature in the informationdisplay. See General Information (page110).

78


Power Running Boards (If Equipped)

• When disabled (OFF), the runningboards move to the stowed positionregardless of the door position.

• When enabled (AUTO), the runningboards move back to the correctpositions based on the door position.

Bounce-backThe running board will reverse directionand move to the end of travel if itencounters an object while moving.

79


Power Running Boards (If Equipped)

ADJUSTING THE STEERINGWHEEL

WARNINGDo not adjust the steering wheelwhen your vehicle is moving.

Note: Make sure that you are sitting in thecorrect position. See Sitting in the CorrectPosition (page 149).

E180482

1. Unlock the steering column.2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired

position.

E180534

3. Lock the steering column.

Power Tilt and Telescope SteeringColumn (If Equipped)

WARNINGDo not adjust the steering wheelwhen your vehicle is moving.

Note: Make sure that you are sitting in thecorrect position. See Sitting in the CorrectPosition (page 149).

80


Steering Wheel

E180535

Use the control on the side of the steeringcolumn to adjust the position.To adjust:• tilt: press the top or bottom of the

control• telescope: press the front or rear of the

control.

Memory FeatureYou can save and recall the steeringcolumn position with the memory function.See Memory Function (page 154).Pressing the adjustment control duringmemory recall cancels the operation. Thecolumn responds to the adjustmentcontrol.

Easy Entry and Exit FeatureThe column moves to the full up and inposition when you switch the ignition off.It returns to the previous setting when youswitch the ignition on. You can enable ordisable this feature in the informationdisplay.

AUDIO CONTROL (If Equipped)

You can operate the following functionswith the control:

E191327

Volume up.AMedia.BSeek up or next.CVolume down.DSeek down or previous.E

MediaPress repeatedly to scroll through availableaudio modes.

Seek, Next or PreviousPress the seek button to:• Tune the radio to the next or previous

stored preset.• Play the next or previous track.

81


Steering Wheel

Press and hold the seek button to:• Tune the radio to the next station up

or down the frequency band.• Seek through a track.

VOICE CONTROL (If Equipped)

E191328

Mute.AVoice recognition.BEnd call.CAnswer call.D

See your SYNC information.

CRUISE CONTROL (If Equipped)

Type 1

E191329

Type 2

E191337

See Cruise Control (page 224).

82


Steering Wheel

INFORMATION DISPLAYCONTROL

E191336

See Information Displays (page 110).

83


Steering Wheel

ADJUSTING THE PEDALS (If

Equipped)

Note: Never use the controls when your feetare on the accelerator or brake pedals,especially when the vehicle is moving.Note: Adjust the pedals only when yourvehicle is in park (P).Depending on your vehicle and equipmentlevel, the shape and location of yourpower-adjustable pedal control can vary.• If your control is vertical, then it is to

the left of the steering column and onthe instrument panel.

• If your control is horizontal, then it is onthe left side of the steering column.

The Vertical Control

E176213

Farther.A.Closer.B.

The Horizontal Control

A B

E162916

Farther.A.Closer.B.

Both horizontal and vertical controlsoperate the same way:1. Press and hold A to move the pedals

away from you.2. Press and hold B to move the pedals

closer to you.You can save and recall the pedal positionswith the memory feature. See MemoryFunction (page 154).

84


Pedals

WINDSHIELD WIPERSNote: Fully defrost the windshield beforeswitching on the windshield wipers.Note: Make sure you switch off thewindshield wipers before entering a carwash.Note: Clean the windshield and wiperblades if they begin to leave streaks orsmears. If that does not resolve the issue,install new wiper blades.Note: Do not operate the wipers on a drywindshield. This may scratch the glass,damage the wiper blades or cause the wipermotor to burn out. Always use thewindshield washers before wiping a drywindshield.

E172816

Rotate the end of the control:• Away from you to increase the wiper

speed.• Toward you to decrease the wiper

speed.

Speed dependent wipers (ifequipped)When your vehicle speed increases, theinterval between wipes decreases.

AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped)

Note: Make sure you switch off the wipersbefore entering a car wash.Note: Wet or winter driving conditions withice, snow or salty road mist can causeinconsistent and unexpected wiping orsmearing.In these conditions, you can do thefollowing to help keep your windshieldclear:• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers.• Change the wiper speed to normal or

high-speed wipe as necessary.• Switch the autowipers off.The autowipers feature uses a rain sensor,located in the area around the interiormirror. The rain sensor monitors theamount of moisture on the windshield andautomatically turns on the wipers. It willadjust the wiper speed by the amount ofmoisture that the sensor detects on thewindshield. You can switch this feature onor off in the information display. SeeInformation Displays (page 110).

E172817

85


Wipers and Washers

Use the rotary control to adjust thesensitivity of the rain sensor. With lowsensitivity, the wipers will operate whenthe sensor detects a large amount ofmoisture on the windshield. With highsensitivity, the wipers will operate whenthe sensor detects a small amount ofmoisture on the windshield. Adjust therotary control toward the windshield toincrease the moisture sensitivity.Keep the outside of the windshield cleanbecause the rain sensor is very sensitive. Ifthe area around the interior mirror is dirty,then the wipers may turn on, for example,if dirt, mist or insects hit the windshield.The courtesy wipe feature turns on afterusing the windshield washers to removeany excess washer fluid and debris.Note: You can adjust the courtesy wipesettings in the instrument cluster. SeeInformation Displays (page 110).

WINDSHIELD WASHERSNote: Do not operate the wipers on a drywindshield. This may scratch the glass,damage the wiper blades or cause the wipermotor to burn out. Always use thewindshield washer before wiping a drywindshield.Note: Do not operate the washers whenthe washer reservoir is empty. This maycause the washer pump to overheat.

E172818

• A brief press causes a single wipewithout washer fluid.

• A brief press and hold causes thewipers to swipe three times withwasher fluid.

• A long press and hold will turn on thewipers and washer fluid for up to 10seconds.

A wipe will occur a few seconds afterwashing to clear any remaining washerfluid. You can switch this feature on or offin the information display. SeeInformation Displays (page 110).

86


Wipers and Washers

LIGHTING CONTROL

E142449

Off.AParking lamps, instrument panellamps, license plate lamps andrear lamps.

B

Headlamps.C

High Beam

E167827

Push the lever away from you to switchthe high beam on.Push the lever forward again or pull thelever toward you to switch the high beamsoff.

Headlamp Flasher

E163268

Slightly pull the lever toward you andrelease it to flash the headlamps.

AUTOLAMPS (If Equipped)

WARNINGThe autolamps switch position maynot activate the headlamps in all lowvisibility conditions, such as daytime

fog. Always ensure that your headlampsare switched to auto or on, as appropriate,during all low visibility conditions. Failureto do so may result in a collision.

E142451

When the lighting control is in theautolamps position, the headlampsautomatically turn on in low light situationsor when the wipers activate.

87


Lighting

If equipped, the following also activatewhen the lighting control is in theautolamps position and you switch themon in the information display:• Configurable daytime running lamps.• Automatic high beam control.• Adaptive headlamp control.The headlamps remain on for a period oftime after you switch the ignition off. Usethe information display controls to adjustthe period of time that the headlampsremain on. See Information Displays(page 110).Note: With the headlamps in theautolamps position, you cannot switch thehigh beam headlamps on until theautolamps system turns the low beamheadlamps on.

Windshield Wiper ActivatedHeadlampsThe windshield wiper activated headlampsturn on within 10 seconds when you switchthe windshield wipers on and the lightingcontrol is in the autolamps position. Theyturn off approximately 60 seconds afteryou switch the windshield wipers off.The headlamps will not turn on by wiperactivation:• During a mist wipe.• When the wipers are on to clear washer

fluid during a wash condition.• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.Note: If you switch autolamps andautowipers on, the headlamps willautomatically turn on when the windshieldwipers continuously operate.

INSTRUMENT LIGHTINGDIMMERNote: You disable the manual dimmerwhen you adjust the setting to AutoDimming in the information display. SeeInformation Displays (page 110).Note: If you disconnect the battery or itbecomes discharged, the illuminatedcomponents will switch to the maximumsetting.

E161902

Press repeatedly or press and hold untilyou reach the desired level.

88


Lighting

DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If

Equipped)

WARNINGThe daytime running lamps systemdoes not activate the rear lamps andmay not provide adequate lighting

during low visibility driving conditions. Also,the autolamps switch position may notactivate the headlamps in all low visibilityconditions, such as daytime fog. Make surethe headlamps are switched to auto or on,as appropriate, during all low visibilityconditions. Failure to do so may result in acrash.

Type 1 - Conventional (Non-Configurable)The daytime running lamps turn on when:1. The ignition is switched to the on

position.2. The transmission is not in park (P) for

vehicles with automatic transmissionsor the parking brake is released forvehicles with manual transmissions.

3. The lighting control is in the off, parkinglamp or autolamps positions.

4. The headlamps are off.

Type 2 - ConfigurableSwitch the daytime running lamps on oroff using the information display controls.See Information Displays (page 110).The daytime running lamps turn on when:1. They are switched on in the information

display. See Information Displays(page 110).

2. The ignition is switched to the onposition.

3. The transmission is not in park (P) forvehicles with automatic transmissionsor the parking brake is released forvehicles with manual transmissions.

4. The lighting control is in the autolampsposition.

5. The headlamps are off.The other lighting control switch positionsdo not activate the daytime running lamps,and you can use them to temporarilyoverride autolamp control.When switched off in the informationdisplay, the daytime running lamps are offin all lighting control switch positions.

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAMCONTROL (If Equipped)

The system automatically turns on the highbeams if it is dark enough and no othertraffic is present. When it detects theheadlights of an approaching vehicle, thetail lamps of the preceding vehicle or streetlighting, the system turns off the highbeams before they distract other drivers.The low beams remain on.Note: If it appears that automatic highbeam is not functioning properly, check thewindshield in front of the camera for ablockage. A clear view of the road is requiredfor proper system operation. Make sure thatauthorized personnel repair any windshielddamage in the area of the camera's field ofview.Note: If the system detects a blockage suchas bird droppings, bug splatter, snow or ice,and you do not observe changes, the systemmay go into low beam mode until you clearthe blockage. A message may also appearin the information display noting the frontcamera is blocked.

89


Lighting

Note: Typical road dust, dirt and waterspots do not affect the performance of theautomatic high beam control. However, incold or inclement weather conditions, youmay notice a decrease in the availability ofthe automatic high beam control, especiallyat start up. If you want to change the beamstate independently of the system, you mayswitch the high beams on or off using thehigh beam lever. Automatic high beamcontrol resumes when conditions arecorrect.Note: Using much larger tires or equippingvehicle accessories such as snowplows canmodify your vehicle's ride height anddegrade automatic high beam controlperformance.A camera sensor, centrally mountedbehind the windshield of your vehicle,continuously monitors conditions to decidewhen to switch the high beams off and on.Once the system is active, the high beamsswitch on if:• The outside light level is low enough.• There is no traffic in front of your

vehicle.• The vehicle speed is greater than

32 mph (52 km/h).The high beams switch off if:• The system detects the headlamps of

an approaching vehicle or the rearlamps of a vehicle in front of you.

• Vehicle speed falls below 16 mph(26 km/h).

• The outside light level is high enoughthat high beams are not required.

• The system detects severe rain, snowor fog.

• The camera is blocked.

Activating the SystemSwitch on automatic high beam controlusing the information display andautolamps. See Information Displays(page 110).

E142451

Switch the lighting control to theautolamps position.

Manually Overriding the SystemWhen automatic high beam control hasactivated the high beams, pushing orpulling the stalk provides a temporaryoverride to low beam.Use the information display menu topermanently deactivate the system, orswitch the lighting control from autolampsto headlamps.

90


Lighting

FRONT FOG LAMPS (If Equipped)

E142453

Press the control to switch the fog lampson or off.You can switch the fog lamps on when thelighting control is in any position exceptOff and the high beams are not on.

DIRECTION INDICATORS

E163272

The direction indicator lever does notmechanically lock in the upward ordownward position when activated. Thedirection indicator activation andcancellation is electronic.

• To operate the left direction indicator,push the lever down until it stops andreleases.

• To operate the right direction indicator,push the lever up until it stops andreleases.

• To cancel direction indicator operationmanually, push the lever again in eitherdirection.

Lane ChangeTo indicate a left or right lane change:• Push the lever up or down to the first

stop position and release. The directionindicators flash three times and stop.

• Push the lever up or down to the firststop position and hold. The directionindicators flash for as long as you holdthe lever in this position.

SPOT LAMPS (If Equipped)

The spot lamps are positioned on theforward-facing side of the exterior mirrors.When the parking lamps are on due to thelighting control switch being in the parkinglamps, headlamps, or autolamps position,press the buttons located above thelighting control switch to activate theleft-hand or right-hand side spot lamps.

E176842

91


Lighting

Once switched on, the spot lamps light thearea in front of and to the side of yourvehicle.Adjust the aim of the spot lamps bymoving the position of the exterior mirrors.For manual folding mirrors, adjust the aimof the lamps by folding the exterior mirrorsinto or away from the windows. Forpower-folding mirrors, use the switchlocated on the driver-side door. SeeExterior Mirrors (page 96).Note: The spot lamps turn offautomatically when you reach a speed of6 mph (10 km/h).

Cargo and Trailer Hookup LampsThe cargo lamps are positioned in thecentral high mounted stop lamp and toeither side of the cargo box.The trailer hookup lamp is positioned onthe tailgate next to the handle.

E189587

Pressing the button located inthe lighting control panel or thebutton located in the cargo box

near the lamp switches on both of theselamps.

E190880

When switched on, these lamps light thecargo area of your vehicle and the trailerhitch.Note: The cargo and trailer hookup lampsturn off automatically when you reach aspeed of 3 mph (5 km/h). They also turn offautomatically after 10 minutes, fadinggradually to off.

INTERIOR LAMPSThe following lamps switch on when:• You open any door.• You press a remote control button.

Front Interior LampsNote: The front interior lamp switches areon the overhead console. The exact locationof each switch on the overhead consoledepends upon which roof, sunroof, andwindow shade features are equipped on thevehicle.

92


Lighting

Note: Touch the required switch to switchthe door function off when you open anydoor. When the door function is off and youopen a door, the courtesy and door lampswill stay off. Touch the switch again toswitch the door function back on. When thedoor function is on and you open a door, thecourtesy and door lamps will switch on.Type 1

E230569

Left-hand side map lamp switch.A.All lamps on switch.B.Door function switch.C.Right-hand side map lampswitch.

D.

Type 2

E192153

D DCA B

All lamps on switch.A.Door function switch.B.All lamps off switch.C.Map lamp switches.D.

E187342

All lamps on switch.A.Door function switch.B.

93


Lighting

Rear Interior Lamps (If Equipped)

E187343

You can switch the lamps on or off bypressing the button.

E182517

Left-hand side map lamp switch.A.Right-hand side map lampswitch.

B.

E187345

You can switch the lamps on or off bypressing the button.

AMBIENT LIGHTING (If Equipped)

Adjust the ambient lighting using thetouchscreen.

94


Lighting

POWER WINDOWS (If Equipped)

WARNINGSDo not leave children unattended inyour vehicle and do not let them playwith the power windows. They may

seriously injure themselves.When closing the power windows,you should verify they are free ofobstructions and make sure that

children and pets are not in the proximityof the window openings.

E176215

Press the control to open the window.Lift the control to close the window.Note: You may hear a pulsing noise whenjust one of the windows is open. Lower theopposite window slightly to reduce thisnoise.

One-Touch Up or Down (If Equipped)

Press or lift the switch fully and release it.Press or lift it again to stop the window.Note: The window may disable for up tofive minutes if you cycle it up and downrepeatedly. This helps prevent damage tothe motor. Normal operation will resumeonce the motor cools.

Restoring the One-Touch Up FunctionYou may lose the one-touch function if thevehicle battery is low.To reset the function after the batteryrecharges:1. Pull the switch all the way up.2. Hold the switch until the glass stops

and continue to hold for two seconds.3. Press the switch down and operate the

window to the full down position.One-touch up will now be functional.

Note: Perform one-touch up re-calibrationwith the door closed. Calibrating with thedoor open will cause the window tocontinuously bounce back.

Bounce-Back (If Equipped)

The window will automatically stop andreverse some distance if it detects anobstacle while closing.

Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature

WARNINGWhen you override the bounce-backfeature the window will not reverseif it detects an obstacle. Take care

when closing the windows to avoidpersonal injury or damage to your vehicle.

Pull up the window switch and hold withintwo seconds of the window reaching thebounce-back position. The window willtravel up with no bounce-back protection.The window will stop if you release theswitch before the window closes fully.

95


Windows and Mirrors

Window Lock (If Equipped)

E176216

Press the control to lock or unlock the rearwindow controls.

Accessory Delay (If Equipped)

The window switches remain operationalfor several minutes when you switch theignition off or until you open either frontdoor.

EXTERIOR MIRRORSPower Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)

WARNINGDo not adjust the mirrors when yourvehicle is moving.

E144073

Left-hand mirror.AAdjustment control.BRight-hand mirror.C

To adjust your mirrors, switch your vehicleon (with the ignition in accessory mode orthe engine running) and then:1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.

The control lights.2. Use the adjustment control to adjust

the position of the mirror.3. Press the mirror control again. The

control light turns off.

Fold-Away Exterior MirrorsPush the mirror toward the door windowglass. Make sure that you fully engage themirror in its support when returning it to itsoriginal position.

96


Windows and Mirrors

Telescoping Mirrors (If Equipped)

E163061

This feature lets you extend the mirrorabout 3 in (75 mm). It is useful whentowing a trailer. You can manually pull outor push in the mirrors to the desiredposition.

Power-Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)

E176218

To fold both mirrors, switch your vehicleon (with the ignition in accessory mode orthe engine running) and then:1. Press the control.2. Press control again to unfold the

mirrors.Note: Do not stop the mirrors midwaythrough their movement. Wait until themirrors stop moving and press the controlagain.

The left-hand and right-hand mirrors moveat different rates. For example, one mirrormay stop while the other one continues tomove. This is normal.Moving the mirrors 10 or more times withinone minute, or repeated folding andunfolding of the mirrors while holding thecontrol down during full travel, may disablethe system to protect the motors fromoverheating. Wait approximately threeminutes with the vehicle running, and up to10 minutes with the vehicle off, for thesystem to reset and for function to return tonormal.

Loose MirrorIf your power-folding mirrors are manuallyfolded, they may not work properly evenafter you re-position them. You need toreset them if:• The mirrors vibrate when you drive.• The mirrors feel loose.• The mirrors do not stay in the folded or

unfolded position.• One of the mirrors is not in its normal

driving position.To reset the power-fold feature, use thepower-folding mirror control to fold andunfold the mirrors. You may hear a loudnoise as you reset the power-foldingmirrors. This sound is normal. Repeat thisprocess as needed each time the mirrorsare manually folded.

PowerScope™ Power TelescopingMirrors (If Equipped)

This feature lets you position both mirrorsat the same time.

97


Windows and Mirrors

E176218

To adjust your mirrors, make sure youswitch your vehicle on (with the ignition inaccessory mode or the engine running) andthen:1. Press and release the control. It lights.2. Press the adjustment control to

position the mirrors.• Press the left arrow to extend the

mirrors out. Press the right arrow toretract the mirrors in.

• Press the up or down arrow to foldthe mirrors toward the windowglass. Press the up or down arrowagain to fold the mirrors out.

Note: Moving the mirrors 10 or more timeswithin one minute, or repeated folding andunfolding of the mirrors while holding thecontrol down during full travel, may disablethe system to protect the motors fromoverheating. Wait approximately threeminutes with the vehicle running, and up to10 minutes with the vehicle off, for thesystem to reset and for function to return tonormal.

Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped)

See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page147).

Memory Mirrors (If Equipped)

You can save and recall the mirrorpositions through the memory function.See Memory Function (page 154).

Auto-dimming Feature (If Equipped)

The driver exterior mirror automaticallydims when the interior auto-dimmingmirror turns on.

Direction Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)

While the vehicle is running, theforward-facing portion of the appropriatemirror housing blinks when you switch onthe direction indicator.

Puddle Lamps (If Equipped)

The lamps on the bottom part of the mirrorhousing light when you use yourtransmitter to unlock the doors or whenyou open a door.

Clearance Lamps (If Equipped)

The lower, outer part of the mirror housingslight when you switch the headlamps orparking lamps on.

Spot Lamps (If Equipped)

The area lights are on the forward-facingportion of the mirror housing. You canswitch them on and off by using thecontrols located on the instrument panel.See Lighting (page 87).

360-Degree Camera (If Equipped)

Each mirror includes a camera.

Integrated Blind Spot Mirror (If

Equipped)

WARNINGObjects in the blind spot mirror arecloser than they appear.

98


Windows and Mirrors

Blind spot mirrors have an integratedconvex mirror built into the upper outboardcorner of the exterior mirrors. They canassist you by increasing visibility along theside of your vehicle. The blind spot mirroris only on the driver exterior mirror.Check the main mirror first before a lanechange, then check the blind spot mirror.If no vehicles are present in the blind spotmirror and the traffic in the adjacent laneis at a safe distance, signal that you aregoing to change lanes. Glance over yourshoulder to verify traffic is clear, andcarefully change lanes.

A

B

C

E138665

The image of the approaching vehicle issmall and near the inboard edge of themain mirror when it is at a distance. Theimage becomes larger and begins to moveoutboard across the main mirror as thevehicle approaches (A). The imagetransitions from the main mirror and beginsto appear in the blind spot mirror as thevehicle approaches (B). The vehicletransitions to your peripheral field of viewas it leaves the blind spot mirror (C).

Blind Spot Information System (If

Equipped)

See Blind Spot Information System(page 236).

INTERIOR MIRROR

WARNINGDo not adjust the mirror when yourvehicle is moving.

Note: Do not clean the housing or glass ofany mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or otherpetroleum or ammonia-based cleaningproducts.You can adjust the interior mirror to yourpreference. Some mirrors also have asecond pivot point. This lets you move themirror head up or down and from side toside.Pull the tab below the mirror toward youto reduce glare at night.

Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)

Note: Do not block the sensors on the frontand back of the mirror. Mirror performancemay be affected. A rear center passenger orraised rear center head restraint may alsoblock light from reaching the sensor.

99


Windows and Mirrors

The mirror will dim automatically to reduceglare when bright lights are detected frombehind your vehicle. It will automaticallyreturn to normal reflection when you selectreverse gear to make sure you have a clearview when backing up.

SLIDING WINDOWS (If Equipped)

Power Sliding Back Window (If

Equipped)

WARNINGSWhen operating the power slidingback window, you must make sureall rear seat occupants and cargo are

not in the proximity of the back window.Do not leave children unattended inyour vehicle and do not let them playwith the power sliding back window.

They may seriously injure themselves.

E176217

The control is on the overhead console.Press and hold the control to open thewindow. Pull and hold the control to closethe window.

SUN VISORS

E138666

Rotate the sun visor toward the sidewindow and extend it rearward for extrashade.

Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If Equipped)

E162197

Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.

MOONROOF (If Equipped)

WARNINGSDo not leave children unattended inyour vehicle and do not let them playwith the moonroof. They may

seriously injure themselves.

100


Windows and Mirrors

WARNINGSWhen closing the moonroof, youshould verify that it is free ofobstructions and make sure that

children and pets are not in the proximityof the roof opening.

The moonroof controls are located on theoverhead console and have a one-touchopen and close feature. To stop itsmovement during one-touch operation,press the control a second time.

Opening and Closing the Moonroof

E191272

Moonroof open.AMoonroof vent.BSunshade open.CSunshade close.DMoonroof close.E

Moonroof OpenPress and release to open the moonroof.Note: The moonroof stops short of the fullyopened position to reduce wind noise orrumbling that may happen with themoonroof fully open. Press and release thecontrol again to open the moonroof fully.

Moonroof VentPress and release to vent the moonroof.

Sunshade OpenPress and release to open the sunshade.The sunshade opens automatically withthe moonroof. You can also open thesunshade with the moonroof closed.Note: The sunshade stops short of its fullyopened position for the comfort of rearpassengers. To open the sunshade fully,press the control again.

Sunshade ClosePress and release to close the sunshade.

Moonroof ClosePress and release to close the moonrooffrom either the open or vent positions.

Bounce-BackThe moonroof automatically reversessome distance if an obstacle is detectedwhile closing.To override this feature, press and hold (E)within two seconds after the roof comesto a stop following a bounce-back reversal.

101


Windows and Mirrors

GAUGESType 1 and 2

E176090

Engine oil pressure gaugeAEngine coolant temperature gaugeBFuel gaugeCTransmission fluid temperature gaugeDSpeedometerEInformation display See General Information (page 110).FTachometerG

102


Instrument Cluster

Type 3

E176091

Engine oil pressure gaugeAEngine coolant temperature gaugeBFuel gaugeCTransmission fluid temperature or Turbo boost (Ecoboost engine only) gaugeDSpeedometerEInformation display See General Information (page 110).FTachometerG

103


Instrument Cluster

Engine Oil Pressure GaugeIndicates engine oil pressure. The needleshould stay in the normal operating range(between L and H). If the needle fallsbelow the normal range, stop your vehicle,turn off the engine and check the engineoil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil level iscorrect, have your vehicle checked by anauthorized dealer.

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge

WARNINGNever remove the coolant reservoircap while the engine is running or hot.

Indicates engine coolant temperature. Atnormal operating temperature, the levelindicator will be in the normal range. If theengine coolant temperature exceeds thenormal range, stop your vehicle as soon assafely possible, switch off the engine andlet the engine cool.

Fuel GaugeNote: The fuel gauge may vary slightlywhen your vehicle is moving or on a gradient.Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge willindicate approximately how much fuel isleft in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent tothe fuel pump symbol indicates on whichside of your vehicle the fuel filler door islocated.The needle should move toward F whenyou refuel your vehicle. If the needle pointsto E after adding fuel, this indicates yourvehicle needs service soon.After refueling some variability in needleposition is normal:

• It may take a short time for the needleto reach F after leaving the gas station.This is normal and depends upon theslope of pavement at the gas station.

• The fuel amount dispensed into thetank is a little less or more than thegauge indicated. This is normal anddepends upon the slope of pavementat the gas station.

• If the gas station nozzle shuts offbefore the tank is full, try a differentgas pump nozzle.

Low Fuel ReminderA low fuel reminder triggers at 50 mi(80 km) to empty.

Transmission Fluid TemperatureGaugeIndicates transmission fluid temperature.At normal operating temperature, the levelindicator will be in the normal range. If thetransmission fluid temperature exceedsthe normal range, stop the vehicle as soonas safely possible and verify the airflow isnot restricted such as snow or debrisblocking airflow through the grill. Also,higher than normal operating temperaturecan be caused by special operationconditions (i.e. snowplowing, towing oroff-road use). Refer to Special operatingconditions in the scheduled maintenanceinformation for instructions. Operating thetransmission for extended periods with thegauge in the higher than normal area maycause internal transmission damage. Youneed to alter the severity of your drivingconditions to lower the transmissiontemperature into the normal range. If thegauge continues to show hightemperatures, see an authorized dealer.

104


Instrument Cluster

Information DisplayOdometerLocated in the bottom of the informationdisplay. Registers the accumulateddistance your vehicle has traveled.

CompassDisplays the vehicle’s heading direction.

Trip ComputerSee General Information (page 110).

Vehicle Settings and PersonalizationSee General Information (page 110).

WARNING LAMPS ANDINDICATORSThe following warning lamps andindicators will alert you to a vehiclecondition that may become serious. Somelamps will illuminate when you start yourvehicle to make sure they work. If anylamps remain on after starting your vehicle,refer to the respective system warninglamp for further information.Note: Some warning indicators appear inthe information display and function thesame as a warning lamp but do not displaywhen you start your vehicle.

Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)

E144524

The speed control systemindicator light changes color toindicate what mode the system

is in: See Using Adaptive Cruise Control(page 225).

Anti-Lock Braking SystemIf it illuminates when you aredriving, this indicates amalfunction. You will continue

to have normal braking (without Anti-lockbraking system) unless the brake systemwarning lamp is also illuminated. Have thesystem checked by an authorized dealer.

Automatic High Beam (If Equipped)

Illuminates when this feature ison. See Automatic High BeamControl (page 89).

Auto Start-stop (If Equipped)

It will illuminate to inform youwhen the engine shuts down orin conjunction with a message.

BatteryIf it illuminates while driving, itindicates a malfunction. Switchoff all unnecessary electrical

equipment and have the system checkedby an authorized dealer immediately.

Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)

E151262

It will illuminate when you switchthis feature off or in conjunctionwith a message. See Blind Spot

Information System (page 236).

Brake System

E144522

It will illuminate when youengage the parking brake withthe ignition on.

105


Instrument Cluster

If it illuminates when you are driving, checkthat you do not have the parking brakeengaged. If you do not have the parkingbrake engaged, this indicates low brakefluid level or a brake system malfunction.Have the system checked immediately byan authorized dealer.

WARNINGDriving your vehicle with the warninglamp on is dangerous. A significantdecrease in braking performance

may occur. It will take you longer to stopyour vehicle. Have your vehicle checked byyour authorized dealer immediately. Drivingextended distances with the parking brakeengaged can cause brake failure and therisk of personal injury.

Check 4X4 (If Equipped)

Illuminates with the messageCHECK 4X4 when a four-wheeldrive fault is present. See Using

Four-Wheel Drive (page 193).

Cruise Control (If Equipped)

E71340

Illuminates gray or green whenyou switch this feature on. SeeUsing Cruise Control (page

224).

Direction IndicatorIlluminates when the left or rightturn signal or the hazard warningflasher is turned on. If the

indicators stay on or flash faster, check fora burned out bulb.

Door AjarDisplays when the ignition is onand any door is not completelyclosed.

Electronic Locking Differential

E163170

Illuminates when using theelectronic locking differential.

Electric Park Brake (If Equipped)

E146190

It will illuminate or flash whenthe electric parking brake has amalfunction. See Electric

Parking Brake (page 204).

Engine Coolant TemperatureIlluminates when the enginecoolant temperature is high.Stop the vehicle as soon as

possible, switch off the engine and let cool.See Engine Coolant Check (page 323).

Engine OilIf it illuminates with the enginerunning or when you are driving,this indicates a malfunction.

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe todo so and switch the engine off. Check theengine oil level. See Engine Oil Check(page 322).Note: Do not resume your journey if itilluminates despite the level being correct.Have the system checked by your authorizeddealer immediately.

Fasten Safety BeltIt will illuminate and a chime willsound to remind you to fastenyour safety belt.

Four-Wheel Drive Indicators (If

Equipped)

Note: Some indicators will appear differentdepending on vehicle options.

106


Instrument Cluster

E163173

E181778

Illuminates momentarily when you selecttwo-wheel drive high.

E181781

Illuminates when the automaticfour-wheel drive system is engaged.

E181780

Illuminates when four-wheel drive low isengaged.

E181779

Illuminates when four-wheel drive high isengaged.

Front AirbagIf it fails to illuminate when youstart your vehicle, continues toflash or remains on, it indicates

a malfunction. Have the system checkedby an authorized dealer.

Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped)

It will illuminate when you switchthe front fog lamps on.

High BeamIlluminates when you switch thehigh beam headlamps on. It willflash when you use the

headlamp flasher.

Hill Descent (If Equipped)

E163171

Illuminates when hill descent isswitched on.

Low Fuel LevelIlluminates when the fuel levelis low or the fuel tank is nearlyempty. Refuel as soon as

possible.

Low Tire Pressure WarningIlluminates when your tirepressure is low. If the lampremains on with the engine

running or when driving, check your tirepressure as soon as possible.It will also illuminate momentarily whenyou switch the ignition on to confirm thelamp is functional. If it does not illuminatewhen you switch the ignition on, or beginsto flash at any time, have the systemchecked by your authorized dealer.

Parking LampsIt will illuminate when you switchthe parking lamps on.

Powertrain Malfunction/ReducedPower/Electronic Throttle Control

Illuminates when the system hasdetected a powertrain or anall-wheel drive fault. Contact an

authorized dealer as soon as possible.

107


Instrument Cluster

Service Engine SoonIf the service engine soonindicator light stays illuminatedafter you start the engine, it

indicates that the On Board Diagnosticssystem (OBD) has detected a malfunctionof your vehicle emissions control system.Refer to On board diagnostics (OBD) inthe Fuel and Refueling chapter for moreinformation about having your vehicleserviced. See Emission Control System(page 183).

If the light is blinking, engine misfire isoccurring which could damage yourcatalytic converter. Drive in a moderatefashion (avoid heavy acceleration anddeceleration) and have your vehicleserviced immediately.

WARNINGUnder engine misfire conditions,excessive exhaust temperaturescould damage the catalytic

converter, the fuel system, interior floorcoverings or other vehicle components,possibly causing a fire. Have an authorizeddealer service your vehicle immediately.

When you first switch the ignition on,before engine start, the service engine soonindicator light illuminates to check the bulband to indicate whether your vehicle isready for inspection maintenance testing.Normally, the service engine soon light willstay on until you crank the engine, and thenturn itself off if no malfunctions arepresent. However, if after 15 seconds theservice engine soon light blinks eight times,it means that your vehicle is not ready forinspection maintenance testing. SeeEmission Control System (page 183).

Sport Mode

E176099

Illuminates when you switch thesport mode on.

Traction and Stability Control

E138639

Illuminates when the system isactive. If it remains illuminatedor does not illuminate when you

switch the ignition on, this indicates amalfunction. During a malfunction thesystem will switch off. Have the systemchecked by an authorized dealerimmediately. See Using StabilityControl (page 210).

Traction and Stability Control Off

E130458

Illuminates when you switch thesystem off. It will go out whenyou switch the system back on

or when you switch the ignition off. SeeUsing Stability Control (page 210).

Transmission Tow/Haul (If Equipped)

E161509

Illuminates when the tow/haulfeature has been activated. If thelight flashes steadily, have the

system serviced immediately, damage tothe transmission could occur. SeeAutomatic Transmission (page 186).

AUDIBLE WARNINGS ANDINDICATORSAirbag Secondary WarningSounds if there is a malfunction with thesafety belt warning lamp and there is afault in the supplemental restraintssystem.

108


Instrument Cluster

Beltminder WarningSounds when a safety belt is unfastenedin an occupied seat and your vehicle ismoving.

Door Ajar WarningSounds when any door is not completelyclosed and your vehicle speed exceeds3 mph (5 km/h).

Headlamps On WarningSounds when you remove the key from theignition and open the driver's door and youhave left the headlamps or parking lampson.

Key in Ignition WarningSounds when you open the driver's doorand you have left the key in the ignition.

Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped)

Sounds the horn twice when you exit yourvehicle with the intelligent access key, afterthe last door is closed and your keylessvehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicle isstill on.

Rear Park Aid WarningA detection warning sounds whenobstacles are within a certain range of thebumper area. The system turns onautomatically whenever you switch theignition on.

Parking Brake On WarningSounds when you have left the parkingbrake on and drive your vehicle. If thewarning chime remains on after you havereleased the parking brake, have thesystem checked by your authorized dealerimmediately.

Service Advancetrac WarningSounds when there is a malfunction withthe Electronic Stability Control (ESC) orRollover Stability Control (RSC) system.

109


Instrument Cluster

GENERAL INFORMATION



Various systems on your vehicle can becontrolled using the information displaycontrols on the steering wheel.Corresponding information is displayed inthe information display.Note: Some options may appear slightlydifferent or not at all if the items areoptional.Note: Trailer options are not available ifyour vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph(5 km/h).Note: Some MyKey menu options onlyappear if MyKey is enabled and at least oneMyKey is programmed.

E204495

This icon gives you the ability toswitch a feature on or off. Acheck in the box indicates the

feature is enabled, and uncheckedindicates the feature is disabled.

Information Display Controls(Type 1 and 2)

E176092

• Press the up and down arrow buttonsto scroll through and highlight theoptions within a menu.

• Press the right arrow button to enter asub-menu.

• Press the left arrow button to exit amenu.

• Press the OK button to choose andconfirm a setting or messages.

Main menu (Type 1)• Trip 1 & 2• Fuel economy• Driver assist• Settings

110


Information Displays

Trip 1 & 2Note: Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following trip options.

Trip 1 & 2

Digital Speed - Press OK for km/h

Trip Odometer

Trip Timer

DTE

Average Fuel

• Digital Speed - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed.• Trip Odometer - Registers the mileage of individual journeys.• Trip Timer - Registers the time of individual journeys.• DTE - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of

fuel.• Average Fuel - Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.Note: Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed trip information.

Fuel EconomyNote: Use the arrow buttons to choose the desired fuel economy display.

Fuel Economy

Distance to E

Instant Fuel Economy

Average Fuel Economy

Auto StartStop status

• Distance to E - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before runningout of fuel.

• Instant Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage.• Average Fuel Economy - Shows the average fuel usage based on time. Press and hold

OK to reset this value.• Auto StartStop status - Shows the current status of the auto startstop system.Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button onthe left hand steering wheel controls.

111



Driver AssistNote: Use the arrow buttons to configure different driver setting choices.

Driver Assist

Engine Hours XXXXXXEngine HoursDriver Assist

Engine Idle Hours XXXXXX

Shows the current gear thetransmission is in and what therange is set to.

Prog Range Sel

Vehicle graphic with tire pres-sures. See Tire PressureMonitoring System (page 367).

Tire Pressure

Rear Park Aid

Select Your SettingBrake Type

Trailer Sway

Settings

Settings

Select Your SettingDTE CalculateVehicle

Select Your SettingAutolamp DelayLighting

Daytime Light

AutolockLocks

Autounlock

Select Your SettingRemote Unlock

Remaining Life XX% - Hold OK to resetOil Life Reset

Select Your SettingClimate ControlRemote Start

Duration

System

Courtesy WipeWiperControls

Admin Keys and MyKeysMyKey StatusMyKey

112



Settings

MyKey Mileage

Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate MyKey

Select Your Setting911 Assist

Do NotDisturb

AdvanceTrac

Max Speed

Speed Minder

Vol. Limiter

Clear MyKeys - Press OK to clear MyKeysClear MyKeys

Select Your SettingUnitsDisplay Setup

Temperature

Tire Pressure

Language

Main menu (Type 2)• Display Mode• Trip/Fuel

• Towing• Off Road• Settings

Display ModeNote: Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following display options.

Display Mode

DTE

Transmission Temp.

Tire Pressure

Digital Speedometer - Press OK for km/h

113



Display Mode

Engine Information - Oil Life, Engine Hours, Engine Idle Hours - Hold OK to Reset

MyKey Status - Admin Keys and MyKey Mileage

• DTE - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out offuel.

• Transmission Temp - Shows the trans temp value.• Tire Pressure - Shows the tire pressure psi. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(page 367).• Engine Information - Shows engine information.• MyKey Status - Shows the status of your MyKeys.

Trip/FuelNote: Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following trip and fuel options.

Trip/Fuel

Trip 1 or 2

Fuel Economy

Fuel History

Select Your SettingCompass

Auto StartStop statusTrip 1 or 2• Trip Timer - Registers the time of individual journeys.• DTE - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of

fuel.• Mi - Registers the mileage of individual journeys.• Avg mpg - Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.Fuel• Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph and average

mpg.• Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage based on time. The graph is updated each minute

with the fuel economy that you achieved during 30 minutes of driving.• Auto StartStop status - Shows the current status of the auto startstop system.Note: Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed information.

114



TowingNote: Use the arrow buttons to configure different towing setting choices.Note: Once you select a trailer, it remains active until you set it as no longer active. An activetrailer still accumulates miles even after you physically disconnect it from your vehicle.

Towing

Trailer connection statusTrailer Status

BLIS with Trailer Ready/Not Available/Not Setup/Off

Pro Trailer Backup Assist: Ready or Not Setup or Not Calibrated

active trailer name or Default Trailer

accumulated trailer miles

Trailer brake gain

Output

Trailer Sway ControlTrailerOptions

no active trailerSelect Trailer

Programmed trailers

Default Trailer

List of namedtrailers, No StoredTrailers - Press OKto rename

Rename TrailerChange Trailer Settings

List of named ordefault trailers -Press OK to select

Reset TrailerDistance


Change BLIS Meas-urement


Add BLIS Measure-ment

Name of stored ProTrailer BackupAssist trailer

Change Pro TrailerSticker

115



Towing

No stored ProBackup trailers -Press OK to select

Name of storedconventional trailer

Add Pro TrailerBackup

No stored conven-tional trailer - PressOK to select

Select Your SettingChange Brake Type

Change Brake Effort

List of namedtrailers, No storedtrailers - Press OK toselect

Delete Trailer

List of namedtrailers or defaulttrailers - Press OK toSelect

Change TrailerSetup

New Trailer - Press OK to selectAdd Trailer

Select Your SettingTrailer Brake Type

Trailer Brake Effort

Select Your SettingChange TrailerSetup

Pro Trailer BackupAssist only SupportsTrailers withConventionalHitches. Press OK toExit

ConventionalConnectionChecklist

Fifth Wheel

Gooseneck

Off RoadNote: Use the arrow buttons to configure different off road choices.

116



Off Road

Pitch, steering angle and roll

Power Distribution

Settings

Settings

Blind Spot

Cross Traffic Alert

Rear Park Aid

Trailer BLIS

Select Your SettingDTE Calcula-tion

Easy Entry/Exit

Select Your SettingAutolampDelay

Lighting

Daytime Lights

AutolockLocks

Autounlock

Select Your SettingRemoteUnlock

Vehicle

ClimateControl

Remote Start

Seats

Duration

System

Courtesy WipeWiperControls

AdvancedSettings

Rain Sensing

Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate MyKeyMyKey


117



Settings

Do NotDisturb

AdvanceTrac

Max Speed

Speed Minder

Volume Limiter

Hold OK to Clear MyKeysClear MyKeys

Select Your SettingUnitsDisplaySetup

Temperature

Tire Pressure

Language

118



Information Display Controls(Type 3) (If Equipped)

E176093

• Press the up and down arrow buttonsto scroll through and highlight theoptions within a menu.

• Press the right arrow button to enter asub-menu.

• Press the left arrow button to exit amenu.

• Press the OK button to choose andconfirm a setting or messages.

Main menuYou can access the menus using theinformation display control.

E176094

My View

E176095

Trip/Fuel

E163181

Truck Info

E176096

Towing

E176097

Off Road

E176098

Settings

My View

E176094

Use the arrow buttons to choosebetween the following My Viewoptions.

MyView

Trip 1Trip/Fuel ScreensAdd/RemoveScreens

Configure MyView

Trip 2

Fuel Economy

Fuel History

Navigation/Compass

Auto StartStop

119



MyView

Gauge ViewTruck Info Screens

Tire Pressure

Digital Speedometer

Engine Information

MyKey Status

Trailer StatusTowing Screens

Trailer Information

Trailer Light Check

Off Road StatusOff Road Screens

Power Distribution

Up/Down moves selec-tion in the list

Screen Selection 1- 7

Reorder Screens

Press OK to select

Trip/Fuel

E176095

Use the arrow buttons to choosebetween the following trip andfuel options.

Trip/Fuel

Trip 1 or 2

Fuel Economy

Fuel History

Navigation

120



Trip/Fuel

Select Your SettingCompass

Auto StartStop statusTrip 1 or 2• Trip Timer - Registers the time of individual journeys.• DTE - Shows the approximate distance your vehicle can travel before running out of

fuel.• Mi - Registers the mileage of individual journeys.• Avg mpg - Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.Fuel• Fuel Economy - Shows your instantaneous fuel usage as a bar graph and average

mpg.• Fuel History - Shows your fuel usage based on time. The graph is updated each minute

with the fuel economy that you achieved during 30 minutes of driving.• Navigation - Shows navigation turn by turn (Compass displayed when a route in

Navigation is not set).• Auto StartStop status - Shows the current status of the auto startstop system.Note: Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed information.

Truck Info

E163181

In this mode, off-roadinformation depicted withgraphics are available.

Note: Use the arrow buttons to choose between the following display options.

Truck Info

Gauge View

Tire Pressure

Digital Speedometer - Press OK for km/h

121



Truck Info

Engine Information - Oil Life, Engine Hours, Engine Idle Hours - Hold OK to Reset

MyKey Status - Admin Keys, MyKeys and MyKey Mileage

• Gauge View - Shows the turbo boost or transmission temp value.• Tire Pressure - Shows the tire pressure psi. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(page 367).• Digital Speedometer - Shows a digital display of your vehicle speed.• Engine Information - Shows engine information.• MyKey Status - Shows the status of your MyKeys.

Towing

E176096

Use the arrow buttons to choosebetween the following towingoptions.

Note: Once you select a trailer, it remains active until you set it as no longer active. An activetrailer still accumulates miles even after you physically disconnect it from your vehicle.

Towing

% Grade, steering angle, gain and output displayTowingStatus

Trailer Name, Accumulated Miles, Pro Trailer Backup Assist Status andTrailer BLIS Status - Press OK for Trailer Options

TowingInforma-tion

Running, Brake and Turn Signal Light Status or No Trailer DetectedTrailerLightStatus

Trailer Sway ControlTrailerSetup

no active trailerSelect trailer

Programmed trailers

Default Trailer

List of namedtrailers, No StoredTrailers - Press OKto rename

Rename TrailerChange Trailer Settings

122



Towing


Reset TrailerDistance


Change BLIS Meas-urement


Add BLIS Measure-ment

Name of stored ProTrailer BackupAssist trailer name

Change Pro TrailerSticker

No stored ProBackup trailers -Press OK to select

Name of storedconventional trailer

Add Pro TrailerBackup

No stored conven-tional trailer - PressOK to select

Select Your SettingChange Brake Type

Change Brake Effort

List of namedtrailers, No storedtrailers - Press OKto select

Delete Trailer

Conventional, FifthWheel or Goose-neck

Change TrailerSetup

New Trailer - Press OK to selectAdd Trailer

Select Your SettingTrailer Brake Type

Trailer Brake Effort

Select Your SettingPro Trailer BackupAssist™ setup

123



Towing

Pro Trailer BackupAssist only SupportsTrailers withConventionalHitches. Press OK toExit

ConventionalConnec-tion Check-list Fifth Wheel

Gooseneck

Off Road

E176097

Use the arrow buttons to choosebetween the following off roadoptions.

Off Road

Pitch, steering angle, roll, Elocker and 4X4

Power Distribution

Settings

E176098

Use the arrow buttons toconfigure different driver settingchoices.

Settings

Auto Highbeam

Blind Spot

Cross Traffic Alert

Driver Alert

Rear Park Aid

Trailer BLIS

Select Your SettingAlert Sensit-ivity

CollisionWarn

124



Settings

Warn

Select Your SettingCruiseControl

Select Your SettingModeLaneKeepingSystem Sensitivity

Alert Intensity

Select Your SettingDTE Calcula-tion

Auto Engine OffVehicle

Easy Entry/Exit

Select YourSetting

Autolamp DelayLighting

Daytime Lights

AutolockLocks

Autounlock

Select YourSetting

Remote Unlock

Select Your SettingAlarm

Ask on Exit

Select Your SettingPower RunningBoards

Select YourSetting

Climate ControlRemote Start

Seats and Wheel orSeats

DurationAdvancedSettings

System

Courtesy WipeWiper Controls

Rain Sensing

Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate MyKeyMyKey

125



Settings


Do Not Disturb

AdvanceTrac

Max Speed

Speed Minder

Volume Limiter

Hold OK to Clear MyKeysClear MyKeys

Select Your SettingUnitsDisplay Setup

Temperature

Tire Pressure

Language

INFORMATION MESSAGESNote: Depending on your vehicle optionsand instrument cluster type, not all of themessages will display or be available. Theinformation display may abbreviate orshorten certain messages.

E184451

Press the OK button to acknowledge andremove some messages from theinformation display. The informationdisplay will automatically remove othermessages after a short time.You need to confirm certain messagesbefore you can access the menus.

126



Active Park

ActionMessage

The system requires service due to a malfunction. Have thesystem checked by an authorized dealer.

Active Park Fault

Adaptive Cruise Control

ActionMessage

A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise controlfrom engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page

225).

Adaptive CruiseMalfunction

A condition exists such that the adaptive cruise cannot func-tion properly. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page

225).

Adaptive Cruise NotAvailable

You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud orwater in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean thesensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page

225).

Adaptive Cruise NotAvailable Sensor

Blocked See Manual

The system has disabled the automatic braking.Normal Cruise ActiveAutomatic Braking

Turned Off

A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise controlfrom engaging.

Front Sensor Not Aligned

The adaptive cruise has reinstated controls to the driver.Adaptive Cruise - DriverResume Control

Your vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive cruise.Adaptive Cruise SpeedToo Low to Activate

The adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting the gapdistance and you need to shift the transmission into a lower

gear.

Adaptive Cruise ShiftDown

127



AdvanceTrac and Traction Control

ActionMessage

The system detects a condition that requires service. Contactan authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Service AdvanceTrac

The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched itoff.

AdvanceTrac Off

The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched iton.

AdvanceTrac On

The status of the AdvanceTrac sport mode after you switchedit on.

AdvanceTrac SPORTMODE

The status of the traction control system after you switchedit off. See Using Traction Control (page 208).

Traction Control Off

The status of the traction control system after you switchedit on. See Using Traction Control (page 208).

Traction Control On

Airbag

ActionMessage

Displays when the system detects a malfunction due to ablocked sensor.

Occupant SensorBLOCKED Remove

Objects Near PassengerSeat

Alarm and Security

ActionMessage

Alarm triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-TheftAlarm (page 76).

Vehicle Alarm To StopAlarm, Start Vehicle.

128



Battery and Charging System

ActionMessage

The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays onor continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon

as possible.

Check Charging System

The battery management system detects an extended low-voltage condition. Your vehicle will disable various features

to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the electricalloads as soon as possible to improve system voltage. If the

system voltage has recovered, the disabled features willoperate again as normal.

Low Battery FeaturesTemporarily Turned Off

The battery management system determines that the batteryis at a low state of charge. Turn your ignition off as soon as

possible to protect the battery. This message will clear onceyou restart your vehicle and the battery state of charge has

recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads will allowfaster battery state-of-charge recovery.

Turn Power Off To SaveBattery

The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays onor continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon

as possible.

Charging System ServiceSoon

The charging system needs servicing. Contact an authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

Charging System ServiceNow

The battery management system determines that the batteryis at a low state of charge. Turn your ignition off as soon as

possible to protect the battery. This message clears once yourestart your vehicle and the battery state of charge has

recovered.

Battery State of ChargeLow

Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System

ActionMessage

A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

Blindspot System Fault

The system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Informa-tion System (page 236).

Blindspot Not AvailableSensor Blocked See

Manual

The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot InformationSystem (page 236).

Cross Traffic VehicleComing From X

129



ActionMessage

The blind spot information system and cross traffic alertsystem sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information

System (page 236).

Cross Traffic Not Avail-able Sensor Blocked See

Manual


Cross Traffic SystemFault

The system automatically turns off and displays this messagewhen you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not havea trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blindspot system off through the information display. See Blind

Spot Information System (page 236).

Cross Traffic Alert Deac-tivated Trailer Attached

The system automatically turns off and displays this messagewhen you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not havea trailer blind spot system or when you switch the trailer blindspot system off through the information display. See Blind

Spot Information System (page 236).

Blind Spot Alert Deactiv-ated Trailer Attached

Displays when the trailer connected is a fifth wheel or goose-neck, or when the trailer width is wider than 10 ft (2.7 m) or

longer than 33 ft (10 m).

Trailer Blind Spot Notavailable Due to Invalid

Trailer

Collision Warning System

ActionMessage


Collision WarningMalfunction

You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud orwater in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the

sensor to resolve. See Collision Warning System (page244).

Collision Warning NotAvailable Sensor

Blocked See Manual


Collision Warning NotAvailable

Doors and Locks

ActionMessage

The door(s) listed is not completely closed.X Door Ajar

The tailgate is not completed closed.Tailgate Ajar

130



Driver Alert

ActionMessage

Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.Driver Alert Warning RestNow

Take a rest soon.Driver Alert Warning RestSuggested

Drivetrain

ActionMessage

The electronic locking differential requests a certain speedrequirement to engage.

To Engage LockingDifferential Slow to XX

mph/km/h

The electronic locking differential requests the acceleratorto be released in order to engage.

To Engage LockingDifferential ReleaseAccelerator Pedal

An electronic locking differential (ELD) system fault ispresent. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Check Locking Differen-tial

The transfer case is in the neutral position. This messageindicates that your vehicle is safe to be towed with all four

wheels on the ground.

Neutral Tow EnabledLeave Transmission in

Neutral

The transfer case is NOT in the neutral position. This messageindicates that your vehicle is NOT safe to be towed with all

four wheels on the ground.

Neutral Tow Disabled

Engine

ActionMessage

The engine has reduced power to help reduce highengine temperature.

Power Reduced to Lower EngineTemp

131



Fuel

ActionMessage

An early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low

The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet

Keys and Intelligent Access

ActionMessage

A reminder to press the brake while starting the vehicle.To START Press Brake

The system does not detect a key in your vehicle. See KeylessStarting (page 168).

No Key Detected

You pressed the StartStop button to switch off the engineand your vehicle does not detect your intelligent access key

inside your vehicle.

Restart Now or Key isNeeded

Your vehicle is in the run ignition state.Run Power Active

There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. Seean authorized dealer for service.

Starting System Fault

You have successfully programmed an intelligent access keyto the system.

Key Program Successful

You have failed to program an intelligent access key to thesystem.

Key Program Failure

You have programmed the maximum number of keys to thesystem.

Max Number of KeysLearned

You have not programmed enough keys to the system.Not Enough KeysLearned

The key battery is low. Change the battery as soon as possible.Key Battery Low ReplaceSoon

Informs you that you are exiting your vehicle and the engineis on.

Engine ON

132



Lane Keeping System

ActionMessage

The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealeras soon as possible.

Lane Keeping Sys.Malfunction Service

Required

The system has detected a condition that has caused thesystem to be temporarily unavailable.

Front Camera Tempor-arily Not Available

The system has detected a condition that requires you toclean the windshield in order for it to operate properly.

Front Camera Low Visib-ility Clean Screen

The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealeras soon as possible.

Front Camera Malfunc-tion Service Required

The system requests you to keep your hands on the steeringwheel.

Keep Hands on SteeringWheel

Maintenance

ActionMessage

Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible and turn off theengine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continuesto come on with your engine running, contact an authorized

dealer as soon as possible.

Low Engine Oil Pressure

The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See Engine OilCheck (page 322).

Change Engine Oil Soon

The oil life left is at 0%. See Engine Oil Check (page 322).Oil Change Required

The brake fluid level is low, inspected the brake systemimmediately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 328).

Brake Fluid Level Low

The brake system needs servicing. Stop your vehicle in a safeplace. Contact an authorized dealer.

Check Brake System

Your vehicle is still in Transport or Factory mode. This maynot allow some features to operate properly. See an author-

ized dealer.

Transport / FactoryMode Contact Dealer

The powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction.See Manual

133



MyKey

ActionMessage

You cannot program a MyKey.MyKey not Created

MyKey is active.MyKey Active DriveSafely

When switching on your vehicle and MyKey is in use, displaysthat the MyKey speed limit is on.

Speed Limited to XXMPH/km/h

MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehiclespeed is approaching 81 mph (130 km/h).

Near Vehicle Top Speed

You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey.Vehicle at Top Speed ofMyKey Setting

You have an active MyKey with a programmed set speed limit.Check Speed DriveSafely

Belt-Minder turns on with a MyKey in use.Buckle Up to UnmuteAudio

With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac turns on.AdvanceTrac On -MyKey Setting

With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on.Traction Control On -MyKey Setting

With a MyKey in use, park aid is always on.MyKey Park Aid Cannotbe Deactivated

With a MyKey in use, lane keeping alert turns on.Lane Keeping Alert OnMyKey Setting

Off Road

ActionMessage

Hill descent control mode is active.Hill Descent Control Active

Hill descent control mode is inactive.Hill Descent Control OFF

Your vehicle speed requirement for off-road modeentry has not been met.

For Hill Descent Reduce SpeedXX MPH/km/h or Less

You need to select a transmission gear for hill descentmode.

For Hill Descent Select Gear

134



ActionMessage

Hill descent control mode is deactivated and you mustresume control.

Hill Descent Driver ResumeControl

A hill descent system fault is present.Hill Descent Control Fault

The hill descent system is cooling due to overuse.Hill Descent Control Off SystemCooling

The hill descent control system is ready.Hill Descent Control Ready

Park Aid

ActionMessage

The system has detected a condition that requires service.Contact an authorized dealer. See Principle of Operation

(page 213).

Check Front Park Aid

The system has detected a condition that requires service.Contact an authorized dealer. See Principle of Operation

(page 213).

Check Rear Park Aid

Displays the park aid status.Front Park Aid On Off

Displays the park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off

Park Brake

ActionMessage

The electric parking brake is set and a manual release isattempted without the brake pedal being pressed.

To Release: Press Brakeand Switch

The electric park brake is set and an automatic release isattempted but cannot be performed. Perform a manual

release.

Park Brake Use Switchto Release

The electric park brake is set and your vehicle speed exceeds3 mph (5 km/h). Release park brake before continued driving.

Release Park Brake

The electric park brake is not fully applied.Park Brake Not Applied

The electric park brake is not fully released.Park Brake Not Released

135



ActionMessage

The electric park brake system has been put into a specialmode that is used to allow service of the rear brakes. Contact

an authorized dealer.

Park Brake MaintenanceMode

The electric park brake system has detected a condition thatrequires service. Some functionality may still be available.

Contact an authorized dealer.

Park Brake LimitedFunction Service

Required

The electric park brake system has detected a condition thatrequires service. Contact an authorized dealer.

Park Brake MalfunctionService Now

Power Steering

ActionMessage

The power steering system has detected a condition thatrequires service. See an authorized dealer.

Steering Fault ServiceNow

The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehiclein a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.

Steering Loss StopSafely

The power steering system has detected a condition withinthe power steering system or passive entry or passive start

system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.

Steering Assist FaultService Required

The steering lock system has detected a condition thatrequires service. See an authorized dealer.

Steering Lock Malfunc-tion Service Now

Pro Trailer Backup Assist

ActionMessage

Pro Trailer Backup Assist can only be activated whenthe vehicle is stopped.

Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ NotActive Stop Vehicle to Activate

Camera System is locating the sticker. Wait until thesticker is found before attempting to use Pro Trailer

Backup Assist.

Pro Trailer Backup Assist™Locating Sticker Please wait...

Press Knob to Exit

Stop Now. Pro Trailer Backup Assist has reached maxtrailer angle.

Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Stopnow Maximum trailer angle

Press Knob to Exit

Stop Now. Pro Trailer Backup Assist is no longercontrolling steering.

Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ StopNow Take Control of Steering

Wheel

136



ActionMessage

Slow vehicle speed. Vehicle is approaching the exitspeed for the Pro Trailer Backup Assist feature.

Pro Trailer Backup Assist™Reduce Speed Turn Knob to

Steer Press Knob to Exit

Conditions for Pro Trailer Backup Assist operation arenot met. See Trailer Reversing Aids (page 257).

Pro Trailer Backup Assist™System is Not Available

Pro Trailer Backup Assist cannot operate with handson wheel. Remove hands to activate.

Pro Trailer Backup Assist™Remove Hands from SteeringWheel to Activate Press Knob

to Exit

Pro Trailer Backup Assist knob has been pushed todeactivate the system.

Pro Trailer Backup Assist™Cancelled by Driver Take

Control of Steering Wheel

Pro Trailer Backup Assist operation is only available inreverse gear. Shift gear selector into reverse to activate.

Pro Trailer Backup Assist™ Shiftto Reverse to Activate. Press

Knob to Exit

Camera system cannot locate sticker. Shift to park.Pro Trailer Backup Assist™Sticker Not Found Shift to Park

Press Knob to Exit

Camera system cannot locate sticker. See TrailerReversing Aids (page 257).

Pro Trailer Backup Assist™Sticker Not Found Refer to

Owner's Manual. Press Knob toExit

Drive between 4–24 mph (6–39 km/h) straightforward to calibrate Pro Trailer Backup Assist.

Pro Trailer Backup Assist™Drive Straight Forward to Calib-

rate. Press Knob to Exit

The system has completed calibration. Stop thevehicle to use Pro Trailer Backup Assist feature.

Pro Trailer Backup Assist™Calibration Complete Stop

Vehicle

Remote Start

ActionMessage

A reminder to push the start button to drive your vehicle aftera remote start.

To Drive: Press StartButton

137



Seats

ActionMessage

A reminder that memory seats are not available while driving.Memory Recall NotPermitted While Driving

Shows where you have saved your memory setting.Memory {0} Saved

Side-Wind

ActionMessage

This message displays when the side-wind system turns onin response to strong wind conditions. See Principle of

Operation (page 209).

Side-Wind StabilizationActive

Starting System

ActionMessage

A reminder to apply the brake when starting your vehicle .To START Press Brake

The starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting tostart your vehicle.

Cranking Time Exceeded

The starter is attempting to start your vehicle.Engine Start PendingPlease Wait

The system has cancelled the pending start.Pending Start Cancelled

138



Tire Pressure Monitoring System

ActionMessage

One or more tires on your vehicle has low tire pressure. SeeTire Pressure Monitoring System (page 367).

Tire Pressure Low

The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If thewarning stays on or continues to come on, contact an

authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System(page 367).

Tire Pressure MonitorFault

A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is inuse. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 367). If

the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact anauthorized dealer as soon as possible.

Tire Pressure SensorFault

Trailer

ActionMessage

The current gain setting for the trailer brake.Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gainvalue:#0.0}

The current gain setting for the trailer brake when atrailer is not connected.

Trailer Brake Gain: {trailer gainvalue:#0.0} No Trailer

Faults sensed in the Integrated Trailer Brake ControlModule followed by a single chime. See Towing a

Trailer (page 256).

Trailer Brake Module Fault

A correct trailer connection is sensed during a givenignition cycle.

Trailer Connected

A trailer connection becomes disconnected, eitherintentionally or unintentionally, and has been sensed

during a given ignition cycle.

Trailer Disconnected

The trailer sway control has detected trailer sway.Trailer Sway Reduce Speed

There are certain faults in your vehicle wiring and trailerwiring/brake system. See Towing a Trailer (page 256).

Trailer Wiring Fault

There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check yourlamp.

Trailer Left Turn Lamps FaultCheck Lamps

139



ActionMessage

There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp. Check yourlamp.

Trailer Right Turn Lamps FaultCheck Lamps

There is a fault with your trailer battery. See Towinga Trailer (page 256).

Trailer Battery Not Charging SeeManual

There is a fault with your vehicle trailer lighting module.See Towing a Trailer (page 256).

Trailer Lighting Module FaultSee Manual

4WD

ActionMessage

A 4X4 system fault is present. Contact an authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

Check 4x4

The 4X4 system is making a shift.4x4 Shift in Progress

Displays when you attempt to switch to 4X4 LOW andyou do not shift the transmission to neutral (N).

For 4x4 LOW Shift to N

Displays when you attempt to switch to 4X4 LOW andyour vehicle's speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).

For 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH

Displays when you attempt to switch from 4X4 LOWand you do not shift the transmission to neutral (N).

To Exit 4x4 LOW Shift to N

Displays when you attempt to switch from 4X4 LOWand your vehicle's speed is greater than 3 mph

(5 km/h).

To Exit 4x4 LOW Slow to 3 MPH

May display when there is a Transfer case gear toothblockage while shifting to or from 4L or to the neutral

state.

Shift Delayed Pull Forward

Displays when the system turns off the clutch due toexcessive stress. The system automatically turns on

the clutch after it cools.

4x4 Temporarily Disabled

Displays when the 4X4 system restores to the 4Asetting.

4x4 Restored

Displays when the 4X4 system temporarily turns on4H from 4A after detecting driving conditions that

require greater 4X4 performance. The system automat-ically returns to 4A after the system no longer detects

these driving conditions.

4x4 Temporarily Locked

140



MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL

E217932

Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.AHeated seats: Press to switch the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats(page 156).

B

Power: Press to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, itprevents outside air from entering the vehicle.

C

Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distributionto the instrument panel and footwell vents turns off. You can also use thissetting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.

D

Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. Theair currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This can reduce thetime needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering yourvehicle.

E

Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the airflow in your vehicle.F

141


Climate Control

MAX Defrost: Adjust to switch on defrost. Outside air flows through thewindshield vents, air conditioning automatically turns on. You can also use thissetting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.

G

Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air whenmaximum defrost is on.MAX A/C: Adjust for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through theinstrument panel vents and air conditioning automatically turns on.

H

A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools yourvehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortabletemperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold airthrough the air vents.

I

Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioningmay continue to operate even though the air conditioning is switched off.Air distribution control: Press to switch airflow from the windshield,instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through anycombination of these vents.

J

Note: At least one of these buttons remain on while the system is on.Heated rear window: Press to switch the heated rear window on and off. SeeHeated Windows and Mirrors (page 147).

K

142


Climate Control

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

E217905

AUTO: Press to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the desiredtemperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and outsideor recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or cool the vehicle tomaintain the desired temperature. You can also switch off dual zone mode bypressing and holding for more than two seconds.

A

MAX Defrost: Press to switch on defrost. Outside air flows through thewindshield vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and fan automaticallyadjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to defrost and clearthe windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window alsoautomatically turns on when you select maximum defrost.

B

Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air whenmaximum defrost is on.Power: Press to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, itprevents outside air from entering the vehicle.

C

Air distribution control: Press to switch airflow from the windshield,instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through anycombination of these vents.

D

143


Climate Control

Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. Theair currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This can reduce thetime needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering yourvehicle.

E

Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrumentpanel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improvecooling efficiency.MAX A/C: Press for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through theinstrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and the fanautomatically adjusts to the highest speed.

F

DUAL: Press to switch separate passenger side temperature control off andon. When dual zone is off, passenger temperature settings remain the same asthe driver settings.

G

Passenger temperature control: Adjust the temperature setting on thepassenger side.

H

A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools yourvehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach a comfortabletemperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold airthrough the air vents.

I

Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioningmay continue to operate even though the air conditioning is switched off.Heated seats: Press to switch the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats(page 156).

J

Climate controlled seats: Press to switch the climate controlled seats onand off. See Climate Controlled Seats (page 157).

K

Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.LHeated rear window: Press to switch the heated rear window on and off. SeeHeated Windows and Mirrors (page 147).

M

Driver temperature control: Adjust the temperature setting on the driver side.N

HINTS ON CONTROLLING THEINTERIOR CLIMATEGeneral Hints

WARNINGProlonged use of recirculated air maycause the windows to fog up. If thewindows fog up, follow the settings

for demisting the windshield.

Note: You may feel a small amount of airfrom the footwell air vents regardless of theair distribution setting.Note: To reduce humidity build-up insideyour vehicle, do not drive with the systemswitched off or with recirculated air alwaysswitched on.Note: Do not place objects under the frontseats as this may interfere with the airflowto the rear seats.

144


Climate Control

Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves fromthe air intake area at the base of thewindshield.Note: To improve the time to reach acomfortable temperature in hot weather,drive with the windows open until you feelcold air through the air vents.

Manual Climate ControlNote: To reduce fogging of the windshieldduring humid weather, adjust the airdistribution control to the windshield airvents position.

Automatic Climate ControlNote: Adjusting the settings when yourvehicle interior is extremely hot or cold isnot necessary. The system automaticallyadjusts to heat or cool the interior to yourselected temperature as quickly as possible.For the system to function efficiently, theinstrument panel and side air vents shouldbe fully open.Note: If you select AUTO during coldoutside temperatures, the system directsairflow to the windshield and side windowvents. In addition, the fan may run at aslower speed until the engine warms up.Note: If you select AUTO during hot outsidetemperatures, or when the inside of thevehicle is hot, the system automatically usesrecirculated air to maximize interior cooling.When the interior reaches the selectedtemperature, the system automaticallyswitches to using outside air.

Heating the Interior Quickly

Vehicle with automatic climate controlVehicle with manual climate control

Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to a high speedsetting.

1

Adjust the temperature control to thedesired setting.

Adjust the temperature control to thefull heat setting.

2

Select the footwell air vents using theair distribution buttons.

3

145


Climate Control

Recommended Settings for Heating


Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to the centersetting.

1

Adjust the temperature control to thedesired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as astarting point, then adjust the setting asnecessary.

Adjust the temperature control to themidway point of the hot settings.

2

Select the footwell air vents using theair distribution buttons.

3

Cooling the Interior Quickly


Press the MAX A/C button.Adjust the temperature control to theMAX A/C position.

1

Drive with the windows fully open untilyou feel cold air through the air vents.

2

Recommended Settings for Cooling


Press the AUTO button.Adjust the fan speed to the centersetting.

1


Adjust the temperature control to themidway point of the cold settings.

2

Select the instrument panel air ventsusing the air distribution buttons.

3

146


Climate Control

Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather


Press the defrost button.Select the windshield air vents using theair distribution buttons.

1


Press the A/C button if the indicator isoff.

2

Adjust the temperature control to thedesired setting.

3

Adjust the fan speed to a high speedsetting.

4

HEATED WINDOWS ANDMIRRORS (If Equipped)

Heated Rear WindowNote: Make sure the engine is runningbefore operating the heated windows.

E184884

Press the button to clear theheated rear window of thin iceand fog. The heated rear window

will automatically turn off after a shortperiod of time. Start the engine before youswitch the heated rear window on.Note: Do not use razor blades or othersharp objects to clean or remove decalsfrom the inside of the heated rear window.The vehicle warranty does not coverdamage caused to the heated rear windowgrid lines.

Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped)

When you switch the heated rear windowon, the heated exterior mirrors willautomatically turn on.Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrorswith a scraper or adjust the mirror glasswhen it is frozen in place.

Note: Do not clean the mirror housing orglass with harsh abrasives, fuel or otherpetroleum-based cleaning products.

CABIN AIR FILTERYour vehicle is equipped with a cabin airfilter, which gives you and your passengersthe following benefits:• It improves your driving comfort by

reducing particle concentration.• It improves the interior compartment

cleanliness.• It protects the climate control

components from particle deposits.You can locate the cabin air filter behindthe glove box.Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filterinstalled at all times. This prevents foreignobjects from entering the system. Runningthe system without a filter in place couldresult in degradation or damage to thesystem.Replace the filter at regular intervals. SeeScheduled Maintenance (page 539).

147


Climate Control

For additional cabin air filter information,or to replace the filter, see an authorizeddealer.

REMOTE START (If Equipped)

You can switch this feature on or off andadjust the settings using the informationdisplay.The system adjusts the interiortemperature depending on your chosensettings during remote start.You cannot adjust the climate controlsetting during remote start operation.When you switch the ignition on, theclimate control system will return to theprevious settings. You can now makeadjustments.You can switch on certainvehicle-dependent features when needed,such as:• Heated seats.• Cooled seats.• Heated steering wheel.• Heated mirrors.• Heated rear window.

Automatic SettingsIn hot weather, the system is set to 72°F(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high(if available, and selected to AUTO in theinformation display).In moderate weather, the system eitherheats or cools (based on previoussettings). The rear defroster, heatedmirrors and heated or cooled seats do notautomatically turn on.In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F(22°C). The heated seats are set to high(if available, and selected to AUTO in theinformation display). The heated rearwindow and heated mirrors automaticallyturn on.

148


Climate Control

SITTING IN THE CORRECTPOSITION

WARNINGSSitting improperly, out of position orwith the seatback reclined too farcan take weight off the seat cushion

and affect the decision of the passengersensing system, resulting in serious injuryor death in the event of a crash. Always situpright against your seat back, with yourfeet on the floor.

Do not recline the seatback as thiscan cause the occupant to slideunder the safety belt, resulting in

serious injury in the event of a crash.Do not place objects higher than theseatback to reduce the risk of seriousinjury in the event of a crash or during

heavy braking.

E68595

When you use them properly, the seat,head restraint, safety belt and airbags willprovide optimum protection in the eventof a crash.

We recommend that you follow theseguidelines:• Sit in an upright position with the base

of your spine as far back as possible.• Do not recline the seatback more than

30 degrees.• Adjust the head restraint so that the

top of it is level with the top of yourhead and as far forward as possible.Make sure that you remaincomfortable.

• Keep sufficient distance betweenyourself and the steering wheel. Werecommend a minimum of 10 in(25 cm) between your breastbone andthe airbag cover.

• Hold the steering wheel with your armsslightly bent.

• Bend your legs slightly so that you canpress the pedals fully.

• Position the shoulder strap of thesafety belt over the center of yourshoulder and position the lap straptightly across your hips.

Make sure that your driving position iscomfortable and that you can maintain fullcontrol of your vehicle.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

WARNINGSFully adjust the head restraint beforeyou operate your vehicle. This willhelp minimize the risk of neck injury

in the event of a crash. Do not adjust thehead restraint when your vehicle is moving.

The head restraint is a safety device.Whenever possible it should beinstalled and properly adjusted when

the seat is occupied. An improperlyadjusted head restraint may notadequately protect an occupant during animpact from the rear.

149


Seats

WARNINGSInstall the head restraint properly tohelp minimize the risk of neck injuryin the event of a crash.

Note: Adjust the seatback to an uprightdriving position before adjusting the headrestraint. Adjust the head restraint so thatthe top of it is level with the top of your headand as far forward as possible. Make surethat you remain comfortable. If you areextremely tall, adjust the head restraint toits highest position.Front Seat Head Restraint

E138642

Rear Seat Outboard Head Restraints

E166700

E

D

C

B

A

Rear Seat Center Head Restraint

E166701

A

D C

B

The head restraints consist of:

An energy absorbing headrestraint.

A

Two steel stems.BGuide sleeve adjust and releasebutton.

C

Guide sleeve unlock and removebutton.

D

Fold button (rear seat outboardonly).

E

Adjusting the Head RestraintRaising the Head RestraintPull the head restraint up.

Lowering the Head Restraint1. Press and hold button C.2. Push the head restraint down.

Removing the Head Restraint1. Pull up the head restraint until it

reaches the highest adjustmentposition.

2. Press and hold buttons C and D.3. Pull up the head restraint.

150


Seats

Note: For rear seat outboard seats, you canfold the head restraint forward for easierremoval.

Installing the Head RestraintAlign the steel stems into the guide sleevesand push the head restraint down until itlocks.

Folding the Head RestraintNote: The rear seat outboard headrestraints may fold forward for improvedvisibility.1. Press and hold button E.2. Pull it back up to reset.

Front Seat Center Head RestraintYour vehicle may be equipped with a frontrow center head restraint that you cannotadjust or remove.

Tilting Head Restraints (If Equipped)The front head restraints tilt for extracomfort. To tilt the head restraint, do thefollowing:

E144727

1. Adjust the seatback to an uprightdriving or riding position.

2. Pivot the head restraint forward towardyour head to the desired position.

After the head restraint reaches theforward-most tilt position, pivot it forwardagain to release it to the rearward, untiltedposition.Note: Do not attempt to force the headrestraint backward after it is tilted. Instead,continue tilting it forward until the headrestraint releases to the upright position.

MANUAL SEATS (If Equipped)

WARNINGDo not adjust the driver's seat orseatback when your vehicle ismoving.

Moving the Seat Backward andForward

E175314

151


Seats

Recline Adjustment

E175315

Manual Lumbar (If Equipped)

E166702

The lumbar support control is located onthe outboard side of the seat. Turn thecontrol to adjust your support.

POWER SEATS (If Equipped)

WARNINGSDo not adjust the driver seat or seatbackrest when your vehicle ismoving. This may result in sudden

seat movement, causing the loss of controlof your vehicle.

Do not place cargo or any objectsbehind the seatback before returningit to the original position.

152


Seats

E176038

Power Lumbar (If Equipped)

E176039

Multi-Contour Front Seats WithActive Motion (If Equipped)

Note: The massage system turns off after20 minutes.

Note: The engine must be running or thevehicle must be in accessory mode toactivate the seats.Note: Allow a few seconds for any selectionto activate. When the seatback and cushionare both active, the massage will alternatebetween zones

E156301

153


Seats

Lumbar and bolster modeMassage mode

Upper lumbarBack massage intensityadjustment

A

Lumbar decreaseMassage intensity decreaseand off*

B

Lower lumbar**Cushion massage intensityadjustment

C

Lumbar increaseMassage intensity increaseD

-On and offE

*The massage feature defaults to analternating massage mode with backmassage intensity adjustment. The lumbarand bolster feature defaults to the middlelumbar mode.**Press C a second time to adjust the backbolster. Press C a third time to adjust thecushion bolster.You can also adjust this feature throughthe touchscreen. When switched on, thesystem displays directions for you to adjustthe lumbar settings in your seat or to setthe massage function. To access and makeadjustments to the lumbar setting:1. Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle

> Multi-contour Seat.2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.3. Press the + or - to adjust the lumbar

intensity.To access and make adjustments to themassage setting:1. Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle

>Multi-contour Seat.2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.3. Press Off, Low or High.

MEMORY FUNCTION (If Equipped)

WARNINGSBefore activating the seat memory,make sure that the area immediatelysurrounding the seat is clear of

obstructions and that all occupants areclear of moving parts.

Do not use the memory functionwhen your vehicle is moving.

This function automatically recalls theposition of these features:• Driver seat.• Power mirrors.• Optional power steering column.• Optional power adjustable pedals.The memory control is on the driver door.

154


Seats

E142554

Saving a PreSet Position1. Switch the ignition on.2. Adjust the seat, exterior mirrors, power

adjustable pedals and power steeringcolumn to your desired position.

3. Press and hold the desired presetbutton until you hear a single tone.

Note: A confirmation that you saved amemory preset appears in the informationdisplay.You can save up to three preset memorypositions. You can save a memory presetat any time.

Recalling a PreSet PositionPress and release the preset buttonassociated with your desired drivingposition. The seat, mirrors, pedals andsteering column move to the positionstored for that preset.Note: You can only recall a preset memoryposition when the ignition is off, or when youplace the transmission in park (P) or neutral(N) if the ignition is on.Note: Press any seat or mirror adjustmentswitch (or any memory button) during amemory recall to cancel the operation.

You can also recall a preset memoryposition by:• Pressing the unlock button on your

intelligent access key fob if you linkedit to a preset position.

• Unlocking the intelligent driver doorhandle if a linked key fob is present.

• Entering a personal entry code on theSecuricode keypad. See KeylessEntry (page 66).

Note: Using a linked key fob to recall yourmemory position when the ignition is off willmove the seat and steering column to theEasy Entry position.

Linking a PreSet Position to yourRemote Control or IntelligentAccess KeyYour vehicle can save the preset memorypositions for up to three remote controlsor intelligent access (IA) keys.1. With the ignition on, move the memory

features to the position you desire.2. Press and hold the desired preset

button for about five seconds. A tonesounds after about two seconds.Continue holding until you hear asecond tone.

3. Within three seconds, press the lockbutton on the remote control you arelinking.

To unlink a remote control, follow thesame procedure – except in Step 3, pressthe unlock button on the remote control.

Easy Entry and Exit FeatureIf you enable the easy entry and exitfeature, it automatically moves the driverseat position rearward up to two inches(five centimeters) when you switch theignition off. The driver seat returns to theprevious position when you switch theignition on.

155


Seats

You can enable or disable this feature inthe information display. See InformationDisplays (page 110).

REAR SEATSFolding Up the Rear Seat CushionThe rear seat has a split 60/40 cushion.You can flip each seat cushion up into avertical storage position.

E181250

Rotate the seat cushion up until it locksinto the vertical storage position.

Returning the Seat to the SeatingPosition

WARNINGMake sure that cargo or any objectsare not trapped underneath the seatcushion before returning the seat

cushion to its original position, and that theseat cushion returns to the full downposition. Failure to do so may prevent theseat from operating properly in the eventof a crash, which could increase the risk ofserious injury.

E166704

Pull the control on the bottom of the seatcushion to release the seat cushion fromthe storage position.

HEATED SEATS (If Equipped)

WARNINGPeople who are unable to feel painto their skin because of advancedage, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal

cord injury, medication, alcohol use,exhaustion or other physical conditions,must exercise care when using the heatedseat. The heated seat may cause burnseven at low temperatures, especially ifused for long periods of time. Do not placeanything on the seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket or cushion. Thismay cause the heated seat to overheat.Do not puncture the seat with pins, needlesor other pointed objects. This may damagethe heating element which may cause theheated seat to overheat. An overheatedseat may cause serious personal injury.

Do not do the following:• Place heavy objects on the seat.• Operate the heated seat if water or any

other liquid spills on the seat. Allow theseat to dry thoroughly.

Note: The engine must be running to usethis feature.

156


Seats

E146322

Press the heated seat symbol to cyclethrough the various heat settings and off.More indicator lights indicate warmersettings.Note: The heated seats may remain onafter you remote start your vehicle, basedon your remote start settings. The heatedseats may also turn on when you start yourvehicle if they were on when you switchedyour vehicle off.

Rear Heated Seats (If Equipped)

WARNINGPeople who are unable to feel painto their skin because of advancedage, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal

cord injury, medication, alcohol use,exhaustion or other physical conditions,must exercise care when using the heatedseat. The heated seat may cause burnseven at low temperatures, especially ifused for long periods of time. Do not placeanything on the seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket or cushion. Thismay cause the heated seat to overheat.Do not puncture the seat with pins, needlesor other pointed objects. This may damagethe heating element which may cause theheated seat to overheat. An overheatedseat may cause serious personal injury.

Do not do the following:• Place heavy objects on the seat.• Operate the heated seat if water or any


Note: The engine must be running to usethis feature.The rear seat heat controls are on the rearof the center console.

E146322

Press the heated seat symbol to cyclethrough the various heat settings and off.More indicator lights indicate warmersettings.The heated seat module resets at everyignition run cycle. While the ignition is inthe on position, press the heated seatswitch to enable heating mode. Whenactivated, they turn off automatically whenyou switch off the engine.

CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS(If Equipped)

Heated Seats

157


Seats

WARNINGPersons who are unable to feel painto the skin because of advanced age,chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord

injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion,or other physical conditions, must exercisecare when using the seat heater. The seatheater may cause burns even at lowtemperatures, especially if used for longperiods of time. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates against heat, suchas a blanket or cushion, because this maycause the seat heater to overheat. Do notpuncture the seat with pins, needles, orother pointed objects because this maydamage the heating element which maycause the seat heater to overheat. Anoverheated seat may cause seriouspersonal injury.

Note: Do not do the following:• Place heavy objects on the seat.• Operate the seat heater if water or any


• Operate the heated seats unless theengine is running. Doing so can causethe battery to lose charge.

E146322

Touch the heated seat symbol to cyclethrough the various heat settings and off.More indicator lights indicate warmersettings.

Cooled SeatsThe cooled seats only function when theengine is running.

E146309

To operate the cooled seats:Touch the cooled seat symbol to cyclethrough the various cooling settings andoff. More indicator lights indicate coolersettings.If the engine falls below 350 RPM whilethe cooled seats are on, the feature turnsitself off. You need to reactivate it.

Climate controlled seat air filterreplacementYour vehicle is equipped with lifetime airfilters that are integrated with the seats.Regular maintenance or replacement isnot needed.

158


Seats

FRONT SEAT ARMREST (If

Equipped)

E175382

Press the release control to move the frontseat armrest up or down.

E184821

Lift the latch to open the lid and gainaccess to the optional storagecompartment under the center seatcushion.The cupholder is located inside the frontseat armrest. You can also flip thecupholder so that it faces forward. SeeCenter Console (page 166).

REAR SEAT ARMREST (If Equipped)

E181222

Pull the strap located on the centerseatback to access the armrest andcupholders.The cupholders are located inside the rearseat armrest.To open the cupholders:1. Push in gently on the center of the

plastic panel at the front edge of thearmrest. The cupholders will partiallyopen.

2. Pull the cupholder fully open beforeusing.

159


Seats

HomeLink Wireless ControlSystem

WARNINGSMake sure that the garage door andsecurity device are free fromobstruction when you are

programming. Do not program the systemwith the vehicle in the garage.

Do not use the system with anygarage door opener that does nothave the safety stop and reverse

feature as required by U.S. Federal SafetyStandards (this includes any garage dooropener manufactured before April 1, 1982).A garage door opener which cannot detectan object, signaling the door to stop andreverse, does not meet current federalsafety standards. Using a garage dooropener without these features increasesthe risk of serious injury or death.

Note: Make sure you keep the originalremote control transmitter for use in othervehicles as well as for future systemprogramming.Note: We recommend that upon the saleor lease termination of your vehicle, youerase the programmed function buttons forsecurity reasons. See Erasing the FunctionButton Codes later in this section.Note: You can program a maximum ofthree devices. To change or replace any ofthe three devices after it has been initiallyprogrammed, you must first erase thecurrent settings. See Erasing the FunctionButton Codes.

E188211

The universal garage door opener replacesthe common hand-held garage dooropener with a three-button transmitterintegrated into the driver’s sun visor.The system includes two primary features,a garage door opener and a platform forremote activation of devices within thehome. You can program garage doors aswell as entry gate operators, securitysystems, entry door locks and home oroffice lighting.Additional system information can befound online at www.homelink.com,www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentexor by calling the toll-free help line at1-800-355-3515.

In-Vehicle ProgrammingThis process is to program your in-vehicleHomeLink function button with yourhand-held transmitter.Note: The programming steps belowassume you will be programming HomeLinkthat was not previously programmed. If yourHomeLink was previously programmed, youmay need to erase your HomeLink buttons.See Erasing the Function Button Codes.Note: Put a new battery in the hand-heldtransmitter. This helps ensure quickertraining and accurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

160


Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)

E188212

1. With your vehicle parked outside of thegarage, switch your ignition to the onposition, but do not start your vehicle.

2. Press and release the function buttonthat you would like to program.

3. Hold your hand-held garage doortransmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away fromthe HomeLink button you want toprogram.

4. Press and hold the hand-heldtransmitter button you want toprogram while watching the indicatorlight on HomeLink. Continue to holdthe hand-held button until theHomeLink indicator light flashes rapidlyor is continuously on.

Note: You may need to use a differentmethod if you live in Canada or havedifficulties programming your gate operatoror garage door opener. See Gate Operator/ Canadian Programming.5. Press and hold the HomeLink button

you programmed for two seconds, thenrelease. You may need to do this twiceto activate the door. If your garage doordoes not operate, watch the HomeLinkindicator light.

If the indicator light stays on, theprogramming is complete. Your deviceshould activate when the HomeLinkbutton is pressed and released.

If the indicator light flashes rapidly, pressand hold for two seconds and release theprogrammed HomeLink button. Repeatthe "press/hold/release" sequence up tothree times to complete the programmingprocess. If your device still does notoperate, you must program your garagedoor. See Programming Your GarageDoor Opener Motor.To program additional buttons, repeatSteps 1 – 4.For questions or comments, please contactHomeLink at www.homelink.com,www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentexor by calling the toll-free help line at1-800-355-3515.

Programming Your Garage DoorOpener MotorNote: You may need a ladder to reach theunit and you may need to remove the coveror lamp lens on your garage door opener.

E142659

1. Press the learn button on the garagedoor opener motor and then you have30 seconds to complete the next twosteps.

2. Return to your vehicle.

161



E188212

3. Press and hold the function button youwant to program for 2 seconds, thenrelease. Repeat this step. Dependingon your brand of garage door opener,you may need to repeat this sequencea third time.

Gate Operator / CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws requiretransmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)after several seconds of transmission –which may not be long enough forHomeLink to pick up the signal duringprogramming. Similar to this Canadian law,some U.S. gate operators are designed to“time-out” in the same manner.Note: If programming a garage door openeror gate operator, it is advised to unplug thedevice during the “cycling” process toprevent possible overheating.1. Press and release, every two seconds,

your hand-held transmitter until theHomeLink indicator light changes to arapidly blinking or continuously on light.

2. Release the hand-held transmitterbutton.

3. Continue programing HomeLink. SeeIn-Vehicle Programming, Step 4.

Erasing the Function Button CodesNote: You cannot erase individual buttons.

E188213

1. Press and hold the outer two functionbuttons simultaneously forapproximately 10 seconds until theindicator light above the buttonsflashes rapidly.

2. When the indicator light flashes,release the buttons. You erased thecodes for all buttons.

Reprogramming a Single ButtonTo program a device to a previously trainedbutton, follow these steps:1. Press and hold the desired button. Do

NOT release the button.2. The indicator light begins to flash after

20 seconds. Without releasing thebutton, follow Step 1 in theProgramming section.

For questions or comments, contactHomeLink at www.homelink.com,www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentexor by calling the toll-free help line at1-800-355-3515.

162



FCC and RSS-210 Industry CanadaComplianceThis device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.Note: Changes or modifications to yourdevice not expressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance can void theuser’s authority to operate the equipment.This equipment complies with FCCradiation exposure limits set forth for anuncontrolled environment. End Users mustfollow the specific operating instructionsfor satisfying RF exposure compliance. Thistransmitter must be at least 8 in (20 cm)from the user and must not be co-locatedor operating in conjunction with any otherantenna or transmitter.The term “IC:” before thecertification/registration number onlysignifies that Industry Canada technicalspecifications were met.

163



12 Volt DC Power PointWARNINGS

Do not plug optional electricalaccessories into the cigar lightersocket. Incorrect use of the cigar

lighter can cause damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty, and can result in fireor serious injury.

Do not use a power point foroperating a cigar lighter. Incorrectuse of the power points can cause

damage not covered by the vehiclewarranty, and can result in fire or seriousinjury.

Note: When you switch the ignition on, youcan use the socket to power 12 voltappliances with a maximum current ratingof 20 amps.Note: Do not hang any accessory from theaccessory plug.Note: Do not use the power point over thevehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 240 watts ora fuse may blow.Note: Always keep the power point capsclosed when not in use.Do not insert objects other than anaccessory plug into the power point. Thiswill damage the power point and blow thefuse.Run the vehicle for full capacity use of thepower point.To prevent the battery from running out ofcharge:• Do not use the power point longer than

necessary when the vehicle is notrunning.

• Do not leave devices plugged inovernight or when you park your vehiclefor extended periods.

LocationsPower points may be in the followinglocations:• On the instrument panel.• Inside the center console.• On the rear of the center console.• Inside the front under-seat storage

compartment.Note: Timed power points remain on for 30minutes if the vehicle is in accessory mode.If you switch the vehicle off, the timedpower points remain on for 75 minutes.

110 Volt - 400 Watt Capacity ACPower Outlet

WARNINGDo not keep electrical devicesplugged in the power point wheneverthe device is not in use. Do not use

any extension cord with the 110 volt ACpower point, since it will defeat the safetyprotection design. Doing so may cause thepower point to overload due to poweringmultiple devices that can reach beyondthe 400 watt load limit and could result infire or serious injury.

E191617

164


Auxiliary Power Points

When the indicator light on the power pointis:• On: The power point is working, the

ignition is on and a device is pluggedin.

• Off: The power point is off, the ignitionis off or no device is plugged in.

• Flashing: The power point is in faultmode.

The power outlet temporarily turns offpower when in fault mode if the deviceexceeds the 400 watt limit. Unplug yourdevice and switch the ignition off. Switchthe ignition back on, but do not plug yourdevice back in. Let the system cool off andswitch the ignition off to reset the faultmode. Switch the ignition back on andmake sure the indicator light remains on.You can use the 400 watt power outlet forthese types of electric devices:• Electric hand drills.• Rechargeable power tools.• Video games.• Laptops.• Televisions.Do not use the power point for certainelectric devices, including:• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,

electric saws and other electric powertools or compressor-drivenrefrigerators.

• Measuring devices, which processprecise data, such as medicalequipment or measuring equipment.

• Other appliances requiring anextremely stable power supply such asmicrocomputer-controlled electricblankets or touch-sensor lamps.

Note: This feature works only when thevehicle is running.

Note: This feature has a maximum outputof 400 watts when the vehicle is in park (P).Note: While in drive (D), the maximumoutlet output is 300 watts.Note: When powering electric devices thatrequire more than 10 watts in vehiclesequipped with keyless start, the vehiclemust remain running. It does not allow youto switch the ignition off or switch theignition to accessory mode.

165


Auxiliary Power Points

CENTER CONSOLE (If Equipped)

Stow items in the cup holder carefully asitems may become loose during hardbraking, acceleration or crashes, includinghot drinks which may spill.In vehicles with a 40-20-40 split-benchseat, the cup holders are inside of thefolding console.

E185121

To use the cup holders:1. Lift the console lid up to open.2. Lift the cup holders up and rotate them

outward.3. Close the console.Vehicles with a console-mounted shifterfeature cup holders molded into theconsole.

E176222

A. Front cup holders.B. Rear cup holders.

E176223

Available console features include:A. 12 volt DC power point.B. One of the following:

• USB ports and SD card slot.• Audio input jack and USB port.• Audio input jack.

C. 12-volt power point.D. Locking storage compartment with

hanging file folder supports and roomfor a laptop computer.

E. 110 volt AC power point.F. 12 volt DC power point.

166


Storage Compartments

OVERHEAD CONSOLE (If Equipped)

E224959

Press near the rear edge of the door toopen it.

167


Storage Compartments

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNINGSExtended idling at high enginespeeds can produce very hightemperatures in the engine and

exhaust system, creating the risk of fire orother damage.

Do not park, idle or drive your vehicleon dry grass or other dry groundcover. The emission system heats up

the engine compartment and exhaustsystem, creating the risk of fire.

Do not start the engine in a closedgarage or in other enclosed areas.Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always

open the garage door before you start theengine.

If you smell exhaust fumes insideyour vehicle, have your vehiclechecked by an authorized dealer

immediately. Do not drive your vehicle ifyou smell exhaust fumes.

If you disconnect the battery, your vehiclemay exhibit some unusual drivingcharacteristics for approximately 5 miles(8 kilometers) after you reconnect it. Thisis because the engine management systemmust realign itself with the engine. You candisregard any unusual drivingcharacteristics during this period.The powertrain control system meets allCanadian interference-causing equipmentstandard requirements regulating theimpulse electrical field or radio noise.When you start the engine, avoid pressingthe accelerator pedal before and duringoperation. Only use the accelerator pedalwhen you have difficulty starting theengine.

IGNITION SWITCH (If Equipped)

C

DB

A

E163165

A (off) - The ignition is off.Note: When you switch the ignition off andleave your vehicle, do not leave your key inthe ignition. This could cause your vehiclebattery to lose charge.B (accessory) - Allows the electricalaccessories, such as the radio, to operatewhile the engine is not running.Note: Do not leave the ignition key in thisposition for too long. This could cause yourvehicle battery to lose charge.C (on) - All electrical circuits areoperational and the warning lamps andindicators illuminate.D (start) - Cranks the engine.

KEYLESS STARTING (If Equipped)

Note: The keyless starting system may notfunction if the key is close to metal objectsor electronic devices such as cellularphones.Note: A valid key must be located insideyour vehicle to switch the ignition on andstart the engine.

168


Starting and Stopping the Engine

Ignition Modes

E144447

The keyless starting system has threemodes:Off: Turns the ignition off.• Without applying the brake pedal,

press and release the button oncewhen the ignition is in the on mode, orwhen the engine is running but thevehicle is not moving.

On: All electrical circuits are operationaland the warning lamps and indicatorsilluminate.• Without applying the brake pedal,

press and release the button once.Start: Starts the vehicle. The engine maynot start when the vehicle starts.• Press the brake pedal, and then press

the button for any length of time. Anindicator light on the button illuminateswhen then ignition is on and when theengine starts.

STEERING WHEEL LOCK (If

Equipped)

WARNINGAlways check that the steering isunlocked before attempting to moveyour vehicle.

To lock the steering wheel:1. Remove the key from the ignition.2. Rotate the steering wheel 180° from

the straight ahead position to engagethe lock.

To unlock the steering wheel:1. Insert the key in the ignition.2. Turn the key to the on position.Note: You may need to rotate the steeringwheel slightly to assist unlocking if there isa steering wheel load applied.

STARTING A GASOLINEENGINEWhen you start the engine, the idle speedincreases. This helps to warm up theengine. If the engine idle speed does notslow down automatically, have yourvehicle checked by an authorized dealer.Note: You can crank the engine for a totalof 60 seconds (without the engine starting)before the starting system temporarilydisables. The 60 seconds does not have tobe all at once. For example, if you crank theengine three times for 20 seconds eachtime, without the engine starting, youreached the 60-second time limit. Amessage appears in the information displayalerting you that you exceeded the crankingtime. You cannot attempt to start the enginefor at least 15 minutes. After 15 minutes, youare limited to a 15-second engine crankingtime. You need to wait 60 minutes beforeyou can crank the engine for 60 secondsagain.Before starting the engine, check thefollowing:• Make sure all occupants have fastened

their safety belts.• Make sure the headlamps and

electrical accessories are off.• Make sure the parking brake is on.

169



• Move the transmission selector leverto position P.

• Turn the ignition key to on. If yourvehicle is equipped with a keylessignition, see the following instructions.

Vehicles with an Ignition KeyNote: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.1. Fully depress the brake pedal.2. Turn the key to start to start the engine.

Release the key when the engine starts.Note: The engine may continue crankingfor up to 15 seconds or until it starts.Note: If you cannot start the engine on thefirst try, wait for a short period and try again.

Vehicles with Keyless StartNote: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.Note: You must have your intelligent accesskey in the vehicle in order to shift thetransmission out of position P.1. Fully depress the brake pedal.2. Press the button.The system does not function if:• The key frequencies are jammed.• The key battery has no charge.If you are unable to start the engine, locatethe backup slot (A) in one of two positions:Type One

E187576

Type Two

E187577

1. If your vehicle is equipped with TypeOne, make sure to place the keyproperly into the backup slot.

2. If your vehicle is equipped with TypeTwo, make sure the buttons are facingthe rear of the vehicle and the key ringup. Place the key into the backup slot.

3. With the key in this position, press thebrake pedal, and then the button toswitch on the engine.

Fast RestartThe fast restart feature allows you torestart the engine within 20 seconds ofswitching it off, even if a valid key is notpresent.Within 20 seconds of switching the engineoff, press the brake pedal and press thebutton. After 20 seconds have expired, youcan no longer restart the engine withoutthe key present inside your vehicle.Once the engine has started, it remainsrunning until you press the button, even ifthe system does not detect a valid key. Ifyou open and close a door while the engineis running, the system searches for a validkey. You cannot restart the engine if thesystem does not detect a valid key within20 seconds.

170



Failure to StartIf you cannot start the engine after threeattempts, wait 10 seconds and follow thisprocedure:1. Fully press the brake pedal.2. Move the transmission selector lever

to position P.3. Fully press the accelerator pedal and

hold it there.4. Start the engine.

Automatic Engine ShutdownIf your vehicle is equipped with a keylessignition, it has a feature that automaticallyshuts down the engine if it has been idlingfor an extended period. The ignition alsoturns off in order to save battery power.Before the engine shuts down, a messageappears in the information display showinga timer counting down from 30 seconds.If you do not intervene within 30 seconds,the engine shuts down. Another messageappears in the information display toinform you that the engine has shut downin order to save fuel. Start your vehicle asyou normally do.

Automatic Engine Shutdown OverrideNote: You cannot permanently switch offthe automatic engine shutdown feature.When you switch it off temporarily, it turnson at the next ignition cycle.You can stop the engine shutdown, or resetthe timer, at any point before the30-second countdown has expired bydoing any of the following:

• You can reset the timer by interactingwith your vehicle (such as pressing thebrake pedal or accelerator pedal).

• You can temporarily switch off theshutdown feature any time the ignitionis on (for the current ignition cycleonly). Use the information display todo so. See Information Displays(page 110).

• During the countdown before engineshutdown, you are prompted to pressOK or RESET (depending on your typeof information display) to temporarilyswitch the feature off (for the currentignition cycle only).

Stopping the Engine When YourVehicle is StationaryVehicles with an Ignition Key1. Move the transmission selector lever

to position P.2. Turn the key to off.3. Apply the parking brake.

Vehicles with Keyless Start1. Move the transmission selector lever

to position P.2. Press the button once.3. Apply the parking brake.Note: This switches off the ignition, allelectrical circuits, warning lamps andindicators.Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,the ignition and engine automatically shutdown.

171



Stopping the Engine When YourVehicle is Moving

WARNINGSwitching off the engine when thevehicle is still moving will result in aloss of brake and steering assistance.

The steering will not lock, but higher effortwill be required. When the ignition isswitched off, some electrical circuits,including air bags, warning lamps andindicators may also be off. If the ignitionwas turned off accidentally, you can shiftinto neutral (N) and re-start the engine.

Vehicles with an Ignition Key1. Move the transmission selector lever

to position N and use the brakes tobring your vehicle to a safe stop.

2. When your vehicle has stopped, movethe transmission selector lever toposition P and turn the key to off.

3. Apply the parking brake.

Vehicles with Keyless Start1. Move the transmission selector lever

to position N and use the brakes tobring your vehicle to a safe stop.

2. When your vehicle has stopped, movethe transmission selector lever toposition P.

3. Press and hold the button for onesecond, or press it three times withintwo seconds.

4. Apply the parking brake.

Guarding Against Exhaust FumesWARNING

Exhaust leaks may result in entry ofharmful and potentially lethal fumesinto the passenger compartment. If

you smell exhaust fumes inside yourvehicle, have your vehicle inspectedimmediately. Do not drive if you smellexhaust fumes.

Important Ventilating InformationIf you stop your vehicle and leave theengine idling for long periods, werecommend that you do one of thefollowing:• Open the windows at least 1 in

(2.5 cm).• Set your climate control to outside air.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If

Equipped)

WARNINGSFailure to follow engine block heaterinstructions could result in propertydamage or serious personal injury.Do not use your heater withungrounded electrical systems ortwo-pronged adapters. There is a risk

of electrical shock.Do not fully close the hood, or allowit to drop under its own weight whenusing the engine block heater. This

could damage the power cable and maycause an electrical short resulting in fire,injury and property damage.

Note: The heater is most effective whenoutdoor temperatures are below 0°F(-18°C).

172



The heater acts as a starting aid bywarming the engine coolant. This allowsthe climate control system to respondquickly. The equipment includes a heaterelement (installed in the engine block) anda wire harness. You can connect thesystem to a grounded 120-volt ACelectrical source.We recommend that you do the followingfor a safe and correct operation:• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord

that is product certified byUnderwriter’s Laboratory (UL) orCanadian Standards Association(CSA). This extension cord must besuitable for use outdoors, in coldtemperatures, and be clearly markedSuitable for Use with OutdoorAppliances. Do not use an indoorextension cord outdoors. This couldresult in an electric shock or become afire hazard.

• Use as short an extension cord aspossible.

• Do not use multiple extension cords.• Make sure that when in operation, the

extension cord plug and heater cordplug connections are free and clear ofwater. This could cause an electricshock or fire.

• Make sure your vehicle is parked in aclean area, clear of combustibles.

• Make sure the heater, heater cord andextension cord are firmly connected.

• Check for heat anywhere in theelectrical hookup once the system hasbeen operating for approximately 30minutes.

• Make sure the system is unplugged andproperly stowed before starting anddriving your vehicle. Make sure theprotective cover seals the prongs of theblock heater cord plug when not in use.

• Make sure the heater system ischecked for proper operation beforewinter.

Using the Engine Block HeaterMake sure the receptacle terminals areclean and dry prior to use. Clean them witha dry cloth if necessary.The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hoursof energy per hour of use. The system doesnot have a thermostat. It achievesmaximum temperature afterapproximately three hours of operation.Using the heater longer than three hoursdoes not improve system performance andunnecessarily uses electricity.

173



AUTO-START-STOP (If Equipped)

The system helps reduce fuel consumptionby automatically stopping and restartingthe engine when your vehicle has stopped.The engine restarts automatically whenyou release the brake pedal.In some situations, your vehicle may restartautomatically, for example:• To maintain interior comfort.• To recharge the battery.Note: Power assist steering turns off whenthe engine is off.

WARNINGSThe engine may restartautomatically if required by thesystem.Switch the ignition off beforeopening the hood or performing anymaintenance. Failure to do so may

result in serious injuries due to automaticengine restart.

Always switch the ignition off beforeleaving your vehicle, as the systemmay have turned the engine off, but

the ignition will still be on and automaticrestart may occur.

The Auto StartStop system status isavailable at a glance within the informationdisplay. See Information Displays (page110).

Enabling Auto StartStopThe system automatically enables everytime you start your vehicle if:• You do not press the Auto StartStop

button (not illuminated).• Your vehicle exceeds an initial speed

of 3 mph (5 km/h) after you haveinitially started your vehicle.

• You have stopped your vehicle.

• Your foot is on the brake pedal.• The transmission is in drive (D) or Sport

mode (enable by pressing the AutoStartStop button).

• The driver door is closed.• There is adequate brake vacuum.• The interior compartment has cooled

or warmed to an acceptable level.• The front windshield defroster is off.• You have not turned the steering wheel

rapidly or you do not have it at a sharpangle.

• The vehicle is not on a steep roadgrade.

• The battery is within optimal operatingconditions (battery state of charge andtemperature in range).

• The engine coolant is at operatingtemperature.

• Elevation is below about 10000 feet(3048 meters).

• Ambient temperature is moderate.• You have selected 4X2 or Auto mode.• If equipped with Terrain mode, and you

select auto snow/ice mode only.• The trailer is not connected.• You have not selected Tow haul.• You have not selected Manual mode.Note: The system allows multiplesuccessive Auto StartStop events, but itmay not operate in conditions of heavytraffic or in extended low speed operation.

The green Auto StartStopindicator light on the instrumentcluster will illuminate to indicate

when the automatic engine stop occurs.

174


Unique Driving Characteristics

E146361

If the instrument cluster isequipped with a grey AutoStartStop indicator light, it

illuminates when automatic engine stopis not available due to one of the abovenoted conditions not being met.

Automatic Engine RestartAny of the following conditions will resultin an automatic restart of the engine:• You have removed your foot from the

brake pedal.• You press the accelerator pedal.• You press the accelerator and the

brake pedal at the same time.• The driver safety belt becomes

unfastened or the driver door is ajar.• You have moved the transmission from

drive (D) to any gear except park (P).• Your vehicle is moving.• The interior compartment does not

meet customer comfort when airconditioning or heat is on.

• Fogging of the windows could occurand the air conditioning is on.

• The battery is not within optimaloperating conditions.

• You have exceeded the maximumengine off time.

• When you press the Auto StartStopbutton with the engine automaticallystopped.

• The front defroster is turned to the Maxsetting.

Any of the following conditions may resultin an automatic restart of the engine:• You have increased the blower fan

speed or changed the climate controltemperature.

• You have an electrical accessoryturned on or plugged in.

Note: You may notice that the climate seatfan fluctuates during an automatic restart.

Disabling Auto StartStop

E181352

Press the Auto StartStop button locatedon the center console to switch the systemoff. The button will illuminate. This will onlydeactivate the system for the currentignition cycle. Press the button again torestore Auto StartStop function.Note: If the Shift to P, Restart Enginemessage appears and the amber AutoStartStop indicator light is flashing,automatic restart is not available. You mustrestart the vehicle manually. SeeInformation Displays (page 110).If your vehicle is in an engine off AutoStartStop state and you change thetransmission to reverse (R) while the brakepedal is not pressed, the message AutoStartStop Press Brake to Start Engine willappear. You must press the brake pedalwithin 10 seconds or a shift to park (P) anda manual restart will be required.

175


Unique Driving Characteristics

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNINGSDo not overfill the fuel tank. Thepressure in an overfilled tank maycause leakage and lead to fuel spray

and fire.The fuel system may be underpressure. If you hear a hissing soundnear the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel

until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel mayspray out, which could cause seriouspersonal injury.

Automotive fuels can cause seriousinjury or death if misused ormishandled.Flow of fuel through a fuel pumpnozzle can produce static electricity.This can cause a fire if you are filling

an ungrounded fuel container.Fuel may contain benzene, which isa cancer-causing agent.When refueling always shut theengine off and never allow sparks oropen flames near the fuel tank filler

valve. Never smoke or use a cell phonewhile refueling. Fuel vapor is extremelyhazardous under certain conditions. Avoidinhaling excess fumes.

Observe the following guidelines whenhandling automotive fuel:• Extinguish all smoking materials and

any open flames before refueling yourvehicle.

• Always turn off the vehicle beforerefueling.

• Automotive fuels can be harmful orfatal if swallowed. Fuel such asgasoline is highly toxic and ifswallowed can cause death orpermanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,call a physician immediately, even if nosymptoms are immediately apparent.The toxic effects of fuel may not bevisible for hours.

• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling toomuch fuel vapor of any kind can leadto eye and respiratory tract irritation.In severe cases, excessive or prolongedbreathing of fuel vapor can causeserious illness and permanent injury.

• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. Iffuel is splashed in the eyes, removecontact lenses (if worn), flush withwater for 15 minutes and seek medicalattention. Failure to seek propermedical attention could lead topermanent injury.

• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbedthrough the skin. If fuel is splashed onthe skin, clothing or both, promptlyremove contaminated clothing andwash skin thoroughly with soap andwater. Repeated or prolonged skincontact with fuel liquid or vapor causesskin irritation.

• Be particularly careful if you are takingAntabuse or other forms of Disulfiramfor the treatment of alcoholism.Breathing gasoline vapors could causean adverse reaction, serious personalinjury or sickness. If fuel is splashed onthe skin, wash the affected areasimmediately with plenty of soap andwater. Consult a physician immediatelyif you experience any adverse reactions.

176


Fuel and Refueling

FUEL QUALITY - E85Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex FuelVehiclesFlex fuel vehicles have one of the followingidentifiers:• Yellow fuel filler cap.• Yellow bezel around the fuel filler inlet.• Yellow fuel filler housing.• Yellow E85 label on the fuel tank filler

door.

E161513

Your vehicle is designed to operate onregular unleaded gasoline with a minimumpump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 orregular unleaded gasoline blended with amaximum of 85% ethanol (E85).Some fuel stations, particularly those inhigh altitude areas, offer fuels posted asregular unleaded gasoline with an octanerating below 87. We do not recommendthese fuels.For best overall vehicle and engineperformance, premium fuel with an octanerating of 91 or higher is recommended. Theperformance gained by using premium fuelis most noticeable in hot weather as wellas other conditions, for example whentowing a trailer. See Towing (page 256).Do not use any fuel other than thoserecommended because they could lead toengine damage that will not be covered bythe vehicle Warranty.

Note: Use of any fuel other than thoserecommended can impair the emissioncontrol system and cause a loss of vehicleperformance.Do not use:• Diesel fuel.• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.• Fuels containing more than 85%

ethanol or E100 fuel.• Fuels containing methanol.• Fuels containing metallic-based

additives, including manganese-basedcompounds.

• Fuels containing the octane boosteradditive, methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl (MMT).

• Leaded fuel (using leaded fuel isprohibited by law).

The use of fuels with metallic compoundssuch as methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl (commonly knownas MMT), which is a manganese-basedfuel additive, will impair engineperformance and affect the emissioncontrol system.Do not be concerned if the enginesometimes knocks lightly. However, if theengine knocks heavily while using fuel withthe recommended octane rating, contactan authorized dealer to prevent any enginedamage.

177


Fuel and Refueling

Switching Between E85 andGasolineWe do not recommend repeatedlyalternating between E85 and gasoline. Ifyou switch from using E85 to gasoline, orfrom gasoline to E85, add as much fuel aspossible, at least half a tank. Drive yourvehicle immediately for a minimum of 5 mi(8 km) to allow it to adapt to the changein ethanol concentration. If you use E85exclusively, we recommend that you fillthe fuel tank with regular unleadedgasoline at each scheduled oil change.

FUEL QUALITY - GASOLINEChoosing the Right Fuel

E161513

Your vehicle is designed to operate onregular unleaded gasoline with a minimumpump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.Some fuel stations, particularly those inhigh altitude areas, offer fuels posted asregular unleaded gasoline with an octanerating below 87. We do not recommendthese fuels.For best overall vehicle and engineperformance, premium fuel with an octanerating of 91 or higher is recommended. Theperformance gained by using premium fuelis most noticeable in hot weather as wellas other conditions, for example whentowing a trailer. See Towing (page 256).

Do not use any fuel other than thoserecommended because they could lead toengine damage that will not be covered bythe vehicle Warranty.Note: Use of any fuel other than thoserecommended can impair the emissioncontrol system and cause a loss of vehicleperformance.Do not use:• Diesel fuel.• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol

or E85 fuel.• Fuels containing methanol.• Fuels containing metallic-based

additives, including manganese-basedcompounds.

• Fuels containing the octane boosteradditive, methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl (MMT).

• Leaded fuel (using leaded fuel isprohibited by law).

The use of fuels with metallic compoundssuch as methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl (commonly knownas MMT), which is a manganese-basedfuel additive, will impair engineperformance and affect the emissioncontrol system.Do not be concerned if the enginesometimes knocks lightly. However, if theengine knocks heavily while using fuel withthe recommended octane rating, contactan authorized dealer to prevent any enginedamage.

FUEL FILLER FUNNELLOCATION - REGULAR CABThe fuel filler funnel is behind theright-hand front seat.

178


Fuel and Refueling

FUEL FILLER FUNNELLOCATION - SUPERCAB/SUPERCREWThe fuel filler funnel is under the secondrow right-hand rear seat.

RUNNING OUT OF FUELRunning out of fuel can cause damage notcovered by the vehicle Warranty.If your vehicle runs out of fuel:• Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel

to restart the engine. If your vehicle isout of fuel and on a steep slope, morefuel may be required.

• You may need to switch the ignitionfrom off to on several times afterrefueling to allow the fuel system topump the fuel from the tank to theengine. When restarting, cranking timetakes a few seconds longer thannormal.

Filling a Portable Fuel ContainerUse the following guidelines to avoidelectrostatic charge build-up, which canproduce a spark, when filling anungrounded fuel container:• Only use an approved fuel container to

transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place thecontainer on the ground when filling it.

• Do not fill a fuel container when it isinside your vehicle (including the cargoarea).

• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contactwith the fuel container when filling it.

• Do not use a device that holds the fuelpump nozzle lever in the fill position.

Adding Fuel From a Portable FuelContainer

WARNINGSDo not insert the nozzle of a fuelcontainer or an aftermarket funnelinto the fuel system filler neck. This

may damage the fuel system filler neck orits seal and cause fuel to run onto theground.

Do not try to pry open or push openthe capless fuel system with foreignobjects. This could damage the fuel

system and its seal and cause injury to youor others.

Do not dispose of fuel in thehousehold refuse or the publicsewage system. Use an authorized

waste disposal facility.

When refueling the vehicle fuel tank froma fuel container, use the fuel filler funnelincluded with your vehicle. See Fuel FillerFunnel Location (page 178).Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels asthey will not work with the capless fuelsystem and can damage it.When refueling the vehicle fuel tank froma fuel container, do the following:1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until

it engages.2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the

fuel tank filler pipe opening.

179


Fuel and Refueling

E157452

3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuelcontainer.

4. Remove the fuel filler funnel from thefuel tank filler pipe opening.

5. Fully close the fuel tank filler door.6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it

back in your vehicle or correctly disposeof it.

Note: Extra funnels can be purchased froman authorized dealer if you choose todispose of the funnel.

REFUELING

WARNINGSWhen refueling always shut theengine off and never allow sparks oropen flames near the fuel tank filler

valve. Never smoke or use a cell phonewhile refueling. Fuel vapor is extremelyhazardous under certain conditions. Avoidinhaling excess fumes.

The fuel system may be underpressure. If you hear a hissing soundnear the fuel filler door, do not refuel

until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel mayspray out, which could cause seriouspersonal injury.

WARNINGSDo not remove the fuel pump nozzlefrom its fully inserted position whenrefueling.Do not overfill the fuel tank. Thepressure in an overfilled tank maycause leakage and lead to fuel spray

and fire.Stop refueling when the fuel pumpnozzle automatically shuts off for thefirst time. Failure to follow this will

fill the expansion space in the fuel tank andcould lead to fuel overflowing.

Wait at least 10 seconds beforeremoving the fuel pump nozzle toallow any residual fuel to drain into

the fuel tank.Do not try to pry open or push openthe capless fuel system with foreignobjects. This could damage the fuel

system and its seal and cause injury to youor others.

Note: Your vehicle does not have a fuel fillercap.

180


Fuel and Refueling

E206911

A B

C D

Left-hand side. To open the fuelfiller door, press the center rearedge of the fuel filler door andthen release.

A

Right-hand side. To open thefuel filler door, press the centerrear edge of the fuel filler doorand then release.

B

Left-hand side. Pull the rear ofthe fuel tank filler door to openit.

C

Right-hand side. Pull the rear ofthe fuel tank filler door to openit.

D

1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door untilit engages.

E139202

A

Note: When you insert the correct size fuelpump nozzle a spring loaded inhibitor willopen.2. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the

first notch on the nozzle A. Keep itresting on the cover of the fuel tankfiller pipe opening.

E139203

A

B

3. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in positionB when refueling. Holding the fuelnozzle in position A can affect the flowof fuel and shut off the fuel nozzlebefore the fuel tank is full.

181


Fuel and Refueling

E206912

A B

4. Operate the fuel pump nozzle withinthe area shown.

E119081

5. Slightly raise the fuel pump nozzle andthen slowly remove it.

6. Fully close the fuel tank filler door.Note: Do not attempt to start the engineif you have filled the fuel tank with incorrectfuel. Incorrect fuel use can cause damagenot covered by the vehicle Warranty. Haveyour vehicle checked immediately.

System Warnings (If Equipped)

If the fuel filler inlet does not fully close awarning message appears in theinformation display.1. Stop your vehicle as soon as safely

possible and shift the transmission intopark (P) or neutral (N).

2. Apply the parking brake and switch theignition off.

3. Fully open the fuel tank filler door untilit engages.

4. Check the fuel filler inlet and the areaaround it for any items or debris thatmay be obstructing its movement.

5. Insert a fuel pump nozzle or the fuelfiller funnel provided with your vehiclein to the fuel tank filler pipe opening.This action should dislodge any debristhat may be preventing the fuel fillerinlet from fully closing.

Note: If this action corrects the problemthe message may not reset immediately. Ifthe message remains and the service enginesoon warning lamp appears in theinformation display, have your vehiclechecked as soon as possible.

FUEL CONSUMPTIONThe advertised capacity is the maximumamount of fuel that you can add to the fueltank after running out of fuel. Included inthe advertised capacity is an emptyreserve. The empty reserve is anunspecified amount of fuel that remainsin the fuel tank when the fuel gaugeindicates empty.Note: The amount of fuel in the emptyreserve varies and should not be relied uponto increase driving range.

Filling the Fuel TankFor consistent results when refueling:• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an

inaccurate reading results if the engineis left running.

• Use the same fill rate(low-medium-high) each time the tankis filled.

• Allow no more than one automaticshut-off when refueling.

Results are most accurate when the fillingmethod is consistent.

182


Fuel and Refueling

Calculating Fuel EconomyDo not measure fuel economy during thefirst 1,000 mi (1,600 km) of driving (this isyour engine’s break-in period). A moreaccurate measurement is obtained after2,000 mi (3,200 km) to 3,000 mi(4,800 km). Also, fuel expense, frequencyof fill ups or fuel gauge readings are notaccurate ways to measure fuel economy.1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record

the initial odometer reading.2. Each time you fill the fuel tank, record

the amount of fuel added.3. After at least three fill ups, fill the fuel

tank and record the current odometerreading.

4. Subtract your initial odometer readingfrom the current odometer reading.

To calculate L/100 km (liters per 100kilometers) fuel consumption, multiply theliters used by 100, then divide by kilometerstraveled. To calculate MPG (miles pergallon) fuel consumption, divide milestraveled by gallons used.Keep a record for at least one month andrecord the type of driving (city or highway).This provides an accurate estimate of yourvehicle's fuel economy under currentdriving conditions. Keeping records duringsummer and winter will show howtemperature impacts fuel economy.

Conditions• Heavily loading your vehicle reduces

fuel economy.• Carrying unnecessary weight in your

vehicle may reduce fuel economy.• Adding certain accessories to your

vehicle such as bug deflectors, rollbarsor light bars, running boards and skiracks may reduce fuel economy.

• Using fuel blended with alcohol maylower fuel economy.

• Fuel economy may decrease with lowertemperatures.

• Fuel economy may decrease whendriving short distances.

• You will get better fuel economy whendriving on flat terrain than when drivingon hilly terrain.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARNINGSDo not park, idle or drive your vehicleon dry grass or other dry groundcover. The emission system heats up

the engine compartment and exhaustsystem, creating the risk of fire.

Exhaust leaks may result in entry ofharmful and potentially lethal fumesinto the passenger compartment. If

you smell exhaust fumes inside yourvehicle, have your vehicle inspectedimmediately. Do not drive if you smellexhaust fumes.

Your vehicle has various emission controlcomponents and a catalytic converter thatenables it to comply with applicableexhaust emission standards.To make sure that the catalytic converterand other emission control componentscontinue to work properly:• Use only the specified fuel listed.• Avoid running out of fuel.• Do not turn off the ignition while your

vehicle is moving, especially at highspeeds.

• Have the items listed in scheduledmaintenance information performedaccording to the specified schedule.

The scheduled maintenance items listedin scheduled maintenance information areessential to the life and performance ofyour vehicle and to its emissions system.

183


Fuel and Refueling

If you use anything other than Ford,Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts formaintenance replacements or for serviceof components affecting emission control,such non-Ford parts should be equivalentto genuine Ford Motor Company parts inperformance and durability.Illumination of the service engine soonindicator, charging system warning light orthe temperature warning light, fluid leaks,strange odors, smoke or loss of enginepower could indicate that the emissioncontrol system is not working properly.An improperly operating or damagedexhaust system may allow exhaust toenter the vehicle. Have a damaged orimproperly operating exhaust systeminspected and repaired immediately.Do not make any unauthorized changes toyour vehicle or engine. By law, vehicleowners and anyone who manufactures,repairs, services, sells, leases, tradesvehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehiclesare not permitted to intentionally removean emission control device or prevent itfrom working. Information about yourvehicle’s emission system is on the VehicleEmission Control Information Decallocated on or near the engine. This decalalso lists engine displacement.Please consult your warranty informationfor complete details.

On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)Your vehicle has a computer known as theon-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) thatmonitors the engine’s emission controlsystem. The system protects theenvironment by making sure that yourvehicle continues to meet governmentemission standards. The OBD-II systemalso assists a service technician in properlyservicing your vehicle.

When the service engine soonindicator illuminates, the OBD-IIsystem has detected a

malfunction. Temporary malfunctions maycause the service engine soon indicator toilluminate. Examples are:

1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—theengine may misfire or run poorly.

2. Poor fuel quality or water in thefuel—the engine may misfire or runpoorly.

3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closedproperly. See Refueling (page 180).

4. Driving through deep water—theelectrical system may be wet.

You can correct these temporarymalfunctions by filling the fuel tank withgood quality fuel, properly closing the fuelfill inlet or letting the electrical system dryout. After three driving cycles without theseor any other temporary malfunctionspresent, the service engine soon indicatorshould stay off the next time you start theengine. A driving cycle consists of a coldengine startup followed by mixed city andhighway driving. No additional vehicleservice is required.If the service engine soon indicator remainson, have your vehicle serviced at the firstavailable opportunity. Although somemalfunctions detected by the OBD-II maynot have symptoms that are apparent,continued driving with the service enginesoon indicator on can result in increasedemissions, lower fuel economy, reducedengine and transmission smoothness andlead to more costly repairs.

184


Fuel and Refueling

Readiness for Inspection andMaintenance (I/M) TestingSome state and provincial and localgovernments may haveInspection/Maintenance (I/M) programsto inspect the emission control equipmenton your vehicle. Failure to pass thisinspection could prevent you from gettinga vehicle registration.

If the service engine soonindicator is on or the bulb doesnot work, your vehicle may need

service. See On-Board Diagnostics.

Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test ifthe service engine soon indicator is on ornot working properly (bulb is burned out),or if the OBD-II system has determinedthat some of the emission control systemshave not been properly checked. In thiscase, the vehicle is not ready for I/Mtesting.If the vehicle’s engine or transmission hasjust been serviced, or the battery hasrecently run down or been replaced, theOBD-II system may indicate that thevehicle is not ready for I/M testing. Todetermine if the vehicle is ready for I/Mtesting, turn the ignition key to the onposition for 15 seconds without crankingthe engine. If the service engine soonindicator blinks eight times, it means thatthe vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; ifthe service engine soon indicator stays onsolid, it means that your vehicle is readyfor I/M testing.The OBD-II system checks the emissioncontrol system during normal driving. Acomplete check may take several days.If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing,you can perform the following driving cycleconsisting of mixed city and highwaydriving:

1. 15 minutes of steady driving on anexpressway or highway followed by 20minutes of stop-and-go driving with atleast four 30-second idle periods.

2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at leasteight hours with the ignition off. Then,start the vehicle and complete theabove driving cycle. The vehicle mustwarm up to its normal operatingtemperature. Once started, do not turnoff the vehicle until the above drivingcycle is complete.

If the vehicle is still not ready for I/Mtesting, you need to repeat the abovedriving cycle.

185


Fuel and Refueling

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNINGSAlways set the parking brake fullyand make sure you shift the gearshiftlever to park (P). Switch the ignition

off and remove the key whenever you leaveyour vehicle.

Do not use the tow/haul featurewhen driving in icy or slipperyconditions as the increased engine

braking can cause the rear wheels to slideand your vehicle to swing around with thepossible loss of vehicle control.

Understanding the Shift Positionsof your Automatic TransmissionFloor shifter

E184456

Column shifter (if equipped)

E184457

Putting your vehicle in or out of gear:1. Fully press down the brake pedal.2. Move the gearshift lever into the

desired gear.3. Come to a complete stop.4. Move the gearshift lever and securely

latch it in park (P).

Park (P)This position locks the transmission andprevents the rear wheels from turning.

Reverse (R)With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), yourvehicle will move backward. Always cometo a complete stop before shifting into andout of reverse (R).

Neutral (N)With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), yourvehicle can be started and is free to roll.Hold the brake pedal down while in thisposition.

Drive (D)Drive (D) is the normal driving position forthe best fuel economy. The overdrivefunction allows automatic upshifts anddownshifts through all available gears.

Manual (M) with floor shifterWith the gearshift lever in manual (M), thedriver can change gears up or down asdesired. By moving the gearshift lever fromdrive position drive (D) to manual (M) younow have control of selecting the gear youdesire using buttons on the shift lever. SeeUnderstanding your SelectShiftAutomatic™ transmission later in thissection.To return to normal drive (D) position,move the shift lever back from manual (M)to drive (D).

186


Transmission

The transmission will operate in allavailable gears.

Third (3) with column shifter(6-speed)Transmission operates in third (3) gearonly. Use third (3) gear for improvedtraction on slippery roads.

Second (2) (6-speed)Transmission operates in second (2) gearonly. Use second (2) gear to start-up onslippery roads.

First (1) (6-speed)• Transmission operates in first (1) gear

only.• Provides maximum engine braking.• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift

lever.• Will not downshift into first (1) gear at

high speeds; allows for first (1) gearwhen vehicle reaches slower speeds.

Tow/Haul Mode

E161509

To activate tow/haul, press thebutton on the gearshift leveronce. The TOW HAUL indicator

light will illuminate in the instrumentcluster.

The tow/haul feature:• Moves upshifts to higher engine speeds

to reduce the frequency oftransmission shifting.

• Provides engine braking in all forwardgears, which will slow your vehicle andassist you in controlling your vehiclewhen descending a grade.

• Depending on driving conditions andload conditions, may downshift thetransmission, slow your vehicle andcontrol your vehicle speed whendescending a hill, without pressing theaccelerator pedal. The amount ofdownshift braking provided will varybased upon the amount the brakepedal is pressed.

The tow/haul feature improvestransmission operation when towing atrailer or a heavy load. All transmissiongear ranges are available when usingtow/haul.To deactivate the tow/haul feature andreturn to normal driving mode, press thebutton on the gearshift lever twice. TheTOW HAUL light will deactivate. Tow/haulwill also deactivate when you power downyour vehicle.

Sport Mode (If Equipped)

E176099

To activate Sport Mode, pressthe button on the gearshift levertwice (if equipped) or access the

setting through the display screen. TheSPORT or S indicator light illuminates inthe instrument display.

187


Transmission

The sport mode feature:• Provides additional grade (engine)

braking and extends lower gearoperation to enhance performance foruphill climbs, hilly terrain ormountainous areas. This will increaseengine RPM during engine braking.

• Provides additional lower gearoperation through the automatictransmission shift strategy.

• Selects gears more quickly and athigher engine speeds.

To deactivate the sport mode feature andreturn to normal driving mode, press thebutton on the gearshift lever once. TheSPORT or S indicator light will deactivate.The sport mode feature will alsodeactivate when your vehicle is powereddown.

Automatic Transmission AdaptiveLearningThis feature increases durability andprovides consistent shift feel over the lifeof your vehicle. A new vehicle ortransmission may have firm shifts, softshifts or both. This operation is considerednormal and will not affect function ordurability of the transmission. Over time,the adaptive learning process will fullyupdate transmission operation.

Forced Downshifts• Allowed in drive (D) with the tow/haul

feature on or off.• Press the accelerator to the floor.• Allows transmission to select an

appropriate gear.

Understanding your SelectShift™Automatic transmission (If Equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a SelectShiftAutomatic transmission gearshift lever.The SelectShift Automatic transmissiongives you the ability to change gears up ordown (without a clutch) as desired.In order to prevent the engine from runningat too low an RPM, which may cause it tostall, SelectShift will still automaticallymake some downshifts if it has determinedthat you have not downshifted in time.Although SelectShift will make somedownshifts for you, it will still allow you todownshift at any time as long as theSelectShift determines that damage willnot be caused to the engine fromover-revving.SelectShift will not automatically upshift,even if the engine is approaching the RPMlimit. It must be shifted manually bypressing the + button.Note: Engine damage may occur if youmaintain excessive engine revving withoutshifting.The SelectShift Automatic transmissionfeature has two modes: PRS and M mode.

Manual (M) with floor shifterMoving the gearshift lever to the manual(M) position will allow you to manuallyselect the gear you desire. Only the currentgear will display. Use the buttons on thegearshift lever or steering wheel tomanually select gears. Press the + buttonto upshift or the – button to downshift.Return the transmission to a differentgearshift position to deactivate manualcontrol.

188


Transmission

Floor Shifter

E192285

Steering Wheel (If Equipped)

E144821

Upshift to the recommended shift speedsaccording to the following chart:

6-speed

Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy)

Shift from:

15 mph (24 km/h)1 – 2

25 mph (40 km/h)2 – 3

40 mph (64 km/h)3 – 4

45 mph (72 km/h)4 – 5

50 mph (80 km/h)5 – 6

10-speed


Shift from:

15 mph (24 km/h)1 – 2

20 mph (32 km/h)2 – 3

27 mph (43 km/h)3 – 4

32 mph (51 km/h)4 – 5

37 mph (60 km/h)5 – 6

42 mph (68 km/h)6 – 7

189


Transmission


48 mph (77 km/h)7 – 8

52 mph (84 km/h)8 – 9

60 mph (97 km/h)9 – 10

Progressive Range SelectionProgressive Range Selection gives you theability to lockout gears from the automaticshifting range. This may provide you withan improved driving experience (forexample, in slippery conditions or whenexperiencing a steep grade).• With the gearshift lever in drive (D),

press the – button to active PRS. Allavailable gears will display with thecurrent gear indicated.

• Press the – button again to lock outgears beginning with the highest gear.

• Only the available gears will displayand the transmission will automaticallyshift between the available gears.

• Press the + button to unlock gears toallow the transmission to shift to highergears. The transmission will shiftautomatically within the gear rangeyou select.

Brake-Shift InterlockWARNINGS

Do not drive your vehicle until youverify that the brake lamps areworking.When doing this procedure, you needto take the transmission out of park(P) which means your vehicle can

roll freely. To avoid unwanted vehiclemovement, always fully set the parkingbrake prior to doing this procedure. Usewheels chocks if appropriate.

WARNINGSIf the parking brake is fully released,but the brake warning lamp remainsilluminated, the brakes may not be

working properly. Have your vehiclechecked as soon as possible.

Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-shiftinterlock feature that prevents moving thegearshift lever from park (P) when theignition is in the on position and the brakepedal is not pressed.If you cannot move the gearshift lever outof park (P) position with the ignition in theon position and the brake pedal pressed,a malfunction may have occurred. It ispossible that a fuse has blown or yourvehicle’s brake lamps are not operatingproperly. See Fuse Specification Chart(page 307).If the fuse is not blown and the brakelamps are working properly, the followingprocedure will allow you to move thegearshift lever from park (P):

Column-shifter1. Apply the parking brake and switch off

your vehicle.2. Move the steering column to the full

down and full rearward position(toward the driver’s seat).

3. Remove the gearshift lever boot.

190


Transmission

4. Place fingers into gearshift lever boothole and pull top half of shroud up andforward to separate it from the lowerhalf of the shroud. There is a hinge atthe forward edge of the top shroud.Roll the top half of the shroud upwardon the hinge point to clear the hazardflasher button, then pull straightrearward toward the driver’s seat toremove.

5. Remove the top half of the shroud.6. Remove the three fasteners under the

column that secure the lower shroudhalf to the column.

E163185

7. Pull the lock lever into the full unlockedposition and remove the lower shroudcover by pulling the lever handlethrough the slot in the cover.

E163186

8. Apply the brake, pull the white diskthen move the shifter to neutral (N).

9. Start your vehicle.Perform Steps 4 through 8 in reverse order,making sure to engage the hinge pivotsbetween the upper and lower halves of theshroud. Keep slight pressure in the forwarddirection as the halves rotate together.

Floor-shifter1. Apply the parking brake and switch off

your vehicle.2. Remove the rubber mat between the

shifter and cup holder. Using ascrewdriver (or similar tool), carefullypry up the access panel from theattachment points and disconnect itfrom the console to expose the insideof the gearshift.

E182464

3. Locate the white brake shift interlocklever on the passenger side of theshifter assembly.

E183128

191


Transmission

4. Apply the brake pedal. Using light fingerpressure move the white lever forwardwhile pulling the gearshift lever out ofthe park (P) position and into theneutral (N) position.

5. Install the access panel and rubbermat.

6. Apply brake pedal, start your vehicle,and release the parking brake. See yourauthorized dealer as soon as possibleif this procedure is used.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mudor SnowNote: Do not rock your vehicle if the engineis not at normal operating temperature ordamage to the transmission may occur.Note: Do not rock your vehicle for morethan a minute or damage to thetransmission and tires may occur, or theengine may overheat.If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,you may rock it out by shifting betweenforward and reverse gears, stoppingbetween shifts in a steady pattern. Presslightly on the accelerator in each gear.

192


Transmission

USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE

WARNINGFor important information regardingsafe operation of this type of vehicle,see General Information in the

Wheels and Tires chapter.

Note: Do not use 4H or 4L mode on dry,hard surfaced roads. Doing so can produceexcessive noise, increase tire wear and maydamage drive components. 4H or 4L modeis only intended for consistently slippery orloose surfaces. Use of 4L mode on thesesurfaces may produce some noise (such asoccasional clunks), but will not damagedrive components.Note: If 4L is selected while your vehicle ismoving above 3 mph (5 km/h), the 4WDsystem will not perform a shift. This isnormal and should be no reason for concern.Refer to Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 Low)for proper operation.Note: The electronic locking differential isactivated by pulling the 4WD control (4WDvehicles) or turning the electronic lockingdifferential control (2WD vehicles). SeeElectronic Locking Differential (page 201).

4WD Indicator LightsNote: When a 4X4 system fault is present,the system will typically remain in whichever4X4 mode was selected prior to the faultcondition occurring. It will not default to 4X2in all circumstances. When this warning isdisplayed, have your vehicle serviced by anauthorized dealer.

4X2

E181778

Momentarily illuminates when2H is selected.

4X4 Auto

E181781

Continuously illuminates when4A is selected (2-SpeedAutomatic 4WD vehicles only).

4X4 HIGH

E181779

Continuously illuminates when4H is selected.

4X4 LOW

E181780

Continuously illuminates when4L is selected.

CHECK 4X4Displays when a 4X4 fault ispresent.

Using the Electronic Shift on theFly 4WD system (If Equipped)

E191851

2H (4X2)For general on-road driving. Sends powerto the rear wheels only and should be usedfor street and highway driving. Providesoptimal smoothness and fuel economy athigh speeds.

193


Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

4H (4X4 HIGH)Provides mechanically locked four-wheeldrive power to both the front and rearwheels for use in off-road or winterconditions such as deep snow, sand ormud. This mode is not for use on drypavement.

4L (4X4 LOW)Provides mechanically locked four-wheeldrive power to both the front and rearwheels for use on low traction surfaces,but does so with additional gearing forincreased torque multiplication. Intendedonly for off-road applications such as deepsand, steep grades, or pulling heavyobjects. 4L (4X4 low) will not engage whileyour vehicle is moving above 3 mph(5 km/h); this is normal and should be noreason for concern. Refer to Shifting to orfrom 4L (4X4 low) for proper operation.

Shifting between system modesNote: Momentarily releasing the acceleratorpedal while a shift in progress messagedisplays will improveengagement/disengagement performance.Note: Do not perform this operation if therear wheels are slipping or while applyingthe accelerator pedal.Note: You may hear some noise as thesystem shifts or engages; this is normal.You can move the control from 2H or 4Hat a stop or while driving. The informationdisplay may display a message indicatinga 4X4 shift is in progress. Once the shift iscomplete the message center will thendisplay the system mode selected.

Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 low)Note: You may hear some noise as thesystem shifts or engages; this is normal.1. Bring your vehicle to a speed of 3 mph

(5 km/h) or less.

2. Place the transmission in neutral (N).3. Move the 4WD control to the desired

position.The information display will display amessage indicating a 4X4 shift is inprogress. The information display will thendisplay the system mode selected. If anyof the above shift conditions are notpresent, the shift will not occur and theinformation display will display informationguiding the driver through the propershifting procedures.If Shift Delayed Pull Forward displays inthe information display, a transfer casegear tooth blockage is present. To alleviatethis condition, place the transmission in aforward gear, move your vehicle forwardapproximately 5 ft (1.5 m), and shift thetransmission back to neutral (N) to allowthe transfer case to complete the rangeshift.

Using the 2-Speed Automatic 4WDSystem (If Equipped)

This system includes an electronicallycontrolled transfer case with a highcapacity clutch. The system is interactivewith the road, continually monitoring andadjusting power delivery to the front andrear wheels to optimize traction.Note: The AdvanceTrac system has theability to take over control of the transfercase clutch in 4A mode and disable it duringdriving maneuvers when necessary.

194



E225302

2H (4X2)For general on-road driving, this modeprovides optimal smoothness and fueleconomy at high speeds. Sends power tothe rear wheels only.

4A (4X4 AUTO)Provides electronic controlled four-wheeldrive with power delivered to the front andrear wheels, as required, for increasedtraction. This is appropriate for all on-roaddriving conditions, including dry roadsurfaces, but is especially useful on wetpavement, snow, dirt, or gravel.

4H (4X4 HIGH)Provides electronically locked four-wheeldrive power to both the front and rearwheels for use in off-road or winterconditions such as deep snow, sand ormud. This mode is not for use on drypavement.

4L (4X4 LOW)Provides electronically locked four-wheeldrive power to both the front and rearwheels for use on low traction surfaces,but does so with additional gearing forincreased torque multiplication. Intendedonly for off-road applications such as deep

sand, steep grades, or pulling heavyobjects. 4L (4X4 low) will not engage whileyour vehicle is moving above 3 mph(5 km/h); this is normal and should be noreason for concern. Refer to Shifting to orfrom 4L (4X4 low) for proper operation.

Shifting between system modesNote: Momentarily releasing the acceleratorpedal while a shift in progress messagedisplays will improveengagement/disengagement performance.Note: Do not perform this operation if therear wheels are slipping or while applyingthe accelerator pedal.Note: You may hear some noise as thesystem shifts or engages; this is normal.You can move the control from 2H to 4Aor 4H at a stop or while driving. Theinformation display may display a messageindicating a 4X4 shift is in progress. Oncethe shift is complete the message centerwill then display the system modeselected.

Shifting to or from 4L (4X4 low)Note: You may hear some noise as thesystem shifts or engages; this is normal.1. Bring your vehicle to a speed of 3 mph

(5 km/h) or less.2. Place the transmission in neutral (N).3. Move the 4WD control to the desired

position.The information display will display amessage indicating a 4X4 shift is inprogress. The information display will thendisplay the system mode selected. If anyof the above shift conditions are notpresent, the shift will not occur and theinformation display will display informationguiding the driver through the propershifting procedures.

195



If Shift Delayed Pull Forward displays inthe information display, a transfer casegear tooth blockage is present. To alleviatethis condition, place the transmission in aforward gear, move your vehicle forwardapproximately 5 ft (1.5 m), and shift thetransmission back to neutral (N) to allowthe transfer case to complete the rangeshift.

How Your Vehicle Differs FromOther Vehicles

WARNINGVehicles with a higher center ofgravity such as utility and four-wheeldrive vehicles handle differently than

vehicles with a lower center of gravity.Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles arenot designed for cornering at speeds ashigh as passenger cars any more thanlow-slung sports cars are designed toperform satisfactorily under off-roadconditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessivespeed and abrupt maneuvers in thesevehicles. Failure to drive cautiously couldresult in an increased risk of loss of vehiclecontrol, vehicle rollover, personal injury anddeath.

Truck and utility vehicles can differ fromsome other vehicles. Your vehicle may behigher to allow it to travel over roughterrain without getting hung up ordamaging underbody components.The differences that make your vehicle soversatile also make it handle differentlythan an ordinary passenger car.Maintain steering wheel control at alltimes, especially in rough terrain. Sincesudden changes in terrain can result inabrupt steering wheel motion, make sureyou grip the steering wheel from theoutside. Do not grip the spokes.

Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damagefrom concealed objects such as rocks andstumps.You should either know the terrain orexamine maps of the area before driving.Map out your route before driving in thearea. To maintain steering and brakingcontrol of your vehicle, you must have allfour wheels on the ground and they mustbe rolling, not sliding or spinning.

Driving Off-Road With Truck andUtility VehiclesNote: On some models, the initial shift fromtwo-wheel drive to four-wheel drive whileyour vehicle is moving can cause somemomentary clunk and ratcheting sounds.This is the front drivetrain coming up tospeed and the automatic locking hubsengaging and is not cause for concern.Note: Your vehicle may be equipped witha front air dam that can become damaged(due to reduced ground clearance) whentaking your vehicle off-road. You mayremove this air dam by removing eight bolts.Note: Vehicles equipped with 2.7LEcoboost, 3.5L Ecoboost and 3.5L TiVCTengines have an underbody transmissionshield and brackets that may becomedamaged (due to reduced groundclearance) when taking your vehicleoff-road. Remove the shield by disengagingthe fasteners at each corner of the shield.Then, remove the shield rear brackets byremoving the bracket to frame bolts.Four-wheel drive vehicles are speciallyequipped for driving on sand, snow, mudand rough terrain and have operatingcharacteristics that are somewhatdifferent from conventional vehicles, bothon and off the road.

196



The transfer case supples power to all fourwheels. On four-wheel drive vehicles, thetransfer case allows you to select different4WD modes when necessary. You can findinformation on transfer case operation andshifting procedures in this chapter. You canfind information on transfer casemaintenance in the Maintenance chapter.You should become thoroughly familiarwith this information before you operateyour vehicle.Four-wheel drive (when you select a 4WDmode) uses all four wheels to power yourvehicle. This increases traction, enablingyou to drive over terrain and roadconditions that a conventional two-wheeldrive vehicle cannot.

Basic Operating Principles• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which

can affect the normal steeringcharacteristics of your vehicle.

• When driving your vehicle on surfacesmade slippery by loose sand, water,gravel, snow or ice proceed with care.

• Do not use four-wheel drive on dry,hard surfaced roads. Doing so willproduce excessive noise, increase tirewear and may damage drivecomponents. Four-wheel drive modesare only for consistently slippery orloose surfaces.

If Your Vehicle leaves the RoadIf your vehicle leaves the road, reduce yourvehicle speed and avoid severe braking.When your vehicle speed decreases, easeyour vehicle back onto the road. Do notturn the steering wheel sharply whilereturning your vehicle to the road.It may be safer to stay on the shoulder ofthe road and slow down gradually beforereturning to the road. You may lose controlif you do not slow down or if you turn thesteering wheel too sharply or abruptly.

It may be less risky to strike small objects,such as freeway reflectors, with minordamage to your vehicle rather thanattempt a sudden return to the road whichcould cause your vehicle to slide sidewaysout of control or roll over. Remember, yoursafety and the safety of others should beyour primary concern.

Emergency ManeuversIn an unavoidable emergency situationwhere a sudden sharp turn must be made,remember to avoid over-driving yourvehicle (i.e. turn the steering wheel only asrapidly and as far as required to avoid theemergency). Excessive steering can resultin loss of vehicle control. Apply smoothpressure to the accelerator pedal or brakepedal when changes in vehicle speed arerequired. Avoid abrupt steering,acceleration and braking. This could resultin an increased risk of vehicle roll over, lossof vehicle control and personal injury. Useall available road surface to bring yourvehicle to a safe direction of travel.In the event of an emergency stop, avoidskidding the tires and do not attempt anysharp steering wheel movements.If your vehicle goes from one type ofsurface to another (i.e. from concrete togravel) there will be a change in the wayyour vehicle responds to a maneuver (i.e.steering, acceleration or braking).

SandWhen driving over sand, try to keep all fourwheels on the most solid area of the trail.Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shiftto a lower gear and drive steadily throughthe terrain. Apply the accelerator slowlyand avoid excessive wheel slip.When driving at slow speeds in deep sandunder high outside temperatures, use a lowgear when possible. Low gear operationwill maximize the engine and transmissioncooling capability.

197



Avoid driving at excessive speeds, thiscauses vehicle momentum to work againstyou and your vehicle could become stuckto the point that assistance may berequired from another vehicle. Remember,you may be able to back out the way youcame if you proceed with caution.

Mud and Water

MudBe cautious of sudden changes in vehiclespeed or direction when you are driving inmud. Even four-wheel drive vehicles canlose traction in slick mud. If your vehicledoes slide, steer in the direction of the slideuntil you regain control of your vehicle.After driving through mud, clean off residuestuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.Excess mud stuck on tires and rotatingdriveshafts can cause an imbalance thatcould damage drive components.

WaterIf you must drive through high water, driveslowly. Traction or brake capability maybe limited.When driving through water, determine thedepth and avoid water higher than thebottom of the hubs. If the ignition systemgets wet, your vehicle may stall.Once through water, always try the brakes.Wet brakes do not stop your vehicle aseffectively as dry brakes. Drying improvesby applying light pressure to the brakepedal while moving slowly.Note: Driving through deep water maydamage the transmission. If the front or rearaxle is submerged in water, the axlelubricant and power transfer unit lubricantshould be checked and changed ifnecessary.

Driving on Hilly or Sloping TerrainAlthough natural obstacles may make itnecessary to travel diagonally up or downa hill or steep incline, you should alwaystry to drive straight up or straight down.Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or hills.A danger lies in losing traction, slippingsideways and possible vehicle roll over.Whenever driving on a hill, determinebeforehand the route you will use. Do notdrive over the crest of a hill without seeingwhat conditions are on the other side. Donot drive in reverse over a hill without theaid of an observer.When climbing a steep slope or hill, startin a lower gear rather than downshifting toa lower gear from a higher gear once theascent has started. This reduces strain onthe engine and the possibility of stalling.If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turnaround because this could cause vehicleroll over. It is better to reverse back to asafe location.Apply just enough power to the wheels toclimb the hill. Too much power will causethe tires to slip, spin or lose traction,resulting in loss of vehicle control.

E143949

198



Descend a hill in the same gear you woulduse to climb up the hill to avoid excessivebrake application and brake overheating.Do not descend in neutral. Disengageoverdrive or move the transmissionselector lever to a lower gear. Whendescending a steep hill, avoid sudden hardbraking as you could lose control. The frontwheels have to be turning in order to steeryour vehicle.If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, applythe brakes steadily. Do not pump thebrakes.

Driving on Snow and Ice

WARNINGIf you are driving in slipperyconditions that require tire chains orcables, then it is critical that you drive

cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow forlonger stopping distances and avoidaggressive steering to reduce the chancesof a loss of vehicle control which can leadto serious injury or death. If the rear end ofyour vehicle slides while cornering, steer inthe direction of the slide until you regaincontrol of your vehicle.

Note: Excessive tire slippage can causetransmission damage.Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantagesover two-wheel drive vehicles in snow andice but can skid like any other vehicle.Should you start to slide while driving onsnowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheelin the direction of the slide until you regaincontrol.Avoid sudden applications of power andquick changes of direction on snow andice. Apply the accelerator slowly andsteadily when starting from a full stop.

Avoid sudden braking. Although afour-wheel drive vehicle may acceleratebetter than a two-wheel drive vehicle insnow and ice, it will not stop any faster asbraking occurs at all four wheels. Do notbecome overconfident as to roadconditions.Make sure you allow sufficient distancebetween you and other vehicles forstopping. Drive slower than usual andconsider using one of the lower gears. Inemergency stopping situations, apply thebrake steadily. Do not pump the brakepedal. See Hints on Driving WithAnti-Lock Brakes (page 203).

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud orSnow

WARNINGDo not spin the wheels at over35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may failand injure a passenger or bystander.

If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,you may rock it out by shifting betweenforward and reverse gears, stoppingbetween shifts in a steady pattern. Presslightly on the accelerator in each gear.Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engineis not at normal operating temperature,damage to the transmission may occur.Note: Do not rock your vehicle for morethan a minute, damage to the transmissionand tires may occur or the engine mayoverheat.

Parking

WARNINGSIf the parking brake is fully released,but the brake warning lamp remainsilluminated, the brakes may not be

working properly. See your authorizeddealer.

199



WARNINGSAlways set the parking brake fullyand make sure the gearshift islatched in park (P). Turn the ignition

to the off position and remove the keywhenever you leave your vehicle.

On some four-wheel drive vehicles, whenthe transfer case is in the neutral (N)position, the engine and transmissiondisconnect from the rest of the driveline.Therefore, your vehicle is free to roll evenif the automatic transmission is in park (P)or the manual transmission is in gear. Donot leave your vehicle unattended with thetransfer case in the neutral (N) position.Always set the parking brake fully and turnoff the ignition when leaving your vehicle.

Maintenance and ModificationsThe suspension and steering systems onyour vehicle have been designed andtested to provide predictable performancewhether loaded or empty. For this reason,we strongly recommend that you do notmake modifications such as adding orremoving parts (for example, lift kits orstabilizer bars) or by using replacementparts not equivalent to the original factoryequipment.We recommend that you use caution whenyour vehicle has either a high load or device(such as ladders or luggage racks). Anymodifications to your vehicle that raise thecenter of gravity may cause your vehicleto roll over when there is a loss of vehiclecontrol.Failure to maintain your vehicle correctlymay void the warranty, increase your repaircost, reduce vehicle performance andoperational capabilities and adverselyaffect you and your passenger's safety. Werecommend you frequently inspect yourvehicle's chassis components when yourvehicle is subject to off road usage.

200



ELECTRONIC LOCKINGDIFFERENTIAL (If Equipped)

Note: The electronic locking differential isfor off-road use only and is not for use ondry pavement. Using the electronic lockingdifferential on dry pavement will result inincreased tire wear, noise and vibration.The electronic locking differential is adevice housed in the rear axle that allowsboth rear wheels to turn at the samespeed. The electronic locking differentialcan provide additional traction should yourvehicle become stuck. You can activatethe differential electronically and shift iton the fly within the differential operatingspeed range. The differential is for use inmud, rocks, sand, or any off-road conditionwhere you need maximum traction. It isnot for use on dry pavement.The following conditions will affect theelectronic locking differential:• The electronic locking differential will

not engage if your vehicle speed isabove 20 mph (32 km/h) in 4x2, 4x4Auto, or 4x4 High modes.

• The electronic locking differential willnot engage if your vehicle speed isabove or 56 mph (90 km/h) in 4X4Low.

• The electronic locking differential maynot engage if you press youraccelerator pedal during anengagement attempt. A message maydisplay in the instrument displayguiding you to release the acceleratorpedal.

• In 4x2, 4x4 Auto, and 4x4 High modes,the electronic locking differential willautomatically disengage at speedsabove 25 mph (41 km/h) and willautomatically reengage at speedsbelow 20 mph (32 km/h).

• In 4L (4X4 low), the electronic lockingdifferential will automaticallydisengage at speeds above 62 mph(100 km/h) and will automaticallyreengage at speeds below 56 mph(90 km/h).

• The AdvanceTrac system has theability to take over control of theelectronic locking differential anddisable it during driving maneuverswhen necessary.

When you switch the system on, if you donot meet the required conditions forelectronic locking differential activation,the instrument cluster will display theappropriate information guiding youthrough the proper activation process.

Activating the Electronic LockingDifferentialNote: Do not use electronic lockingdifferential on dry, hard surfaced roads.Doing so will produce excessive noise,vibration and increase tire wear.Note: If the electronic locking differentialhas difficulty disengaging, release theaccelerator pedal and turn the steeringwheel in the opposite direction while rolling.

For 4WD vehicles

E227398

Pull the 4WD control knob toward you.

201


Rear Axle

For 2WD vehicles

E183740

Turn the control to ON.

E163170

Once the indicator lightilluminates in the informationdisplay, both rear wheel axle

shafts will be locked together providingadded traction.

If the indicator does not come on, or theindicator turns off while driving, one of thefollowing has occurred:• The vehicle speed is too high.• The left and right rear wheel speed

difference is too high during anengagement attempt.

• The system has malfunctioned and isaccompanied by CHECK LOCKINGDIFFERENTIAL in the informationdisplay. See your authorized Forddealer for assistance.

202


Rear Axle

GENERAL INFORMATIONNote: Occasional brake noise is normal. Ifa metal-to-metal, continuous grinding orcontinuous squeal sound is present, thebrake linings may be worn-out. Have thesystem checked by an authorized dealer. Ifyour vehicle has continuous vibration orshudder in the steering wheel while braking,have it checked by an authorized dealer.Note: Brake dust may accumulate on thewheels, even under normal drivingconditions. Some dust is inevitable as thebrakes wear and does not contribute tobrake noise. See Cleaning the Wheels(page 346).

E144522

See Warning Lamps andIndicators (page 105).

Wet brakes result in reduced brakingefficiency. Gently press the brake pedal afew times when driving from a car wash orstanding water to dry the brakes.

Brake Over AcceleratorIn the event the accelerator pedalbecomes stuck or entrapped, apply steadyand firm pressure to the brake pedal toslow the vehicle and reduce engine power.If you experience this condition, apply thebrakes and bring your vehicle to a safestop. Move the transmission to park (P),switch the engine off and apply the parkingbrake. Inspect the accelerator pedal forany interference. If none are found and thecondition persists, have your vehicle towedto the nearest authorized dealer.

Brake AssistBrake assist detects when you brakerapidly by measuring the rate at which youpress the brake pedal. It providesmaximum braking efficiency as long as youpress the pedal, and can reduce stoppingdistances in critical situations.

Anti-lock Brake SystemThis system helps you maintain steeringcontrol during emergency stops by keepingthe brakes from locking.

This lamp momentarilyilluminates when you turn theignition on. If the light does not

illuminate during start up, remains on orflashes, the system may be disabled. Havethe system checked by an authorizeddealer. If the anti-lock brake system isdisabled, normal braking is still effective.

E144522

If the brake warning lampremains illuminated after yourelease the parking brake, have

the system checked by an authorizeddealer.

HINTS ON DRIVING WITHANTI-LOCK BRAKESNote: When the system is operating, thebrake pedal may pulse and may travelfurther. Maintain pressure on the brakepedal. You may also hear a noise from thesystem. This is normal.The anti-lock braking system will noteliminate the risks when:• You drive too closely to the vehicle in

front of you.• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.• You take corners too fast.• The road surface is poor.

203


Brakes

PARKING BRAKE

WARNINGAlways set the parking brake fullyand make sure the transmission islocked in park (P). Failure to set the

parking brake and engage park could resultin vehicle roll-away, property damage orbodily injury.

To set the parking brake, press the parkingbrake pedal down to its fullest extent. Thebrake warning lamp in the instrumentcluster will illuminate and remainsilluminated until the parking brake isreleased.To release the parking brake, press theparking brake pedal down again.If you are parking your vehicle on a gradeor with a trailer, press and hold the brakepedal down, then set the parking brake.There may be a little vehicle movement asthe parking brake sets to hold the vehicle'sweight. This is normal and should be noreason for concern. If needed, press andhold the service brake pedal down, thentry reapplying the parking brake. Chock thewheels if required. If the parking brakecannot hold the weight of the vehicle, theparking brake may need to be serviced orthe vehicle may be overloaded.

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (If

Equipped)

The electric parking brake replaces theconventional foot brake. The operatingswitch is located on the instrument panelleft of the steering wheel.

WARNINGAlways set the parking brake fullyand make sure the transmission islocked in park (P). Failure to set the

parking brake and engage park could resultin vehicle roll-away, property damage orbodily injury.

Note: When you apply the electric parkingbrake in certain conditions, for example, ona steep hill, the electric parking brake mayreapply the brakes within ten minutes.Note: You may notice various noises whenyou apply and release the electric parkingbrake. This is normal and no cause forconcern.

Applying the Electric ParkingBrake

WARNINGThe brake system warning lamp willflash during an electric parking brakeapply. If the brake system warning

lamp continues to flash there could be aproblem with your electric parking brake.Have the system checked by an authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

E169085

Pull the switch up to apply the electricparking brake.

204


Brakes

The brake system warning lamp will flashfor approximately two seconds and thenilluminate to confirm that the electricparking brake has been applied. SeeInformation Displays (page 110).Note: The brake system warning lamp willremain illuminated for about ten seconds ifyou switch the ignition off with the parkingbrake applied, or apply the parking brakewhile the ignition is off.Note: The electric parking brake will notautomatically apply. You must apply theelectric parking brake using the electricparking brake switch.

Applying the Electric ParkingBrake When the Vehicle is Moving

WARNINGSApplying the electric parking brakewhile moving will result in use of theanti-lock braking system. Do not use

the electric parking brake system when thevehicle is moving unless the normal brakesystem is unable to stop the vehicle.

With the exception of emergencyconditions (for example, the brakepedal does not work or is blocked),

do not apply the electric parking brakewhile the vehicle is moving. On bends, orpoor road surfaces or weather conditions,emergency braking can cause the vehicleto skid out of control or off the road.

If you apply the electric parking brake whenyour vehicle is moving, the brake systemwarning lamp will illuminate and a warningtone will sound. See InformationDisplays (page 110).If your vehicle speed is above 4 mph(6 km/h), the braking force is applied aslong as the switch is pulled. Release orpress the switch or press the acceleratorpedal to stop the braking force.

Releasing the Electric ParkingBrake

E169086

You can release the electric parking brakeeither manually by pressing the switch orautomatically.

Manual Release

WARNINGIf the brake system warning lightremains illuminated or flashes afteryou have released the parking brake,

there could be a problem with your brakingsystem. Have the system checked by anauthorized dealer as soon as possible.

You can manually release the electricparking brake by:• Switching the ignition on.• Pressing the brake pedal.• Pressing the electric parking brake

switch.When the electric parking brake is released,the brake system warning lamp will turnoff.

Driving With a TrailerDepending on the grade and the weight ofthe trailer, your vehicle and trailer may rollbackwards slightly when you start on aslope.

205


Brakes

To prevent this from happening, do thefollowing:1. Pull the switch up and hold it in this

position.2. Drive your vehicle, then release the

switch when you notice that the enginehas developed sufficient driving force.

Automatic Release - Drive AwayReleaseYour vehicle will automatically release theparking brake if:• The driver door is closed.• The transmission is in a forward or

reverse gear.• The vehicle is accelerated.• There are no faults detected in the

parking brake system.The brake system warning lamp will go offto confirm that you have released theelectric parking brake.Note: If the electric parking brake warninglamp stays illuminated, the electric parkingbrake will not automatically release. Youmust release the electric parking brake usingthe electric parking brake switch.Note: The electric parking brake drive awayrelease makes starting on a hill easier. Thisfeature will release the parking brakeautomatically when the vehicle hassufficient drive force to move up the hill.

Battery With No ChargeWARNING

You will not be able to apply orrelease the electric parking brake ifthe battery is low or has no charge.

If the battery is low or has no charge, usejumper cables and a booster battery.

HILL START ASSIST

WARNINGSThe system does not replace theparking brake. When you leave yourvehicle, always apply the parking

brake. Failure to leave your vehicle securelyparked may lead to a crash or injury. SeeParking Brake (page 204).

You must remain in your vehiclewhen the system turns on. At alltimes, you are responsible for

controlling your vehicle, supervising thesystem and intervening, if required. Failureto take care may result in the loss ofcontrol of your vehicle, serious personalinjury or death.

The system will turn off if amalfunction is apparent or if you revthe engine excessively. Failure to

take care may result in the loss of controlof your vehicle, serious personal injury ordeath.

The system makes it easier to pull awaywhen your vehicle is on a slope without theneed to use the parking brake.When the system is active, your vehicleremains stationary on the slope for two tothree seconds after you release the brakepedal. This allows time to move your footfrom the brake to the accelerator pedal.The system releases the brakesautomatically once the engine hasdeveloped sufficient torque to prevent yourvehicle from rolling down the slope. Thisis an advantage when pulling away on aslope, for example from a car park ramp,traffic lights or when reversing uphill intoa parking space.Note: The system only functions when youbring your vehicle to a complete standstillin an uphill gear (for example, drive (D)when facing uphill or reverse (R) whenfacing downhill).

206


Brakes

Note: There is no warning light to indicatethe system is either on or off.

Using Hill Start Assist1. Press the brake pedal to bring your

vehicle to a complete standstill. Keepthe brake pedal pressed.

2. If the sensors detect that your vehicleis on a slope, the system activatesautomatically.

3. When you remove your foot from thebrake pedal, your vehicle remains onthe slope without rolling away forabout two to three seconds. This holdtime automatically extends if you arein the process of driving off.

4. Drive off in the normal manner. Thesystem releases the brakesautomatically.

Note: When you remove your foot from thebrake pedal and press the pedal again whenthe system is active, you will experiencesignificantly reduced brake pedal travel. Thisis normal.

Switching the System On and OffVehicles with Manual TransmissionYou can switch this feature on or off in theinformation display. The systemremembers the last setting when you startyour vehicle.

Vehicles with Automatic TransmissionYou cannot turn the system on or off.When you switch the ignition on, thesystem automatically turns on.

207


Brakes

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONThe traction control system helps avoiddrive wheel spin and loss of traction.If your vehicle begins to slide, the systemapplies the brakes to individual wheelsand, when needed, reduces engine powerat the same time. If the wheels spin whenaccelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,the system reduces engine power in orderto increase traction.

USING TRACTION CONTROL

WARNINGThe stability and traction controllight illuminates steadily if thesystem detects a failure. Make sure

you did not manually disable the tractioncontrol system using the switch. If thestability control and traction control lightis still illuminating steadily, have thesystem serviced by an authorized dealerimmediately. Operating your vehicle withtraction control disabled could lead to anincreased risk of loss of vehicle control,vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

The system automatically turns on eachtime you switch the ignition on.If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,switching traction control off may bebeneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.Note: When you switch traction control off,stability control remains fully active.

Switching the System Off

E166706

The switch for the stability and tractioncontrol system is on the instrument panel.When you switch the system off, amessage and an illuminated icon appearon the instrument cluster.Use the switch again to return the tractioncontrol system to normal operation.Your vehicle may have MyKey restrictionsregarding this feature. See Principle ofOperation (page 59).

System Indicator Lights andMessages

E138639

The stability and traction controllight temporarily illuminates onengine start-up and flashes:

• When a driving condition activateseither of the systems.

• If a problem occurs in either of thesystems.

E130458

The stability and traction controloff light temporarily illuminateson engine start-up and stays on:

• When you switch the traction controlsystem off.

• When you select an alternative stabilitycontrol mode.

208


Traction Control


WARNINGSVehicle modifications involvingbraking system, aftermarket roofracks, suspension, steering system,

tire construction and wheel and tire sizemay change the handling characteristicsof your vehicle and may adversely affectthe performance of the electronic stabilitycontrol system. In addition, installing anystereo loudspeakers may interfere withand adversely affect the electronic stabilitycontrol system. Install any aftermarketstereo loudspeaker as far as possible fromthe front center console, the tunnel, andthe front seats in order to minimize the riskof interfering with the electronic stabilitycontrol sensors. Reducing theeffectiveness of the electronic stabilitycontrol system could lead to an increasedrisk of loss of vehicle control, vehiclerollover, personal injury and death.

Remember that even advancedtechnology cannot defy the laws ofphysics. It's always possible to lose

control of a vehicle due to inappropriatedriver input for the conditions. Aggressivedriving on any road condition can causeyou to lose control of your vehicleincreasing the risk of personal injury orproperty damage. Activation of theelectronic stability control system is anindication that at least some of the tireshave exceeded their ability to grip the road;this could reduce the operator's ability tocontrol the vehicle potentially resulting ina loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,personal injury and death. If your electronicstability control system activates, SLOWDOWN.

The system automatically turns on eachtime you switch the ignition on.

If the stability control or traction controlsystem detects a fault, the following mayoccur:• The stability and traction control light

illuminates steadily.• The stability control and traction

control systems do not enhance yourvehicle's ability to maintain traction ofthe wheels.

If the stability control or traction controlsystem activates, the following may occur:• The stability and traction control light

flashes.• Your vehicle slows down.• Reduced engine power.• A vibration in the brake pedal.• The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.• If the driving condition is severe and

your foot is not on the brake pedal, thepedal may move as the system applieshigher brake force.

The stability control system has severalfeatures built into it to help you maintaincontrol of your vehicle.

Electronic Stability ControlThe system enhances your vehicle's abilityto prevent skids or lateral slides byapplying the brakes to one or more of thewheels individually and, if necessary,reducing engine power.

Roll Stability ControlThe system enhances your vehicle's abilityto prevent rollovers by detecting yourvehicle's roll motion and the rate at whichit changes by applying the brakes to oneor more wheels individually.

209


Stability Control

Side-Wind StabilizationThe system applies the brakes on one sideof your vehicle to reduce the effect of asudden side-wind gust on your vehicle'spath. When the system turns on, thestability and traction control light flashes,and a message may appear in theinformation display. You may notice aslight deceleration and may still need tomake a steering correction to maintain theintended vehicle path. The system doesnot turn on for a continuous side-wind orduring turns.

Traction ControlThe system enhances your vehicle's abilityto maintain traction of the wheels bydetecting and controlling wheel spin. SeeUsing Traction Control (page 208). E72903

A A

AB

B

B

B

Vehicle without stability controlskidding off its intended route.

A

Vehicle with stability controlmaintaining control on a slipperysurface.

B

USING STABILITY CONTROLAdvanceTrac™ with Roll StabilityControl™ (RSC™)The system automatically turns on eachtime you switch the ignition on.You can switch the electronic stabilitycontrol systems off.When you shift the transmission intoreverse (R), the systems are disabled.You can switch the traction control systemoff or on independently. See UsingTraction Control (page 208).

210


Stability Control

AdvanceTrac with RSC Features

Tractioncontrol system

Electronicstabilitycontrol

Roll stabilitycontrol

Stabilitycontrol OFF

light

Button func-tions

EnabledEnabledEnabledIlluminatedduring bulb

check

Default at start-up

DisabledEnabledEnabledIlluminatedButton pressedmomentarily

DisabledDisabledEnabledIlluminatedButton pressedand held formore than 5

seconds

Enabled withhigher threshold

target

Enabled withhigher threshold

target

EnabledIlluminatedDouble press 1

Sport Mode

EnabledEnabledEnabledNot illuminatedButton pressedagain after

deactivation

DisabledDisabledDisabledIlluminatedTransfer caseswitched to4WD Low

1On Raptor models the double press function to put your vehicle into sport mode is notavailable. You can access sport mode through the terrain management system. SeeDriving Aids in your Raptor Supplement.

211


Stability Control


WARNINGSHill descent control cannot controldescent in all surface conditions andcircumstances, such as ice or

extremely steep grades. Hill descentcontrol is a driver assist system and cannotsubstitute for good judgment by the driver.Failure to do so may result in loss of vehiclecontrol, crash or serious injury.

Hill descent control does not providehill hold at zero miles per hour (0kilometers per hour). When stopped,

you must apply the parking brake or placethe vehicle in P (Park), or it may roll away.

Hill descent control allows you to set andmaintain vehicle speed while descendingsteep grades in various surface conditions.Hill descent control can maintain vehiclespeeds on downhill grades between 2 mph(3 km/h) and 12 mph (20 km/h). Above 20mph (32 km/h), the system remainsarmed, but you cannot use the system toset or maintain the descent speed.Hill descent control requires a coolingdown interval after a period of sustaineduse. The amount of time that the featurecan remain active before cooling varieswith conditions. The system provides awarning in the message center and a tonesounds when the system is about todisengage for cooling. At this time,manually apply the brakes as needed tomaintain descent speed.

USING HILL DESCENTCONTROL

E163957

Press and release the hilldescent button on theinstrument panel. A light in the

cluster illuminates and a tone soundswhen you switch this on.

To increase descent speed, press theaccelerator pedal until you reach the speedyou desire. To decrease descent speed,press the brake pedal until you reach thespeed you desire.

When accelerating or decelerating, onceyou reach the descent speed you desire,remove your feet from the pedals and thehill descent control maintains the vehiclespeed you chose.Note: You may observe a noise from theABS pump motor during hill descent controloperation. This is a normal characteristic ofthe ABS and is no reason for concern.

Hill descent modes• At speeds between 2 mph (3 km/h)

and 20 mph (32 km/h): When youpress this button, the light flashesindicating this feature is active. Yourvehicle maintains the speed you desirewhile in this mode.

• At speeds between 20 mph (32 km/h)and 40 mph (64 km/h): When youpress this button, the light is solid anda message appears in the informationdisplay indicating this feature is active.Your vehicle does not maintain thespeed you desire and you cannot setyour descent speed.

• At speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h):When you press this button, the systemturns this feature off and no light ormessage appears in the informationdisplay. You need to switch this featureback on to use.

Refer to the Information Displays foradditional hill descent control messages.See Information Messages (page 126).

212


Hill Descent Control


WARNINGSTo help avoid personal injury, pleaseread and understand the limitationsof the system as contained in this

section. Sensing is only an aid for some(generally large and fixed) objects whenmoving on a flat surface at parking speeds.Certain objects with surfaces that absorbultrasonic waves, surrounding vehicle'sparking aid systems, traffic controlsystems, fluorescent lamps, inclementweather, air brakes, and external motorsand fans may also affect the function ofthe sensing system. This may includereduced performance or a false activation.

To help avoid personal injury, alwaysuse caution when in reverse (R) andwhen using the sensing system.The system may not detect small ormoving objects, particularly thoseclose to the ground.Traffic control systems, inclementweather, air brakes, external motorsand fans may affect the correct

operation of the sensing system.This maycause reduced performance or false alerts.

Note: Keep the sensors, located on thebumper or fascia, free from snow, ice andlarge accumulations of dirt. If the sensorsare covered, the system’s accuracy can beaffected. Do not clean the sensors withsharp objects.Note: If your vehicle sustains damage tothe bumper or fascia, leaving it misalignedor bent, the sensing zone may be alteredcausing inaccurate measurement ofobstacles or false alarms.Note: The sensing system cannot be turnedoff when a MyKey is present. See Principleof Operation (page 213).

Note: If your vehicle is equipped with atrailer tow package and a trailer isconnected to your vehicle, the rear sensingsystem disables and you cannot switch thesystem on through the information display.The sensing system warns the driver ofobstacles within a certain range of yourvehicle. The system turns on automaticallywhenever you switch the ignition on.When receiving a detection warning, theradio volume reduces to a predeterminedlevel. After the warning goes away, theradio volume returns to the previous level.The system can be switched off throughthe information display menu or from thepop-up message that appears once youshift the transmission into reverse (R). SeeGeneral Information (page 110).If a fault is present in the system, a warningmessage appears in the informationdisplay and you cannot switch the systemon through the pop-up message. SeeInformation Messages (page 126).

REAR PARKING AID (If Equipped)

The rear sensors are only active when thetransmission is in reverse (R). As yourvehicle moves closer to the obstacle, therate of the audible warning increases.When the obstacle is less than 12 in(30 cm) away, the warning soundscontinuously. If the system detects astationary or receding object farther than12 in (30 cm) from the corners of thebumper, the tone sounds for only threeseconds. Once the system detects anobject approaching, the warning soundsagain.

213


Parking Aids

E231381

Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) fromthe rear bumper. There may be decreasedcoverage area at the outer corners of thebumper.The system detects certain objects whilethe transmission is in reverse (R) :• Your vehicle is moving toward a

stationary object at a speed of 3 mph(5 km/h) or less.

• Your vehicle is not moving, but amoving object is approaching the rearof your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph(5 km/h) or less.

• Your vehicle is moving at a speed ofless than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a movingobject is approaching the rear of yourvehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph(5 km/h).

The system provides audio warnings onlywhen your vehicle is moving or when yourvehicle is stationary and the detectedobstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) awayfrom the bumper.

Obstacle Distance Indicator (If

Equipped)

The system provides obstacle distanceindication through the display screen. SeeRear View Camera (page 218).

ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (If Equipped)

WARNINGSDesigned to be a supplementary parkaid, this system may not work in allconditions. This system cannot

replace the driver’s attention andjudgment. The driver is responsible foravoiding hazards and maintaining a safedistance and speed, even when the systemis in use.

Active Park Assist does not apply thebrakes under any circumstances.

Note: The driver is always responsible forcontrolling the vehicle, supervising thesystem and intervening if required.Active Park Assist is an electronic parkingaid that uses ultrasonic sensors. Thesystem detects an available parallelparking space and automatically steersyour vehicle into the space (hands-free)while you control the accelerator, gearshiftand brakes. The system visually andaudibly instructs you to park your vehicle.The system may not function correctly ifsomething passes between the frontbumper and the parking space (apedestrian or cyclist) or if the edge of theneighboring parked vehicle is high off theground (for example, a bus, tow truck orflatbed truck).Note: The sensors may not detect objectsin heavy rain, snow or other conditions thatcause disruptive reflections.Note: Keep the sensors, located on thebumper or fascia, free from snow, ice andlarge accumulations of dirt. Covered sensorscan affect the system's accuracy. Do notclean the sensors with sharp objects.Note: The sensors may not detect objectswith surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves.

214


Parking Aids

Do not use the system if:• You have attached a foreign object

(bike rack or trailer) to the front or rearof your vehicle or close to the sensors.

• You have attached an overhangingobject (surfboard) to the roof.

• A foreign object damages or obstructsthe sensors.

• The correct tire size is not in use on yourvehicle (for example, a mini-spare tire).

Using Active Park Assist

E146186

Press the button located on thecenter console near the gearshiftlever.

The touchscreen displays a message anda corresponding graphic to indicate it issearching for a parking space. Use thedirection indicator to indicate which sideof your vehicle you want the system tosearch.Note: The system automatically searcheson the passenger side. You can use thedirection indicator to toggle between thedriver and passenger side.Note: You can also activate the Active ParkAssist system after you have already drivenpartially or completely past a parking space.To do so, press the Active Park button andthe system will inform you if you haverecently passed a suitable parking space.

E130107

When the system finds a suitable space,the touchscreen displays a message anda tone sounds. Stop your vehicle andfollow the instructions on the touchscreen.If your vehicle is moving very slowly, youmay need to pull forward a short distancebefore the system is ready to park.Note: You must observe that the selectedspace remains clear of obstructions at alltimes in the maneuver.Note: Active park assist may not detectvehicles with overhanging loads (a bus or atruck), street furniture such as benches andfire hydrants and other items. You mustmake sure the selected space is suitable forparking.

Note: You should drive your vehicle within5 ft (1.5 m) and as parallel to the othervehicles as possible while passing a parkingspace.Note: The system always offers the lastdetected parking space (for example, if thevehicle detects multiple spaces while youare driving, it offers the last one).Note: If driven above approximately 22 mph(35 km/h), the touchscreen shows amessage to alert you to reduce your vehiclespeed.

215


Parking Aids

Automatic Steering into ParkingSpaceNote: If your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph(9 km/h), the system turns off and you needto take full control of your vehicle.

When you shift the transmission intoreverse (R), with your hands off the wheel(and nothing obstructing its movement),your vehicle steers itself into the space.Indicated by tones, instructions to moveyour vehicle back and forth in the spaceappear on the display screen.

E130108

When you think your vehicle is properlyparked, or you hear a solid tone from theparking aid (accompanied by atouchscreen display message and achime), bring your vehicle to a completestop.When automatic steering is finished, thetouch screen displays a message and atone sounds, indicating that the active parkassist process is done. The driver isresponsible for checking the parking joband making any necessary correctionsbefore putting the transmission in park (P).

Deactivating the Park AssistFeatureManually deactivate the system by:• Pressing the active park assist button.• Grabbing the steering wheel during

automatic steering.

• Driving above approximately 22 mph(35 km/h) for 30 seconds during anactive park search.

• Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) duringautomatic steering.

• Turning off the traction control system.Certain vehicle conditions can alsodeactivate the system, such as:• Traction control has activated on a

slippery or loose surface.• There is an anti-lock brake system

activation or failure.If a problem occurs with the system, awarning message displays, followed by atone. Occasional system messages mayoccur in normal operation. For recurring orfrequent system faults, contact anauthorized dealer to have your vehicleserviced.

216


Parking Aids

Troubleshooting the System

The system does not look for a space

The traction control system may be off.

The transmission is in reverse (R); your vehicle must be moving forward to detect aparking space.

You recently disconnected or replaced the battery. After a battery disconnect, you mustdrive your vehicle for a short period of time before Active Park Assist becomes functional.

The system does not offer a particular space

Something may be contacting the sensors.

There is not enough room in the parking space for the vehicle to safely park.

There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parkingspace.

Your vehicle is farther than 4.9 ft (1.5 m) from the parking space.

Your vehicle is closer than 16 in (40 cm) from neighboring parked vehicles.

The transmission is in reverse (R); your vehicle must be moving forward to detect aparking space.

Your vehicle is going faster than 22 mph (35 km/h).

The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space

Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission (rolling forward withreverse (R) selected).

An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning your vehicleproperly.

Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly.

You pulled your vehicle too far past the parking space. The system performs best whenyou drive the same distance past the parking space.

The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly (not inflated correctly, impropersize, or of different sizes).

A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities.

A parked vehicle has a high attachment (salt sprayer, snowplow or moving truck bed).

217


Parking Aids

The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space

The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed.

The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly (driving from a heated garageinto the cold, or after leaving a car wash).

You didn't wait for the steering wheel to complete its rotation after a gear change. Thesystem performs best when the steering wheel is allowed to finish rotating beforeaccelerating.

REAR VIEW CAMERA (If Equipped)

WARNINGSThe rear view camera system is areverse aid supplement device thatstill requires the driver to use it in

conjunction with the interior and exteriormirrors for maximum coverage.

Objects that are close to eithercorner of the bumper or under thebumper, might not be seen on the

screen due to the limited coverage of thecamera system.

Reverse your vehicle as slow aspossible, higher speeds may limityour reaction time to stop your

vehicle.Use caution when the rear cargo dooris ajar. If the rear cargo door is ajar,the camera will be out of position

and the video image may be incorrect. Allguidelines disappear when the rear cargodoor is ajar. Some vehicles may not comeequipped with guidelines.

Use caution when turning camerafeatures on or off when thetransmission is not in park (P). Make

sure your vehicle is not moving.

The rear view camera system provides avideo image of the area behind yourvehicle.

During operation, lines appear in thedisplay which represent your vehicle’s pathand proximity to objects behind yourvehicle.

E184050

The rear view camera is located on thetailgate.

Using the Rear View CameraSystemThe rear view camera system displayswhat is behind your vehicle when you placethe transmission in reverse (R).Note: The reverse sensing system is noteffective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)and may not detect certain angular ormoving objects.

218


Parking Aids

The system uses three types of guides tohelp you see what is behind your vehicle:• Active guidelines: Show the intended

path of your vehicle while reversing.• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path

your vehicle is moving in while reversingin a straight line. This can be helpfulwhen backing into a parking space oraligning your vehicle with anotherobject behind you.

• Centerline: Helps align the center ofyour vehicle with an object (forexample, a trailer).

Note: If the image comes on while thetransmission is not in reverse (R), have thesystem inspected by your authorized dealer.Note: When towing, the camera only seeswhat you are towing behind your vehicle.This might not provide adequate coverageas it usually provides in normal operationand you might not see some objects. Insome vehicles, the guidelines may disappearonce you engage the trailer tow connector.Note: If your vehicle is equipped with ProTrailer Backup Assist you can set-up thetrailer to work with the Rear View Camerasystem. See Trailer Reversing Aids (page257).The camera may not operate correctlyunder the following conditions:• Nighttime or dark areas if the reverse

lamps are not operating.• Mud, water or debris obstructs the

camera's view. Clean the lens with asoft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasivecleaner.

• The rear of your vehicle is hit ordamaged, causing the camera tobecome misaligned.

Camera System SettingsYou can access the rear view camerasystem settings in the display screen. SeeGeneral Information (page 110).

Camera guidelinesNote: Active guidelines and fixed guidelinesare only available when the transmission isin reverse (R).Note: The centerline is only available ifactive or fixed guidelines are on.

A B C D

F

E

E142436

Active guidelinesACenterlineBFixed guideline: Green zoneCFixed guideline: Yellow zoneDFixed guideline: Red zoneERear bumperF

219


Parking Aids

Active guidelines only show with fixedguidelines. To use active guidelines, turnthe steering wheel to point the guidelinestoward an intended path. If the steeringwheel position changes while reversing,your vehicle might deviate from the originalintended path.The fixed and active guidelines fade in andout depending on the steering wheelposition. The active guidelines do not showwhen the steering wheel position isstraight.Always use caution while reversing.Objects in the red zone are closest to yourvehicle and objects in the green zone arefarther away. Objects are getting closer toyour vehicle as they move from the greenzone to the yellow or red zones. Use theside view mirrors and rear view mirror toget better coverage on both sides and rearof your vehicle.

Obstacle Distance Indicator (If

Equipped)

E190459

The system will provide an image of yourvehicle and the sensor zones. The zoneswill highlight green, yellow and red whenthe parking aid sensors detect an object inthe coverage area.

Manual ZoomWARNING

When manual zoom is on, the fullarea behind your vehicle may notshow. Be aware of your surroundings

when using the manual zoom feature.

Note: Manual zoom is only available whenthe transmission is in reverse (R).Note: Only the centerline shows when youenable manual zoom.Selectable settings for this feature areZoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press thesymbol on the camera screen to changethe view. The default setting is Zoom OFF.This allows you to get a closer view of anobject behind your vehicle. The zoomedimage keeps the bumper in the image toprovide a reference. The zoom is onlyactive while the transmission is in reverse(R).

Rear Camera DelaySelectable settings for this feature are ONand OFF. The default setting for the rearcamera delay is OFF.When shifting the transmission out ofreverse (R) and into any gear other thanpark (P), the camera image remains in thedisplay until your vehicle speed reaches6 mph (10 km/h). This occurs when therear camera delay feature is on, or until aradio button is pressed.

220


Parking Aids

360 DEGREE CAMERA (If Equipped)

WARNINGSThe 360 degree camera system stillrequires the driver to use it inconjunction with looking out of the

windows, and checking the interior andexterior mirrors for maximum coverage.

Objects that are close to eithercorner of the bumper or under thebumper, might not be seen on the

screen due to the limited coverage of thecamera system.

Use caution when turning camerafeatures on or off when thetransmission is not in park (P). Make

sure your vehicle is not moving.

The 360 degree camera system consistsof front, side and rear cameras. Thesystem:• Allows you to see what is directly in

front or behind your vehicle.• Provides cross traffic view in front and

behind your vehicle.• Allows you to see a top-down view of

the area outside your vehicle, includingthe blind spots.

• Provides visibility around your vehicleto you in parking maneuvers such as:• Centering in a parking space.• Obstacles near vehicle.• Parallel parking.

E183663

The 360 degree camera systembutton is located on theinstrument panel and allows you

to toggle through different camera views.The front and rear cameras have multiplescreens which consist of: Normal view with

360, Normal view, and split view. When inpark (P), neutral (N) or drive (D), only thefront images will be displayed when thebutton is pressed. When in reverse (R), onlythe rear images will be displayed when thebutton is pressed.Note: The 360 degree camera system willturn OFF when your vehicle is in motion atlow speed, except when in reverse (R).

Camera ViewsThe small vehicle icon displayed on thetop left corner of the image illustrates thecamera view being displayed. Cameraviews are laid out in the order the screenswill appear once the button is pressed.Note: The front video image will bedisabled when your vehicle is in motion atlow speed, except when in reverse (R).• Front 360 + Normal: Contains the

normal front camera view next to a360 degree camera view. This view willappear on the screen when the buttonis pressed in any gear other thanreverse (R).

• Front Normal View: Provides animage of what is directly in front of yourvehicle. Access this view by pressingthe camera button from the Front 360+ Normal View screen.

• Front Split View: Provides anextended view of what is in front ofyour vehicle. Access this view bypressing the camera button from theFront Normal View screen.

• Rear 360 + Normal: Contains thenormal rear camera view next to a 360degree camera view. This view can beaccessed by putting your vehicle inreverse (R), or by pressing the camerabutton from the Rear Split View screen.

221


Parking Aids

• Rear Normal View: Provides an imageof what is directly behind your vehicle.Access this view by pressing thecamera button from the Rear 360 +Normal screen.

• Rear Split View: Provides anextended view of what is behind yourvehicle. Access this view by pressingthe camera button from the RearNormal View screen.

Keep Out Zone

E184448

The Keep Out Zone is represented by theyellow dotted lines running parallel to yourvehicle. It is designed to give you theindication on the ground of the fullyextended outside mirror position.

Front CameraWARNING

The front camera system stillrequires the driver to use it inconjunction with looking out of your

vehicle.

E184044

The front video camera, located in thegrille, provides a video image of the areain front of your vehicle. It adds assistanceto the driver while driving forward at lowspeeds.To use the front video camera system,place the transmission in any gear exceptreverse (R) and press the small icon in thecorner of the screen.Note: The front camera system willautomatically switch on when you are inmud/sand, rock crawl, or Baja mode andyour speed is less than 15 mph (24 km/h)(Raptor only).The area displayed on the screen may varyaccording to your vehicle's orientation androad conditions.

Side Camera

E206263

222


Parking Aids

The side view camera, located in theoutside mirror, provide a video image ofthe area on the sides of your vehicle as partof the front 360 + normal view and rear360 + normal view. It aids you whileparking your vehicle either forward orbackwards.Note: Use caution when using the 360 viewwhile any of the doors are ajar. If a door isajar, the camera will be out of position andthe video image may be incorrect.

223


Parking Aids

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONCruise control lets you maintain a setspeed without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. You can use cruisecontrol when your vehicle speed is greaterthan 20 mph (30 km/h).

USING CRUISE CONTROL

WARNINGSDo not use cruise control on windingroads, in heavy traffic or, when theroad surface is slippery. This could

result in loss of vehicle control, seriousinjury or death.

When you are going downhill, yourvehicle speed may increase abovethe set speed. The system will not

apply the brakes. Change down a gear toassist the system in maintaining the setspeed. Failure to do so could result in lossof vehicle control, serious injury or death.

Note: Cruise control will disengage if thevehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph(16 km/h) below the set speed while drivinguphill.

E191819

The cruise controls are on the steeringwheel.

Switching Cruise Control On andOffSwitching Cruise Control OnPress and release ON.

E71340

The indicator appears in theinstrument cluster.

Setting the Cruise Speed1. Drive to desired speed.2. Press and release SET+.3. Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal.The indicator color changes.

224



Changing the Set SpeedNote: If you accelerate by pressing theaccelerator pedal, the set speed will notchange. When you release the acceleratorpedal, your vehicle returns to the speed thatyou previously set.• Press the accelerator or brake pedal

until you reach the desired speed. Pressand release SET+.

• Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Releasethe control when you reach the desiredspeed.

• Press and release SET+ or SET-. Theset speed will change in approximately1 mph (2 km/h) increments.

Canceling the Set SpeedPress CNCL or tap the brake pedal, thisaction does not erase the set speed.

Resuming the Set SpeedPress and release RES.

Switching Cruise Control OffPress and release OFF or switch theignition off.Note: You will erase the set speed if youswitch the system off.

USING ADAPTIVE CRUISECONTROL (If Equipped)

WARNINGSAlways pay close attention tochanging road conditions when usingadaptive cruise control. The system

does not replace attentive driving. Failingto pay attention to the road may result ina crash, serious injury or death.

Adaptive cruise control is not a crashwarning or avoidance system.

WARNINGSAdaptive cruise control does notdetect stationary or slow movingvehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).Adaptive cruise control does notdetect pedestrians or objects in theroad.Adaptive cruise control does notdetect oncoming vehicles in thesame lane.Do not use adaptive cruise controlon winding roads, in heavy traffic orwhen the road surface is slippery.

This could result in loss of vehicle control,serious injury or death.

Do not use adaptive cruise controlwith a snow plow blade installed.Do not use adaptive cruise controlwhen towing a trailer that has trailerbrakes. The auto-brake component

of the adaptive cruise control system doesnot operate the trailer brakes. Usingadaptive cruise control when towing atrailer that has trailer brakes may result inthe loss of vehicle control, which couldresult in serious injury.

Do not use tire sizes other than thoserecommended because this canaffect the normal operation of the

system. Failure to do so may result in a lossof vehicle control, which could result inserious injury.

Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert,drive safely and control the vehicle at alltimes.The system adjusts your speed to maintaina proper distance between you and thevehicle in front of you in the same lane. Youcan select from one of four gap settings.

225



E183737

The controls for using your cruise controlare located on the steering wheel.

Switching the System OnPress and release ON.

E144529

The information display showsthe grey indicator light.

E183738

The current gap setting and SET alsoshows.

Setting a Speed1. Accelerate to the desired speed.2. Press and release SET+. The memory

stores the vehicle speed.3. The information display shows a green

indicator light, current gap setting andthe desired set speed.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

E183738

5. A lead vehicle graphic illuminates if thesystem detects a vehicle in front of you.

Note: When adaptive cruise control isactive, the speedometer may vary slightlyfrom the set speed displayed in theinformation display.

Following a VehicleWARNINGS

When following a vehicle, yourvehicle does not decelerateautomatically to a stop, nor does

your vehicle always decelerate quicklyenough to avoid a crash without driverintervention. Always apply the brakes whennecessary. Failing to do so may result in acrash, serious injury or death.

Adaptive cruise control only warnsof vehicles detected by the radarsensor. In some cases there may be

no warning or a delayed warning. Alwaysapply the brakes when necessary. Failureto do so may result in a crash, serious injuryor death.

Note: The brakes may emit a sound whenthe adaptive cruise control system is active.

226



When a vehicle ahead of you enters thesame lane or a slower vehicle is ahead inthe same lane, the vehicle speed adjuststo maintain a preset gap distance. Thedistance setting is adjustable.The lead vehicle graphic illuminates.The vehicle maintains a constant distancefrom the vehicle ahead until:• The vehicle in front of you accelerates

to a speed above the set speed.• The vehicle in front of you moves out

of your lane or out of view.• The vehicle speed falls below 12 mph

(20 km/h).• You set a new gap distance.The system applies the brakes to slow thevehicle to maintain a safe distance fromthe vehicle in front. The system appliesonly limited maximum braking. Press thebrake pedal to override the system.If the system predicts that its maximumbraking level is insufficient, an audiblewarning sounds while the systemcontinues to brake. A red warning barappears on the windshield heads-updisplay. Take immediate action to slow orstop the vehicle.The system may provide slight temporaryacceleration when you use your driver sidedirectional indicator while following a leadvehicle, to aid in passing the vehicle.

Setting the Gap DistanceNote: It is your responsibility to select a gapappropriate to the driving conditions.

E183739

Gap decrease.AGap increase.B

Press the gap control to decrease orincrease the distance between your vehicleand the vehicle in front of you.

E183738

Bars in the graphic show the selected gapdistance. You can select between four gapsettings.Note: When you select Tow/Haul Mode,the gap distance is increased slightly.

227



Adaptive cruise control distance-between-vehicle settings

Dynamic beha-vior

Distance gapTime gap,seconds

Graphic display,bars indicated

betweenvehicles

Set speed

yd (m)mph ( km/h)

Sport.37 (34)1.2162 (100)

Normal.49 (45)1.6262 (100)

Normal.55 (50)1.8362 (100)

Comfort.67 (61)2.2462 (100)

Each time you start the vehicle, the systemselects the last chosen gap for the currentdriver.

Disengaging the SystemPress the brake pedal or press CNCL. Thelast set speed displays in grey but does noterase.

Overriding the SystemWARNING

If you override the system by pressingthe accelerator pedal, it does notautomatically apply the brakes to

maintain a gap from any vehicle ahead.

When you press the accelerator pedal, youoverride the set speed and gap distance.

E144529

The green indicator illuminateswhen the system engages.The system resumes operation

when you release the accelerator pedal.The vehicle speed decreases to the setspeed, or to a lower speed if following aslower vehicle.

Changing the Set Speed• Accelerate or brake to the desired

speed, then press and release SET+.• Press and hold SET+ or SET- until the

desired set speed shows on theinformation display. The vehicle speedgradually changes to the selectedspeed.

• Press and release SET+ or SET-. Theset speed changes in approximately1 mph (1 km/h).

• Hold the SET+ or SET- button tochange the set speed in increments ofapproximately 5 mph or 10 km/h.

The system may apply the brakes to slowthe vehicle to the new set speed. The setspeed displays continuously in theinformation display while the system isactive.

Resuming the Set SpeedNote: Only use resume if you are aware ofthe set speed and intend to return to it.Press and release RES. The vehicle returnsto the previously set speed. The set speedshows continuously in the informationdisplay while the system is active.

228



Low Speed AutomaticCancellationThe system does not function at vehiclespeeds below 12.4 mph (20 km/h). Anaudible alarm sounds and the automaticbraking releases if the vehicle drops belowthis speed.

Hilly Condition and Trailer TowUsageNote: An audible alarm sounds and thesystem shuts down if it applies brakes foran extended period of time. This allows thebrakes to cool. The system functionsnormally again when the brakes havecooled.Note: When towing with adaptive cruisecontrol, turn on Tow/Haul Mode and DieselEngine Brake.Select a lower gear when the system isactive in situations such as prolongeddownhill driving on steep grades, forexample in mountainous areas. Thesystem needs additional engine braking inthese situations to reduce the load on thevehicle’s regular brake system to preventit from overheating.

Switching the System OffNote: The set speed memory erases whenyou switch off the system.Press and release OFF or switch off theignition.

Detection IssuesWARNING

On rare occasions, detection issuescan occur due to the roadinfrastructures, for example bridges,

tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases,the system may brake late orunexpectedly. At all times, you areresponsible for controlling your vehicle,supervising the system and intervening, ifrequired.

The radar sensor has a limited field ofvision. It may not detect vehicles at all ordetect a vehicle later than expected insome situations. The lead vehicle graphicdoes not illuminate if the system does notdetect a vehicle in front of you.

E71621

229



Detection issues can occur:

When driving on a different linethan the vehicle in front.

A

With vehicles that edge into yourlane. The system can only detectthese vehicles once they movefully into your lane.

B

There may be issues with thedetection of vehicles in frontwhen driving into and coming outof a bend or curve in the road.

C

In these cases the system may brake lateor unexpectedly. Stay alert and take actionwhen necessary.If something hits the front end of yourvehicle or damage occurs, theradar-sensing zone may change. This couldcause missed or false vehicle detections.Contact an authorized dealer to have themcheck for proper coverage and operation.

System Not AvailableConditions that can cause the system todeactivate or prevent the system fromactivating when requested include:• A blocked sensor.• High brake temperature.• A failure in the system or a related

system.

Note: If you disable electronic stabilitycontrol, adaptive cruise control is notavailable. See Using Stability Control(page 210).

Blocked Sensor

E183741

A message displays if something obstructsthe radar signals from the sensor. Thesensor is behind a cover near the driver sideof the lower grille. The system cannotdetect a vehicle ahead and does notfunction when something obstructs theradar signals. The following table listspossible causes and actions for thismessage displaying.

230



ActionCause

Clean the grille surface in front of the radaror remove the object causing the obstruc-tion.

The surface of the radar in the grille is dirtyor obstructed in some way.

Wait a short time. It may take severalminutes for the radar to detect that it is freefrom obstruction.

The surface of the radar in the grille is cleanbut the message remains in the display.

Do not use the system in these conditionsbecause it may not detect any vehiclesahead.

Heavy rain or snow is interfering with theradar signals.

Do not use the system in these conditionsbecause it may not detect any vehiclesahead.

Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surfaceof the road may interfere with the radarsignals.

Wait a short time or switch to normal cruisecontrol.

You are in a desert or remote area with noother vehicles and no roadside objects.

Due to the nature of radar technology, it ispossible to get a blockage warning and nothave a blockage. This can happen, forexample, when driving in sparse rural ordesert environments. A false blockedcondition either self clears or clears aftera key cycle.

Switching to Normal CruiseControl

WARNINGNormal cruise control will not brakewhen your vehicle is approachingslower vehicles. Always be aware of

which mode you have selected and applythe brakes when necessary.

You can manually change from adaptivecruise control to normal cruise controlthrough the information display. SeeInformation Messages (page 126).

E71340

The cruise control indicator lightreplaces the adaptive cruisecontrol indicator light if you

select normal cruise control. The gapsetting does not display, the system doesnot automatically respond to lead vehiclesand automatic braking remains active tomaintain set speed. The system recalls itslast setting when you start your vehicle.

231



DRIVER ALERT (If Equipped)

WARNINGThe driver alert system is designedto aid you. It is not intended toreplace your attention and judgment.

You are still responsible to drive with duecare and attention.

Note: The system will store the on or offsetting in the information display menuthrough ignition cycles.Note: If enabled in the menu, the systemwill be active at speeds above 40 mph(64 km/h).Note: The system works as long as one lanemarking can be detected by the camera.Note: If the camera is blocked or if thewindshield is damaged, the system may notfunction.Note: The system may not be available inpoor weather or other low visibilityconditions.The system automatically monitors yourdriving behavior using various inputsincluding the front camera sensor.If the system detects that your drivingalertness is reduced below a certainthreshold, the system will alert you usinga chime and a message in the informationdisplay.

Using Driver AlertSwitching the system on and offYou may switch the system on or offthrough the information display byselecting Settings then Driver Assist thenDriver Alert in the menu. When activated,the system will monitor your alertness levelbased upon your driving behavior in relationto the lane markings, and other factors.

System WarningsNote: Note: The system will not issuewarnings below approximately 40 mph(64 km/h).The warning system is in two stages. Atfirst the system issues a temporary warningthat you need to take a rest. This messagewill only appear for a short time. If thesystem detects further reduction in drivingalertness, another warning may be issuedwhich will remain in the information displayfor a longer time. Press OK on the steeringwheel control to clear the warning. Whenactive the system will run automatically inthe background and only issue a warningif required.

Resetting the SystemYou can reset the system by either:• Switching the ignition off and on.• Stopping the vehicle and then opening

and closing the driver’s door.

LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If

Equipped)

WARNINGThe system is designed to aid thedriver. It is not intended to replaceyour attention and judgment. You are

still responsible to drive with due care andattention.

Note: The system works above 40 mph(64 km/h).Note: The system works as long as thecamera can detect one lane marking.Note: The system may not operate ifsomething blocks the camera or there isdamage to the windshield.

232


Driving Aids

Note: When Aid mode is on and the systemdetects no steering activity for a shortperiod, the system will alert you to put yourhands on the steering wheel. The systemmay detect a light grip or touch on thesteering wheel as hands off driving.The system notifies you to stay in your lanethrough the steering system and theinstrument cluster display when the frontcamera detects an unintentional drift outof your lane is likely to occur. The systemautomatically detects and tracks the roadlane markings using a camera mountedbehind the interior rear view mirror.

Switching the System On and OffNote: The system on or off setting is storeduntil it is manually changed, unless aMyKey® is detected. If the system detectsa MyKey®, it defaults to on and the modeis set to alert.Note: If a MyKey® is detected, pressing thebutton will not affect the on or off status ofthe system. You can only change the modeand intensity settings.

E173233

Press the button located on thecenter console to switch thesystem on or off.

System SettingsThe system has one standard featuresetting and one optional setting menuavailable. See General Information(page 110). The system stores the lastknown selection for each of these settings.You do not need to readjust your settingseach time you turn on the system.Adjust the settings to enable one of thethree modes:

Alert Only

E165515

Alert Only mode provides a steering wheelvibration when an unintended lanedeparture is detected.Aid Only

E165516

Aid Only mode provides an assistancesteering torque input toward the lanecenter.

233


Driving Aids

Alert and Aid Mode

E165517

AlertAAidB

Alert and Aid mode provides an assistancesteering torque input toward the lanecenter. If your vehicle continues drifting outof the lane, the system provides a steeringwheel vibration.Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrategeneral zone coverage. They do not provideexact zone parameters.Intensity: This setting affects the intensityof the steering wheel vibration used for thealert and alert + aid modes. This settingdoes not affect the aid mode.• Low• Medium• High

System Display

E144813

When you switch on the system,an overhead graphic of a vehiclewith lane markings will display

in the information display.

E173234

If you select aid mode when youswitch on the system, arrows willbe displayed with lane markings.

When you switch off the system, the lanemarking graphics will not display.Note: The overhead vehicle graphic maystill be displayed if adaptive cruise controlis enabled.While the system is on, the color of thelane markings will change to indicate thesystem status.Gray: Indicates that the system istemporarily unable to provide a warningor intervention on the indicated side(s).This may be because:• Your vehicle is under the activation

speed.• Your turn indicator is active.• Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.• Quick braking.• Fast acceleration.• The road has no or poor lane markings

in the camera field-of-view.• The camera is obscured or unable to

detect the lane markings due toenvironmental conditions (significantsun angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain,fog), traffic conditions (following alarge vehicle that is blocking orshadowing the lane), or vehicleconditions (poor headlampillumination).

See Troubleshooting for additionalinformation.Green: Indicates that the system isavailable or ready to provide a warning orintervention, on the indicated side(s).Yellow: Indicates that the system isproviding or has just provided a lanekeeping aid intervention.Red: Indicates that the system is providingor has just provided a lane keeping alertwarning.

234


Driving Aids

Troubleshooting

Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markingson the road?

Vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature

Sun is shining directly into the camera lens

Quick intentional lane change

Staying too close to the lane marking

Driving at high speeds in curves

Previous feature activation happened within the last one second

Ambiguous lane markings (mainly in construction zones)

Rapid transition from light to dark or vice versa

Sudden offset in lane markings

ABS or AdvanceTrac activation

Camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield

Driving too close to the vehicle in front of you

Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa

Standing water on the road

Faint lane markings (partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads)

Lane width too narrow or too wide

Camera not calibrated after a windshield replacement

Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads

Vehicle accessories such as snow plows

Why does the vehicle not come back into the middle of the lane always, as expected, inthe Aid or Aid + Alert mode?

High cross winds

Large road crown

Rough roads, grooves, shoulder drop-offs

235


Driving Aids

Why does the vehicle not come back into the middle of the lane always, as expected, inthe Aid or Aid + Alert mode?

Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure

If the tires have been exchanged (including snow tires), or the suspension has beenmodified

Vehicle accessories such as snow plows or trailers

BLIND SPOT INFORMATIONSYSTEM

WARNINGTo help avoid injuries, NEVER use theBlind Spot Information System as areplacement for using the interior

and exterior mirrors or looking over yourshoulder before changing lanes. The BlindSpot Information System is not areplacement for careful driving.

E227388

The Blind Spot Information System isdesigned to aid you in detecting vehiclesthat may have entered the blind spot zone(A). The detection area is on both sides ofyour vehicle, extending rearward from theexterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft(4 m) beyond the bumper. The system isdesigned to alert you if certain vehiclesenter the blind spot zone while driving.Note: The Blind Spot Information Systemdoes not prevent contact with other vehiclesor objects; nor detect parked vehicles,people, animals or infrastructure (fences,guardrails, trees). It’s only designed to alertyou to moving vehicles in the blind spotzones.Note: When a vehicle passes quicklythrough the blind spot zone, typically fewerthan two seconds, the system does nottrigger.

Using the SystemThe Blind Spot Information System turnson when you start the engine and you driveyour vehicle forward above 5 mph(8 km/h).For automatic transmissions, the BlindSpot Information System remains on whilethe transmission is in drive (D). If shiftedinto reverse (R) or park (P) the Blind SpotInformation System turns off. Once shiftedback into drive (D), the Blind SpotInformation System turns back on whenyou drive your vehicle above 5 mph(8 km/h).

236


Driving Aids

For manual transmissions, the Blind SpotInformation System is on for all gearsexcept the reverse (R).Note: For automatic transmissions, theBlind Spot Information System does notfunction in reverse (R) or park (P).

System Lights and Messages

E142442

The Blind Spot Information Systemilluminates an amber alert indicator in theoutside mirror on the side of your vehiclethe approaching vehicle is coming from.When the Blind Spot Information Systemis alerting on a vehicle and thecorresponding turn signal is ON, the BlindSpot Information System alert indicatorflashes as an increased warning level.The alert indicator dims when the systemdetects nighttime darkness.Note: The alert indicator flashes in case ofan alert and the turn signal is set to that sideat the same time.

System Sensor Blockage

WARNINGTo help avoid injuries, NEVER use theBlind Spot Information System as areplacement for using the interior

and exterior mirrors or looking over yourshoulder before changing lanes. The BlindSpot Information System is not areplacement for careful driving.

E190708

The system uses radar sensors that arelocated inside the tail lamp on each sideof your vehicle. Any dirt, mud and snow infront of the sensors and/or driving in heavyrain can cause system degradation. Also,other types of obstructions in front of thesensor can cause system degradation. Thisis referred to as a ‘blocked’ condition.Note: Do not apply bumper stickers and/orrepair compound to these areas, this cancause degraded system performance.If the system detects a degradedperformance condition, a message warningof a blocked sensor will appear in theinformation display. Also the BLIS alertindicators will remain ON and BLIS will nolonger provide any vehicle warnings. Youcan clear the information display warningbut the alert indicators will remainilluminated.A "blocked" condition can be cleared intwo ways:• After the blockage in front of the

sensors is removed or therainfall/snowfall rate decreases orstops, drive for a few minutes in trafficto allow the sensors to detect passingvehicles.

• By cycling the ignition from ON to OFFand then back ON.

237


Driving Aids

Note: If your vehicle has a tow bar with afactory equipped trailer tow module and itis towing a trailer, the sensors willautomatically turn the Blind SpotInformation System off. If your vehicle hasa tow bar but no factory equipped trailertow module, it is recommended to turn theBlind Spot Information System offmanually. Operating the Blind SpotInformation System without the Blind SpotTrailer Tow package and a trailer attachedwill cause poor system performance.

Blind Spot Information Systemwith Trailer Tow (If Equipped)

E225007

The Blind Spot Information System withTrailer Tow is designed to aid you indetecting vehicles that may have enteredthe detection area zone (A). The detectionarea is on both sides of your vehicle andtrailer, extending rearward from theexterior mirrors to the end of your trailer.When a trailer is attached and thecustomer has set up a Blind Spot Trailer,the Blind Spot Information System withTrailer Tow becomes active when drivingforward above 6 mph (10 km/h). SeeTrailer Reversing Aids (page 257).

The Blind Spot Information System withTrailer Tow can be turned off in theinstrument cluster. If the Blind SpotInformation System is turned off, then theBlind Spot Information System with TrailerTow automatically turns off.

Setting up a Blind Spot Trailer

E225008

Trailer lengthATrailer widthBTrailer hitch ballC

You can set-up any trailer to work with theBlind Spot Information System with TrailerTow through the instrument cluster menu.See General Information (page 110).While setting up a trailer, a sequence ofscreens appear asking for trailerinformation. The Blind Spot InformationSystem with Trailer Tow specific screensare described below:• Select type of trailer screen -

Conventional, fifth wheel or gooseneck.The Blind Spot Information System withTrailer Tow only supports conventionaltrailers. If fifth wheel or gooseneck isselected, the system automatically turnsoff.• Do you want to set up BLIS with trailer

screen?If no, the Blind Spot Information Systemturns off.If yes, the menu goes to the next screen.

238


Driving Aids

• Is the width less than 9 ft (2.7 m) andlength less than 33 ft (9 m)?

If no, the Blind Spot Information Systemturns off.If yes, the menu goes to the next screen.• Trailer width measurement:The width of the trailer is measured at thefront of the trailer. It is not measured at thewidest point of the trailer. The maximumwidth at the front of the trailer that theBlind Spot Information System with TrailerTow can support is 8.5 ft (2.6 m).Note: You do not need to enter an exacttrailer width measurement; just measurethat it is 8.5 ft (2.6 m) or less.• Trailer length measurement:The trailer length is the distance betweenthe trailer hitch ball and the rear of thetrailer. The maximum length that the BlindSpot Information System with Trailer Towcan support is 33 ft (9 m).• Enter length of trailer:The default setting is 18 ft (5.5 m).Toggling up or down using the menubuttons will increase/decrease themeasurement by 3 ft (1 m). Select thelength so that the value is equal to orwithin 3 ft (1 m) of the actual measuredlength. For example, if the actual measuredlength is 25 ft (7.6 m), then toggle thelength in the menu to 27 ft (8.2 m). Whenthe length has been entered, the Blind SpotInformation System with Trailer Tow setupis saved.If you do not set up a Blind Spot Trailer, awarning appears in the instrument clusterwhen a trailer is connected stating that thesystem has been turned off due to a trailerconnect.Note: If the trailer is actually a bike rack orcargo rack with electrical lighting, then thelength will be 3 ft (1 m). Cross Traffic Alertwill remain on for trailers 3ft (1 m) or less.

Note: Proper measurement andmeasurement entry is required for BlindSpot Information System with Trailer Towto function as designed.

System OperationIf you select a trailer in the display screenprior to connecting the trailer, the systemwill load that configuration and theinformation cluster displays a messagewhen the trailer is connected. A secondmessage appears stating Cross TrafficAlert has been turned off; the Blind SpotInformation System with Trailer Tow stillfunctions normally when driving forward.If no trailer has been set up and a trailer isconnected, the instrument cluster providesa message indicating a trailer is connectedfollowed by a message asking to select atrailer from the existing list of trailers or toadd a trailer. In order for the Blind SpotInformation System with Trailer Tow tofunction, an existing trailer must beselected or a new trailer must be added. Ifthe request is ignored or if you exit thescreen, a message appears prompting youthat the system has been turned off dueto a trailer connect. This message may notappear until your vehicle speed reaches22 mph (35 km/h).The Blind Spot Information System withTrailer Tow activates when driving forwardfor that particular trailer set up. If theignition is cycled, the Blind SpotInformation System with Trailer Towcontinues to function using the last trailerselected.

239


Driving Aids

Trailer ConsiderationsThe Blind Spot Information System withTrailer Tow is designed to work with anytrailer whose front width is 8.5 ft (2.6 m)or less and total length from the trailerhitch ball to the rear of the trailer is 33 ft(9 m) or less. Different trailers may causea slight change in performance as outlinedbelow.Large box trailers may cause false alertsto trigger when driving next to buildings ornear parking cars. A false alert may alsooccur while making a 90-degree turn.Trailers that are 8.5 ft (2.6 m) wide at thefront and have a total length greater than20 ft (6 m) may have delayed alerts frompassing vehicles when the vehicle ispassing at high speed.A box trailer whose front width is 8.5 ft (2.6m) may cause early alerts when you areover taking a vehicle.When towing a clam shell or V-Nose boxtrailer with a front width of 8.5 ft (2.6 m),delayed alerts on merging vehicles that aretraveling the same speed as your vehiclemay occur.

System ErrorsIf the system senses a problem with theleft or right sensor, the telltale willilluminate and a message will appear inthe information display. See InformationMessages (page 126).

Switching the System Off and OnYou can temporarily switch the Blind SpotInformation System off in the informationdisplay. See General Information (page110). When the Blind Spot InformationSystem switches off, you will not receivealerts and the information display showsa system off message. The telltale in thecluster also illuminates. When you switchthe Blind Spot Information System on oroff, the alert indicators flash twice.Note: The Blind Spot Information Systemremembers the last selected on or offsetting.You can also have the Blind SpotInformation System switched offpermanently at an authorized dealer. Onceswitched off permanently, the system canonly be switched back on at an authorizeddealer.

CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT

WARNINGTo help avoid personal injury, NEVERuse the Cross Traffic Alert system asa replacement for using the interior

and exterior mirrors and looking over yourshoulder before backing out of a parkingspace. Cross Traffic Alert is not areplacement for careful driving.

Note: When a trailer is detected, CrossTraffic Alert automatically turns off.Cross Traffic Alert is designed to warn youof vehicles approaching from the sideswhen the transmission is in reverse (R).

Using the SystemCross Traffic Alert turns on when you startthe engine and you shift into reverse (R).Once shifted out of reverse (R), CrossTraffic Alert turns off.

240


Driving Aids

Cross Traffic Alert is designed to detectvehicles that approach with a speed up to37 mph (60 km/h). Coverage decreaseswhen the sensors are partially, mostly or

fully obstructed. Reversing slowly helpsincrease the coverage area andeffectiveness.

E142440

In this first example, the left sensor is onlypartially obstructed; zone coverage to theright is nearly maximized.

E142441

241


Driving Aids

Zone coverage also decreases whenparking at shallow angles. Here, the leftsensor is mostly obstructed; zone coverageon that side is severely limited.

System Lights, Messages andAudible Alerts

E142442

The Cross Traffic Alert illuminates anamber alert indicator in the outside mirroron the side of your vehicle the approachingvehicle is coming from. Cross Traffic Alertalso sounds an audible alert and amessage appears in the informationdisplay indicating a vehicle is coming fromthe right or left. Cross Traffic Alert workswith the reverse sensing system thatsounds its own series of tones. SeePrinciple of Operation (page 213).

E190708

The system uses radar sensors that arelocated in the tail lamp on each side ofyour vehicle. Do not allow mud, snow orbumper stickers to obstruct these areas,this can cause degraded systemperformance. See Blind SpotInformation System (page 236). If theBlind Spot Information System is blocked,Cross Traffic Alert is also blocked. A CrossTraffic Alert blocked message appears inthe information display when thetransmission is shifted into reverse (R).

System LimitationsCross Traffic Alert has its limitations;situations such as severe weatherconditions or debris build-up on the sensorarea may limit vehicle detection.The following are other situations that maylimit the Cross Traffic Alert performance:• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects

obstructing the sensors.• Approaching vehicles passing at

speeds greater than 37 mph(60 km/h).

• Driving in reverse faster than 7 mph(12 km/h).

• Backing out of an angled parking spot.

False AlertsNote: If your vehicle has a tow bar with afactory equipped trailer tow module and itis towing a trailer, the sensors willautomatically turn the Cross Traffic Alertoff. If your vehicle has a tow bar but nofactory equipped trailer tow module, it isrecommended to turn the Cross Traffic Alertoff manually. Operating Cross Traffic Alertwith a trailer attached will cause poor CrossTraffic Alert performance.

242


Driving Aids

There may be certain instances when thereis a false alert by the Cross Traffic Alertsystem that illuminates the alert indicatorwith no vehicle in the coverage zone. Someamount of false alerts are normal; they aretemporary and self-correct.

System ErrorsIf Cross Traffic Alert senses a problem withthe left or right sensor a message willappear in the information display. SeeInformation Messages (page 126).

Switching the System Off and OnYou can temporarily switch Cross TrafficAlert off in the information display. SeeGeneral Information (page 110). Whenyou switch Cross Traffic Alert off, you willnot receive alerts and the informationdisplay will display a system off message.Note: The Cross Traffic Alert switches onwhenever the ignition is switched on andready to provide appropriate alerts whenthe transmission is in reverse (R). CrossTraffic Alert will not remember the lastselected on or off setting.You can also have Cross Traffic Alertswitched off permanently at an authorizeddealer. Once switched off permanently,the system can only be switched back onat an authorized dealer.

STEERINGElectric Power Steering

WARNINGSThe electric power steering systemhas diagnostic checks thatcontinuously monitor the system. If

a fault is detected, a message displays inthe information display. Stop your vehicleas soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the

WARNINGSignition off. After at least 10 seconds,switch the ignition on and watch theinformation display for a steering systemwarning message. If a steering systemwarning message returns, have the systemchecked by an authorized dealer.

If the system detects an error, youmay not feel a difference in thesteering, however a serious condition

may exist. Obtain immediate service froman authorized dealer, failure to do so mayresult in loss of steering control.

Your vehicle has an electric power steeringsystem. There is no fluid reservoir. Nomaintenance is required.If your vehicle loses electrical power whileyou are driving, electric power steeringassistance is lost. The steering system stilloperates and you can steer your vehiclemanually. Manually steering your vehiclerequires more effort.Extreme continuous steering may increasethe effort required for you to steer yourvehicle. This increased effort preventsoverheating and permanent damage tothe steering system. You do not lose theability to steer your vehicle manually.Typical steering and driving maneuversallow the system to cool and return tonormal operation.

Steering TipsIf the steering wanders or pulls, check for:• Correct tire pressures.• Uneven tire wear.• Loose or worn suspension

components.• Loose or worn steering components.• Improper vehicle alignment.

243


Driving Aids

Note: A high crown in the road or highcrosswinds may also make the steeringseem to wander or pull.

Adaptive LearningThe electronic power steering systemadaptive learning helps correct roadirregularities and improves overall handlingand steering feel. It communicates withthe brake system to help operateadvanced stability control and accidentavoidance systems. Additionally, wheneverthe battery is disconnected or a newbattery installed, you must drive yourvehicle a short distance before the systemrelearns the strategy and reactivates allsystems.

COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM(If Equipped)

Principle Of Operation (If Equipped)

WARNINGSThis system is an extra driving aid. Itdoes not replace your attention andjudgment, or the need to apply the

brakes. This system does NOTautomatically brake your vehicle. If you failto press the brake pedal when necessary,you may collide with another vehicle.

The collision warning system withbrake support cannot help preventall collisions. Do not rely on this

system to replace your judgment and theneed to maintain correct distance andspeed.

Note: The system does not detect, warn orrespond to potential collisions with vehiclesto the rear or sides of your vehicle.Note: The collision warning system is activeat speeds above approximately 5 mph(8 km/h).

Note: The collision warning system will beunavailable if you disable the electronicstability control. See Using StabilityControl (page 210).

E156130

The system alerts you of certain collisionrisks. The system's sensor detects yourvehicle's rapid approach to other vehiclestraveling in the same direction as yourvehicle.

E156131

When your vehicle rapidly approachesanother vehicle, a red warning light flashesand a tone sounds.The brake support system assists you inreducing any collision speed bypre-charging the brakes. If the risk ofcollision continues to increases after theaudio-visual warning, the brake supportprepares the brake system for rapidbraking. The system does notautomatically activate the brakes, but ifthe brake pedal is pressed even lightly, thebrakes apply full stopping power.

Using the Collision Warning System

WARNINGThe collision warning system’s brakesupport reduces collision speed onlyif you brake your vehicle before any

collision. As in any typical braking situation,you must press your brake pedal.

244


Driving Aids

You can use your information displaycontrol to adjust the collision warningsystem's sensitivity or to turn the systemOn or Off. Your vehicle will rememberthese settings across key cycles. You maychange the collision warning systemsensitivity to any one of three possiblesettings. See General Information (page110).Note: It is recommended that you turn thecollision warning system off if a snow plowor similar object is installed in such a waythat it may block the radar sensor. Yourvehicle will remember the selected settingacross key cycles.Note: When possible, the manufacturerrecommends using the highest sensitivitysetting. If warnings are too frequent, you canreduce your system's sensitivity. Reducedsensitivity causes fewer and later systemwarnings. See General Information (page110).

Blocked Sensors

E183741

If a blocked sensor message appears in theinformation display, dirt, water, or an objectis blocking the sensor. The sensor islocated behind a cover near the driver sideof the lower grille. If anything blocks thesensor, your vehicle cannot see throughthe sensor, and the collision warningsystem will not work. Possible causes forthe blocked sensor message and correctiveactions are listed below.

ActionCause

Clean the radar sensor cover or remove theobstruction

The radar sensor cover in the grille is dirtyor obstructed

Wait a short time. The radar may takeseveral minutes to reset after you remove

the obstruction

The surface of the radar sensor cover isclean but the message remains in the

display

The collision warning system is temporarilydisabled. Shortly after weather conditions

improve, the collision warning systemautomatically reactivates

Heavy rain, spray, snow or fog in the airinterferes with the radar signals

The collision warning system is temporarilydisabled. Shortly after weather conditions

improve, the collision warning systemautomatically reactivates

Swirling water, snow or ice on the roadsurface interferes with the radar signals

245


Driving Aids

System Limitations

WARNINGThe collision warning system’s brakesupport only reduces collision speedif you first apply your brakes. You

must brake as you would in any typicalbraking situation.

Due to the nature of radar technology,there may be certain instances wherevehicles do not provide a collision warning.These include:• Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving

below 6 mph (10 km/h).• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.• Severe weather conditions (see

blocked sensor section).• Debris build-up on the grille near the

headlamps (see blocked sensorsection).

• Small distance to vehicle ahead.• Large steering wheel and pedal

movements (very active driving style).Damage to the front end of your vehiclemay alter the radar sensor's coverage area.This may result in missed or false collisionwarnings. Have an authorized dealer checkyour radar sensor for proper coverage andoperation.

DRIVE CONTROLSelectable SteeringNote: The steering setting defaults toNormal if the battery is disconnected orremoved.

E174705

To change the steering feel,toggle the switch on theinstrument panel. The first press

illuminates the selected mode, subsequentpresses will change the selected mode.

Modes:• Normal - Default factory setting.• Sport - Slightly higher effort required

for steering with more road force feltthrough the steering wheel.

• Comfort - Slightly less effort requiredfor steering with less road force feltthrough the steering wheel.

After selecting the desired setting, you mayfeel a soft feedback bump in the steeringwheel when the changeover occurs.Note: If your vehicle is equipped with theselectable drive modes feature, the steeringfeel will change when you select a new drivemode. You can override this automaticselection by pressing the steering button orswitch.

246


Driving Aids

LOAD RETAINING FIXTURES (If

Equipped)

BoxLink™ CleatsThese cleats attach to the inner box wallsto help you to tie down cargo. The cleatscan be locked to prevent removal orunlocked for removal.

BoxLink CleatsNote: Leave the key in the lock whenremoving or installing the cleats. The keycannot be removed from the lock unless itis in the locked position.

E184885

A. 275 lb (1,223 N) maximum forcebetween directly opposed cleats.B. 600 lb (2,669 N) maximum forcebetween diagonally opposed cleats.

Secure cargo with up to 275 lb (1,223 N)force applied between opposing box linkcleats, or up to 600 lb (2,669 N) forceapplied between diagonal box link cleats.

Removing Locking BoxLink Cleats1. Insert the key into the lock and turn

clockwise to unlock.2. Pull bottom of the cleat outward while

pushing top of cleat down.3. Hold on to the cleat as it clears the

mounting slot.

Installing Locking BoxLink Cleats

E189558

1. Insert the key into lock and turnclockwise to unlock.

2. Insert the cleat into the mounting slotand push upward. Make sure the cleatis fully engaged.

247


Load Carrying

3. Turn the key counterclockwise to lock.4. Remove the key.

LOAD LIMIT

Vehicle Loading - with andwithout a TrailerThis section guides you in theproper loading of your vehicle,trailer, or both. Keep your loadedvehicle weight within its designrating capability, with or withouta trailer. Properly loading yourvehicle provides maximum returnof vehicle design performance.Before you load your vehicle,become familiar with thefollowing terms for determiningyour vehicle’s weight rating, withor without a trailer, from thevehicle’s Tire and LoadingInformation label or SafetyCompliance Certification label.

Tire and Loading Label InformationExample:

E198719

Payload

E143816

PAYLOAD

248


Load Carrying

Payload is the combined weightof cargo and passengers that yourvehicle is carrying. The maximumpayload for your vehicle appearson the Tire and Loading label. Thelabel is either on the B-pillar or theedge of the driver door. Vehiclesexported outside the US andCanada may not have a tire andloading label. Look for “Thecombined weight of occupantsand cargo should never exceedXXX kg OR XXX lb” for maximumpayload. The payload listed on theTire and Loading Information labelis the maximum payload for yourvehicle as built by the assemblyplant. If you install any additionalequipment on your vehicle, youmust determine the new payload.Subtract the weight of theequipment from the payload listedon the Tire and Loading label.When towing, trailer tongueweight or king pin weight is alsopart of payload.

WARNINGThe appropriate loadingcapacity of your vehicle can

be limited either by volumecapacity (how much space isavailable) or by payload capacity(how much weight the vehicleshould carry). Once you havereached the maximum payload ofyour vehicle, do not add morecargo, even if there is spaceavailable. Overloading orimproperly loading your vehiclecan contribute to loss of vehiclecontrol and vehicle rollover.

GAWR (Gross Axle WeightRating)GAWR is the maximum allowableweight that a single axle (front orrear) can carry. These numbersare on the Safety ComplianceCertification label. The label islocated on the door hinge pillar,door-latch post, or the door edgethat meets the door-latch post,next to the driver seating position.The total load on each axle mustnever exceed its Gross AxleWeight Rating.GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating)GVWR is the maximum allowableweight of the fully loaded vehicle.This includes all options,equipment, passengers and cargo.It appears on the SafetyCompliance Certification label.The label is located on the doorhinge pillar, door-latch post, or thedoor edge that meets thedoor-latch post, next to the driverseating position.The gross vehicle weight mustnever exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating.

249


Load Carrying

Safety Compliance Certification LabelExample:

E198828

WARNINGExceeding the SafetyCompliance Certification

label vehicle weight rating limitscould result in substandardvehicle handling or performance,engine, transmission and/orstructural damage, seriousdamage to the vehicle, loss ofcontrol and personal injury.

Maximum Loaded TrailerWeightMaximum loaded trailer weight isthe highest possible weight of afully loaded trailer the vehicle cantow. Consult an authorized dealer(or the RV and Trailer TowingGuide available at an authorizeddealer) for more detailedinformation.GCWR (Gross CombinedWeight Rating)GCWR is the maximum allowableweight of the vehicle and theloaded trailer, including all cargoand passengers, that the vehiclecan handle without riskingdamage. (Important: The towing

vehicle’s braking system is ratedfor operation at Gross VehicleWeight Rating, not at GrossCombined Weight Rating.)Separate functional brakes shouldbe used for safe control of towedvehicles and for trailers where theGross Combined Weight of thetowing vehicle plus the trailerexceed the Gross Vehicle WeightRating of the towing vehicle.The gross combined weight mustnever exceed the Gross CombinedWeight Rating.Note: For trailer towinginformation refer to the RV andTrailer Towing Guide available atan authorized dealer.

WARNINGSDo not exceed the GVWR orthe GAWR specified on the

Safety Compliance Certificationlabel.

Do not use replacement tireswith lower load carrying

capacities than the original tiresbecause they may lower yourvehicle’s GVWR and GAWRlimitations. Replacement tireswith a higher limit than the originaltires do not increase the GVWRand GAWR limitations.

Exceeding any vehicle weightrating limitation could result

in serious damage to your vehicle,personal injury or both.

250


Load Carrying

Steps for determining thecorrect load limit:1. Locate the statement "The

combined weight of occupantsand cargo should never exceedXXX kg or XXX lb." on yourvehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weightof the driver and passengersfrom XXX kg or XXX lb.

4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the “XXX” amountequals 1,400 lb. and there willbe five 150 lb. passengers inyour vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lb.(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargo andluggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual todetermine how this reduces theavailable cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.

Helpful examples for calculatingthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacitySuppose your vehicle has a1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargoand luggage capacity. You decideto go golfing. Is there enough loadcapacity to carry you, four of yourfriends and all the golf bags? Youand four friends average 220pounds (99 kilograms) each andthe golf bags weigh approximately30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.The calculation would be: 1400 -(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you haveenough load capacity in yourvehicle to transport four friendsand your golf bags. In metric units,the calculation would be: 635kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) -(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 -67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.Suppose your vehicle has a1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargoand luggage capacity. You andone of your friends decide to pickup cement from the local homeimprovement store to finish thatpatio you have been planning forthe past two years. Measuring theinside of the vehicle with the rearseat folded down, you have roomfor twelve 100-pound(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Doyou have enough load capacity totransport the cement to yourhome? If you and your friend eachweigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),the calculation would be: 1400 -(2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440

251


Load Carrying

- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you donot have enough cargo capacityto carry that much weight. Inmetric units, the calculation wouldbe: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.You will need to reduce the loadweight by at least 240 pounds(104 kilograms). If you removethree 100-pound (45-kilogram)cement bags, then the loadcalculation would be:1400 - (2 x220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -900 = 60 pounds. Now you havethe load capacity to transport thecement and your friend home. Inmetric units, the calculation wouldbe: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.The above calculations alsoassume that the loads arepositioned in your vehicle in amanner that does not overloadthe front or the rear gross axleweight rating specified for yourvehicle on the Safety ComplianceCertification label.Special Loading Instructionsfor Owners of Pick-up Trucksand Utility-type Vehicles

WARNINGLoaded vehicles may handledifferently than unloaded

vehicles. Take extra precautions,such as slower speeds andincreased stopping distance, whendriving a heavily loaded vehicle.

BED ACCESS (If Equipped)

Box Side StepUse the step for easier access to thevehicle bed.Note: Close the step before driving.Note: Do not exceed 500 lb (227 kg) onthe step. This includes you plus cargo.Note: Do not use the step to lift the vehicle.Only use proper jacking points.Note: The step may operate more slowlyin cool temperatures.Note: The step mechanism may trap debrissuch as mud, dirt, snow, ice and salt. Thismay prevent the step from deployingautomatically when you press the button.If this happens, make sure that you pressthe button down and carefully pull out thestep manually. Wash off the debris with ahigh-pressure sprayer and stow the step.

Deploying the Step

E167268

Push down on the button with your foot.The step automatically extends from thestowed position.

252


Load Carrying

Stowing the Step

E167269

Push the step under your vehicle with yourfoot until it fully latches. Do not push onthe button while stowing the step.

BED RAMPS (If Equipped)

WARNINGSThe slide action of the ramp is apinch point. Do not place fingers orhands in the pinch point.Extend and retract the ramp onlywhen connected to the tailgateplate.Be sure the ramp is installedcorrectly when loading andunloading equipment on and off the

ramp.Do not step or sit on the ramp whenit is in the stowed position.Install the ramp only within theprescribed ramp angles.

Note: The ramp maximum capacity is800 lb (363 kg).Note: Verify the ramp is on stable groundbefore usage.

Note: For loading and unloadingequipment, your ramp should be setbetween 10° upward and 26° downward toavoid damage to the ramp claw and tailgateplate.

Using the Bed Ramp1. Remove the front and rear cables.

E194380

2. Open the cam lever arms and unscrewthe cam bolts.

3. Remove the ramp from the rampholder.

E211150

Note: A smooth surface tool can be usedto rotate the stops.4. Rotate the stops at the underside of

the ramp to the open position.

253


Load Carrying

E194382

5. Slide the ramp claw onto the tailgateplate.

E194383

6. Pull the location pin outward andextend the ramp until the pin is seatedin the usage position, then set the rampon even ground.

Stowing the Bed Ramp1. Pick up the ramp. Pull the location pin

outward.2. Slide the ramp into the storage position

until the location pin locks.Note: Make sure the proper pin location hasbeen applied for your bed size.3. Slide the ramp claw off of the tailgate

plate.4. Rotate the stops at the underside of

the ramp to the closed position.

E194391

5. Place the ramp into the ramp holder.6. Install the cam bolts and close the cam

lever arms.7. Attach the front and rear cables.Note: Make sure you properly secure thelocking cable. If the locking cable isunsecured, you may hear a rattling noise.

254


Load Carrying

Installing the Ramp Holder

E194387

1. Hook the top of the ramp holder overthe mounting plate and rotate theramp holder into position.

E194388

2. Slide the ramp holder studs upwardsinto the installed position.

3. Tighten the ramp holder nut.Note: The nut should be on the upper stud.

255


Load Carrying

TOWING A TRAILER

WARNINGSDo not exceed the GVWR orthe GAWR specified on the

certification label.Towing trailers beyond themaximum recommended

gross trailer weight exceeds thelimit of your vehicle and couldresult in engine damage,transmission damage, structuraldamage, loss of vehicle control,vehicle rollover and personalinjury.

Do not exceed the lowestrating capacity for your

vehicle or trailer hitch. Overloadingyour vehicle or trailer hitch canimpair your vehicle stability andhandling. Failure to follow thisinstruction could result in the lossof control of your vehicle, personalinjury or death.

Do not cut, drill, weld ormodify the trailer hitch.

Modifying the trailer hitch couldreduce the hitch rating.

Note: To prevent your trailer fromaccumulating distance, and thetrailer information status appearingwhen you restart your vehicle afterdisconnecting your trailer, you mustdeactivate your trailer. Using theinformation display, go to theTowing menu and then the SelectTrailer option. Select the No activetrailer option. See InformationDisplays (page 110).Your vehicle may have electricalitems, such as fuses or relays,related to towing. See Fuses(page 307).Your vehicle may have ability tomodify trailer towing features.See General Information (page110).Your vehicle's load capacitydesignation is by weight, not byvolume, so you cannot necessarilyuse all available space whenloading a vehicle or trailer.Towing a trailer places an extraload on your vehicle's engine,transmission, axle, brakes, tiresand suspension. Inspect thesecomponents periodically during,and after, any towing operation.

256


Towing

Load PlacementTo help minimize how trailermovement affects your vehiclewhen driving:• Load the heaviest items closest

to the trailer floor.• Load the heaviest items

centered between the left andright side trailer tires.

• Load the heaviest items abovethe trailer axles or just slightlyforward toward the trailertongue. Do not allow the finaltrailer tongue weight to goabove or below 10-15% of theloaded trailer weight.

• Select a ball mount with thecorrect rise or drop. When boththe loaded vehicle and trailerare connected, the trailer frameshould be level, or slightlyangled down toward yourvehicle, when viewed from theside.

When driving with a trailer orpayload, a slight takeoff vibrationor shudder may be present due tothe increased payload weight.Additional information regardingproper trailer loading and settingyour vehicle up for towing islocated in another chapter of thismanual. See Load Limit (page248).You can also find information inthe RV & Trailer Towing Guideavailable at your authorizeddealer, or online.

RV & Trailer Towing Guide Onlinehttp://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/Website

TRAILER REVERSING AIDSPro Trailer Backup Assist™

WARNINGSDriving while distracted can result inloss of vehicle control, crash andinjury. We strongly recommend that

you use extreme caution when using anydevice that may take your focus off theroad. Your primary responsibility is the safe

WARNINGSoperation of your vehicle. We recommendagainst the use of any hand-held devicewhile driving and encourage the use ofvoice-operated systems when possible.Make sure you are aware of all applicablelocal laws that may affect the use ofelectronic devices while driving.

257


Towing

WARNINGSThis system is an extra driving aid. Itdoes not replace your attention andjudgment, or the need to apply the

brakes. This system does NOTautomatically brake your vehicle. If you failto press the brake pedal when necessary,you may collide with another vehicle.

Note: The system is not a substitute forsafe driving practices.Note: You must always be aware of thevehicle and trailer combination and thesurrounding environment.Note: The system does not detect orprevent the vehicle or trailer from makingcontact with obstacles in the surroundingenvironment.Note: Keep in mind that the front end ofthe vehicle swings out when changing thedirection of the trailer.Note: The system relies on usermeasurements to determine stickerplacement and system limits. It is critical totake the key measurements correctly.Incorrect measurements can result in theimproper function of the system up to andincluding contact between the vehicle andtrailer.Note: The system limits vehicle speed whenbacking up. The system is not a replacementfor proper use of the throttle and brakepedals.

Principle of OperationThis feature helps you to steer your vehiclewhen backing up with a trailer attached.Turn and hold the control knob in thedirection you want the trailer to go and thesystem takes over the steering. This allowsyou to focus on checking the mirrors andoperating the brake and accelerator.Each trailer you use with your vehicle hasto be setup once.

You must take care to follow the setupprocess accurately, to make sure thesticker is placed correctly.

Setting Up Pro Trailer BackupAssistNote: Once you have entered a trailer'sinformation into the system, it is stored foreasy recall. A maximum of 10 trailers can beadded to the system.

Step 1: Position your Vehicle and TrailerHitch your conventional trailer to yourvehicle. See Essential Towing Checks(page 278).Park your vehicle and hitched trailer on alevel surface.For best results, make sure that your trailerrides level with the ground when you hitchit your vehicle. More information onselecting your towbar is available in theTowing section. See Towing (page 256).

E209759

Make sure your vehicle and the trailer arein line with each other. You can do this bydriving straight forward.

E209760

Step 2: Follow the Information DisplayPromptsPress the button to turn the system on.

258


Towing

E209765

1. Select the option to add a trailer in theinstrument cluster menu, using thesteering wheel control. See GeneralInformation (page 110).

2. Add a personalized name for the trailerusing the screen prompts. Use thedown arrow to scroll to the desiredletter and then press the right arrow toadvance to the next letter. Press OK tocontinue.

3. Select the type of trailer brake systemfor the trailer you are adding.

4. Select the brake effort level for thetrailer.

Note: The default option is low. This isrecommended for most trailers. If thetrailer's brakes require more initial voltage,or if you prefer more aggressive braking thenselect the other options as required.

5. Select the trailer type.Some examples of conventional typetrailers are shown below.Note: You cannot use the system with thetypes of trailers marked with the cross.The system only works withconventional trailers. It does not workwith other types including goose neckand fifth wheel.

E209766

Follow the information display prompts.

Step 3: Place the Sticker on the TrailerFrameThe supplied sticker must be placed in anarea visible by the Rear View Camera.Note: The cargo and trailer hookup lampsturn on automatically to improve visibility.Note: An assistant can help to carry out thefollowing procedure.Note: Make sure nothing can obstruct theRear View Camera's view of the sticker. Forexample, items such as a jack handle orwiring.Note: Position the sticker on a flat, dry andclean horizontal surface. For best resultsapply the sticker when temperatures areabove 32°F (0°C).

259


Towing

Note: Do not move stickers after they areplaced. Do not re-use any stickers ifremoved.Note: Additional stickers may be purchasedthrough your Ford Dealers parts department.

E209805

Use the supplied measurement card, atape measure and pen to carefully markthe area where to attach the sticker(supplied in the back cover pocket of yourquick start guide). Make sure the wholesticker is within the zone between the twoarcs or distance markers on the diagram,and is also visible in the Rear View Cameradisplay.

Step 4: Take MeasurementsAfter the sticker is correctly placed on thetrailer you must take some keymeasurements.Note: Accurate measurements must betaken for the system to operate properly.Note: Round measurement figures to thenearest half inch.Note: Round upward if the measured lengthis a quarter inch or greater. Rounddownward if the measure length is less thana quarter inch. For example 12.25 in(31.11 cm) would be rounded up to 12.50 in(31.75 cm). 12.13 in (30.8 cm) would berounded down to 12.00 in (30.48 cm).Note: Use consistent metric or imperialunits as required by your country or vehicle.

Record the four key distances (A, B, C, D)as required by the measurement card.Record the trailer name for thesemeasurements.

E209806

A

B

C

DD

Distance AThe horizontal distance from the licenseplate to the center of the ball hitch on thetrailer.

Distance BThe horizontal distance from the center ofthe ball hitch to the center of the sticker.

Distance CThe distance from the Rear View Camerato the center of the sticker.

Distance DThe horizontal distance from the tailgateto the center of the trailer axle (single axletrailers), or the center of the axles (trailerswith dual axles or more).

260


Towing

Step 5: Enter Measurements Using theInformation DisplayUsing the recorded measurements, enterthe required data into the system. Followthe on screen prompts to enter each of themeasurements taken in step 4. When allfour distances have been entered, aconfirmation display will appear. Checkthe values are correct before proceeding,or go back to change any if required.

Step 6: Confirming the Sticker LocationCheck the Rear View Camera display tosee if the sticker is identified by the systemand marked with a red circle.Confirm that the red circle is correctlylocated over the sticker image in thedisplay. The on screen prompt will ask youto confirm this.Note: If the system cannot locate thesticker try cleaning the camera lens, andalso make sure the sticker is within the greenzone as indicated in step 3.

Calibrating the SystemTo complete setup, drive your vehiclestraight forward between 4 mph (6 km/h)and 24 mph (39 km/h) following the onscreen prompt.Note: Check your measurements to makesure you measured from the correct points.Note: If you move the steering wheel duringthis procedure, the calibration pauses.Note: We recommend that you do not dothis at night.A message will be displayed duringcalibration and after calibration iscomplete.

Using Pro Trailer Backup AssistTo use the system press the button andselect the required trailer from the display.

E209765

When the sticker is located, the displayprompts you to shift into reverse (R). Thesystem turns on.Note: The system does not function if yourhands are on the steering wheel. Removeyour hands to resume operation.Follow the screen prompts to steer yourvehicle and trailer.Note: You may have to drive forward tostraighten the trailer.Take your hands off the steering wheel andturn the Pro Trailer Backup Assist controlknob instead. The knob acts as the steeringcontrol for the trailer.Note: The more you turn the knob, thesharper the trailer turns.

261


Towing

E209812

Turn and hold counterclockwise to makethe trailer go left.

E209813

Turn and hold clockwise to make the trailergo right.Note: Practice maneuvering with thesystem in a safe open area first.Note: Try backing up in a straight line andthen turning the knob slowly in the directionyou want to go.Note: Quickly turning and releasing theknob results in a jerky movement of thevehicle.

E209814

Release the knob when the trailer ismoving in the direction you want. Controlthe accelerator and brakes while thesystem steers your vehicle automaticallyto keep the trailer moving straight back.Note: You may have to use the knob tocorrect the trailer direction when attemptingto move the trailer straight back under someconditions.Note: Your vehicle speed is automaticallylimited.Note: When you release the knob or turn itto the center position, your vehicle followsthe trailer's path.

TroubleshootingNote: The system requires a clear view ofthe sticker placed on the trailer. You mustkeep the camera lens and sticker clean forthe system to operate correctly.

SetupThe system is designed to be used with awide variety of trailers. However there aresome trailers that do not have a propersurface and location to mount the sticker.These trailers are not supported. Attemptsto place the sticker on a surface that doesnot meet the sticker placementrequirement listed in Step 3 of the setupinstruction or entering inaccuratemeasurements to proceed through setupcan result in improper system function.Accurate measurements are critical tocorrect system function. If you need tocheck measurements entered or changethem you can access them through thetrailer menus in the instrument cluster.Choose the option to change the stickerfrom the change trailer settings menu. It isnot necessary to remove the sticker if youare just reviewing or changingmeasurements.

262


Towing

The following menu warnings or difficultiesmay occur during setup. Tips to resolvethem are listed below.Note: If you still experience issues with thesystem's ability to detect the sticker, seethe information in the next section regardingsticker lost during system operation.Measurement A has reached maximum orminimum value:• The system is designed to work with

drawbars that have a license plate tohitch ball center measurement of 9 in(23 cm) to 16 in (40 cm) wheninstalled. Do not attempt to usedrawbars that have a length outsidethis range as the system performancewill be degraded and could causeimproper system function.

• Make sure that the measurement beingmade is the horizontal distance onlyfrom license plate and the hitch ballcenter. A straight line distance thatincludes any vertical rise or drop willincrease the measurement and makeit inaccurate. Inaccuratemeasurements will degrade systemperformance and could cause impropersystem function. See step 4 of thesetup instruction to reviewmeasurement instructions.

Measurement B has reached maximum orminimum value:• Make sure that the sticker placement

instruction in step 3 of the setup hasbeen followed. Stickers placed outsidethe allowed zone will adversely affectthe system performance and couldcause improper feature function.

• Make sure that the measurement beingmade is the horizontal distance onlyfrom center of sticker to the hitch ballcenter. A straight line distance thatincludes any vertical rise or drop willincrease the measurement and causean inaccurate value to be entered intothe system. See step 4 of the setup foradditional measurement instructions.

Measurement C has reached maximum orminimum value:• Make sure that the sticker placement

instructions in step 3 of the setup havebeen followed. Stickers placed outsidethe allowed zone will adversely affectthe system performance and couldcause improper feature function. If youhave met all the criteria for stickerplacement and you see this messagethis sticker is either too far below or tooclose to the camera to properlyrecognize the sticker. In order for thesystem to operate correctly the stickerheight must be lowered if you receivethe minimum warning or the stickerheight must be raised if you receive themaximum warning.

• Only one sticker can be placed on thetrailer for correct system function. Theprevious sticker must be removed orcovered so only one sticker is visible tothe camera.

• Measurement B and C must bemeasured again if a new sticker isplaced on the trailer.

263


Towing

Measurement D has reached maximum orminimum value:• Make sure that the measurement being

made is the horizontal distance onlyfrom tailgate to the center of the singleaxle or the center of all the axles on thetrailer. See step 4 of the setup foradditional measurement instructions.The TBA system does not supporttrailer lengths outside the rangeallowed by the information display.

System is circling something beside thesticker or system cannot find the sticker:• Make sure the rear camera is clean and

the sticker is clearly visible in thecamera image. Clean the camera andsticker if necessary.

• The camera system uses the enteredmeasurements to help locate thesticker. Inaccurate stickermeasurements will degrade thesystem’s ability to locate the sticker.Verify the measurements entered intothe system are accurate.

• Remove the incorrectly circled label ordecal if possible.

• If you cannot resolve the issue a newsticker location should be tried. Thesticker location must still meet therequirements noted in step 3 of thesetup instructions. Only one sticker canbe placed on the trailer for correctsystem function. The previous stickermust be removed or covered so onlyone sticker is visible to the camera.

CalibrationThe system monitors various vehicleparameters to ensure your vehicle is beingdriven straight and the trailer straightbehind your vehicle. Any steering input ortrailer movement will pause the calibration.

For best results:• Use a long, straight, smooth and level

road when attempting to calibrate.• Drive straight forward.• Drive between 4 mph (6 km/h) and

24 mph (39 km/h).

System OperationThe following warnings or difficulties mayoccur during feature operation. Tips toresolve them are listed below.The system is not available:• The system relies on many

sub-systems in your vehicle to operatecorrectly. If those sub-systems are notoperating correctly the system may notbe available.

• Low battery voltage is a conditionwhich will prevent the system fromoperating. Please make sure thebattery is correctly charged if thesystem is not available.

• You may need to drive your vehiclestraight forward above 25 mph(40 km/h) before the system isavailable again.

• If the message still displays take yourvehicle to an authorized dealer forservice.

Sticker lost:• If the system cannot initially find the

sticker, it may be necessary for you tochange the lighting conditions bymoving the vehicle and trailer orwaiting until conditions change.

• Check for the following if you receivethe lost sticker message while usingthe system.

• Stop your vehicle as soon as themessage displays.

• Make sure the sticker is visible and thepattern is discernable in the rear viewcamera image.

264


Towing

• Clean the sticker and camera to makesure they are unobstructed.

• Clean the lens with a soft, lint-freecloth and water.

• Clean the sticker with isopropyl rubbingalcohol sprayed directly onto thesticker, and then wipe clean with a softcloth.

• Remove any items that may beblocking the view of the sticker.Depending on your trailer configurationand any equipment mounted to yourtrailer it is possible for the sticker to beblocked from view of the camera as itrotates on the hitch ball but not beblocked during setup. Remove theobstruction if possible. It will benecessary to remove the sticker fromit’s current location if the obstructioncannot be cleared and place a newsticker that will be visible to the camerain all positions of the trailer behind yourvehicle.

• Placing the sticker on a surface angledaway from the vehicle reducesperformance. Use a drawbar thatpositions the trailer level to the groundwhen attached to vehicle. This typicallyprovides a level surface to mount thesticker. Place the sticker on a bracketor other object when no level surfaceis available.

• Make sure the entire sticker is on a flatsurface that is completely visible to thecamera. Do not fold the sticker over anedge on the trailer frame. This candegrade performance.

• Shadows on the sticker may effecttracking performance under somelighting conditions. Moving the stickerto another location within the allowedplacement area may improveperformance. Use the change stickeroption in your Towing menu if youmove the sticker.

• You can change your sticker locationby going into the Towing menu,selecting trailer options, selectingchange trailer settings and thenselecting the change sticker option. Theprevious sticker must be removed.ONLY ONE STICKER SHOULD BEPLACED ON THE TRAILER FORCORRECT SYSTEM FUNCTION.

• The camera system uses the enteredmeasurements to help locate thesticker. Inaccurate measurements willreduce the system’s ability to locatethe sticker. Check the measurementsentered into the system are correct.Refer to the step 4 of Pro trailer backupAssist setup for instructions onmeasurements.

• You can change your measurement bygoing into the Towing menu, selectingtrailer options, selecting change trailersetting and then selecting the changesticker option. Disregard the prompt toremove this sticker and continue to thenext step if you only plan to update themeasurements for the current stickerlocation.

265


Towing

System will not backup straight:• Factors such as the drawbar

connection to the hitch receiver, roadcamber, road grade and compliance inthe trailer suspension can influencehow straight the system is able to backyour trailer when the knob is not turned.You can compensate for the trailerdrifting to the right or left by slowlyturning the Pro Trailer Backup Assistknob until the trailer is following yourdesired path and then holding the knobin that position. If you would like torecalibrate the system for straightbacking, you can do so with thefollowing procedure.

• Go into the Towing menu, select traileroptions, select change trailer settingand then select the change stickeroption. Your saved measurements willbe displayed. Do not change them butcontinue to confirm measurements.Once you confirm the measurements,the system will then prompt you toperform the calibration procedure.

System consistently shows Stop Now Maxtrailer angle reached warning:• The system uses your measurements

to determine sticker position andestablish system limits. Accuratesticker placement and trailermeasurements will provide the bestsystem performance. If you areconsistently receiving this warning it islikely there is an issue with stickerplacement or the enteredmeasurements. Make sure that the

sticker is placed correctly based onsteps 3 and the measurements weremade correctly according to Step 4.The troubleshooting guide for trailermeasurements can also be reviewedfor help in making measurements.

• To change sticker location or changetrailer measurements, go into theTowing menu, select trailer options,select change trailer setting and thenselect the change sticker option.

• If the sticker location needs to bechanged, the previous sticker must beremoved and a new sticker needs tobe placed on the trailer. ONLY ONESTICKER SHOULD BE PLACED ONTHE TRAILER FOR PROPERSYSTEM FUNCTION.

• Disregard the prompt to remove thissticker and continue to the next step ifyou only plan to update themeasurements for the current stickerlocation.

System consistently shows Stop now takecontrol of steering warning:• The system displays this warning when

it can no longer steer the vehicle andyou must take over steering. There arefour reasons why this warning displaysand additional information regardingthe reason for the warning is availableon the center display.

• The steering wheel is touched whilethe system is controlling it. Avoidtouching the wheel during systemoperation.

• The maximum speed for featureoperation is exceeded. Systemperformance is optimized at slowerspeeds. Backup slowly.

266


Towing

• The sticker was lost by the camerasystem. Once your vehicle is stoppedadditional warnings will indicate thesticker was lost. Refer to sticker losttrouble shooting tips.

• An internal condition for systemoperation was not met which requiresyour vehicle return to manual controlof the steering.

Note: The system is designed to be usedwith the same trailer connection every timethe trailer is chosen from the selectionmenu. Using a different drawbar or adifferent pin hole (on drawbars with morethan one) when connecting the drawbar toyour vehicle will affect the trailermeasurements. Take the measurementsagain and update if required.

TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (If

Equipped)

WARNINGTurning off trailer sway controlincreases the risk of loss of vehiclecontrol, serious injury or death. Ford

does not recommend disabling this featureexcept in situations where speed reductionmay be detrimental (such as hill climbing),the driver has significant trailer towingexperience, and can control trailer swayand maintain safe operation.

Note: This feature does not prevent trailersway, but reduces it once it begins.Note: This feature cannot stop all trailersfrom swaying.Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is toohigh, the system may activate multipletimes, gradually reducing vehicle speed.

This feature applies your vehicle brakes atindividual wheels and, if necessary, reducesengine power. If the trailer begins to sway,the stability control light flashes and themessage TRAILER SWAY REDUCESPEED appears in the information display.The first thing to do is slow your vehicledown, then pull safely to the side of theroad and check for proper tongue load andtrailer load distribution. See LoadCarrying (page 247).

RECOMMENDED TOWINGWEIGHTS

Note: Do not exceed a trailerweight of 5,100 lb (2,313 kg) whentowing with, or by, bumper only.Note: For vehicles equipped witha 3.5 L TiVCT engine without aHeavy Duty Trailer TowingPackage, do not exceed a trailerweight of 5,100 lb (2,313 kg).Note: Make sure to take intoconsideration trailer frontal area.Vehicles not equipped with theTrailer Tow Package or the HeavyDuty Payload Package should notexceed 36.6 feet2 (3.4 meters2)trailer frontal area. Vehiclesequipped with the Trailer TowPackage or the Heavy Duty PayloadPackage should not exceed 60feet2 (5.6 meters2) trailer frontalarea.

267


Towing

Note: Exceeding this limitationmay significantly reduce theperformance of your towingvehicle. Selecting a trailer with alow aerodynamic drag and roundedfront design helps optimizeperformance and fuel economy.Note: For high altitude operation,reduce the gross combined weightby 2% per 1,000 ft (305 m) startingat the 1,000 ft (305 m) elevationpoint.

Note: Certain states requireelectric trailer brakes for trailersover a specified weight. Be sure tocheck state regulations for thisspecified weight. The maximumtrailer weights listed may be limitedto this specified weight, as yourvehicle's electrical system may notinclude the wiring connectorneeded to use electric trailerbrakes.Your vehicle may tow a trailerprovided the maximum trailerweight is less than or equal to themaximum trailer weight listed foryour vehicle configuration on thefollowing charts.

Driveline – 4x21

MaximumGCWR2, 3

Axle ratioEngineCab – wheel-base (inches)

9400 lb (4264kg)4

3.55

3.5L TiVCT

Regular cab –122

12000 lb (5443kg)

3.73

12200 lb (5533 kg)3.15, 3.312.7L GTDI

13100 lb (5942 kg)3.7313000 lb (5897

kg)3.31

5.0L TiVCT13800 lb (6260

kg)3.55

9500 lb (4309kg)4

3.553.5L TiVCTRegular cab –

14112100 lb (5488 kg)3.73

268


Towing

Driveline – 4x21

MaximumGCWR2, 3


12300 lb (5579 kg)3.15, 3.31

2.7L GTDI 13100 lb (5942 kg)3.7313300 lb (6032

kg)53.73

13900 lb (6305kg)

3.31

5.0L TiVCT 14900 lb (6758kg)

3.55

16000 lb (7257kg)6

3.73

15500 lb (7030kg)

3.15

3.5L GTDI 17100 lb (7756 kg)73.55

17100 lb (7756 kg)6,

7

3.73

9800 lb (4445kg)4

3.553.5L TiVCT

Super Cab – 145

12200 lb (5534 kg)3.7312500 lb (5670 kg)3.15, 3.31

2.7L GTDI 13100 lb (5942 kg)3.7313300 lb (6032

kg)53.73

12000 lb (5443kg)83.315.0L TiVCT

269


Towing

Driveline – 4x21

MaximumGCWR2, 3


14200 lb (6441 kg)13500 lb (6123

kg)8

3.5515200 lb (6895

kg)15800 lb (7167 kg)3.15

3.5L GTDI17100 lb (7756 kg)73.55

12600 lb (5715 kg)3.15, 3.31

2.7L GTDI

Super Cab – 163

13100 lb (5942 kg)3.7313300 lb (6032

kg)53.73

14300 lb (6486kg)

3.31

5.0L TiVCT 15300 lb (6940kg)

3.55

16200 lb (7348kg)6

3.73

15900 lb (7212 kg)3.15

3.5L GTDI 17100 lb (7756 kg)73.55

17100 lb (7756 kg)6,

7

3.73

9900 lb (4491 kg)3.553.5L TiVCTCrew cab – 145 12200 lb (5534

kg)33.73

270


Towing

Driveline – 4x21

MaximumGCWR2, 3


12600 lb (5715 kg)3.15, 3.31

2.7L GTDI 13100 lb (5942 kg)3.7313300 lb (6032

kg)53.73

12000 lb (5443kg)83.31

5.0L TiVCT14200 lb (6441 kg)

13500 lb (6123kg)8

3.5515200 lb (6895

kg)15800 lb (7167 kg)3.15

3.5L GTDI17000 lb (7711 kg)73.55

12600 lb (5715 kg)3.15, 3.31

2.7L GTDI

Crew cab – 157

13100 lb (5942 kg)3.7313300 lb (6032

kg)53.73

12000 lb (5443kg)83.31

5.0L TiVCT14200 lb (6441 kg)

13500 lb (6123kg)8

3.5515200 lb (6895

kg)

271


Towing

Driveline – 4x21

MaximumGCWR2, 3


16200 lb (7348kg)6

3.73

15900 lb (7212 kg)3.15

3.5L GTDI 17100 lb (7756 kg)73.55

17100 lb (7756 kg)6,

7

3.73

1For vehicles equipped with a 3.5 L TiVCT engine without a Heavy Dutyor MAX Trailer Towing Package, do not exceed a trailer weight of 5,100 lb(2,313 kg).2Calculated with SAE J2807 method.3Heavy Duty Trailer Tow Payload Package (unless stated otherwise).4Medium Duty Trailer Tow package – 5100 pound (2313 kilogram)maximum trailer weight.52.7L EcoBoost Payload Package.6Heavy Duty Payload Package.7MAX Trailer Tow Payload Package.8Sport package.

272


Towing

Driveline – 4x41

MaximumGCWR2, 3


9700 lb (4400 kg)3.553.5L TiVCT

Regular cab –122

12200 lb (5534kg)3

3.73

12500 lb (5670kg)

3.552.7L GTDI

13300 lb (6032kg)

3.73

13200 lb (5987 kg)3.31, 3.555.0L TiVCT 14600 lb (6622

kg)3.73

12200 lb (5534 kg)3.733.5L TiVCT

Regular cab –141

12500 lb (5670kg)

3.55

2.7L GTDI 13300 lb (6032kg)

3.73

13300 lb (6032kg)4

3.73

14100 lb (6396 kg)3.31, 3.55

5.0L TiVCT

16200 lb (7348kg)

3.73

16100 lb (7303kg)5, 8

3.73

16200 lb (7348kg)5, 9

15800 lb (7167 kg)3.31, 3.553.5L GTDI

273


Towing

Driveline – 4x41

MaximumGCWR2, 3


17100 lb (7756 kg)63.55

17000 lb (7711 kg)5,

6, 8

3.73

17100 lb (7756 kg)5,

6, 9

12200 lb (5534 kg)3.733.5L TiVCT

Super Cab – 145

12700 lb (5761 kg)3.55

2.7L GTDI13300 lb (6032

kg)3.73

13300 lb (6032kg)4

3.73

14300 lb (6486kg)3.31

5.0L TiVCT

13500 lb (6123kg)7

3.5514400 lb (6532

kg)14000 lb (6350

kg)73.73

16200 lb (7348kg)

16000 lb (7167 kg)3.31, 3.553.5L GTDI

17100 lb (7756 kg)63.55

274


Towing

Driveline – 4x41

MaximumGCWR2, 3


14300 lb (6486kg)

3.31

5.0L TiVCT

Super Cab – 163

14500 lb (6577 kg)3.5516200 lb (7348

kg)3.73

16200 lb (7348kg)5

3.73

16200 lb (7348kg)

3.31, 3.55

3.5L GTDI 17100 lb (7756 kg)63.55

17100 lb (7756 kg)5,

6

3.73

12200 lb (5534 kg)3.733.5L TiVCT

Crew cab – 145

12800 lb (5806kg)

3.55

2.7L GTDI 13300 lb (6033kg)

3.73

13300 lb (6033kg)4

3.73

14300 lb (6486kg)3.31

5.0L TiVCT 13500 lb (6123kg)7

3.5514400 lb (6532

kg)

275


Towing

Driveline – 4x41

MaximumGCWR2, 3


16200 lb (7348kg)

3.73

14000 lb (6350kg)7

16100 lb (7303 kg)3.31, 3.55

3.5L GTDI16700 lb (7666

kg)103.55

16900 lb (7666kg)6

14300 lb (6486kg)3.31

5.0L TiVCTCrew cab – 157

13500 lb (6123kg)73.55

14500 lb (6577 kg)14000 lb (6350

kg)73.73

16200 lb (7348kg)

16200 lb (7348kg)5

3.73

14000 lb (6350kg)7

16100 lb (7303 kg)3.5L GTDI

3.31, 3.5516700 lb (7303 kg)3.55

276


Towing

Driveline – 4x41

MaximumGCWR2, 3


17000 lb (7756kg)5, 6, 8

3.73

17100 lb (7756 kg)5,

6, 9

1For vehicles equipped with a 3.5 L TiVCT engine without a Heavy Dutyor MAX Trailer Towing Package, do not exceed a trailer weight of 5,100 lb(2,313 kg).2Calculated with SAE J2807 method.3Heavy Duty Trailer Tow Payload Package (unless stated otherwise).42.7L EcoBoost Payload Package.5Heavy Duty Payload Package.6MAX Trailer Tow Payload Package.7Sport package.817 inch wheels.918 inch wheels10Limited

Calculating the MaximumLoaded Trailer Weight for YourVehicle1. Start with the gross combined

weight rating for your vehiclemodel and axle ratio. See theprevious charts.

2. Subtract all of the followingthat apply to your vehicle:

• Vehicle curb weight.• Hitch hardware weight, for

example a draw bar, ball, locksor weight distributing hardware.

• Driver weight.• Passenger(s) weight.

277


Towing

• Payload, cargo and luggageweight.

• Aftermarket equipment weight.This equals the maximum loadedtrailer weight for this combination.Note: The trailer tongue load isconsidered part of the payload foryour vehicle. Reduce the totalpayload by the final trailer tongueweight.Note: Consult an authorized dealerto determine the maximum trailerweight allowed for your vehicle ifyou are not sure.

ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKSFollow these guidelines for safe towing:• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your

vehicle at least 1000 miles (1600kilometers).

• Consult your local motor vehicle lawsfor towing a trailer.

• See the instructions included withtowing accessories for the properinstallation and adjustmentspecifications.

• Service your vehicle more frequently ifyou tow a trailer. See your scheduledmaintenance information.

• If you use a rental trailer, follow theinstructions the rental agency givesyou.

See Load limits in the Load Carryingchapter for load specification terms foundon the tire label and Safety Compliancelabel and instructions on calculating yourvehicle's load.Remember to account for the trailertongue weight as part of your vehicle loadwhen calculating the total vehicle weight.

Trailer Towing Connector

E193232

When attaching the trailer wiring connectorto your vehicle, only use a proper fittingconnector that works with the vehicle andtrailer functions. Some seven-positionconnectors may have the SAE J2863 logo,which confirms that it is the proper wiringconnector and works correctly with yourvehicle.

FunctionColor

Left turn signal and stop lampYellow

Ground (-)White

Electric brakesBlue

Right turn signal and stoplamp

Green

278


Towing

FunctionColor

Battery (+)*Orange

Running lightsBrown

Reverse lightsGrey

*Your vehicle must recognize the trailerbefore the trailer can receive power.

Recognizing a Trailer1. Attach the trailer and wiring connector

to your vehicle.2. Switch on your vehicle.3. Press the brake pedal for a few

seconds.A confirmation message appears in theinformation display. See InformationMessages (page 126).

HitchesDo not use a hitch that either clamps ontothe bumper or attaches to the axle. Youmust distribute the load in your trailer sothat 10-15% of the total weight of thetrailer is on the tongue.

Weight-distributing Hitches

WARNINGDo not adjust the spring bars so thatyour vehicle's rear bumper is higherthan before attaching the trailer.

Doing so will defeat the function of theweight-distributing hitch, which may causeunpredictable handling, and could resultin serious personal injury.

When hooking-up a trailer using aweight-distributing hitch, always use thefollowing procedure:1. Park the loaded vehicle, without the

trailer, on a level surface.

2. Measure the height to the top of yourvehicle's front wheel opening on thefender. This is H1.

3. Attach the loaded trailer to your vehiclewithout the weight-distributing barsconnected.

4. Measure the height to the top of yourvehicle's front wheel opening on thefender a second time. This is H2.

5. Install and adjust the tension in theweight-distributing bars so that theheight of your vehicle's front wheelopening on the fender is approximatelya quarter the way down from H2,toward H1.

6. Check that the trailer is level or slightlynose down toward your vehicle. If not,adjust the ball height accordingly andrepeat Steps 2-6.

Once the trailer is level or slightly nosedown toward the vehicle:• Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.• Check that the trailer tongue securely

attaches and locks onto the hitch.• Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer

brake controls as required by law or thetrailer manufacturer.

Safety ChainsNote: Do not attach safety chains to thebumper.Always connect the safety chains to theframe or hook retainers of your vehiclehitch.To connect the safety chains, cross thechains under the trailer tongue and allowenough slack for turning tight corners. Donot allow the chains to drag on the ground.

279


Towing

Trailer BrakesWARNING

Do not connect a trailer's hydraulicbrake system directly to yourvehicle's brake system. Your vehicle

may not have enough braking power andyour chances of having a collision greatlyincrease.

Electric brakes and manual, automatic orsurge-type trailer brakes are safe if youinstall them properly and adjust them tothe manufacturer's specifications. Thetrailer brakes must meet local and federalregulations.The rating for the tow vehicle's brakingsystem operation is at the gross vehicleweight rating, not the gross combinedweight rating.Separate functioning brake systemsare required for safe control of towedvehicles and trailers weighing morethan 1500 pounds (680 kilograms)when loaded.

Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (IfEquipped)

WARNINGThe Ford trailer brake controller hasbeen verified to be compatible withtrailers having electric-actuated

drum brakes (one to four axles) andelectric-over-hydraulic brakes. It will notactivate hydraulic surge-style trailerbrakes. It is the responsibility of thecustomer to ensure that the trailer brakesare adjusted appropriately, functioningnormally and all electric connections areproperly made. Failure to do so may resultin loss of vehicle control, crash or seriousinjury.

E183395

When used properly, the trailer brakecontroller assists in smooth and effectivetrailer braking by powering the trailer’selectric or electric-over-hydraulic brakeswith a proportional output based on thetowing vehicle’s brake pressure.You can adjust the level of initial trailerbrake output by selecting one of threesettings using the information display.Choose Low, Medium or High for the initialtrailer brake output you require. SeeInformation Displays (page 110).The controller user interface consists ofthe following:A: + and - (Gain adjustment buttons):Pressing these buttons adjusts thecontroller's power output to the trailerbrakes in 0.5 increments. You can increasethe gain setting to 10.0 (maximum trailerbraking) or decrease it to 0 (no trailerbraking). The gain setting displays in themessage center.

280


Towing

The controller shows gain setting, outputbar graph, and trailer connectivity statusin the information display. They appear inthe information display as follows:• Trailer Brake Controller Gain (without

trailer connected): Shows the currentgain setting during a given ignition cycleand when adjusting the gain. This alsodisplays if you use the manual controllever or make gain adjustments withno trailer connected.

• Trailer Brake Controller Gain Output:Displays when you push your vehicle'sbrake pedal, or upon use of the manualcontrol. Bar indicators illuminate in theinformation display to indicate theamount of power going to the trailerbrakes relative to the brake pedal ormanual control input. One bar indicatesthe least amount of output; six barsindicate maximum output.

• Trailer Connected: Displays when thesystem senses a correct trailer wiringconnection (a trailer with electric trailerbrakes) during a given ignition cycle.

• Trailer Disconnected: Displays,accompanied by a single audible time,when the system senses a trailerconnection and then a disconnection,either intentional or unintentional,during a given ignition cycle. It alsodisplays if a truck or trailer-wiring faultoccurs causing the trailer to appeardisconnected. This message can alsodisplay if you use the manual controllever without a trailer connected. Afterdisconnecting the trailer connector,press the brake pedal forapproximately five seconds to allowthe system to detect and update thetrailer status.

B: Manual control lever: Slide the controllever to the left to turn on the trailer'selectric brakes independent of the towvehicle's. See the following Procedure foradjusting gain section for instructions onproper use of this feature. If you use themanual control while the brake is alsoapplied, the greater of the two inputsdetermines the power sent to the trailerbrakes.• Stop lamps: Using the manual control

lever illuminates both the trailer brakelamps and your vehicle brake lampsexcept the center high-mount stoplamp, if you make the proper electricalconnection to the trailer. Pressing yourvehicle brake pedal also illuminatesboth trailer and vehicle brake lamps.

Procedure for Setting Trailer BrakeController ModeSelect the correct option using theinformation display. Choose electric fortrailers with electromagentic drum brakesor EOH for trailers with electric overhydraulic brake systems. See InformationDisplays (page 110).

Trailer Brake Effort SettingThe trailer brake controller allows the userto customize how aggressively the trailerbrakes engage. The default value is "Low"and is the recommended setting for mosttrailers. If your trailer's brakes require moreinitial voltage, or if you prefer moreaggressive trailer braking, then select eitherthe "Medium" or the "High" setting.

Procedure for Adjusting GainNote: Only perform this procedure in atraffic-free environment at speeds ofapproximately 20-25 mph (30-40 km/h).

281


Towing

The gain setting sets the trailer brakecontroller for the specific towing condition.You should change the setting as towingconditions change. Changes to towingconditions include trailer load, vehicle load,road conditions and weather.The gain should be set to provide themaximum trailer braking assistance whilemaking sure the trailer wheels do not lockwhen using the brakes. Locked trailerwheels may lead to trailer instability.1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good

working condition, functioning normallyand properly adjusted. See your trailerdealer if necessary.

2. Hook up the trailer and make theelectrical connections according to thetrailer manufacturer's instructions.

3. When you plug in a trailer with electricor electric-over-hydraulic brakes, amessage confirming connectionappears in the information display.

4. Use the gain adjustment (+ and -)buttons to increase or decrease thegain setting to the desired startingpoint. A gain setting of 6.0 is a goodstarting point for heavier loads.

5. In a traffic-free environment, tow thetrailer on a dry, level surface at a speedof 20-25 mph (30-40 km/h) andsqueeze the manual control levercompletely.

6. If the trailer wheels lock up, indicatedby squealing tires, reduce the gainsetting. If the trailer wheels turn freely,increase the gain setting. Repeat Steps5 and 6 until the gain setting is at apoint just below trailer wheel lock-up.If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheellock-up may not be attainable evenwith the maximum gain setting of 10.

Explanation of Information DisplayWarning MessagesNote: An authorized dealer can diagnosethe trailer brake controller to determineexactly which trailer fault has occurred.However, your Ford warranty does not coverthis diagnosis if the fault is with the trailer.A message indicating a trailer brakemodule fault may display in response tofaults sensed by the trailer brake controller,accompanied by a single tone. If thismessage appears, contact an authorizeddealer as soon as possible for diagnosisand repair. The controller may stillfunction, but performance may bedegraded.A message indicating a trailer wiring faultmay display when there is a short circuiton the electric brake output wire. If thismessage displays, accompanied by asingle tone, with no trailer connected, theproblem is with your vehicle wiringbetween the trailer brake controller andthe 7-pin connector at the bumper. If themessage only displays with a trailerconnected, the problem is with the trailerwiring. Consult your trailer dealer forassistance. This can be a short to ground(such as a chaffed wire), short to voltage(such as a pulled pin on trailer emergencybreakaway battery) or the trailer brakesmay be drawing too much current.

Points to RememberNote: Do not attempt removal of the trailerbrake controller without consulting theWorkshop Manual. Damage to the unit mayresult.• Adjust gain setting before using the

trailer brake controller for the first time.• Adjust gain setting, using the procedure

above, whenever road, weather andtrailer or vehicle loading conditionschange from when the gain was initiallyset.

282


Towing

• Only use the manual control lever forproper adjustment of the gain duringtrailer setup. Misuse, such asapplication during trailer sway, couldcause instability of trailer or towvehicle.

• Avoid towing in adverse weatherconditions. The trailer brake controllerdoes not provide anti-lock control ofthe trailer wheels. Trailer wheels canlock up on slippery surfaces, resultingin reduced stability of trailer and towvehicle.

• The trailer brake controller is equippedwith a feature that reduces output atvehicle speeds below 11 mph (18 km/h)so trailer and vehicle braking is not jerkyor harsh. This feature is only availablewhen applying the brakes using yourvehicle's brake pedal, not thecontroller.

• The controller interacts with the brakecontrol system and powertrain controlsystem of your vehicle to provide thebest performance on different roadconditions.

• Your vehicle's brake system and thetrailer brake system workindependently of each other. Changingthe gain setting on the controller doesnot affect the operation of yourvehicle's brakes whether you attach atrailer or not.

• When you switch the engine off, thecontroller output is disabled and thedisplay and module shut down. Thecontroller module and display turn onwhen you switch the ignition on.

• The trailer brake controller is only afactory-installed or dealer-installeditem. Ford is not responsible forwarranty or performance of thecontroller due to misuse or customerinstallation.

Trailer LampsWARNING

Never connect any trailer lamp wiringto the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; thismay damage the electrical system

resulting in fire. Contact your authorizeddealer as soon as possible for assistancein proper trailer tow wiring installation.Additional electrical equipment may berequired.

Trailer lamps are required on most towedvehicles. Make sure all running lights, brakelights, turn signals and hazard lights areworking.

Using a Step Bumper (If Equipped)

The rear bumper is equipped with anintegral hitch and only requires a ball witha one-inch (25.4 millimeter) shankdiameter. The bumper has a 5000-pound(2268 kilogram) trailer weight and a500-pound (227 kilogram) tongue weightcapacity.If it is necessary to relocate the hitch ballposition, you must install a frame-mountedtrailer hitch.

Before Towing a TrailerPractice turning, stopping and backing upto get the feel of your vehicle-trailercombination before starting on a trip.When turning, make wider turns so thetrailer wheels clear curbs and otherobstacles.

When Towing a Trailer• Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113

km/h) during the first 500 miles (800kilometers).

• Do not make full-throttle starts.

283


Towing

• Check your hitch, electrical connectionsand trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughlyafter you have traveled 50 miles (80kilometers).

• When stopped in congested or heavytraffic during hot weather, place thegearshift in position P to aid engine andtransmission cooling and to help A/Cperformance.

• Turn off the speed control with heavyloads or in hilly terrain. The speedcontrol may turn off automaticallywhen you are towing on long, steepgrades.

• Shift to a lower gear when driving downa long or steep hill. Do not apply thebrakes continuously, as they mayoverheat and become less effective.

• If your transmission is equipped with aGrade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, usethis feature when towing. This providesengine braking and helps eliminateexcessive transmission shifting foroptimum fuel economy andtransmission cooling.

• If your vehicle is equipped withAdvanceTrac with RSC, this systemmay turn on during typical corneringmaneuvers with a heavily loaded trailer.This is normal. Turning the corner at aslower speed while towing may reducethis tendency.

• If you are towing a trailer frequently inhot weather, hilly conditions, at thegross combined weight rating (or anycombination of these factors), considerrefilling your rear axle with syntheticgear lubricant (if the axle is not alreadyfilled with it). See Capacities andSpecifications (page 381).

• Allow more distance for stopping witha trailer attached. Anticipate stops andbrake gradually.

• Avoid parking on a grade. However, ifyou must park on a grade:

1. Turn the steering wheel to point yourvehicle tires away from traffic flow.

2. Set your vehicle parking brake.3. Place the automatic transmission in

position P.4. Place wheel chocks in front and back

of the trailer wheels. (Chocks notincluded with vehicle.)

Your vehicle may be equipped with atemporary or conventional spare tire. A"temporary" spare tire is different in size(diameter or width), tread-type(All-Season or All Terrain) or is from adifferent manufacturer than the road tireson your vehicle. Consult information on thetire label or Safety Compliance label forlimitations when using.

Launching or Retrieving a Boat orPersonal Watercraft (PWC)Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailerbefore backing the trailer into the water.Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailerafter removing the trailer from the water.When backing down a ramp during boatlaunching or retrieval:• Do not allow the static water level to

rise above the bottom edge of the rearbumper.

• Do not allow waves to break higherthan 6 inches (15 centimeters) abovethe bottom edge of the rear bumper.

Exceeding these limits may allow water toenter vehicle components:• Causing internal damage to the

components.• Affecting driveability, emissions, and

reliability.

284


Towing

Replace the rear axle lubricant anytimethe rear axle has been submerged in water.Water may have contaminated the rearaxle lubricant, which is not normallychecked or changed unless a leak issuspected or other axle repair is required.

TOWING THE VEHICLE ONFOUR WHEELS

WARNINGIf your vehicle has a steering wheellock make sure the ignition is in theaccessory or on position when being

towed.

Emergency TowingIf your vehicle becomes inoperable(without access to wheel dollies,car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transportvehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheelson the ground, regardless of the powertrainand transmission configuration) under thefollowing conditions:• Your vehicle is facing forward for

towing in a forward direction.• Place the transmission in position N. If

you cannot move the transmission intoN, you may need to override it. SeeTransmission (page 186).

• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).

Recreational TowingNote: Put your climate control system inrecirculated air mode to prevent exhaustfumes from entering your vehicle. SeeClimate Control (page 141).Follow these guidelines if you have a needfor recreational towing, such as towingyour vehicle behind a motorhome. Wedesigned these guidelines to preventdamage to your transmission.

Two-wheel Drive VehiclesYou cannot tow a two-wheel drive vehiclewith any wheels on the ground as vehicleor transmission damage may occur. Youmust tow your vehicle with all four wheelsoff the ground, such as when using acar-hauling trailer.

Four-wheel Drive VehiclesYou can only tow a four-wheel drivevehicle with all wheels on the ground byplacing the transfer case in its neutralposition and engaging thefour-wheel-down towing feature. Performthe steps outlined in the following sectionafter positioning your vehicle behind thetow vehicle and properly securing themtogether.Note: Make sure you properly secure yourvehicle to the tow vehicle.

Four-wheel-down Towing1. Put the ignition in the on position, but

do not start the engine. If your vehiclehas an ignition key, turn the key to on.If your vehicle has intelligent access,press the engine START/STOP buttononce without pressing the brake pedal.

2. Press and hold the brake pedal.3. Rotate the four-wheel drive switch to

2H.4. Shift the transmission to position N.5. Rotate the four-wheel drive switch

from 2H to 4L and back to 2H fivetimes within seven seconds.

Note: If completed successfully, theinformation display shows NEUTRAL TOWLEAVE IN N or NEUTRAL TOW ENABLEDLEAVE TRANSMISSION IN NEUTRAL.This indicates that your vehicle is safe totow with all wheels on the ground.Note: If you do not see the message in thedisplay, you must perform the procedureagain from the beginning.

285


Towing

Note: You may hear an audible noise as thetransfer case shifts into its neutral position.This is normal.6. Leave the transmission in position N

and turn the ignition as far as it will gotoward the off position (it will not turnfully off when the transmission is inposition N). If your vehicle has anignition key, you must leave the key inthe ignition while towing. To lock andunlock your vehicle, use the keylessentry keypad or extra set of keys. If yourvehicle has intelligent access, press theengine START/STOP button oncewithout pressing the brake pedal. Youdo not need to leave your keys in thevehicle. You can lock and unlock yourvehicle as you normally do.

7. Release the brake pedal.WARNINGS

Do not disconnect the battery duringrecreational towing. Doing so willprevent the transfer case from

shifting properly and may cause the vehicleto roll even if the transmission is in P(Park).

Shifting the transfer case to itsneutral position for recreationaltowing may cause the vehicle to be

able to roll even if the transmission is in P(Park). The driver or others could beinjured. Make sure the foot brake isdepressed and the vehicle is in a secureand safe position while the transfer caseis being shifted to its neutral position.

Failing to put the transfer case in itsneutral position will damage vehiclecomponents.

Note: You can check four-wheel-downtowing status at any time by opening thedriver's door or turning the ignition to theaccessory or on position and verifying theNEUTRAL TOW ENABLED messagedisplays in the cluster.

To exit four-wheel-down towing and returnthe transfer case to its 2H position:1. With your vehicle still properly secured

to the tow vehicle, put the ignition inthe on position, but do not start theengine. If your vehicle has an ignitionkey, turn the key to on. If your vehiclehas intelligent access, press the engineSTART/STOP button once withoutpressing the brake pedal.

2. Press and hold the brake pedal.3. Shift the transmission out of N and into

any gear.4. Release the brake pedal.Note: If completed successfully, theinstrument cluster displays 4X2, andNEUTRAL TOW DISABLED.Note: If the indicator light and message donot display, you must perform the procedureagain from the beginning.Note: You may hear an audible noise as thetransfer case shifts out of its neutralposition. This is normal.Note: If SHIFT DELAY PULL FORWARDdisplays in the instrument cluster, transfercase gear tooth blockage is present. See theinstructions after this section.5. Apply the parking brake, and then

disconnect the vehicle from the towvehicle.

6. Release the parking brake, start theengine, and shift the transmission toposition D to make sure the transfercase is out of position N.

7. If the transfer case does notsuccessfully shift out of position N, setthe parking brake until you can haveyour vehicle serviced.

286


Towing

Resolving the SHIFT DELAY PULLFORWARD MessageIf the instrument cluster displays SHIFTDELAY PULL FORWARD perform thefollowing:1. Press and hold the brake pedal.2. Put the transmission into position N,

and then start the engine.3. With the engine running, shift the

transmission to position D and let thevehicle roll forward, up to 3 feet (1meter). You may hear an audible noiseas the transfer case shifts out of itsneutral position. This is normal.

4. Make sure the instrument clusterdisplays NEUTRAL TOW DISABLED.

287


Towing

BREAKING-INYou need to break in new tires forapproximately 300 miles (480kilometers). During this time, your vehiclemay exhibit some unusual drivingcharacteristics.Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000miles (1600 kilometers). Vary your speedfrequently and change up through thegears early. Do not labor the engine.Do not tow during the first 1000 miles(1600 kilometers).

ECONOMICAL DRIVINGYour fuel economy is affected by severalthings, such as how you drive, theconditions you drive under, and how youmaintain your vehicle.You may improve your fuel economy bykeeping these things in mind:• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,

moderate fashion.• Drive at steady speeds without

stopping.• Anticipate stops; slowing down may

eliminate the need to stop.• Combine errands and minimize

stop-and-go driving.• Close the windows for high-speed

driving.• Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling

at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15% lessfuel than traveling at 65 mph [105km/h]).

• Keep the tires properly inflated and useonly the recommended size.

• Use the recommended engine oil.• Perform all regularly scheduled

maintenance.

Avoid these actions; they reduce your fueleconomy:• Sudden accelerations or hard

accelerations.• Revving the engine before turning it off.• Idle for periods longer than one minute.• Warm up your vehicle on cold

mornings.• Use the air conditioner or front

defroster.• Use the speed control in hilly terrain.• Rest your foot on the brake pedal while

driving.• Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a

trailer.• Carry unnecessary weight

(approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] islost for every 400 lb [180 kilogram] ofweight carried).

• Driving with the wheels out ofalignment.

Conditions• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a

trailer may reduce fuel economy at anyspeed.

• Adding certain accessories to yourvehicle (for example bug deflectors,rollbars, light bars, running boards, skiracks or luggage racks) may reducefuel economy.

• To maximize the fuel economy, drivewith the tonneau cover installed (ifequipped).

• Using fuel blended with alcohol maylower fuel economy.

• Fuel economy may decrease with lowertemperatures during the first 8–10miles (12–16 kilometers) of driving.

• Driving on flat terrain offers improvedfuel economy as compared to drivingon hilly terrain.

288


Driving Hints

• Transmissions give their best fueleconomy when operated in the topcruise gear and with steady pressureon the gas pedal.

• Four-wheel-drive operation (ifequipped) is less fuel efficient thantwo-wheel-drive operation.

• Close the windows for high-speeddriving.

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

WARNINGDo not drive through flowing or deepwater as you may lose control of yourvehicle.

Note: Driving through standing water cancause vehicle damage.Note: Engine damage can occur if waterenters the air filter.Before driving through standing water,check the depth. Never drive through waterthat is higher than the bottom of the wheelhubs.

E176913

When driving through standing water, drivevery slowly and do not stop your vehicle.Your brake performance and traction maybe limited. After driving through water andas soon as it is safe to do so:

• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry thebrakes and to check that they work.

• Check that the horn works.• Check that the exterior lights work.• Turn the steering wheel to check that

the steering power assist works.

FLOOR MATS

WARNINGSAlways use floor mats that aredesigned to fit the foot well of yourvehicle. Only use floor mats that

leave the pedal area unobstructed. Onlyuse floor mats that are firmly secured toretention posts so that they cannot slip outof position and interfere with the pedalsor impair safe operation of your vehicle inother ways.

Pedals that cannot move freely cancause loss of vehicle control andincrease the risk of serious personal

injury.Always make sure that the floormats are properly attached to theretention posts in the carpet that are

supplied with your vehicle. Floor mats mustbe properly secured to both retention poststo make sure mats do not shift out ofposition.

Never place floor mats or any othercovering in the vehicle foot well thatcannot be properly secured to

prevent them from moving and interferingwith the pedals or the ability to control thevehicle.

Never place floor mats or any othercovering on top of already installedfloor mats. Floor mats should always

rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface andnot another floor mat or other covering.Additional floor mats or any other coveringwill reduce the pedal clearance andpotentially interfere with pedal operation.

289


Driving Hints

WARNINGSCheck attachment of floor mats ona regular basis. Always properlyreinstall and secure floor mats that

have been removed for cleaning orreplacement.

Always make sure that objectscannot fall into the driver foot wellwhile the vehicle is moving. Objects

that are loose can become trapped underthe pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.

Failure to properly follow floor matinstallation or attachmentinstructions can potentially cause

interference with pedal operation causinga loss of vehicle control.

E142666

To install floor mats, position the floor matso that the eyelet is over the retention postand press down to lock in.To remove the floor mat, reverse theinstallation procedure.

SNOWPLOWINGWe recommend the four-wheel drive F-150in XL, XLT or Lariat trim levels with the 5.0Lengine and snowplow option for residentialsnowplowing only. We do not recommendthe F-150 with the automatic four-wheeldrive system for snowplowing.

Do not use F-150 vehicles equipped withthe 2.7L or 3.5L engines for snowplowing.

Installing the SnowplowWeight limits and guidelines for selectingand installing the snowplow are in the FordTruck Body Builders Layout Book,snowplow section, found atwww.fleet.ford.com/truckbbas.A typical installation affects the following:• Certification to government safety laws

such as occupant protection and airbagdeployment, braking, and lighting. Lookfor an Alterer’s Label on your vehiclefrom the snowplow installer certifyingthat the installation meets allapplicable Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards (FMVSS).

• The Front Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) is on the upper left side of thevehicle’s Safety ComplianceCertification Label. This is the totalweight that front axle supports, whichincludes the vehicle weight plus anyauxiliary equipment such as snowplowframe-mounted hardware that can beadded to the vehicle and satisfy Fordcompliance certification to FMVSS. Donot exceed FGAWR or Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR).

• Rear ballast weight behind the rearaxle may be required to preventexceeding the FGAWR, and providefront-to-rear weight balance for properbraking and steering.

• Front wheel toe may requirere-adjustment to prevent prematureuneven tire wear. Specifications are inthe Ford Workshop Manual.

• Headlight aim may require adjustment.

290


Driving Hints

• The tire air pressures recommendedfor general driving are on the vehicle’sSafety Certification Label. Themaximum cold inflation pressure forthe tire and associated load rating areon the tire sidewall. Tire air pressuremay require re-adjustment within thesepressure limits to accommodate theadditional weight of the snowplowinstallation.

• Federal and some local regulationsrequire additional exterior lamps forsnowplow-equipped vehicles. Contactan authorized dealer for additionalinformation.

Snowplow Mode (If Equipped)

Press the snowplow button on theinstrument panel to switch on snowplowmode. The button illuminates when insnowplow mode. A message appears inthe information display indicating thatfeatures are turned off when in snowplowmode.The following features are disabled whenin snowplow mode:• 110V inverter.• Fog lamps.• Heated steering wheel.• Heated front and rear seats.• Massaging seats.The body module also activates thesnowplow relay that provides power toaftermarket snowplow controls.Switch off snowplow mode by pressingthe snowplow button or switching off theignition. The snowplow button is no longerilluminated and features are turned on.

Note: The electrical system is designed tosupport the addition of a residentialsnowplow (up to 60 Amps continuous) andsnowplow lights (up to 20 Ampscontinuous) using snowplow mode. Thesystem is not designed to support snowplowusage with additional electrical aftermarketaccessories.

Operating the Vehicle with theSnowplow AttachedNote: Drive the vehicle at least 500 miles(800 kilometers) before using your vehiclefor snow removal.We recommend vehicle speed does notexceed 45 mph (72 km/h) whensnowplowing.The attached snowplow blade restrictsairflow to the radiator, and may cause theengine to run at a higher temperature.Attention to engine temperature isespecially important when outsidetemperatures are above freezing. Anglethe blade to maximize airflow to theradiator and monitor engine temperatureto determine whether a left or right angleprovides the best performance.Follow the severe duty schedule in yourScheduled Maintenance information forengine oil and transmission fluid changeintervals.

Snowplowing with your AirbagEquipped Vehicle

WARNINGSDo not attempt to service, repair, ormodify the airbag supplementalrestraint system (SRS) or its fuses.

Contact a Ford or Lincoln dealer.

291


Driving Hints

WARNINGSAdditional equipment such assnowplow equipment may affect theperformance of the airbag sensors

increasing the risk of injury. Please refer tothe Body Builders Layout Book forinstructions about the appropriateinstallation of additional equipment.

All occupants of the vehicle,including the driver, should alwaysproperly wear their safety belts, even

when provided with an airbagsupplemental restraint system (SRS).

Your vehicle is equipped with a driver andpassenger airbag supplemental restraintsystem. The supplemental restraint systemactivates in certain frontal and offsetfrontal collisions when the vehicle sustainssufficient longitudinal deceleration.Careless or high speed driving whilesnowplowing, which results in significantvehicle decelerations, can deploy theairbag. Such driving also increases the riskof accidents.Never remove or defeat the trippingmechanisms designed into the snowremoval equipment by its manufacturer.Doing so may cause damage to the vehicleand the snow removal equipment as wellas possible airbag deployment.

Engine Temperature while PlowingYour engine may run at a highertemperature than normal because theattached snowplow blade restricts airflowto the radiator:

• If you are driving more than 15 mi(24 km) at temperatures abovefreezing, angle the plow blade eitherfull left or full right to providemaximum airflow to the radiator.

• If you are driving less than 15 mi(24 km) at speeds up to 45 mph(72 km/h) in cold weather, you do notneed to worry about blade position toprovide maximum airflow.

Transmission Operation whilePlowing

WARNINGDo not spin the wheels at over 35mph (55 km/h). The tires may failand injure a passenger or bystander.

• Shift transfer case to 4L (4WD Low)when plowing in small areas at speedsbelow 5.0 mph (8 km/h).

• Shift transfer case to 4H (4WD High)when plowing larger areas or light snowat higher speeds. Do not exceed 15 mph(24 km/h).

• Do not shift the transmission from aforward gear to R (Reverse) until theengine is at idle and the wheels havestopped.

Outside Air Temperature WhilePlowingWhile plowing with your vehicle, the plowblade can block the sensor airflow andcause the outside air temperature readingto be inaccurate.A Ford wiring kit is available to relocate theOutside Air Temperature sensor to theplow blade frame to provide moreaccurate outside air temperature readings.Contact an authorized dealer for moreinformation.

292


Driving Hints

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCEVehicles Sold in the United States:Getting Roadside AssistanceTo fully assist you should you have avehicle concern, Ford Motor Companyoffers a complimentary roadsideassistance program. This program isseparate from the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. The service is available:• 24 hours a day, seven days a week.• For the coverage period listed on the

Roadside Assistance Card included inyour Owner's Manual portfolio.

Roadside Assistance covers:• A flat tire change with a good spare, if

provided with the vehicle (exceptvehicles supplied with a tire inflationkit).

• Battery jump start.• Lock-out assistance (key replacement

cost is the customer's responsibility).• Fuel delivery — independent service

contractors, if not prohibited by state,local or municipal law, shall deliver upto 2 gal (7.6 L) of gasoline or 5 gal(18.9 L) of diesel fuel to a disabledvehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fueldelivery service to two no-chargeoccurrences within a 12-month period.

• Winch out — available within 100 ft(30.5 m) of a paved or countymaintained road, no recoveries.

• Towing — independent servicecontractors, if not prohibited by state,local or municipal law, shall tow Fordeligible vehicles to an authorized dealerwithin 35 mi (56 km) of thedisablement location or to the nearest

authorized dealer. If a memberrequests a tow to an authorized dealerthat is more than 35 mi (56 km) fromthe disablement location, the membershall be responsible for any mileagecosts in excess of 35 mi (56 km).

Roadside Assistance includes up to $200for a towed trailer if the disabled eligiblevehicle requires service at the nearestauthorized dealer. If the towing vehicle isoperational but the trailer is not, then thetrailer does not qualify for any roadsideservices.

Vehicles Sold in the United States:Using Roadside AssistanceComplete the roadside assistanceidentification card and place it in yourwallet for quick reference. This card is inthe owner's information portfolio in theglove compartment.United States Ford vehicle customers whorequire Roadside Assistance, call1-800-241-3673.If you need to arrange roadside assistancefor yourself, Ford Motor Companyreimburses a reasonable amount fortowing to the nearest dealership within35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursementinformation, United States Ford vehiclecustomers call 1-800-241-3673.Customers need to submit their originalreceipts.

Vehicles Sold in Canada: GettingRoadside AssistanceTo fully assist you should you have avehicle concern, Ford Motor Company ofCanada, Limited offers a complimentaryroadside assistance program. This programis eligible within Canada or the continentalUnited States.

293


Roadside Emergencies

This program is separate from the NewVehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverageis concurrent with the powertrain coverageperiod of your vehicle.Canadian customers who require roadsideassistance, call 1-800-665-2006.

Vehicles Sold in Canada: UsingRoadside AssistanceComplete the roadside assistanceidentification card and place it in yourwallet for quick reference.In Canada, this card is found in theWarranty Guide in the glove compartmentof your vehicle.

Vehicles Sold in Canada: RoadsideAssistance Program CoverageThe service is available 24 hours a day,seven days a week.Canadian roadside coverage and benefitsmay differ from the U.S. coverage.For complete program coverage detailsyou may contact your dealer, you can callus in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visitour website at www.ford.ca.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERSNote: The hazard warning flashers willoperate when the ignition is in any positionor if the key is not in the ignition. If usedwhen the engine is not running, the batterywill lose charge. As a result, there may beinsufficient power to restart your engine.

E142663

The hazard flasher control islocated on the instrument panelby the radio. Use it when your

vehicle is disabled and is creating a safetyhazard for other motorists.

• Press the flasher control and all frontand rear direction indicators flash.

• Press the flasher control again to turnthem off.

FUEL SHUTOFF

WARNINGFailure to inspect and, if necessary,repair fuel leaks after a collision mayincrease the risk of fire and serious

injury. Ford Motor Company recommendsthat the fuel system be inspected by anauthorized dealer after any collision.

In the event of a moderate to severecollision, this vehicle is equipped with afuel pump shut-off feature that stops theflow of fuel to the engine. Not every impactwill cause a shut-off.Should your vehicle shut off after acollision, you may restart your vehicle. Forvehicles equipped with a key system:1. Switch off the ignition.2. Switch on the ignition.3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the

fuel pump.For vehicles equipped with a push buttonstart system:1. Press the START/STOP button to

switch off the ignition.2. Press the brake pedal and press the

START/STOP button to switch on theignition.

294



3. Remove your foot from the brake pedaland press the START/STOP buttonto switch off the ignition.

4. You can either attempt to start theengine by pressing the brake pedal andthe START/STOP button, or switchon the ignition only by pressing theSTART/STOP button withoutpressing the brake pedal. Both waysre-enable the fuel system.

Note: When you try to restart your vehicleafter a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes surethat various systems are safe to restart.Once your vehicle determines that thesystems are safe, then the vehicle will allowyou to restart.Note: In the event that your vehicle doesnot restart after your third attempt, contactan authorized dealer.

JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE

WARNINGSBatteries normally produce explosivegases which can cause personalinjury. Therefore, do not allow

flames, sparks or lighted substances tocome near the battery. When working nearthe battery, always shield your face andprotect your eyes. Always provide correctventilation.

Keep batteries out of reach ofchildren. Batteries contain sulfuricacid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or

clothing. Shield your eyes when workingnear the battery to protect against possiblesplashing of acid solution. In case of acidcontact with skin or eyes, flushimmediately with water for a minimum of15 minutes and get prompt medicalattention. If acid is swallowed, call aphysician immediately.

Use only adequately sized cableswith insulated clamps.

Preparing Your VehicleDo not attempt to push-start yourautomatic transmission vehicle.Note: Attempting to push-start a vehiclewith an automatic transmission may causetransmission damage.Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start yourvehicle.Note: Do not disconnect the battery of thedisabled vehicle as this could damage thevehicle electrical system.Park the booster vehicle close to the hoodof the disabled vehicle, making sure thetwo vehicles do not touch.

Connecting the Jumper CablesWARNINGS

Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,engine rocker covers, the intakemanifold or electrical components

as grounding points. Stay clear of movingparts. To avoid reverse polarityconnections, make sure that you correctlyidentify the positive (+) and negative (-)terminals on both the disabled and boostervehicles before connecting the cables.

Do not attach the end of the positivecable to the studs or L-shaped eyeletlocated above the positive (+)

terminal of your vehicle’s battery. Highcurrent may flow through and causedamage to the fuses.

Do not connect the end of thesecond cable to the negative (-)terminal of the battery to be jumped.

A spark may cause an explosion of thegases that surround the battery.

Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehiclerepresents the booster vehicle.

295



4

2

1

3

E142664

1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cableto the positive (+) terminal of thedischarged battery.

2. Connect the other end of the positive(+) cable to the positive (+) terminalof the booster vehicle battery.

3. Connect the negative (-) cable to thenegative (-) terminal of the boostervehicle battery.

4. Make the final connection of thenegative (-) cable to an exposed metalpart of the stalled vehicle's engine,away from the battery and the fuelinjection system, or connect thenegative (-) cable to a groundconnection point if available.

Jump Starting1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle

and rev the engine moderately, or pressthe accelerator gently to keep yourengine speed between 2000 and 3000RPM, as shown in your tachometer.

2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.3. Once the disabled vehicle has been

started, run both vehicle engines for anadditional three minutes beforedisconnecting the jumper cables.

Removing the Jumper CablesRemove the jumper cables in the reverseorder that they were connected.

4

1

3

2

E142665

1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cablefrom the disabled vehicle.

296



2. Remove the jumper cable on thenegative (-) terminal of the boostervehicle battery.

3. Remove the jumper cable from thepositive (+) terminal of the boostervehicle battery.

4. Remove the jumper cable from thepositive (+) terminal of the disabledvehicle battery.

5. Allow the engine to idle for at least oneminute.

POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEMThe system flashes the direction indicatorsand sounds the horn (intermittently) in theevent of a serious impact that deploys anairbag (front, side, side curtain or SafetyCanopy) or the safety belt pretensioners.The horn and indicators will turn off when:• You press the hazard control button.• You press the panic button on the

remote entry transmitter (if equipped).• Your vehicle runs out of power.

TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE

WARNINGSBlock the wheels to help prevent thevehicle from moving.Unexpected and possibly suddenvehicle movement may occur if youdo not take these precautions.

E143886

If you need to have your vehicle towed,contact a professional towing service or,if you are a member of a roadsideassistance program, your roadsideassistance service provider.We recommend the use of a wheel lift anddollies or flatbed equipment to tow yourvehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. FordMotor Company has not approved aslingbelt towing procedure. Vehicledamage may occur if towed incorrectly, orby any other means.Ford Motor Company produces a towingmanual for all authorized tow truckoperators. Have your tow truck operatorrefer to this manual for proper hook-upand towing procedures for your vehicle.

297



It is acceptable to have your two-wheeldrive vehicle towed with the front wheelson the ground (without dollies) and therear wheels off the ground.We recommend towing a four-wheel drivevehicle with all wheels off the ground, suchas using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbedequipment. However, it is acceptable touse a wheel lift to raise the rear of yourvehicle so long as, depending on vehicleconfiguration, you perform the followingbefore towing:• If your vehicle is equipped with a

manual-shift transfer case, make surethe front wheel hub locks are in theFREE position before towing.

• If your vehicle is equipped with anelectronic shift-on-the-fly transfercase, make sure you turn thefour-wheel drive control to the 2Hposition before towing.

Note: Towing an electronic shift-on-the-flyfour-wheel drive vehicle with the frontwheels on the ground without disengagingthe front hubs may cause damage to theautomatic transmission.Note: Towing a two-wheel drive vehicle oran electronic shift-on-the-fly four-wheeldrive vehicle with the rear wheels on theground for more than 50 miles (80 km) orfaster than 35 mph (56 km/h) may causedamage to the automatic transmission.Note: Using wheel lift equipment to tow adual rear wheel vehicle requires removingan outer rear wheel before towing.

TOWING POINTS

WARNINGSUsing recovery hooks is dangerousand should only be done by a personfamiliar with proper vehicle recovery

safety practices. Improper use of recoveryhooks may cause hook failure or separationfrom the vehicle and could result in seriousinjury or death.

Always slowly remove the slack fromthe recovery strap prior to pulling.Failure to do so can introduce

significantly higher loads which can causethe recovery hooks to break off, or therecovery strap to fail which can causeserious injury or death.

Never link two straps together witha clevis pin. These heavy metalobjects could become projectiles if

the strap breaks and can cause seriousinjury or death.

Your vehicle comes equipped withframe-mounted front recovery hooks.These hooks should never have a loadapplied to them greater than the grossvehicle weight rating of your vehicle.Before using recovery hooks:• Make sure all attaching points are

secure and capable of withstandingthe applied load.

• Never use chains, cables or tow strapswith metal hook ends.

• Only use recovery straps that have aminimum breaking strength two tothree times the gross vehicle weight ofthe stuck vehicle.

• Make sure the recovery strap is in goodcondition and free of visible cuts, tearsor damage.

298



• Use a damper device such as a tarp,heavy blanket or piece of carpetdraped over the recovery strap to helpabsorb the energy in the event thestrap breaks.

• Make sure the stuck vehicle is notloaded heavier than its gross vehicleweight rating specified on thecertification label.

• Always align the tow vehicle and stuckvehicle in a straight line (within 10degrees).

• Keep bystanders to the sides of thevehicle, at a distance of at least twicethe length of the recovery strap. Thishelps avoid injury from the hazard of arecovery hook or strap breaking, or avehicle lurching into their path.

299



GETTING THE SERVICES YOUNEEDWarranty repairs to your vehicle must beperformed by an authorized dealer. Whileany authorized dealer handling your vehicleline will provide warranty service, werecommend you return to your sellingauthorized dealer who wants to ensureyour continued satisfaction.Please note that certain warranty repairsrequire special training and equipment, sonot all authorized dealers are authorizedto perform all warranty repairs. This meansthat, depending on the warranty repairneeded, you may have to take your vehicleto another authorized dealer.A reasonable time must be allowed toperform a repair after taking your vehicleto the authorized dealer. Repairs will bemade using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, orremanufactured or other parts that areauthorized by Ford.

Away From HomeIf you are away from home when yourvehicle needs service, contact the FordCustomer Relationship Center or use theonline resources listed below to find thenearest authorized dealer.In the United States:Mailing addressFord Motor CompanyCustomer Relationship CenterP.O. Box 6248Dearborn, MI 48126Telephone1-800-392-3673 (FORD)(TDD for the hearing impaired:1-800-232-5952)Additional information and resources areavailable online:

Website

www.owner.ford.com

These are some of the items that can befound online:• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,

City/State or Zip Code.• Owner Manuals.• Maintenance Schedules.• Recalls.• Ford Extended Service Plans.• Ford Genuine Accessories.• Service specials and promotions.In Canada:Mailing addressCustomer Relationship CentreFord Motor Company of Canada, LimitedP.O. Box 2000Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8Telephone1-800-565-3673 (FORD)

Website

www.ford.ca

Twitter@FordServiceCA (English Canada)@FordServiceQC (Quebec)

Additional AssistanceIf you have questions or concerns, or areunsatisfied with the service you arereceiving, follow these steps:1. Contact your Sales Representative or

Service Advisor at your selling orservicing authorized dealer.

300


Customer Assistance

2. If your inquiry or concern remainsunresolved, contact the Sales Manager,Service Manager or Customer RelationsManager.

3. If you require assistance or clarificationon Ford Motor Company policies,please contact the Ford CustomerRelationship Center.

In order to help us serve you better, pleasehave the following information availablewhen contacting a Customer RelationshipCenter:• Vehicle Identification Number.• Your telephone number (home and

business).• The name of the authorized dealer and

city where located.• The vehicle’s current odometer reading.In some states within the United States,you must directly notify Ford in writingbefore pursuing remedies under yourstate's warranty laws, and Ford is alsoallowed a final repair attempt.Additionally, in some states within theUnited States, a consumer has the optionof submitting a warranty dispute to theBBB Auto Line before taking action underthe Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or tothe extent allowed by state law, beforepursuing replacement or repurchaseremedies provided by certain state laws.This dispute handling procedure is notrequired prior to enforcing state createdrights or other rights which are independentof the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act orstate replacement or repurchase laws.

IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)requires that, if a manufacturer or itsrepresentative is unable to repair a motorvehicle to conform to the vehicle’sapplicable express warranty after areasonable number of attempts, themanufacturer shall be required to eitherreplace the vehicle with one substantiallyidentical or repurchase the vehicle andreimburse the buyer in an amount equal tothe actual price paid or payable by theconsumer (less a reasonable allowancefor consumer use). The consumer has theright to choose whether to receive a refundor replacement vehicle.California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)presumes that the manufacturer has hada reasonable number of attempts toconform the vehicle to its applicableexpress warranties if, within the first 18months of ownership of a new vehicle orthe first 18,000 mi (29,000 km), whicheveroccurs first:1. Two or more repair attempts are made

on the same non-conformity likely tocause death or serious bodily injury OR

2. Four or more repair attempts are madeon the same nonconformity (a defector condition that substantially impairsthe use, value or safety of the vehicle)OR

3. The vehicle is out of service for repairof nonconformities for a total of morethan 30 calendar days (not necessarilyall at one time).

In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumermust also notify the manufacturer of theneed for the repair of the nonconformityat the following address:Ford Motor Company16800 Executive Plaza DriveMail Drop 3NE-BDearborn, MI 48126

301


Customer Assistance

You are required to submit your warrantydispute to BBB AUTO LINE before assertingin court any rights or remedies conferredby California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).You are also required to use BBB AUTOLINE before exercising rights or seekingremedies created by the FederalMagnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seekredress by pursuing rights and remediesnot created by California Civil Code Section1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-MossWarranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE isnot required by those statutes.

THE BETTER BUSINESSBUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINEPROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)Your satisfaction is important to FordMotor Company and to your dealer. If awarranty concern has not been resolvedusing the three-step procedure outlinedearlier in this chapter in the Getting theServices you need section, you may beeligible to participate in the BBB AUTOLINE program.The BBB AUTO LINE program consists oftwo parts – mediation and arbitration.During mediation, a representative of theBBB will contact both you and Ford MotorCompany to explore options for settlementof the claim. If an agreement is not reachedduring mediation or you do not want toparticipate in mediation, and if your claimis eligible, you may participate in thearbitration process. An arbitration hearingwill be scheduled so that you can presentyour case in an informal setting before animpartial person. The arbitrator willconsider the testimony provided and makea decision after the hearing.

Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINEprogram are usually decided within fortydays after you file your claim with the BBB.You are not bound by the decision, andmay reject the decision and proceed tocourt where all findings of the BBB AutoLine dispute, and decision, are admissiblein the court action. Should you choose toaccept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Fordis then bound by the decision, and mustcomply with the decision within 30 daysof receipt of your acceptance letter.BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using theinformation provided below, please call orwrite to request a program application.You will be asked for your name andaddress, general information about yournew vehicle, information about yourwarranty concerns, and any steps you havealready taken to try to resolve them. ACustomer Claim Form will be mailed thatwill need to be completed, signed andreturned to the BBB along with proof ofownership. Upon receipt, the BBB willreview the claim for eligibility under theProgram Summary Guidelines.You can get more information bycalling BBB AUTO LINE at1-800-955-5100, or writing to:BBB AUTO LINE3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600Arlington, Virginia 22201BBB AUTO LINE applications can also berequested by calling the Ford MotorCompany Customer Relationship Centerat 1-800-392-3673.Note: Ford Motor Company reserves theright to change eligibility limitations, modifyprocedures, or to discontinue this processat any time without notice and withoutobligation.

302


Customer Assistance

UTILIZING THEMEDIATION/ARBITRATIONPROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)For vehicles delivered to authorizedCanadian dealers. In those cases whereyou continue to feel that the efforts by Fordof Canada and the authorized dealer toresolve a factory-related vehicle serviceconcern have been unsatisfactory, Ford ofCanada participates in an impartial thirdparty mediation/arbitration programadministered by the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).The CAMVAP program is a straight forwardand relatively speedy alternative to resolvea disagreement when all other efforts toproduce a settlement have failed. Thisprocedure is without cost to you and isdesigned to eliminate the need for lengthyand expensive legal proceedings.In the CAMVAP program, impartialthird-party arbitrators conduct hearings atmutually convenient times and places inan informal environment. These impartialarbitrators review the positions of theparties, make decisions and, whenappropriate, render awards to resolvedisputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,and final as the arbitrator’s award isbinding on both you and Ford of Canada.CAMVAP services are available in allCanadian territories and provinces. Formore information, without charge orobligation, call your CAMVAP ProvincialAdministrator directly at 1-800-207-0685or visit www.camvap.ca.

GETTING ASSISTANCEOUTSIDE THE U.S. ANDCANADABefore exporting your vehicle to a foreigncountry, contact the appropriate foreignembassy or consulate. These officials caninform you of local vehicle registrationregulations and where to find unleadedfuel or petrol/gas engines or the propersulfur fuel for diesel engines.If you cannot find the proper fuelrecommended for your vehicle, contactour Customer Relationship Center.The use of improper fuels in your vehiclewithout proper conversion may damagethe effectiveness of your emission controlsystem and may cause engine knocking orserious engine damage. Ford MotorCompany or Ford of Canada is notresponsible for any damage caused by useof improper fuel. Using improper fuels mayalso result in difficulty importing yourvehicle back into the United States.If your vehicle must be serviced while youare traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islandsand/or Puerto Rico , Central America, theCaribbean, and Israel and the Middle East,contact the nearest authorized dealer. Ifthe authorized dealer cannot help you,contact the corresponding Ford CustomerAssistance Center:FORD MOTOR COMPANYCustomer Relationship Centers in:

303


Customer Assistance

E-mailFaxPhoneCustomer Relation-ship Center

[email protected]/AN/AAsia Pacific

[email protected]+1 313 594 4857Caribbean andCentral America

[email protected] 4 3327 266FORDFord Middle East80004443673

Lincoln80004441067

UAE80004441066

Saudi Arabia8008443673

Mobily and Zain cellphone users in Saudi

800850078

[email protected]/A+1-800-841-3673Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands

[email protected]+1 313 390 0804+1-313-594-4857Sub-Saharan Africa

[email protected] [email protected]/A+63-2-717-6410South Korea

If you are in another foreign country,contact the nearest authorized dealer. Inthe event your inquiry is unresolved,communicate your concern with thedealership’s Sales Manager, ServiceManager or Customer Relations Manager.If you require additional assistance orclarification, please contact the respectiveCustomer Relationship Center aspreviously listed.Customers in the U.S. should call1-800-392-3673.

ORDERING ADDITIONALOWNER'S LITERATURETo order the publications in this portfolio,contact Helm, Incorporated at:

HELM, INCORPORATED47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, Michigan 48170Attention: Customer ServiceOr to order a free publication catalog, calltoll free: 1-800-782-4356Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. ESTHelm, Incorporated can also be reachedby their website:www.helminc.com(Items in this catalog may be purchasedby credit card, check or money order.)

304


Customer Assistance

Obtaining a French Owner’sManualFrench Owner’s Manual can be obtainedfrom your authorized dealer or bycontacting Helm, Incorporated using thecontact information listed previously in thissection.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS(U.S. ONLY)

E142557

If you believe that your vehicle hasa defect which could cause acrash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingFord Motor Company.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems betweenyou, your dealer, or Ford MotorCompany.To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go towww.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator1200 New Jersey Avenue,SoutheastWashington, D.C. 20590You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from www.safercar.gov.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS(CANADA ONLY)If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform Transport Canada and Ford ofCanada.

Transport Canada Contact Information

www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safevehicles-defectinvestigations-index-76.htm (English)

Website

www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/VehiculesSecuritaires-Enquetes-index-76.htm (French)

Website

1–800–333–0510Phone

305


Customer Assistance

Ford of Canada Contact Information

www.ford.caWebsite

1–800–565-3673Phone

306


Customer Assistance

FUSE SPECIFICATION CHARTPower Distribution Box

WARNINGSAlways disconnect the battery beforeservicing high current fuses.To reduce risk of electrical shock,always replace the cover to thepower distribution box before

reconnecting the battery or refilling fluidreservoirs.

The power distribution box is located inthe engine compartment. It hashigh-current fuses that protect yourvehicle's main electrical systems fromoverloads.If you disconnect and reconnect thebattery, you will need to reset somefeatures. See Changing the 12V Battery(page 329).

E176315

Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number

Not used.—1

Not used.—2

Not used.—3

307


Fuses


Telescoping side-view mirror.—4

Rear window defroster.40A*5

Not used.—6

Not used.—7

Telescoping side-view mirror.—8

Fuel pump.30A*9

Charge air cooler fans (Raptor only).40A*10

Automatic brake system motor.60A*11

Body control module 1.50A*12

Body control module 2.60A*13

Amplifier.20A**14

4x4.25A**15

Spot light module.10A**16

Heated seat.15A**17

Steering-column lock.10A**18

Power seats.10A**19

Snow plow.15A**20Rear heated seats.

Transmission control module.15A**21A

Not used.—21B

Windshield wiper motor.30A*22

Rain sensor.15A*23

Series fan feed.25A*24

Not used.—25

Driver seat motors.30A*26

Passenger power seat.30A*27

Climate controlled seat.30A*28

308


Fuses


Upfitter fuses 94, 96, 98 and 100 (Raptoronly).

25A*29

Air conditioner clutch relay.—30

Not used.—31

Not used.—32

Electric fan 3.50A*33

Trailer tow park lamps.25A*34

Trailer tow stop-turn relay fuse.20A*35

Trailer tow lamps module.25A*36

Electric fan 1.50A*37

Alt A sensor.10A**38

Integrated wheel end solenoid.10A**39

E-locker.15A**40

Telescoping mirror.10A**41

Transmission fluid pump.30A**42

Horn.25A**43

Air conditioner clutch.10A**44

Powertrain control module relay coil.10A**45

Wiper relay coil.10A**46

Upfitter 1 (Raptor only).15A*47

Upfitter 2 (Raptor only).15A*48

Trailer brake control module.30A*49

Power running boards.30A*50

Fuel pump relay.—51

Not used.—52

Upfitter 5 relay (Raptor only).—53

Voltage quality module.30A*54

309


Fuses


Body-control-module voltage-quality-module feed.

Body control module RP2 feed.40A*55

Fuel pump.20A*56

Right-hand electric parking brake actuator.30A*57

Left-hand electric parking brake actuator.30A*58

Starter.30A*59

Blower motor.40A*60

Brake control module.30A*61Automatic brake system valves.

Power seat relay.—62

Heated mirrors.15A**63


Starter relay.—65

Powertrain control module relay.—66

Windshield wiper relay.—67

Blower motor relay.—68

Power sliding back window relay.—69

Electric fan 1 relay.—70

Not used.—71

4x4.25A*72

Not used.—73

PDRG motor.30A*74

Horn relay.—75

Not used.—76

Steering column lock relay.—77

Not used.—78

Trailer tow parking lamp relay.—79

310


Fuses


Rear window defroster relay.—80


PDRG close relay.—82


Not used.—84

Not used.—85

Not used.—86

Trailer tow backup lamps.10A**87

Not used.—88

Cigar lighter power point 1.20A*89

Power point 2.20A*90



GTDI vehicle power 1.25A**93

PFI vehicle power 1.10A**

Upfitter 3 (Raptor only).10A**94

Vehicle power 2.25A**95


Vehicle power 3.10A**97


Vehicle power 4 (PFI).20A**99

Vehicle power 4 (GTDI).15A**


Not used.—101

Snow plow relay.—102

Charge air cooler fan (Raptor only).—103

Electronic fan 3 relay.—104

311


Fuses


Power steering.10A**105

Not used.—106

Anti-lock brakes.10A**107

Not used.—108

Powertrain control module.10A**109Transmission control module run-startpower.

4x4 run/start.10A**110Adaptive cruise control.

Transmission pump run-start.15A**111

Charge air cooler relay coil run-start(Raptor only).

10A**112

Blind spot information system.7.5A**113Rear view camera.Front view camera.Voltage quality module.

Electric fan 2 relay.—114



*Cartridge fuses**Mini fuses

Passenger Compartment FusePanelThe fuse panel is in the right-hand side ofthe passenger footwell behind a trim panel.To remove the trim panel, pull it towardyou and swing it away from the side. Toreinstall it, line up the tabs with the grooveson the panel, and then push it shut.

To remove the fuse panel cover, press inthe tabs on both sides of the cover, andthen pull it off.To reinstall the fuse panel cover, place thetop part of the cover on the fuse panel andpush the bottom part until it latches.Gently pull on the cover to make sure it haslatched properly.

312


Fuses

E145984


Demand lamp relay.10A1Power seats relay.Glove box.Vanity lamps.Overhead console.Dome.Courtesy.Map lamps.

Memory module logic.7.5A2Memory seat switches.Lumbar motor.

Driver door lock motor.20A3

Trailer brake control.5A4

Not used.20A5

Not used.10A6

Not used.10A7

Not used.10A8

Not used (spare).10A9

313


Fuses


Embedded modem module.5A10

Combined sensor module.5A11

Climate head module.7.5A12Smart datalink converter.

Cluster.7.5A13SCCM.

Brake.10A14

Smart datalink converter.10A15

Tailgate release.15A16

HUD.5A17Terrain switch.

Ignition switch and passive-entry passive-start start stop switch.

5A18

Key inhibit solenoid.

Tow haul (O/D) cancel for floor or columnshifter.

7.5A19

Not used.—20

HUD.5A21In car temperature with humidity sensor.

EPB.5A22Power seat.

PDRG switch.10A23Inverter.Driver side window.Moonroof.Vista roof.

Central lock/unlock.20A24

Driver door control module.30A25

Passenger door control module.30A26

Vista roof.30A27Moonroof.

Not used.20A28

314


Fuses


Not used.30A29

Not used.30A30

Adjustable pedal switch and motor.15A31

Multi-function display.10A32Global position system.SYNC.Radio frequency receiver.

Radio.20A33

Run-start relay.30A34

Restraints module.5A35

360 camera module.15A36Heated steering wheel module.Rear-view mirror.Rear heated seats.

Power distribution box run-start fuses.20A37

Rear window switches and motors.30A Circuit breaker.38

CHANGING A FUSEFuses

WARNINGAlways replace a fuse with one thathas the specified amperage rating.Using a fuse with a higher amperage

rating can cause severe wire damage andcould start a fire.

E217331

If electrical components in the vehicle arenot working, a fuse may have blown. Blownfuses are identified by a broken wire withinthe fuse. Check the appropriate fusesbefore replacing any electricalcomponents.

315


Fuses

Fuse Types

E207206

Fuse TypeCallout

Micro 2A

Micro 3B

MaxiC

MiniD

M CaseE

J CaseF

J Case Low ProfileG

316


Fuses

GENERAL INFORMATIONHave your vehicle serviced regularly to helpmaintain its roadworthiness and resalevalue. There is a large network ofauthorized dealers that are there to helpyou with their professional servicingexpertise. We believe that their speciallytrained technicians are best qualified toservice your vehicle properly and expertly.They are supported by a wide range ofhighly specialized tools developedspecifically for servicing your vehicle.If your vehicle requires professional service,an authorized dealer can provide thenecessary parts and service. Check yourwarranty information to find out whichparts and services are covered.Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,fluids and service parts conforming tospecifications. Motorcraft® parts aredesigned and built to provide the bestperformance in your vehicle.

Precautions• Do not work on a hot engine.• Make sure that nothing gets caught in

moving parts.• Do not work on a vehicle with the

engine running in an enclosed space,unless you are sure you have enoughventilation.

• Keep all open flames and other burningmaterial (such as cigarettes) awayfrom the battery and all fuel relatedparts.

Working with the Engine Off1. Set the parking brake and shift to park

(P).2. Switch off the engine.3. Block the wheels.

Working with the Engine OnWARNING

To reduce the risk of vehicle damageand/or personal burn injuries, do notstart your engine with the air cleaner

removed and do not remove it while theengine is running.

1. Set the parking brake and shift to park(P).

2. Block the wheels.

OPENING AND CLOSING THEHOOD1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release

handle located under the left hand sideof the instrument panel.

E166491

2. Go to the front of your vehicle andlocate the secondary release leverunder the front of the hood near thecenter of your vehicle.

317


Maintenance

E190266

3. Raise the hood until the lift cylindershold it open.

4. To close, lower the hood and makesure that it is closed properly and fullylatched.

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.7L ECOBOOST™2.7L EcoBoost

E176046

318


Maintenance

Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 307).A.Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 329).B.Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 322).C.Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 322).D.Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 328).E.Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 339).F.Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 323).G.Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 329).H.

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L

E176214

Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 307).A.Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 329).B.Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 322).C.

319


Maintenance

Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 322).D.Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 328).E.Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 339).F.Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 323).G.Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 329).H.

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L ECOBOOST™

A

A

B D E FC

GHE166496

Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 329).A.Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 329).B.Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 322).C.Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 322).D.Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 328).E.Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 323).F.

320


Maintenance

Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 339).G.Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 307).H.

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 5.0L

E166494

AA AB AC AD AE AF

AAAGAAAH

Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 329).A.Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 329).B.Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 322).C.Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 322).D.Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 328).E.Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 323).F.Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 339).G.Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 307).H.

321


Maintenance

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK

E161560

A B

MINAMAXB

ENGINE OIL CHECKTo check the engine oil level consistentlyand accurately, do the following:1. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make

sure the transmission is in park (P) orneutral (N).

2. Run the engine until it reaches normaloperating temperature.

3. Make sure that your vehicle is on levelground.

4. Switch the engine off and wait 15minutes for the oil to drain into the oilpan. Checking the engine oil level toosoon after you switch the engine offmay result in an inaccurate reading.

5. Open the hood. See Opening andClosing the Hood (page 317).

6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it witha clean, lint-free cloth. See UnderHood Overview (page 319).

7. Replace the dipstick and remove itagain to check the oil level. SeeEngine Oil Dipstick (page 322).

8. Make sure that the oil level is betweenthe maximum and minimum marks. Ifthe oil level is at the minimum mark,add oil immediately. See Capacitiesand Specifications (page 388).

9. If the oil level is correct, replace thedipstick and make sure it is fully seated.

Note: Do not remove the dipstick when theengine is running.Note: If the oil level is between themaximum and minimum marks, the oil levelis acceptable. Do not add oil.Note: The oil consumption of new enginesreaches its normal level after approximately3,100 mi (5,000 km).

Adding Engine OilWARNING

Do not remove the filler cap whenthe engine is running.

Do not use supplemental engine oiladditives because they are unnecessaryand could lead to engine damage that maynot be covered by the vehicle Warranty.

E142732

322


Maintenance

Only use oils certified for gasoline enginesby the American Petroleum Institute (API).An oil with this trademark symbolconforms to the current engine andemission system protection standards andfuel economy requirements of theInternational Lubricants SpecificationAdvisory Committee (ILSAC).To top up the engine oil level do thefollowing:1. Clean the area surrounding the engine

oil filler cap before you remove it.2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See

Under Hood Overview (page 319).Turn it counterclockwise and removeit.

3. Add engine oil that meets Fordspecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 388). You mayhave to use a funnel to pour the engineoil into the opening.

4. Recheck the oil level.5. If the oil level is correct, replace the

dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn

it clockwise until you feel a strongresistance.

Note: Do not add oil further than themaximum mark. Oil levels above themaximum mark may cause engine damage.Note: Make sure you install the oil filler capcorrectly.Note: Soak up any spillage with anabsorbent cloth immediately.

OIL CHANGE INDICATORRESETUse the information display controls onthe steering wheel to reset the oil changeindicator.

From the main menu scroll to:

Action and descriptionMessage

Press the right arrow button,then from this menu scrollto the following message.

Settings


Conveni-ence


Oil LifeReset

Press and hold the OKbutton until the instrumentcluster displays thefollowing message.

Hold OK toReset

Reset Successful

When the oil change indic-ator resets the instrumentcluster displays 100%.

Remaining Life

{00}%

If the instrument clusterdisplays one of the followingmessages, repeat theprocess.

Not Reset

Reset Cancelled

ENGINE COOLANT CHECK

WARNINGSDo not add engine coolant when theengine is hot. Steam and scaldingliquids released from a hot cooling

system can burn you badly. Also, spillingcoolant on hot engine parts can burn you.

323


Maintenance

WARNINGSDo not put engine coolant in thewindshield washer fluid container. Ifsprayed on the windshield, engine

coolant could make it difficult to seethrough the windshield.

To reduce the risk of personal injury,make sure the engine is cool beforeunscrewing the coolant pressure

relief cap. The cooling system is underpressure. Steam and hot liquid can comeout forcefully when you loosen the capslightly.

Do not add coolant further than theMAX mark.

When the engine is cold, check theconcentration and level of the coolant atthe intervals listed in the scheduledmaintenance information. See ScheduledMaintenance (page 539).Note: Make sure that the coolant level isbetween the MIN and MAX marks on thecoolant reservoir.Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. Thelevel may extend beyond the MAX mark.Maintain coolant concentration within48% to 50%, which equates to a freezepoint between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F(-37°C). Coolant concentration should bechecked using a refractometer. We do notrecommend the use of hydrometers orcoolant test strips for measuring coolantconcentration.

Adding CoolantWARNING

Never remove the coolant reservoircap when the engine is running orhot.

Note: Automotive fluids are notinterchangeable. Take care not to putengine coolant in the windshield washerfluid reservoir or windshield washer fluid inthe engine coolant reservoir.Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, coolingsystem sealants, or non-specified additivesas they can cause damage to the enginecooling or heating systems. Resultingcomponent damage may not be covered bythe vehicle Warranty.It is very important to use predilutedcoolant approved to the correctspecification in order to avoid plugging thesmall passageways in the engine coolingsystem. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 381). Do not mixdifferent colors or types of coolant in yourvehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or usingan incorrect coolant may harm the engineor cooling system components and maynot be covered by the vehicle Warranty.Note: If prediluted coolant is not available,use the approved concentrated coolantdiluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. SeeCapacities and Specifications (page 381).Using water that has not been deionisedmay contribute to deposit formation,corrosion and plugging of the small coolingsystem passageways.Note: Coolants marketed for all makes andmodels may not be approved to Fordspecifications and may cause damage tothe cooling system. Resulting componentdamage may not be covered by the vehicleWarranty.If the coolant level is at or below theminimum mark, add prediluted coolantimmediately.To top up the coolant level do thefollowing:1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure

escapes as you unscrew the cap.

324


Maintenance

2. Add prediluted coolant approved tothe correct specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications (page381).

3. Add enough prediluted coolant toreach the correct level.

4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap, turnit clockwise until you feel a strongresistance.

5. Check the coolant level in the coolantreservoir the next few times you driveyour vehicle. If necessary, add enoughprediluted engine coolant to bring thecoolant level to the correct level.

If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) ofengine coolant per month, have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible.Operating an engine with a low level ofcoolant can result in engine overheatingand possible engine damage.Note: During normal vehicle operation, thecoolant may change color from orange topink or light red. As long as the coolant isclear and uncontaminated, this color changedoes not indicate the coolant has degradednor does it require the coolant to be drained,the system to be flushed, or the coolant tobe replaced.Note: In case of emergency, you can add alarge amount of water without coolant inorder to reach a vehicle service location.Water alone, without coolant, can causeengine damage from corrosion, overheatingor freezing. When you reach a servicelocation, you must have the cooling systemdrained and refilled with prediluted coolantapproved to the correct specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications (page 381).Do not use the following as a coolantsubstitute:• Alcohol.• Methanol.

• Brine.• Any coolant mixed with alcohol or

methanol antifreeze.Alcohol and other liquids can cause enginedamage from overheating or freezing.Do not add extra inhibitors or additives tothe coolant. These can be harmful andcompromise the corrosion protection ofthe coolant.

Recycled CoolantWe do not recommend the use of recycledcoolant as an approved recycling processis not yet available.Dispose of used engine coolant in anappropriate manner. Follow yourcommunity's regulations and standardsfor recycling and disposing of automotivefluids.

Severe ClimatesIf you drive in extremely cold climates:• It may be necessary to increase the

coolant concentration above 50%.• A coolant concentration of 60%

provides improved freeze pointprotection. Coolant concentrationsabove 60% decrease the overheatprotection characteristics of thecoolant and may cause enginedamage.

If you drive in extremely hot climates:• You can decrease the coolant

concentration to 40%.• Coolant concentrations below 40%

decrease the freeze and corrosionprotection characteristics of thecoolant and may cause enginedamage.

Vehicles driven year-round in non-extremeclimates should use prediluted coolant foroptimum cooling system and engineprotection.

325


Maintenance

Coolant ChangeAt specific mileage intervals, as listed inthe scheduled maintenance information,the coolant should be changed. Addprediluted coolant approved to the correctspecification. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 381).

Fail-Safe CoolingFail-safe cooling allows you to temporarilydrive your vehicle before any incrementalcomponent damage occurs. The fail-safedistance depends on ambienttemperature, vehicle load and terrain.

How Fail-Safe Cooling WorksIf the engine begins to overheat, thecoolant temperature gauge moves towardthe red zone:

A warning lamp illuminates anda message may appear in theinformation display.

If the engine reaches a presetover-temperature condition, the engineautomatically switches to alternatingcylinder operation. Each disabled cylinderacts as an air pump and cools the engine.When this occurs, your vehicle stilloperates, however:• Engine power is limited.• The air conditioning system turns off.Continued operation increases the enginetemperature, causing the engine tocompletely shut down. Your steering andbraking effort increases in this situation.When the engine temperature cools, youcan re-start the engine. Have your vehiclechecked as soon as possible to minimizeengine damage.

When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated

WARNINGSFail-safe mode is for use duringemergencies only. Operate yourvehicle in fail-safe mode only as long

as necessary to bring your vehicle to restin a safe location and seek immediaterepairs. When in fail-safe mode, yourvehicle will have limited power, will not beable to maintain high-speed operation, andmay completely shut down withoutwarning, potentially losing engine power,power steering assist, and power brakeassist, which may increase the possibilityof a crash resulting in serious injury.

Never remove the coolant reservoircap when the engine is running orhot.

Your vehicle has limited engine powerwhen in the fail-safe mode, drive yourvehicle with caution. Your vehicle does notmaintain high-speed operation and theengine may operate poorly.Remember that the engine is capable ofautomatically shutting down to preventengine damage. In this situation:1. Pull off the road as soon as safely

possible and switch the engine off.2. If you are a member of a roadside

assistance program, we recommendthat you contact your roadsideassistance service provider.

3. If this is not possible, wait a shortperiod for the engine to cool.

4. Check the coolant level. If the coolantlevel is at or below the minimum mark,add prediluted coolant immediately.

5. When the engine temperature cools,you can re-start the engine. Have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible tominimize engine damage.

326


Maintenance

Note: Driving your vehicle without repairincreases the chance of engine damage.

Engine Coolant TemperatureManagement (If Equipped)

WARNINGTo reduce the risk of crash and injury,be prepared that the vehicle speedmay reduce and the vehicle may not

be able to accelerate with full power untilthe coolant temperature reduces.

If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, theengine may temporarily reach a highertemperature during severe operatingconditions, for example ascending a longor steep grade in high ambienttemperatures.At this time, you may notice the coolanttemperature gauge moves toward the redzone and a message may appear in theinformation display.You may notice a reduction in vehiclespeed caused by reduced engine power.In order to manage the engine coolanttemperature. Your vehicle may enter thismode if certain high-temperature andhigh-load conditions take place. Theamount of speed reduction depends onvehicle loading, grade and ambienttemperature. If this occurs, there is no needto pull off the road. You can continue todrive your vehicle.The air conditioning may automaticallyturn on and off during severe operatingconditions to protect the engine fromoverheating. When the coolanttemperature decreases to the normaloperating temperature, the air conditioningturns on.

If the coolant temperature gauge movesfully into the red zone, or if the coolanttemperature warning or service enginesoon messages appear in your informationdisplay, do the following:1. Pull off the road as soon as safely

possible and shift the transmission intopark (P).

2. Leave the engine running until thecoolant temperature gauge needlereturns to the normal position. Afterseveral minutes, if the temperaturedoes not drop, follow the remainingsteps.

3. Switch the engine off and wait for it tocool. Check the coolant level.

4. If the coolant level is at or below theminimum mark, add prediluted coolantimmediately.

5. If the coolant level is normal, restartthe engine and continue.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONFLUID CHECKIf required, have an authorized dealer checkand change the transmission fluid at thecorrect service interval. See ScheduledMaintenance (page 539).The automatic transmission does not havea transmission fluid dipstick.Refer to your scheduled maintenanceinformation for scheduled intervals for fluidchecks and changes. Your transmissiondoes not consume fluid. However, if thetransmission slips, shifts slowly or if younotice a sign of leaking fluid, contact anauthorized dealer.Do not use supplemental transmissionfluid additives, treatments or cleaningagents. The use of these materials mayaffect transmission operation and resultin damage to internal transmissioncomponents.

327


Maintenance

TRANSFER CASE FLUIDCHECK

E170444

3

1. Clean the filler plug.2. Remove the filler plug.3. Inspect the fluid level. The fluid level

should be within 0.12 in (3 mm) fromthe bottom of the hole.

4. Add fluid through the filler hole.Use only fluid that meets Fordspecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 381).

BRAKE FLUID CHECK

WARNINGSDo not use any fluid other than therecommended brake fluid as this willreduce brake efficiency. Use of

incorrect fluid could result in the loss ofvehicle control, serious personal injury ordeath.

Only use brake fluid from a sealedcontainer. Contamination with dirt,water, petroleum products or other

materials may result in brake systemdamage or failure. Failure to adhere to thiswarning could result in the loss of vehiclecontrol, serious personal injury or death.

Do not allow the fluid to touch yourskin or eyes. If this happens, rinse theaffected areas immediately with

plenty of water and contact your physician.A fluid level between the MAX andMIN lines is within the normaloperating range and there is no need

to add fluid. A fluid level not in the normaloperating range could compromise theperformance of the system. Have yourvehicle checked immediately.

To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoircap must remain in place and fully tight,unless you are adding fluid.Only use fluid that meets Fordspecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 381).

POWER STEERING FLUIDCHECKYour vehicle is equipped with an electricpower steering (EPS) system. There is nofluid reservoir to check or fill.

328


Maintenance

WASHER FLUID CHECK

WARNINGIf you operate your vehicle intemperatures below 40°F (5°C), usewasher fluid with antifreeze

protection. Failure to use washer fluid withantifreeze protection in cold weather couldresult in impaired windshield vision andincrease the risk of injury or accident.

Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level islow. Only use a washer fluid that meetsFord specifications. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 381).State or local regulations on volatileorganic compounds may restrict the useof methanol, a common windshield washerantifreeze additive. Washer fluidscontaining non-methanol antifreezeagents should be used only if they providecold weather protection without damagingthe vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades orwasher system.

FUEL FILTERYour vehicle is equipped with a lifetimefuel filter that is integrated with the fueltank. Regular maintenance or replacementis not needed.

CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY

WARNINGSBatteries normally produce explosivegases which can cause personalinjury. Therefore, do not allow

flames, sparks or lighted substances tocome near the battery. When working nearthe battery, always shield your face andprotect your eyes. Always provide correctventilation.

WARNINGSWhen lifting a plastic-cased battery,excessive pressure on the end wallscould cause acid to flow through the

vent caps, resulting in personal injury anddamage to the vehicle or battery. Lift thebattery with a battery carrier or with yourhands on opposite corners.

Keep batteries out of reach ofchildren. Batteries contain sulfuricacid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or

clothing. Shield your eyes when workingnear the battery to protect against possiblesplashing of acid solution. In case of acidcontact with skin or eyes, flushimmediately with water for a minimum of15 minutes and get prompt medicalattention. If acid is swallowed, call aphysician immediately.

Battery posts, terminals and relatedaccessories contain lead and leadcompounds. Wash hands after

handling.This vehicle may be fitted with morethan one battery. Removing thebattery cables from only one battery

does not disconnect your vehicle electricalsystem. Make sure you disconnect thebattery cables from all batteries whendisconnecting power. Failure to do so maycause serious personal injury or propertydamage.

Your vehicle is fitted with a Motorcraftmaintenance-free battery which normallydoes not require additional water.When a battery replacement is required,you must use a recommendedreplacement battery that matches theelectrical requirements of the vehicle.Note: After cleaning or replacing thebattery, make sure you reinstall the batterycover or shield.

329


Maintenance

Note: If you add electrical accessories orcomponents to the vehicle, it may adverselyaffect the low voltage battery performanceand durability. This may also affect theperformance of other electrical systems inthe vehicle.For longer, trouble-free operation, keep thetop of the battery clean and dry.If you see any corrosion on the battery orterminals, remove the cables from theterminals and clean with a wire brush. Youcan neutralize the acid with a solution ofbaking soda and water.Because your vehicle’s engine iselectronically controlled by a computer,some control conditions are maintainedby power from the battery. When thebattery is disconnected or a new batteryis installed, the engine must relearn its idleand fuel trim strategy for optimumdriveability and performance. Flexible fuelvehicles (FFV) must also relearn theethanol content of the fuel for optimumdriveability and performance.To restore the settings, do the following:1. Apply the parking brake.2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).3. Switch off all accessories.4. Press the brake pedal and start your

vehicle.5. Run the engine until it reaches normal

operating temperature. While theengine is warming up, complete thefollowing: Reset the clock. See AudioSystem (page 405). Reset the powerwindows bounce-back feature. SeeWindows and Mirrors (page 95).Reset the radio station presets. SeeAudio System (page 405).

6. Allow the engine to idle for at least oneminute.

7. Drive the vehicle at least 10 mi (16 km)to completely relearn the idle trim andfuel trim strategy.

Note: If you do not allow the engine torelearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, theidle quality of your vehicle may be adverselyaffected until the engine computereventually relearns the idle trim and fueltrim strategy.Note: For flexible fuel vehicles, if you areoperating on E85, you may experience poorstarts or an inability to start the engine anddriveability problems until the fuel trim andethanol content have been relearned.Make sure that you dispose of old batteriesin an environmentally friendly way. Seekadvice from your local authority aboutrecycling old batteries.If storing your vehicle for more than 30days without recharging the battery, werecommend that you disconnect thebattery cables to maintain battery chargefor quick starting.

Battery Management System (If

Equipped)

The battery management system monitorsbattery conditions and takes actions toextend battery life. If excessive batterydrain is detected, the system temporarilydisables some electrical systems toprotect the battery.Systems included are:• Heated rear window.• Heated seats.• Climate control.• Heated steering wheel.• Audio unit.• Navigation system.

330


Maintenance

A message may appear in the informationdisplays to alert you that batteryprotection actions are active. Thesemessages are only for notification that anaction is taking place, and not intended toindicate an electrical problem or that thebattery requires replacement.After battery replacement, or in somecases after charging the battery with anexternal charger, the battery managementsystem requires eight hours of vehicle sleeptime to relearn the battery state of charge.During this time your vehicle must remainfully locked with the ignition switched off.Note: Prior to relearning the battery stateof charge, the battery management systemmay temporarily disable some electricalsystems.

Electrical Accessory InstallationTo make sure the battery managementsystem works correctly, do not connect anelectrical device ground connectiondirectly to the battery negative post. Thiscan cause inaccurate measurements ofthe battery condition and potentialincorrect system operation.Note: If you add electrical accessories orcomponents to the vehicle, it may adverselyaffect battery performance and durability.This may also affect the performance ofother electrical systems in the vehicle.

CHECKING THE WIPERBLADES

E142463

Run the tip of your fingers over the edge ofthe blade to check for roughness.Clean the wiper blades with washer fluidor water applied with a soft sponge orcloth.

CHANGING THE WIPERBLADESNote: Do not hold the wiper blade whenlifting the wiper arm.

E165804

1. Pull the wiper blade and arm awayfrom the glass.

331


Maintenance

E205141

2

3

4

2. Lift the wiper blade primary locking clip.3. Press the wiper blade secondary

locking clip.4. Remove the wiper blade.Note: Make sure that the wiper arm doesnot spring back against the glass when thewiper blade is not attached.5. Install in the reverse order.Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locksinto place.

ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPSVertical Aim AdjustmentThe headlamps on your vehicle areproperly aimed at the assembly plant. Ifyour vehicle has been in an accident,contact an authorized dealer to check andrealign your headlamps.

Headlamp Aiming Target

E142592

8 feet (2.4 meters).ACenter height of lamp to ground.B25 feet (7.6 meters).CHorizontal reference line.D

Vertical Aim Adjustment1. Park your vehicle directly in front of a

wall or screen on a level surface,approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters)away.

2. Measure the height from the center ofyour headlamp (indicated by a 3.0millimeter circle on the lens) to theground and mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter)horizontal reference line on the verticalwall or screen at this height (a piece ofmasking tape works well).

Note: To see a clearer light pattern foradjusting, you may want to block the lightfrom one headlamp while adjusting theother.3. Switch on the low beam headlamps to

illuminate the wall or screen and openthe hood. Cover one of the headlampsso no light hits the wall.

332


Maintenance

E167358

4. For halogen or LED headlamps: Onthe wall or screen you will observe alight pattern with a distinct horizontaledge toward the right. If this edge is notat the horizontal reference line, you willneed to adjust the beam so the edgeis at the same height as the horizontalreference line.

E163806

5. Locate the vertical adjuster on eachheadlamp. Use a #2 Phillipsscrewdriver to turn the adjuster eithercounterclockwise or clockwise in orderto adjust the vertical aim of theheadlamp.

6. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to adjust theother headlamp.

7. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.

Horizontal Aim AdjustmentHorizontal aim is not required for thisvehicle and is not adjustable.

CHANGING A BULB

WARNINGHandle a halogen headlamp bulbcarefully and keep out of children’sreach. Grasp the bulb only by its

plastic base and do not touch the glass.The oil from your hand could cause thebulb to break the next time the headlampsare operated.

Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched,clean it with rubbing alcohol beforeinstalling it.

Lamp Assembly CondensationExterior lamps are vented toaccommodate normal changes in pressure.Condensation can be a natural by-productof this design. When moist air enters thelamp assembly through the vents, there isa possibility that condensation can occurwhen the temperature is cold. Whennormal condensation occurs, a thin film ofmist can form on the interior of the lens.The thin mist eventually clears and exitsthrough the vents during normal operation.Clearing time may take as long as 48 hoursunder dry weather conditions.Examples of acceptable condensation are:• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip

marks or droplets).• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the

lens.

333


Maintenance

Examples of unacceptable moisture(usually caused by a lamp water leak) are:• Water puddle inside the lamp.• Large water droplets, drip marks or

streaks present on the interior of thelens.

Take your vehicle to a dealer for service ifany of the above conditions ofunacceptable moisture are present.

Accessing the Halogen High Beam,Low Beam and Direction IndicatorBulbs1. Rotate the steering wheel to the

opposite side of the bulb needingreplacement.

2. Remove two screws and one push pinfrom the front of the wheel liner.

E183762

3. Pull the wheel liner back towards thetire to gain access to the bulbs.

Replacing the Halogen High Beam,Low Beam and Direction IndicatorBulbs

E183500

Low beam headlamp bulb.A.Direction indicator bulb.B.High beam headlamp bulb.C.

334


Maintenance

E183763

1. Make sure the headlamps are off.2. For the high beam and low beam bulbs,

remove the rubber cap to access thebulbs.

3. Remove the bulb holder from the lampassembly by turning itcounterclockwise and pulling it straightout.

4. Disconnect the bulb from the electricalconnector.

5. Install the new bulb in reverse order.

Replacing Side Marker Bulb

E183764

1. Make sure the headlamps are off.2. With the hood open, locate the side

marker on the top of the headlampassembly.

3. Remove the bulb holder from the lampassembly by turning itcounterclockwise and pulling it straightout.


Replacing Fog Lamp Bulbs (If Equipped)

E163826

1. Make sure the fog lamps are off.2. Disconnect the electrical connector

from the fog lamp bulb.3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and

remove it from the fog lamp.4. Install the new bulb in reverse order.

335


Maintenance

Replacing LED Headlamp Bulbs (If

Equipped)

These lamps have LED bulbs. Contact anauthorized dealer.

Replacing LED Direction Indicatorand Side Marker Bulbs (If Equipped)


Replacing Brake, Rear, DirectionIndicator and Reverse Lamp Bulbs1. Make sure the headlamps are off.2. Open the tailgate to access the rear

lamp assemblies

E187288

3. Remove the two bolts from the taillamp assembly. Then, carefully pull thelamp assembly from the tailgate pillarby releasing the two retaining tabs.

4. Disconnect the electrical connectorfrom the bulb.

E187289

Brake, rear and directionindicator bulb.

A.

Reverse lamp bulb.B.

1. Rotate the bulb socketcounterclockwise and remove it fromthe rear lamp assembly.


Replacing LED Brake, Rear,Direction Indicator and ReverseLamp Bulbs (If Equipped)


Replacing Cargo Lamp and High-mount Brake Lamp Bulbs1. Make sure the lamps are off.2. Remove the four screws and move the

lamp assembly away from the vehicleto expose the bulb sockets.

336


Maintenance

E187290

3. Remove the bulb socket by rotating itcounterclockwise and pulling it out ofthe lamp assembly.

4. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.5. Install the new bulb in reverse order.

Replacing LED Cargo Lamp, SpotLamp and High-mount Brake LampBulbs (If Equipped)


Replacing the License Plate LampBulbNote: The license plate bulbs are locatedbehind the rear bumper.

E187794

1. Reach behind the rear bumper tolocate the bulb.

2. Twist the bulb socket counterclockwiseand carefully pull to remove it from thelamp assembly.

3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.4. Install the new bulb in reverse order.

Replacing Exterior Mounted MirrorDirection Indicator Lamp BulbsThese lamps have LED bulbs. Contact anauthorized dealer.

BULB SPECIFICATION CHARTReplacement bulbs are specified in thechart below. Headlamp bulbs must bemarked with an authorized D.O.T. markingfor North America to make sure they havethe proper lamp performance, lightbrightness, light pattern and safe visibility.The correct bulbs will not damage thelamp assembly or void the lamp assemblywarranty and will provide quality bulbillumination time.

337


Maintenance

Exterior Lamps

Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp

21/5W7444NAFront direction indicator and parking lamps.

LEDLEDDaytime running lamps.

65W9005Headlamp high beam.

55WH11Headlamp low beam.

55W9140Front fog lamps.

5WW5WFront side marker lamps.

LEDLEDSide direction indicator.

LEDLEDPuddle lamp.

27/8W3157Rear lamps, brake lamps, rear direction indicatorand rear side marker lamps.*

16W921Central high mounted brake lamp.*

LEDLEDCentral high mounted brake lamp. Vehicles withcargo box.

27W3156KReversing lamps.

5W168License plate lamp.*May have optional LED lamps.Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.

Interior Lamps

Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp

LEDLEDGlove compartment lamp.

LEDLEDMap lamp.

LEDLEDRear dome and courtesy lamps.

LEDLEDRear cargo box lamps.Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.

338


Maintenance

CHANGING THE ENGINE AIRFILTER

WARNINGTo reduce the risk of vehicle damageand personal burn injuries, do notstart your engine with the air cleaner

removed and do not remove it while theengine is running.

Note: Failure to use the correct air filterelement may result in severe enginedamage. Resulting component damagemay not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.Note: When servicing the air cleaner, do notallow foreign material to enter the airinduction system. The engine is susceptibleto damage from even small particles.When changing the air filter element, useonly the air filter element listed. SeeCapacities and Specifications (page381).Change the air filter element at the properintervals. See Scheduled Maintenance(page 539).

E191820

x2

1. Release the clamps that secure the airfilter cover to the housing.

2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.3. Remove the air filter element from the

air filter housing.4. Install in the reverse order.

339


Maintenance

GENERAL INFORMATIONYour dealer has many quality productsavailable to clean your vehicle and protectits finishes.

CLEANING PRODUCTSFor best results, use the following productsor products of equivalent quality:

MaterialsSpecificationName

-Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover (U.S.)Motorcraft® Dissolvant de goudron et éliminateur d’insectes (Canada)ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)

-Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (U.S.)Motorcraft® Nettoyant pour métal brillant (Canada)ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada)

ESR-M14P4-AMotorcraft® Detail Wash (U.S.)Shampooing superfin Motorcraft® (Canada)ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada)

-Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and DegreaserEngine Shampoo and DegreaserZC-20 (U.S.)

-Engine ShampooMotorcraft® Shampooing pour moteur (Canada)CXC-66-A (Canada)

-Motorcraft® Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (U.S.)Motorcraft® Nettoyant pour cuir et vinyle de haute qualité (Canada)ZC-56 (U.S. & Canada)

-Multi-Purpose CleanerMotorcraft® Nettoyant multi-usage (Canada)CXC-101 (Canada)

WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant(U.S.)Liquide lave-glace de haute qualité Motorcraft® (Canada)ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)CXC-37-A/B/D/F (Canada)

-Professional Strength Carpet and Upholstery Cleaner (U.S.)Motorcraft® Nettoyant professionnel pour sellerie et moquette (Canada)ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)

-Motorcraft® Spot and Stain RemoverSpot and Stain RemoverZC-14 (U.S.)

ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (U.S.)Motorcraft® Nettoie-vitres de qualité supérieure (Canada)ZC-23 (U.S.)CXC-100 (Canada)

-Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner (U.S.)

340


Vehicle Care

SpecificationNameNettoyant pour roues et pneus Motorcraft® (Canada)ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)

CLEANING THE EXTERIORWash your vehicle regularly with cool orlukewarm water and a neutral pHshampoo, we recommend MotorcraftDetail Wash.• Never use strong household detergents

or soap, for example dish washing orlaundry liquid. These products candiscolor and spot painted surfaces.

• Never wash your vehicle when it is hotto the touch, or during strong or directsunlight.

• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or softterry cloth towel to eliminate waterspotting.

• Immediately remove fuel spillages, birddroppings, insect deposits and road tar.These may cause damage to yourvehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.We recommend Motorcraft Bug andTar Remover.

• Remove any exterior accessories, forexample antennas, before entering acar wash.

Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellentscan damage painted surfaces. If thesesubstances come in contact with yourvehicle, wash the affected area as soon aspossible.

Exterior Chrome Parts• Apply a high quality-cleaning product

to bumpers and other chrome parts.Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.We recommend Motorcraft CustomBright Metal Cleaner.

• Do not apply the cleaning product tohot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaningproduct on chrome surfaces longerthan the time recommended.

• Using other non-recommendedcleaners can result in severe andpermanent cosmetic damage.

Note: Never use abrasive materials, forexample steel wool or plastic pads as theycan scratch the chrome surface.Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metalcleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.

Exterior Plastic PartsFor routine cleaning we recommendMotorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or greasespots are present, we recommendMotorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.

Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)

Hand washing your vehicle is preferredhowever, pressure washing may be usedunder the following conditions:• Do not use water pressure higher than

2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).• Do not use water hotter than 179°F

(82°C).• Use a spray with a 40° wide spray

angle pattern.• Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)

distance and 90° angle to yourvehicle's surface.

341


Vehicle Care

Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzleat an angle to the vehicle's surface maydamage graphics and cause the edges topeel away from the vehicle's surface.

UnderbodyFlush the complete underside of yourvehicle frequently. Keep body and doordrain holes free of debris or foreignmaterial.

Under HoodFor removing black rubber marks fromunder the hood we recommend MotorcraftWheel and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bugand Tar Remover.

WAXINGRegular waxing is necessary to protect yourcar's paint from the elements. Werecommend that you wash and wax thepainted surface once or twice a year.When washing and waxing, park yourvehicle in a shaded area out of directsunlight. Always wash your vehicle beforeapplying wax.• Use a quality wax that does not contain

abrasives.• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions

to apply and remove the wax.• Apply a small amount of wax in a

back-and-forth motion, not in circles.

• Do not allow wax to come in contactwith any non-body (low-gloss black)colored trim. The wax will discolor orstain the parts over time.• Roof racks.• Bumpers.• Grained door handles.• Side moldings.• Mirror housings.• Windshield cowl area.

• Do not apply wax to glass areas.• After waxing, your car's paint should

feel smooth, and be free of streaks andsmudges.

CLEANING THE ENGINEEngines are more efficient when they areclean because grease and dirt buildup keepthe engine warmer than normal.When washing:• Take care when using a power washer

to clean the engine. The high-pressurefluid could penetrate the sealed partsand cause damage.

• Do not spray a hot engine with coldwater to avoid cracking the engineblock or other engine components.

• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo andDegreaser on all parts that requirecleaning and pressure rinse clean. InCanada, use Motorcraft EngineShampoo.

• Never wash or rinse the engine while itis hot or running; water in the runningengine may cause internal damage.

342


Vehicle Care

• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,spark plug wire or spark plug well, orthe area in and around these locations.

• Cover the battery, power distributionbox, and air filter assembly to preventwater damage when cleaning theengine.

CLEANING THE WINDOWS ANDWIPER BLADESCar wash chemicals and environmentalfallout can result in windshield and wiperblade contamination. Dirty windshield andwipers will result in poor windshield wiperoperation. Keep the windshield and wiperblades clean to maintain windshield wiperperformance.To clean the windshield and wiper blades:• Clean the windshield with a

non-abrasive glass cleaner. Whencleaning the interior of the windshield,avoid getting any glass cleaner on theinstrument panel or door panels. Wipeany glass cleaner off these surfacesimmediately.

• For windshields contaminated withtree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, cleanthe entire windshield using steel wool(no greater than 0000 grade) in acircular motion and rinse with water.

• Clean the wiper blades with isopropylrubbing alcohol or windshield washerconcentrate.

Note: Do not use razor blades or othersharp objects to clean or remove decalsfrom the inside of the heated rear window.The vehicle warranty does not coverdamage caused to the heated rear windowgrid lines.

CLEANING THE INTERIOR

WARNINGSDo not use cleaning solvents, bleachor dye on the vehicle’s safety belts,as these actions may weaken the

belt webbing.On vehicles equipped withseat-mounted airbags, do not usechemical solvents or strong

detergents. Such products couldcontaminate the side airbag system andaffect performance of the side airbag in acollision.

For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety beltsand seats equipped with side airbags:• Remove dust and loose dirt with a

vacuum cleaner.• Remove light stains and soil with

Motorcraft Professional StrengthCarpet & Upholstery Cleaner.

• If grease or tar is present on thematerial, spot-clean the area first withMotorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. InCanada, use Motorcraft Multi-PurposeCleaner.

• If a ring forms on the fabric after spotcleaning, clean the entire areaimmediately (but do not oversaturate)or the ring will set.

• Do not use household cleaningproducts or glass cleaners, which canstain and discolor the fabric and affectthe flame retardant abilities of the seatmaterials.

343


Vehicle Care

CLEANING THE INSTRUMENTPANEL AND INSTRUMENTCLUSTER LENS

WARNINGDo not use chemical solvents orstrong detergents when cleaning thesteering wheel or instrument panel

to avoid contamination of the airbagsystem.

Clean the instrument panel and clusterlens with a clean, damp, white cottoncloth, then use a clean and dry whitecotton cloth to dry these areas.• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase

the gloss of the upper portion of theinstrument panel. The dull finish in thisarea helps protect you fromundesirable windshield reflection.

• Be certain to wash or wipe your handsclean if you have been in contact withcertain products such as insectrepellent and suntan lotion in order toavoid possible damage to the interiorpainted surfaces.

• Do not use household or glass cleanersas these may damage the finish of theinstrument panel, interior trim andcluster lens.

• Do not allow air fresheners and handsanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.Damage may not be covered by yourwarranty.

If a staining liquid like coffee or juice hasbeen spilled on the instrument panel or oninterior trim surfaces, clean as follows:1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,

white, cotton cloth.

2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean,white cotton cloth. For more thoroughcleaning, use a mild soap and watersolution. If the spot cannot becompletely cleaned by this method,the area may be cleaned using acommercially available cleaningproduct designed for automotiveinteriors.

3. If necessary, apply more soap andwater solution or cleaning product toa clean, white, cotton cloth and pressthe cloth onto the soiled area. Allowthis to set at room temperature for 30minutes.

4. Remove the soaked cloth and if it is notsoiled badly, use this cloth to clean thearea by using a rubbing motion for 60seconds.

5. Following this, wipe area dry with aclean, white, cotton cloth.

CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If

Equipped)

Without King Ranch EditionNote: Follow the same procedure ascleaning leather seats for cleaning leatherinstrument panels and leather interior trimsurfaces.For routine cleaning, wipe the surface witha soft, damp cloth and a mild soap andwater solution. Dry the area with a clean,soft cloth.For cleaning and removing spots and stainssuch as dye transfer, use MotorcraftPremium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or acommercially available leather cleaningproduct for automotive interiors.Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover onan inconspicuous area.You should:

344


Vehicle Care

• Remove dust and loose dirt with avacuum cleaner.

• Clean and treat spills and stains assoon as possible.

Do not use the following products as thesemay damage the leather:• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based

leather conditioners.• Household cleaners.• Alcohol solutions.• Solvents or cleaners intended

specifically for rubber, vinyl andplastics.

With King Ranch EditionYour vehicle has seating covered inpremium, top-grain leather that isextremely durable, but still requires specialcare and maintenance in order to preservelongevity and comfort.Regular cleaning and conditioningmaintains the appearance of the leather.

CleaningFor dirt, use a vacuum cleaner then use aclean, damp cloth or soft brush.For routine cleaning, wipe the surface witha soft, damp cloth. For more thoroughcleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soapand water solution.• Clean spills as quickly as possible.• Test any cleaner or stain remover on

an inconspicuous part of the leather ascleaners may darken the leather.

• Do not spill coffee, ketchup, mustard,orange juice or oil-based products onthe leather as they may permanentlystain the leather.

• Do not use household cleaningproducts, alcohol solutions, solventsor cleaners intended for rubber, vinylor plastics.

ScratchesBecause the leather in the seat comesfrom genuine steer hides, there may beevidence of naturally occurring markings,such as small scars. These markings givecharacter to the seating covers and areconsidered to be proof of a genuine leatherproduct.In order to lessen the appearance ofcertain scratches and other wear marks,apply conditioner on the affected areafollowing the same instructions as in theConditioning section.

ConditioningBottles of King Ranch Leather Conditionerare available at the King Ranch SaddleShop. Visit the website atwww.krsaddleshop.com, or call1–800–282–KING (5464) in the UnitedStates. If you are unable to obtain KingRanch Leather Conditioner, use anotherpremium leather conditioner.• Clean the surfaces using the steps

outlined in the Cleaning section.• Make sure the leather is dry then apply

a nickel-sized amount of conditionerto a clean, dry cloth.

• Rub the conditioner into the leatheruntil it disappears. Allow theconditioner to dry, then repeat theprocess for the entire interior. If a filmappears, wipe it off with a dry, cleancloth.

REPAIRING MINOR PAINTDAMAGEAuthorized dealers have touch-up paint tomatch your vehicle’s color. Your vehiclecolor code is printed on a sticker on thefront, left-hand side door jamb. Take yourcolor code to your authorized dealer tomake sure you get the correct color.

345


Vehicle Care

Before repairing minor paint damage, usea cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and TarRemover to remove particles such as birddroppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tarspots, road salt and industrial fallout.Always read the instructions before usingcleaning products.

CLEANING THE WHEELS (If

Equipped)

Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical towarm or hot wheel rims and covers.Note: Some automatic car washes maycause damage to the finish on your wheelrims and covers.Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-dutycleaners in combination with brush agitationto remove brake dust and dirt, could wearaway the clear coat finish over a period time.Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-basedor high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steelwool, fuels or strong household detergents.Note: If you intend parking your vehicle foran extended period after cleaning thewheels with a wheel cleaner, drive yourvehicle for a few minutes before doing so.This will reduce the risk of increasedcorrosion of the brake discs.Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coatedwith a clear coat paint finish. To maintaintheir condition we recommend that you:• Clean the wheels weekly using

Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner.Apply using manufacturer'sinstructions.

• Use a sponge to remove heavydeposits of dirt and brake dustaccumulation.

• Rinse thoroughly with a strong streamof water when you have completed thecleaning process.

• To remove tar and grease, useMotorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.

VEHICLE STORAGEIf you plan on storing your vehicle for 30days or more, read the followingmaintenance recommendations to makesure your vehicle stays in good operatingcondition.We engineer and test all motor vehiclesand their components for reliable, regulardriving. Under various conditions,long-term storage may lead to degradedengine performance or failure unless youuse specific precautions to preserve enginecomponents.

General• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated

place.• Protect from sunlight, if possible.• If vehicles are stored outside, they

require regular maintenance to protectagainst rust and damage.

Body• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to

remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud fromexterior surfaces, rear-wheel housingand the underside of front fenders.

• Periodically wash your vehicle if it isstored in exposed locations.

• Touch-up exposed or primed metal toprevent rust.

• Cover chrome and stainless steel partswith a thick coat of auto wax to preventdiscoloration. Re-wax as necessarywhen you wash your vehicle.

346


Vehicle Care

• Lubricate all hood, door and luggagecompartment hinges and latches witha light grade oil.

• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and

solvents.

Engine• Change the engine oil and filter prior to

storage because used engine oilcontains contaminates which maycause engine damage.

• Start the engine every 15 days for aminimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idlewith the climate controls set to defrostuntil the engine reaches normaloperating temperature.

• With your foot on the brake, shiftthrough all the gears while the engineis running.

• We recommend that you change theengine oil before you use your vehicleagain.

Fuel system• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel

until the first automatic shutoff of thefuel pump nozzle.

Cooling system• Protect against freezing temperatures.• When removing your vehicle from

storage, check coolant fluid level.Confirm that there are no coolingsystem leaks and that fluid is at therecommended level.

Battery• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep

connections clean.• If storing your vehicle for more than 30

days without recharging the battery,we recommend that you disconnectthe battery cables to maintain batterycharge for quick starting.

Note: It is necessary to reset memoryfeatures if battery cables are disconnected.

Brakes• Make sure the brakes and parking brake

release fully.

Tires• Maintain recommended air pressure.

Miscellaneous• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers

and pins under your vehicle are coveredwith grease to prevent rust.

• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)every 15 days to lubricate working partsand prevent corrosion.

Removing Vehicle From StorageWhen your vehicle is ready to come out ofstorage, do the following:• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt

or grease film build-up on windowsurfaces.

• Check windshield wipers for anydeterioration.

• Check under the hood for any foreignmaterial that may have collectedduring storage such as mice or squirrelnests.

• Check the exhaust for any foreignmaterial that may have collectedduring storage.

347


Vehicle Care

• Check tire pressures and set tireinflation per the Tire Label.

• Check brake pedal operation. Driveyour vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back andforth to remove rust build-up.

• Check fluid levels (including coolant,oil and gas) to make sure there are noleaks, and fluids are at recommendedlevels.

• If you remove the battery, clean thebattery cable ends and check fordamage.

Contact an authorized dealer if you haveany concerns or issues.

348


Vehicle Care

GENERAL INFORMATIONNotice to utility vehicle and truckowners

WARNINGSUtility vehicles have a significantlyhigher rollover rate than other typesof vehicles. To reduce the risk of

serious injury or death from a rollover orother crash you must avoid sharp turns andabrupt maneuvers, drive at safe speeds forthe conditions, keep tires properly inflated,never overload or improperly load yourvehicle, and make sure every passenger isproperly restrained.

In a rollover crash, an unbeltedperson is significantly more likely todie than a person wearing a seat belt.

All occupants must wear seat belts, andchildren and infants must use appropriaterestraints to minimize the risk of injury orejection.

Do not become overconfident in theability of four-wheel drive vehicles.Although a four-wheel drive vehicle

may accelerate better than a two-wheeldrive vehicle in low traction situations, itwon't stop any faster than two-wheel drivevehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.

E145298

Utility vehicles and trucks handledifferently than passenger cars in thevarious driving conditions that areencountered on streets, highways andoff-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are notdesigned for cornering at speeds as highas passenger cars any more than low-slungsports cars are designed to performsatisfactorily under off-road conditions.Study your owner's manual and anysupplements for specific information aboutequipment features, instructions for safedriving and additional precautions toreduce the risk of an accident or seriousinjury.

Four-wheel drive system (ifequipped)A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive(when selected) has the ability to use allfour wheels to power itself. This increasestraction which may enable you to safelydrive over terrain and road conditions thata conventional two-wheel drive vehiclecannot.On some four-wheel drive models, theinitial shift from two-wheel drive tofour-wheel drive while the vehicle ismoving can cause a momentary clunk andratcheting sound. These sounds are normalas the front drivetrain comes up to speedand are not cause for concern.

How your vehicle differs fromother vehiclesSport utility vehicles and trucks can differfrom some other vehicles in a fewnoticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:

349


Wheels and Tires

E145299

• Higher - to allow higher load carryingcapacity and to allow it to travel overrough terrain without getting hung upor damaging underbody components.

• Shorter - to give it the capability toapproach inclines and drive over thecrest of a hill without getting hung upor damaging underbody components.All other things held equal, a shorterwheelbase may make your vehiclequicker to respond to steering inputsthan a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.

• Narrower - to provide greatermaneuverability in tight spaces,particularly in off-road use.

E168583

As a result of the above dimensionaldifferences, Sport utility vehicles andtrucks often will have a higher center ofgravity and a greater difference in centerof gravity between the loaded andunloaded condition. These differences thatmake your vehicle so versatile also makeit handle differently than an ordinarypassenger car.

350


Wheels and Tires

TIRE CARE

Information About UniformTire Quality Grading

E142542

Tire Quality Grades apply to newpneumatic passenger car tires.The Quality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample: Treadwear 200Traction AA Temperature A.These Tire Quality Grades aredetermined by standards that theUnited States Department ofTransportation has set.Tire Quality Grades apply to newpneumatic passenger car tires.They do not apply to deep tread,winter-type snow tires,space-saver or temporary usespare tires, light truck or LT typetires, tires with nominal rimdiameters of 10 to 12 inches orlimited production tires as definedin Title 49 Code of FederalRegulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).

U.S. Department ofTransportation Tire qualitygrades: The U.S. Department ofTransportation requires FordMotor Company to give you thefollowing information about tiregrades exactly as the governmenthas written it.TreadwearThe treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government test course.For example, a tire graded 150would wear one and one-half (1½) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of theiruse, however, and may departsignificantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.Traction AA A B C

WARNINGThe traction grade assignedto this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning or peak tractioncharacteristics.

351


Wheels and Tires

The traction grades, from highestto lowest are AA, A, B, and C. Thegrades represent the tire’s abilityto stop on wet pavement asmeasured under controlledconditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.Temperature A B C

WARNINGThe temperature grade forthis tire is established for a

tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B and C,representing the tire’s resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to suddentire failure. The grade Ccorresponds to a level ofperformance which all passengercar tires must meet under the

Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 139. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law.Glossary of Tire Terminology*Tire label: A label showing theoriginal equipment tire sizes,recommended inflation pressureand the maximum weight thevehicle can carry.*Tire Identification Number(TIN): A number on the sidewallof each tire providing informationabout the tire brand andmanufacturing plant, tire size anddate of manufacture. Also referredto as DOT code.*Inflation pressure: A measureof the amount of air in a tire.*Standard load: A class ofP-metric or Metric tires designedto carry a maximum load at setpressure. For example: ForP-Metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) andfor Metric 36 psi (2.5 bar).Increasing the inflation pressurebeyond this pressure will notincrease the tire’s load carryingcapability.*Extra load: A class of P-metricor Metric tires designed to carry aheavier maximum load at 42 psi(2.9 bar). Increasing the inflationpressure beyond this pressure willnot increase the tire’s loadcarrying capability.

352


Wheels and Tires

*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit ofair pressure.*PSI: Pounds per square inch, astandard unit of air pressure.*Cold tire pressure: The tirepressure when the vehicle hasbeen stationary and out of directsunlight for an hour or more andprior to the vehicle being driven for1 mile (1.6 kilometers).*Recommended inflationpressure: The cold inflationpressure found on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label(affixed to either the door hingepillar, door-latch post, or the dooredge that meets the door-latchpost, next to the driver's seatingposition), or Tire Label located onthe B-pillar or the edge of thedriver's door.B-pillar: The structural memberat the side of the vehicle behindthe front door.*Bead area of the tire: Area ofthe tire next to the rim.* Sidewall of the tire: Areabetween the bead area and thetread.*Tread area of the tire: Area ofthe perimeter of the tire thatcontacts the road when mountedon the vehicle.*Rim: The metal support (wheel)for a tire or a tire and tubeassembly upon which the tirebeads are seated.

Information Contained on theTire SidewallBoth United States and CanadaFederal regulations require tiremanufacturers to placestandardized information on thesidewall of all tires. Thisinformation identifies anddescribes the fundamentalcharacteristics of the tire and alsoprovides a U.S. DOT TireIdentification Number for safetystandard certification and in caseof a recall.Information on P Type Tires

H

I

J

KL

M

A

BC D E

FG

E142543

P215/65R15 95H is an example ofa tire size, load index and speedrating. The definitions of theseitems are listed below. (Note thatthe tire size, load index and speedrating for your vehicle may bedifferent from this example.)

353


Wheels and Tires

A. P: Indicates a tire, designatedby the Tire and Rim Association,that may be used for service oncars, sport utility vehicles,minivans and light trucks. Note: Ifyour tire size does not begin witha letter this may mean it isdesignated by either the EuropeanTire and Rim TechnicalOrganization or the Japan TireManufacturing Association.B. 215: Indicates the nominalwidth of the tire in millimetersfrom sidewall edge to sidewalledge. In general, the larger thenumber, the wider the tire.C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratiowhich gives the tire's ratio ofheight to width.D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rimdiameter in inches. If you changeyour wheel size, you will have topurchase new tires to match thenew wheel diameter.F. 95: Indicates the tire's loadindex. It is an index that relates tohow much weight a tire can carry.You may find this information inyour owner’s manual. If not,contact a local tire dealer.Note: You may not find thisinformation on all tires because itis not required by federal law.

G. H: Indicates the tire's speedrating. The speed rating denotesthe speed at which a tire isdesigned to be driven for extendedperiods of time under a standardcondition of load and inflationpressure. The tires on your vehiclemay operate at differentconditions for load and inflationpressure. These speed ratings mayneed to be adjusted for thedifference in conditions. Theratings range from 81 mph(130 km/h) to 186 mph(299 km/h). These ratings arelisted in the following chart.Note: You may not find thisinformation on all tires because itis not required by federal law.

mph ( km/h)Letterrating

81 (130)M87 (140)N99 (159)Q106 (171)R112 (180)S118 (190)T124 (200)U130 (210)H149 (240)V

354


Wheels and Tires

mph ( km/h)Letterrating

168 (270)W186 (299)Y

Note: For tires with a maximumspeed capability over 149 mph(240 km/h), tire manufacturerssometimes use the letters ZR. Forthose with a maximum speedcapability over 186 mph(299 km/h), tire manufacturersalways use the letters ZR.

H. U.S. DOT Tire IdentificationNumber: This begins with theletters DOT and indicates that thetire meets all federal standards.The next two numbers or lettersare the plant code designatingwhere it was manufactured, thenext two are the tire size code andthe last four numbers representthe week and year the tire wasbuilt. For example, the numbers317 mean the 31st week of 1997.After 2000 the numbers go to fourdigits. For example, 2501 meansthe 25th week of 2001. Thenumbers in between areidentification codes used fortraceability. This information isused to contact customers if a tiredefect requires a recall.I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, orAT: All Terrain, orAS: All Season.

J. Tire Ply Composition andMaterial Used: Indicates thenumber of plies or the number oflayers of rubber-coated fabric inthe tire tread and sidewall. Tiremanufacturers also must indicatethe ply materials in the tire and thesidewall, which include steel,nylon, polyester, and others.K. Maximum Load: Indicates themaximum load in kilograms andpounds that can be carried by thetire (affixed to either the doorhinge pillar, door-latch post, or thedoor edge that meets thedoor-latch post, next to thedriver's seating position), or TireLabel located on the B-pillar orthe edge of the driver's door.L. Treadwear, Traction andTemperature Grades:*Treadwear: The treadweargrade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tirewhen tested under controlledconditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. Forexample, a tire graded 150 wouldwear 1½ times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100.

355


Wheels and Tires

*Traction: The traction grades,from highest to lowest are AA, A,B, and C. The grades represent thetire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.*Temperature: The temperaturegrades are A (the highest), B andC, representing the tire'sresistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel.M. Maximum InflationPressure: Indicates the tiremanufacturers' maximumpermissible pressure or thepressure at which the maximumload can be carried by the tire. Thispressure is normally higher thanthe vehicle manufacturer'srecommended cold inflationpressure which can be found onthe Safety ComplianceCertification Label (affixed toeither the door hinge pillar,door-latch post, or the door edgethat meets the door-latch post,next to the driver's seatingposition), or Tire Label located onthe B-pillar or the edge of thedriver's door. The cold inflationpressure should never be set lowerthan the recommended pressureon the vehicle label.

The tire suppliers may haveadditional markings, notes orwarnings such as standard loador radial tubeless.Additional InformationContained on the Tire Sidewallfor LT Type TiresNote: Tire Quality Grades do notapply to this type of tire.

A

BC

BDE142544

LT type tires have some additionalinformation beyond those of Ptype tires. These differences aredescribed below.A. LT: Indicates a tire, designatedby the Tire and Rim Association,that is intended for service on lighttrucks.B. Load Range and LoadInflation Limits: Indicates thetire's load-carrying capabilitiesand its inflation limits.

356


Wheels and Tires

C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates themaximum load and tire pressurewhen the tire is used as a dual;defined as four tires on the rearaxle (a total of six or more tires onthe vehicle).D. Maximum Load Single lb(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicatesthe maximum load and tirepressure when the tire is used asa single; defined as two tires(total) on the rear axle.Information on T Type TiresT145/80D16 is an example of atire size.Note: The temporary tire size foryour vehicle may be different fromthis example. Tire Quality Gradesdo not apply to this type of tire.

AB C D

E

E142545

T type tires have some additionalinformation beyond those of Ptype tires. These differences aredescribed below:A. T: Indicates a type of tire,designated by the Tire and RimAssociation, that is intended fortemporary service on cars, sportutility vehicles, minivans and lighttrucks.B. 145: Indicates the nominalwidth of the tire in millimetersfrom sidewall edge to sidewalledge. In general, the larger thenumber, the wider the tire.

357


Wheels and Tires

C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratiowhich gives the tire's ratio ofheight to width. Numbers of 70 orlower indicate a short sidewall.D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.R: Indicates a radial type tire.E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rimdiameter in inches. If you changeyour wheel size, you will have topurchase new tires to match thenew wheel diameter.Location of the Tire LabelYou will find a Tire Labelcontaining tire inflation pressureby tire size and other importantinformation located on the B-Pillaror the edge of the driver's door.See Load Carrying (page 247).Inflating Your TiresSafe operation of your vehiclerequires that your tires areproperly inflated. Remember thata tire can lose up to half of its airpressure without appearing flat.Every day before you drive, checkyour tires. If one looks lower thanthe others, use a tire gauge tocheck pressure of all tires andadjust if required.At least once a month and beforelong trips, inspect each tire andcheck the tire pressure with a tiregauge (including spare, ifequipped). Inflate all tires to theinflation pressure recommendedby Ford Motor Company.

You are strongly urged to buy areliable tire pressure gauge, asautomatic service station gaugesmay be inaccurate. Fordrecommends the use of a digitalor dial-type tire pressure gaugerather than a stick-type tirepressure gauge.Use the recommended coldinflation pressure for optimum tireperformance and wear.Under-inflation or over-inflationmay cause uneven treadwearpatterns.

WARNINGUnder-inflation is the mostcommon cause of tire failures

and may result in severe tirecracking, tread separation orblowout, with unexpected loss ofvehicle control and increased riskof injury. Under-inflation increasessidewall flexing and rollingresistance, resulting in heatbuildup and internal damage tothe tire. It also may result inunnecessary tire stress, irregularwear, loss of vehicle control andaccidents. A tire can lose up tohalf of its air pressure and notappear to be flat!

Always inflate your tires to theFord recommended inflationpressure even if it is less than themaximum inflation pressureinformation found on the tire. TheFord recommended tire inflationpressure is found on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label or

358


Wheels and Tires

Tire Label (affixed to either thedoor hinge pillar, door-latch post,or the door edge that meets thedoor-latch post, next to thedriver's seating position), or TireLabel located on the B-pillar orthe edge of the driver's door.Failure to follow the tire pressurerecommendations can causeuneven treadwear patterns andadversely affect the way yourvehicle handles.Note: Do not reduce tire pressureto change the ride characteristicsof the vehicle. If you do notmaintain the inflation pressure atthe levels specified by Ford, yourvehicle may experience a conditionknown as shimmy. Shimmy is asevere vibration and oscillation inthe steering wheel after the vehicletravels over a bump or dip in theroad that does not dampen out byitself. Shimmy may result fromsignificant under-inflation of thetires, improper tires (load range,size, or type), or vehiclemodifications such as lift-kits. Inthe event that your vehicleexperiences shimmy, you shouldslowly reduce speed by either liftingoff the accelerator pedal or lightlyapplying the brakes. The shimmywill cease as the vehicle speeddecreases.Maximum Inflation Pressure isthe tire manufacturer's maximumpermissible pressure and thepressure at which the maximumload can be carried by the tire. Thispressure is normally higher than

the manufacturer’s recommendedcold inflation pressure which canbe found on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label(affixed to either the door hingepillar, door-latch post, or the dooredge that meets the door-latchpost, next to the driver's seatingposition), or Tire Label located onthe B-pillar or the edge of thedriver's door. The cold inflationpressure should never be set lowerthan the recommended pressureon the Safety ComplianceCertification Label or Tire Label.When weather temperaturechanges occur, tire inflationpressures also change. A 10°F(6°C) temperature drop cancause a corresponding drop of 1psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure.Check your tire pressuresfrequently and adjust them to theproper pressure which can befound on the Safety ComplianceCertification Label or Tire Label.To check the pressure in yourtire(s):1. Make sure the tires are cool,meaning they are not hot fromdriving even a mile.

359


Wheels and Tires

Note: If you are checking tirepressure when the tire is hot, (forexample, driven more than 1 mile[1.6 kilometers]), never bleed orreduce air pressure. The tires arehot from driving and it is normal forpressures to increase aboverecommended cold pressures. Ahot tire at or below recommendedcold inflation pressure could besignificantly under-inflated.Note: If you have to drive adistance to get air for your tire(s),check and record the tire pressurefirst and add the appropriate airpressure when you get to thepump. It is normal for tires to heatup and the air pressure inside to goup as you drive.2. Remove the cap from the valveon one tire, then firmly press thetire gauge onto the valve andmeasure the pressure.3. Add enough air to reach therecommended air pressure.Note: If you overfill the tire, releaseair by pressing on the metal stemin the center of the valve. Thenrecheck the pressure with your tiregauge.4. Replace the valve cap.5. Repeat this procedure for eachtire, including the spare.

Note: Some spare tires operate ata higher inflation pressure than theother tires. For T type mini-sparetires, see the Dissimilar spare wheeland tire assembly information fora description. Store and maintainat 60 psi (4.15 bar). For full-sizeand dissimilar spare tires, see theDissimilar spare wheel and tireassembly information for adescription. Store and maintain atthe higher of the front and rearinflation pressure as shown on theSafety Compliance CertificationLabel or Tire Label.6. Visually inspect the tires tomake sure there are no nails orother objects embedded thatcould poke a hole in the tire andcause an air leak.7. Check the sidewalls to makesure there are no gouges, cuts orbulges.Inspecting Your Tires andWheel Valve StemsPeriodically inspect the tire treadsfor uneven or excessive wear andremove objects such as stones,nails or glass that may be wedgedin the tread grooves. Check the tireand valve stems for holes, cracks,or cuts that may permit airleakage and repair or replace thetire and replace the valve stem.Inspect the tire sidewalls forcracking, cuts, bruises and othersigns of damage or excessivewear. If internal damage to the tireis suspected, have the tiredemounted and inspected in case

360


Wheels and Tires

it needs to be repaired or replaced.For your safety, tires that aredamaged or show signs ofexcessive wear should not be usedbecause they are more likely toblow out or fail.Improper or inadequate vehiclemaintenance can cause tires towear abnormally. Inspect all yourtires, including the spare,frequently, and replace them ifone or more of the followingconditions exist:Tire Wear

E142546

When the tread is worn down toone sixteenth of an inch (2millimeters), tires must bereplaced to help prevent yourvehicle from skidding andhydroplaning. Built-in treadwearindicators, or wear bars, whichlook like narrow strips of smoothrubber across the tread willappear on the tire when the treadis worn down to one sixteenth ofan inch (2 millimeters).

When the tire tread wears downto the same height as these wearbars, the tire is worn out and mustbe replaced.DamagePeriodically inspect the tire treadsand sidewalls for damage (suchas bulges in the tread or sidewalls,cracks in the tread groove andseparation in the tread orsidewall). If damage is observedor suspected have the tireinspected by a tire professional.Tires can be damaged duringoff-road use, so inspection afteroff-road use is alsorecommended.Age

WARNINGSTires degrade over timedepending on many factors

such as weather, storageconditions, and conditions of use(load, speed, inflation pressure)the tires experience throughouttheir lives.

In general, tires should bereplaced after six years

regardless of tread wear or evenif they have not been used.However, heat caused by hotclimates or frequent high-loadconditions can accelerate theaging process and may require youto replace tires more frequently.

361


Wheels and Tires

WARNINGSYou should replace yourspare tire when you replace

the road tires or after six years dueto aging even if it has not beenused.

U.S. DOT Tire IdentificationNumberBoth United States and CanadaFederal regulations require tiremanufacturers to placestandardized information on thesidewall of all tires. Thisinformation identifies anddescribes the fundamentalcharacteristics of the tire and alsoprovides a U.S. DOT TireIdentification Number for safetystandard certification and in caseof a recall.This begins with the letters DOTand indicates that the tire meetsall federal standards. The nexttwo numbers or letters are theplant code designating where itwas manufactured, the next twoare the tire size code and the lastfour numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. Forexample, the numbers 317 meanthe 31st week of 1997. After 2000the numbers go to four digits. Forexample, 2501 means the 25th

week of 2001. The numbers inbetween are identification codesused for traceability. Thisinformation is used to contactcustomers if a tire defect requiresa recall.Tire ReplacementRequirementsYour vehicle is equipped with tiresdesigned to provide a safe rideand handling capability.

WARNINGSOnly use replacement tiresand wheels that are the same

size, load index, speed rating andtype (such as P-metric versusLT-metric or all-season versusall-terrain) as those originallyprovided by Ford. Therecommended tire and wheel sizemay be found on either the SafetyCompliance Certification Label(affixed to either the door hingepillar, door-latch post, or the dooredge that meets the door-latchpost, next to the driver’s seatingposition), or the Tire Label whichis located on the B-Pillar or edgeof the driver’s door. If thisinformation is not found on theselabels, then you should contactyour authorized dealer as soon aspossible. Use of any tire or wheelnot recommended by Ford canaffect the safety and performanceof your vehicle, which could resultin an increased risk of loss ofvehicle control, vehicle rollover,personal injury and death.

362


Wheels and Tires

WARNINGSTo reduce the risk of seriousinjury, when mounting

replacement tires and wheels, youshould not exceed the maximumpressure indicated on the sidewallof the tire to set the beads withoutadditional precautions listedbelow. If the beads do not seat atthe maximum pressure indicated,re-lubricate and try again.

When inflating the tire formounting pressures up to

20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than themaximum pressure on the tiresidewall, the followingprecautions must be taken toprotect the person mounting thetire:

1. Make sure that you have thecorrect tire and wheel size.2. Lubricate the tire bead andwheel bead seat area again.3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft(3.66 m) away from the

wheel and tire assembly.4. Use both eye and earprotection.For a mounting pressuremore than 20 psi (1.38 bar)

greater than the maximumpressure, a Ford dealer or othertire service professional should dothe mounting.

WARNINGSAlways inflate steel carcasstires with a remote air fill with

the person inflating standing at aminimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) awayfrom the wheel and tire assembly.

Important: Remember to replacethe wheel valve stems when theroad tires are replaced on yourvehicle.The two front tires or two rear tiresshould generally be replaced as apair.The tire pressure sensors mountedin the wheels are not designed tobe used in aftermarket wheels.The use of wheels or tires notrecommended by Ford MotorCompany may affect theoperation of your tire pressuremonitoring system.If the tire pressure monitoringsystem indicator is flashing, thesystem is malfunctioning. Yourreplacement tire might beincompatible with your tirepressure monitoring system, orsome component of the systemmay be damaged.

363


Wheels and Tires

Safety Practices

WARNINGSIf your vehicle is stuck insnow, mud or sand, do not

rapidly spin the tires; spinning thetires can tear the tire and causean explosion. A tire can explode inas little as three to five seconds.

Do not spin the wheels atover 34 mph (55 km/h). The

tires may fail and injure apassenger or bystander.

Driving habits have a great dealto do with your tire mileage andsafety.*Observe posted speed limits*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns*Avoid potholes and objects onthe road*Do not run over curbs or hit thetire against a curb when parkingHighway HazardsNo matter how carefully you drivethere’s always the possibility thatyou may eventually have a flat tireon the highway. Drive slowly to theclosest safe area out of traffic.This may further damage the flattire, but your safety is moreimportant.

If you feel a sudden vibration orride disturbance while driving, oryou suspect your tire or vehiclehas been damaged, immediatelyreduce your speed. Drive withcaution until you can safely pulloff the road. Stop and inspect thetires for damage. If a tire isunder-inflated or damaged,deflate it, remove wheel andreplace it with your spare tire andwheel. If you cannot detect acause, have the vehicle towed tothe nearest repair facility or tiredealer to have the vehicleinspected.Tire and Wheel AlignmentA bad jolt from hitting a curb orpothole can cause the front endof your vehicle to becomemisaligned or cause damage toyour tires. If your vehicle seems topull to one side when you’redriving, the wheels may be out ofalignment. Have an authorizeddealer check the wheel alignmentperiodically.Wheel misalignment in the frontor the rear can cause uneven andrapid treadwear of your tires andshould be corrected by anauthorized dealer. Front-wheeldrive vehicles and those with anindependent rear suspension mayrequire alignment of all fourwheels.The tires should also be balancedperiodically. An unbalanced tireand wheel assembly may result inirregular tire wear.

364


Wheels and Tires

Tire Rotation

WARNINGIf the tire label showsdifferent tire pressures for the

front and rear tires and the vehiclehas a tire pressure monitoringsystem, then you need to updatethe settings for the systemsensors. Always perform thesystem reset procedure after tirerotation. If you do not reset thesystem, it may not provide a lowtire pressure warning whennecessary.

Note: If your tires show unevenwear ask an authorized dealer tocheck for and correct any wheelmisalignment, tire imbalance ormechanical problem involvedbefore tire rotation.Note: Your vehicle may beequipped with a dissimilar sparewheel and tire assembly. Adissimilar spare wheel and tireassembly is defined as a sparewheel and tire assembly that isdifferent in brand, size orappearance from the road tires andwheels. If you have a dissimilarspare wheel and tire assembly it isintended for temporary use onlyand should not be used in a tirerotation.Note: After having your tiresrotated, inflation pressure must bechecked and adjusted to thevehicle requirements.

Rotating your tires at therecommended interval (asindicated in the ScheduledMaintenance chapter) will helpyour tires wear more evenly,providing better tire performanceand longer tire life.Rear-wheel drive vehicles andfour-wheel drive vehicles (fronttires at left of diagram)

E142548

Sometimes irregular tire wear canbe corrected by rotating the tires.

365


Wheels and Tires

USING SNOW CHAINS

WARNINGSnow tires must be the same size,load index and speed rating as thoseoriginally provided by Ford. Use of

any tire or wheel not recommended byFord can affect the safety andperformance of your vehicle, which couldresult in an increased risk of loss of control,vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.Additionally, the use of non-recommendedtires and wheels can cause steering,suspension, axle, transfer case or powertransfer unit failure. Follow the Fordrecommended tire inflation pressure foundon the Safety Compliance CertificationLabel (on the door hinge pillar, door latchpost or the door edge that meets the doorlatch post, next to the driver seat), or TireLabel on the B-Pillar or the edge of thedriver door. Failure to follow the tirepressure recommendations can causeuneven treadwear patterns and adverselyaffect the way your vehicle handles.

Note: The suspension insulation andbumpers will help prevent vehicle damage.Do not remove these components from yourvehicle when using snow tires and chains.The tires on your vehicle have all-weathertreads to provide traction in rain and snow.However, in some climates, you may needto use snow tires and cables. If you needto use cables, it is recommended that steelwheels (of the same size andspecifications) be used, as cables may chipaluminum wheels.Follow these guidelines when using snowtires and chains:• If possible, avoid fully loading your

vehicle.• Conventional link type chains may

contact and cause damage to thevehicle's wheel house and/or body.

• Do not install chains on the front tiresas this may interfere with suspensioncomponents.

• Only certain snow cables or chainshave been approved by Ford/Lincolnas safe for use on your vehicle with thefollowing tires: 245/70R17,LT245/70R17, 265/70R17 and265/60R18.

• You should install snow cables orchains that have been rated as SAEClass S.

• Install chains securely, verifying thatthe chains do not touch any wiring,brake lines, or fuel lines.

• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) orless if recommended by the chainmanufacturer while using snow chains.

• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chainsrub or bang against your vehicle, stopand retighten the chains. If this doesnot work, remove the chains to preventdamage to your vehicle.

• Remove the tire chains when they areno longer needed. Do not use tirechains on dry roads.

• Purchase chains or cables from amanufacturer that clearly labels bodyto tire dimension restrictions. The snowchains or cables must be mounted inpairs on the rear tires only.

If you have any questions regarding snowchains or cables, please contact yourFord/Lincoln authorized dealer.

366


Wheels and Tires

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM

WARNINGThe tire pressure monitoring systemis not a substitute for manuallychecking tire pressures. You should

periodically check tire pressures using apressure gauge. Failure to correctlymaintain tire pressures could increase therisk of tire failure, loss of control, vehiclerollover and personal injury.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated

to the inflation pressure recommended bythe vehicle manufacturer on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label. (Ifyour vehicle has tires of a different sizethan the size indicated on the vehicleplacard or tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehiclehas been equipped with a Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) thatilluminates a low tire pressure telltalewhen one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tire causes thetire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, and may affect thevehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire maintenance, andit is the driver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressure, even if under-inflationhas not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped witha TPMS malfunction indicator to indicatewhen the system is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and then remaincontinuously illuminated. This sequencewill continue upon subsequent vehiclestart-ups as long as the malfunction exists.When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be ableto detect or signal low tire pressure asintended. TPMS malfunctions may occurfor a variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternatetires or wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or more tires orwheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheelsallow the TPMS to continue to functionproperly.The tire pressure monitoring systemcomplies with part 15 of the FCC rules andwith RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) This devicemust accept any interference received,including interference that may causeundesired operation.

367


Wheels and Tires

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules and with Licence exempt RSSStandards of Industry Canada. Operationis subject to the following two conditions:• This device may not cause harmful

interference.• This device must accept any

interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changing Tires With a TirePressure Monitoring System

E142549

Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tirepressure sensor located inside the wheeland tire assembly cavity. The pressuresensor is attached to the valve stem. Thepressure sensor is covered by the tire and isnot visible unless the tire is removed. Takecare when changing the tire to avoiddamaging the sensor.You should always have your tires servicedby an authorized dealer.Check the tire pressure periodically (atleast monthly) using an accurate tiregauge. See Inflating Your Tires in thischapter.

Understanding Your Tire PressureMonitoring SystemThe tire pressure monitoring systemmeasures pressure in your four road tiresand sends the tire pressure readings toyour vehicle.

E224333

The low tire pressure warning light will turnon if the tire pressure is significantly low.Once the light is illuminated, your tires areunder-inflated and need to be inflated tothe manufacturer’s recommended tirepressure. Even if the light turns on and ashort time later turns off, your tire pressurestill needs to be checked.

When Your Temporary Spare Tire isInstalledWhen one of your road tires needs to bereplaced with the temporary spare, thesystem will continue to identify an issue toremind you that the damaged road wheeland tire assembly needs to be repaired andput back on your vehicle.To restore the full function of the tirepressure monitoring system, have thedamaged road wheel and tire assemblyrepaired and remounted on your vehicle.

368


Wheels and Tires

When You Believe Your System is NotOperating ProperlyThe main function of the tire pressuremonitoring system is to warn you when

your tires need air. It can also warn you inthe event the system is no longer capableof functioning as intended. See thefollowing chart for information concerningyour tire pressure monitoring system:

Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressurewarning light

Make sure tires are at the proper pres-sure. See Inflating your tires in thischapter. After inflating your tires to themanufacturer’s recommended pressureas shown on the Tire Label (located onthe edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),the vehicle must be driven for at leasttwo minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)before the light turns off.

Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning light

Repair the damaged road wheel and tireassembly and reinstall it on the vehicleto restore system function. For adescription on how the system functions,see When your temporary spare tireis installed in this section.

Spare tire in use

If the tires are properly inflated and thespare tire is not in use but the lightremains on, contact your authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

Tire pressure monitoringsystem malfunction

On vehicles with different front and reartire pressures, the system must beretrained following every tire rotation.See Tire Care (page 351).

Tire rotation withoutsensor training

Repair the damaged road wheel and tireassembly and reinstall it on the vehicleto restore system function. For adescription on how the system functions,see When your temporary spare tireis installed in this section.

Spare tire in useFlashing warninglight

If the tires are properly inflated and thespare tire is not in use but the lightremains on, contact your authorizeddealer as soon as possible.

Tire pressure monitoringsystem malfunction

369


Wheels and Tires

When Inflating Your TiresWhen putting air into your tires (such as ata gas station or in your garage), the tirepressure monitoring system may notrespond immediately to the air added toyour tires.It may take up to two minutes of drivingover 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turnoff after you have filled your tires to therecommended inflation pressure.

How Temperature Affects Your TirePressureThe tire pressure monitoring systemmonitors tire pressure in each pneumatictire. While driving in a normal manner, atypical passenger tire inflation pressuremay increase about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28kPa) from a cold start situation. If thevehicle is stationary overnight with theoutside temperature significantly lowerthan the daytime temperature, the tirepressure may decrease about 3 psi (21kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambienttemperature. This lower pressure valuemay be detected by the tire pressuremonitoring system as being significantlylower than the recommended inflationpressure and activate the system warninglight for low tire pressure.If the low tire pressure warning light is on,visually check each tire to verify that no tireis flat. If one or more tires are flat, repair asnecessary. Check the air pressure in theroad tires. If any tire is under-inflated,carefully drive the vehicle to the nearestlocation where air can be added to thetires. Inflate all the tires to therecommended inflation pressure.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System ResetProcedure

WARNINGTo determine the requiredpressure(s) for your vehicle, see theSafety Compliance Certification

Label (on the door hinge pillar, door-latchpost or the door edge that meets thedoor-latch post, next to the driver seat) orthe Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edgeof the driver door.

Note: You need to perform the tire pressuremonitoring system reset procedure aftereach tire rotation on vehicles that requiredifferent recommended tire pressures in thefront tires as compared to the rear tires.

OverviewTo provide the vehicle's load carryingcapability, some vehicles require differentrecommended tire pressures in the fronttires as compared to the rear tires. The tirepressure monitoring system equipped onthese vehicles is designed to illuminate thelow tire pressure warning light at twodifferent pressures; one for the front tiresand one for the rear tires.Since tires need to be rotated to provideconsistent performance and maximum tirelife, the tire pressure monitoring systemneeds to know when the tires are rotatedto determine which set of tires are on thefront and which are on the rear. With thisinformation, the system can detect andproperly warn of low tire pressures.System reset tips:

370


Wheels and Tires

• To reduce the chances of interferencefrom another vehicle, perform thesystem reset procedure at least threefeet (one meter) away from anotherFord Motor Company vehicleundergoing the system reset procedureat the same time.

• Do not wait more than two minutesbetween resetting each tire sensor orthe system will time-out and the entireprocedure will have to be repeated onall four wheels.

• A double horn will sound indicating theneed to repeat the procedure.

Performing the System Reset ProcedureRead the entire procedure beforeattempting.1. Drive the vehicle above 20 mph (32

km/h) for at least two minutes, thenpark in a safe location where you caneasily get to all four tires and haveaccess to an air pump.

2. Place the ignition in the off position andkeep the key in the ignition.

3. Cycle the ignition to the on positionwith the engine off.

4. Turn the hazard flashers on then offthree times. You must accomplish thiswithin 10 seconds. If the reset modehas been entered successfully, the hornwill sound once, the system indicatorwill flash and a message is shown inthe information display. If this does notoccur, please try again starting at Step2. If after repeated attempts to enterthe reset mode, the horn does notsound, the system indicator does notflash and no message is shown in theinformation display, seek service fromyour authorized dealer.

5. Train the tire pressure monitoringsystem sensors in the tires using thefollowing system reset sequencestarting with the left front tire in thefollowing clockwise order: Left front(driver's side front tire), Right front(passenger's side front tire), Right rear(passenger's side rear tire), Left rear(driver's side rear tire).

6. Remove the valve cap from the valvestem on the left front tire. Decrease theair pressure until the horn sounds.

Note: The single horn chirp confirms thatthe sensor identification code has beenlearned by the module for this position. If adouble horn is heard, the reset procedurewas unsuccessful, and you must repeat it.7. Remove the valve cap from the valve

stem on the right front tire. Decreasethe air pressure until the horn sounds.

8. Remove the valve cap from the valvestem on the right rear tire. Decrease theair pressure until the horn sounds.

9. Remove the valve cap from the valvestem on the left rear tire. Decrease theair pressure until the horn sounds.Training is complete after the hornsounds for the last tire trained (driver'sside rear tire), the system indicatorstops flashing, and a message is shownin the information display.

10. Turn the ignition off. If two short hornbeeps are heard, the reset procedurewas unsuccessful and you mustrepeat it. If after repeating theprocedure and two short beeps areheard when the ignition is turned tooff, seek assistance from yourauthorized dealer.

371


Wheels and Tires

11. Set all four tires to the recommendedair pressure as indicated on theSafety Compliance CertificationLabel (affixed to either the door hingepillar, door-latch post, or the dooredge that meets the door-latch post,next to the driver's seating position)or Tire Label located on the B-Pillaror the edge of the driver's door.

CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL

WARNINGSDo not use tire sealants as they maydamage the tire pressure monitoringsystem.If the tire pressure monitor sensorbecomes damaged it may notfunction.

Note: The tire pressure monitoring systemindicator light will illuminate when the sparetire is in use. To restore the full function ofthe monitoring system, all road wheelsequipped with tire pressure monitoringsensors must be mounted on this vehicle.If you get a flat tire while driving, do notapply the brake heavily. Instead, graduallydecrease your speed. Hold the steeringwheel firmly and slowly move to a safeplace on the side of the road.Have a flat serviced by an authorizeddealer in order to prevent damage to thesystem sensors See Tire PressureMonitoring System (page 367). Replacethe spare tire with a road tire as soon aspossible. During repairing or replacing ofthe flat tire, have the authorized dealerinspect the system sensor for damage.

Dissimilar Spare Wheel and TireAssembly Information

WARNINGFailure to follow these guidelinescould result in an increased risk ofloss of vehicle control, injury or death.

If you have a dissimilar spare wheel andtire, then it is intended for temporary useonly. This means that if you need to use it,you should replace it as soon as possiblewith a road wheel and tire assembly thatis the same size and type as the road tiresand wheels that were originally providedby Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheelis damaged, it should be replaced ratherthan repaired.A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assemblyis defined as a spare wheel and tireassembly that is different in brand, size orappearance from the road tires and wheelsand can be one of three types:1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tirebegins with the letter T for tire size andmay have Temporary Use Only molded inthe sidewall.2. Full-size dissimilar spare with labelon wheel: This spare tire has a label onthe wheel that states: THIS WHEEL ANDTIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USEONLYWhen driving with one of the dissimilarspare tires listed above, do not:• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).• Load the vehicle beyond maximum

vehicle load rating listed on the SafetyCompliance Label.

• Tow a trailer.• Use snow chains on the end of the

vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire

at a time.

372


Wheels and Tires

• Use commercial car washingequipment.

• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.Use of one of the dissimilar spare tireslisted above at any one wheel location canlead to impairment of the following:• Handling, stability and braking

performance.• Comfort and noise.• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.• Winter weather driving capability.• Wet weather driving capability.• All-wheel driving capability.3. Full-size dissimilar spare withoutlabel on wheelWhen driving with the full-size dissimilarspare wheel and tire assembly, do not:• Exceed 70 mph (120 km/h).• Use more than one dissimilar spare

wheel and tire assembly at a time.• Use commercial car washing

equipment.• Use snow chains on the end of the

vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheeland tire assembly.

The usage of a full-size dissimilar sparewheel and tire assembly can lead toimpairment of the following:• Handling, stability and braking

performance.• Comfort and noise.• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.• Winter weather driving capability.• Wet weather driving capability.• All-wheel driving capability.

When driving with the full-size dissimilarspare wheel and tire assembly additionalcaution should be given to:• Towing a trailer.• Driving vehicles equipped with a

camper body.• Driving vehicles with a load on the

cargo rack.Drive cautiously when using a full-sizedissimilar spare wheel and tire assemblyand seek service as soon as possible.

Tire Change ProcedureWARNINGS

When one of the front wheels is offthe ground, the transmission alonewill not prevent the vehicle from

moving or slipping off the jack, even if thetransmission is in park (P).

To help prevent your vehicle frommoving when changing a wheel, shiftthe transmission into park (P), set

the parking brake and use an appropriateblock or wheel chock to secure the wheeldiagonally opposite to the wheel beingchanged. For example, when changing thefront left wheel, place an appropriate blockor wheel chock on the right rear wheel.

Do not work on your vehicle whenthe jack is the only support. If thevehicle slips off the jack, you or

someone else could be seriously injured.Do not attempt to change a tire onthe side of the vehicle close tomoving traffic. Pull far enough off the

road to avoid the danger of being hit whenoperating the jack or changing the wheel.

373


Wheels and Tires

WARNINGSAlways use the jack provided asoriginal equipment with your vehicle.If using a jack other than the one

provided, make sure the jack capacity isadequate for the vehicle weight, includingany vehicle cargo or modifications. If youare unsure if the jack capacity is adequate,contact the authorized dealer.

Switch off the running boards beforejacking or placing any object underyour vehicle. Never place your hand

between the extended running board andyour vehicle. A moving running board maycause injury.

Note: Only use the spare tire carrier to stowthe tire and wheel combination providedwith your vehicle. Other tire and wheelcombinations can cause the tire carrier tofail.Note: Do not use impact tools or powertools operating at over 200 RPM on thespare tire carrier, this may cause a winchmalfunction and prevent a secure fit.Override the winch at least three times(there will be an audible click each time) tomake sure the wheel and tire have beeninstalled securely.Note: Passengers should not remain in thevehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.Park on a level surface, activate the hazardflashers and set the parking brake. Then,place the transmission in park (P) and turnthe engine off.

Remove the Vehicle Jack and Tool BagThe vehicle jack and tool bag are locatedon the rear passenger side of your vehicle.

E233621

1. Remove the foam top.

E233622

2. Release the strap securing the vehiclejack and tool bag to the vehicle.

3. With slight downward pressure, slidethe vehicle jack and tool bag outward,toward the passenger side of thevehicle.

4. Lift the vehicle jack and tool bag off thefloor posts and remove from yourvehicle.

374


Wheels and Tires

E233623

5. With the vehicle jack and tool bagremoved from your vehicle, remove thefuel funnel.

E233624

6. Release the D-ring straps.

E233625

7. Lift the tool bag off of the vehicle jack.

E233626

8. Remove the tools from the tool bag.Note: Only Raptor trim vehicles receive awheel chock with the tool bag.

Removing the Spare TireNote: Remove the hook end from theassembled jack handle before continuing.The spare tire is located under the vehicle,just forward of the rear bumper.1. Use your key to remove the lock

cylinder from the access hole of thebumper to allow access to the guidetube.

E188735

375


Wheels and Tires

2. Assemble the jack handle as shown inthe illustration.

E184020

3. Fully insert the jack handle through thebumper hole and into the guide tubethrough the access hole in the rearbumper.

4. Turn the handle counterclockwise untilthe tire is lowered to the ground, thetire can be slid rearward and the cableis slightly slack.

5. Remove the retainer from the centerof the wheel.

E175447

6. Block both the front and rear of thewheel diagonally opposite the flat tire.For example, if the left front tire is flat,block the right rear wheel.

7. Obtain the spare tire and vehicle jackfrom their storage locations.

8. Loosen each wheel lug nut on theaffected flat tire one-half turncounterclockwise, but do not removethem.

Jacking the VehicleFront Jacking Points

E183709

Note: Use the frame rail as the jackinglocation point, not the control arm. Theframe rail is marked with an arrow.

376


Wheels and Tires

Rear Jacking Points

E166718

Note: Jack at the specified locations toavoid damage to the vehicle.1. Place the vehicle jack at the jacking

point next to the tire you are changing.Turn the jack handle clockwise untilthe wheel is completely off the ground.

2. Remove the lug nuts with the lugwrench.

3. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,making sure the valve stem is facingoutward. Reinstall the lug nuts until thewheel is snug against the hub. Do notfully tighten the lug nuts until the wheelhas been lowered.

4. Lower the wheel by turning the jackhandle counterclockwise.

5. Remove the vehicle jack and fullytighten the lug nuts in the order shown.See Technical Specifications (page380).

6. Stow the flat tire. See the Stowing theFlat or Spare Tire.

7. Stow the vehicle jack and lug wrench.Make sure the jack is fastened securelybefore you drive. See Stowing theVehicle Jack and Tool Bag.

8. Unblock the wheels.

E166719

1

3

5

4

6

2

Stowing the Flat or Spare TireNote: Failure to follow the spare tirestowage instructions may result in failure ofthe cable or loss of the spare tire.1. Lay the tire on the ground with the

valve stem facing up.2. Slide the wheel partially under the

vehicle and install the retainer throughthe wheel center. Pull on the cable toalign the components at the end of thecable.

3. Turn the jack handle clockwise untilthe tire is raised to its stowed positionunderneath the vehicle. The effort toturn the jack handle increasessignificantly and the spare tire carrierratchets or slips when the tire is raisedto the maximum tightness. Tighten to

377


Wheels and Tires

the best of your ability, to the pointwhere the ratchet or slip occurs, ifpossible. The spare tire carrier will notallow you to overtighten. If the sparetire carrier ratchets or slips with littleeffort, contact your authorized dealer.

4. Check that the tire lies flat against theframe and is properly tightened. Try topush or pull, then turn the tire to besure it will not move. Loosen andretighten, if necessary. Failure toproperly stow the spare tire may resultin failure of the winch cable and lossof the tire.

5. Repeat this tightness check procedurewhen servicing the spare tire pressure(every six months, as per yourscheduled maintenance information),or at any time that the spare tire isdisturbed through service of othercomponents.

6. If removed, install the spare tire lockinto the bumper drive tube with thespare tire lock key and jack handle.

Stowing the Vehicle Jack and Tool Bag

E184021

1. Adjust the jack up or down by rotatingthe lead screw located on the end ofthe jack. The stowage markings shouldline up with the bottom channel.

E233626

2. Place the tools inside of the tool bag.

E233625

3. Install the tool bag to the top of thevehicle jack.

E233624

4. Install the D-ring straps that secure thetool bag to the vehicle jack.

378


Wheels and Tires

E233623

5. Install the fuel funnel.6. Position the jack base so the key hole

slots align with the posts in the floor.7. With slight downward pressure, slide

the vehicle jack and tool bag inwardstoward the driver side of the vehicleuntil it stops.

E233622

8. Secure the strap the holds the vehiclejack and tool bag to the vehicle.

E233621

9. Install the foam top.

379


Wheels and Tires

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSWheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications

WARNINGWhen you install a wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materialspresent on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub,brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure any fasteners

that attach the rotor to the hub so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces ofthe wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mountingsurfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicleis in motion, resulting in loss of vehicle control, personal injury or death.

lb.ft (Nm)Bolt size

150 lb.ft (204 Nm)M14 x 1.5*Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Fordrecommended replacement fasteners.Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after anywheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).

E145950

Wheel pilot boreAInspect the wheel pilot hole andmounting surface prior to installation.Remove any visible corrosion or looseparticles.

380


Wheels and Tires

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™

2.7L EcoBoostEngine

164Cubic inches

1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order

Coil on plugIgnition system

.028-.031 (0.7 - 0.8 mm)Spark plug gap

10.0:1Compression ratio

Drivebelt Routing

E176088

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L

3.5L V6 TiVCTEngine

213Cubic inches



.049-.053 in. (1.25 - 1.35 mm)Spark plug gap


381


Capacities and Specifications

Drivebelt Routing

E167467

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™

3.5L V6 EcoboostEngine

213Cubic inches





Drivebelt Routing

E167467

382



ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 5.0L

5.0L V8Engine

302Cubic inches

1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8Firing order




Drivebelt Routing

E167465

MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™

2.7L EcoboostComponent

FA-1883Air filter element.

FL-2062Oil filter.

BAGM-48H6-760Battery.

BAGM-94RH7-800(King Ranch, Lariat and Premium)

SP-542Spark plugs.

WW-2242Windshield wiper blade.

FP-79Cabin air filter.

383



For scheduled maintenance, werecommend Motorcraft® replacementparts available at your Ford dealer or atfordparts.com. These parts meet or exceedFord Motor Company’s specifications andare engineered for your vehicle. Use ofother parts may impact vehicleperformance, emissions and durability.Your warranty may be void for any damage

related to use of other parts.If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available,use an oil filter that meets industryperformance specificationSAE/USCAR-36.For spark plug replacement, contact anauthorized dealer. Replace the spark plugsat the appropriate intervals. SeeScheduled Maintenance (page 539).

MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L

Motorcraft Part numberComponent


FL-500-SOil filter.

BXT-48H6-610Battery.

SP-520Spark plugs.

FT-138Transmission filter.



We recommend Motorcraft replacementparts available at your Ford dealer or atfordparts.com for scheduled maintenance.These parts meet or exceed Ford MotorCompany’s specifications and areengineered for your vehicle. Use of otherparts may impact vehicle performance,emissions and durability. Your warrantymay be void for any damage related to useof other parts.

If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, usean oil filter that meets industryperformance specificationSAE/USCAR-36.For spark plug replacement, contact anauthorized dealer. Replace the spark plugsat the appropriate intervals. SeeScheduled Maintenance (page 539).

384



MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™

3.5L EcoboostComponent


FL-500-SOil filter.


BXT-94RH7-730(King Ranch, Lariat and Premium)

SP-534Spark plugs.



For scheduled maintenance, werecommend Motorcraft® replacementparts available at your Ford dealer or atfordparts.com. These parts meet or exceedFord Motor Company’s specifications andare engineered for your vehicle. Use ofother parts may impact vehicleperformance, emissions and durability.Your warranty may be void for any damagerelated to use of other parts.

If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available,use an oil filter that meets industryperformance specificationSAE/USCAR-36.For spark plug replacement, contact anauthorized dealer. Replace the spark plugsat the appropriate intervals. SeeScheduled Maintenance (page 539).

MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 5.0L

5.0LComponent


FL-500-SOil filter.


BXT-94RH7-730(King Ranch, Lariat and Premium)

SP-519Spark plugs.



385



For scheduled maintenance, werecommend Motorcraft® replacementparts available at your Ford dealer or atfordparts.com. These parts meet or exceedFord Motor Company’s specifications andare engineered for your vehicle. Use ofother parts may impact vehicleperformance, emissions and durability.Your warranty may be void for any damagerelated to use of other parts.If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available,use an oil filter that meets industryperformance specificationSAE/USCAR-36.For spark plug replacement, contact anauthorized dealer. Replace the spark plugsat the appropriate intervals. SeeScheduled Maintenance (page 539).

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBERThe vehicle identification number islocated on the left-hand side of theinstrument panel.

E142476

Please note that in the graphic, XXXX isrepresentative of your vehicle identificationnumber.

The Vehicle Identification Number containsthe following information:

E142477

World manufacturer identifierABrake system, Gross VehicleWeight Rating, Restraint Devicesand their locations

B

Make, vehicle line, series, bodytype

C

Engine typeDCheck digitEModel yearFAssembly plantGProduction sequence numberH

386



VEHICLE CERTIFICATIONLABEL

E167469

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration Regulations require that aSafety Compliance Certification Label beaffixed to a vehicle and prescribe wherethe Safety Compliance Certification Labelmay be located. The Safety ComplianceCertification Label shall be affixed to eitherthe door hinge pillar, the door latch post,or the edge of the door near the door latch,next to the driver's seating position.

TRANSMISSION CODEDESIGNATION

E167814

The transmission code is on the SafetyCompliance Certification Label. Thefollowing table shows the transmissioncode along with the transmissiondescription.

CodeDescription

6Six-speed automatic transmission 6R80

GTen-speed automatic transmission 10R80

387



CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™Capacities

WARNINGThe air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure.Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.

CapacityItem

6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil (with oil filter)

16.4 qt (15.5 L)Engine coolant

Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid

3.5 pt (1.7 L)Front axle fluid (Four-wheel drive)

5.5 pt (2.6 L)Rear axle fluid

13.1 qt (12.4 L) *Automatic transmission fluid

1.5 qt (1.4 L)Transfer case fluidFour-wheel drive (Electronic Shift-on-the-Fly)

1.5 qt (1.4 L)Transfer case fluidAutomatic four-wheel drive (Torque ondemand)

Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid

23.0 gal (87.1 L)Fuel tank

36.0 gal (136.2 L)Fuel tank(Optional)

1.5 lb (0.68 kg)A/C Refrigerant

3.4 fl oz (100.5 ml)A/C Refrigerant Compressor Oil*Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.

388



SpecificationsMaterials

SpecificationName

WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend MotorOilXO-5W30-QSP

WSS-M2C946-ARecommended Motor oil (Canada):Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor OilCXO-5W30-LSP12

WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor OilMXO-5W30-QSP

WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor OilXO-5W30-QFS

WSS-M2C946-AOptional Motor oil (Canada):Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor OilCXO-5W30-LFS12

WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/CoolantVC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/CoolantCVC-3DIL-B

WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High PerformanceMotor Vehicle Brake FluidPM-20

WSS-M2C942-AFront axle fluid:Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic HypoidGear LubricantXY-75W85-QL

WSS-M2C942-ARear axle fluid:Motorcraft® SAE 75W-85 Premium Synthetic HypoidGear LubricantXY-75W85-QL

WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):

389



SpecificationName

MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission FluidXT-10-QLVC

WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid

CXT-10-LV12

WSS-M2C938-ATransfer case fluid (U.S. and Mexico):MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid

XT-10-QLVC

WSS-M2C938-ATransfer case fluid (Canada):MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid

CXT-10-LV12

WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentratewith BitterantZC-32-B2

WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer FluidCXC-37-(A, B, D, F)

WSS-M17B21-AA/C refrigerant (U.S. and Mexico):R-1234yf RefrigerantHS7Z-19B519-AA

WSS-M17B21-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):R-1234yf RefrigerantHS7Z-19B519-BA

WSS-M2C300-A2A/C refrigerant compressor oil:R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG OilYN-35

ESA-M1C75-BTransmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brakepedal shift grease:Premium Long-Life GreaseXG-1-E1

ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease SprayXL-5

390



SpecificationName

--Lock cylinders (U.S.):Penetrating and Lock LubricantXL-1

--Lock cylinders (Canada):Penetrating FluidCXC-51-A

--Lock cylinders (Mexico):Penetrating and Lock LubricantMXL-1

If you use oil and fluids that do not meetthe defined specification and viscositygrade, this may lead to:• Component damage which is not

covered by the vehicle warranty.• Longer engine cranking periods.• Increased emission levels.• Reduced engine performance.• Reduced fuel economy.• Degraded brake performance.We recommend Motorcraft motor oil foryour vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is notavailable, use motor oils of therecommended viscosity grade that meetAPI SN requirements and display the APICertification Mark for gasoline engines. Donot use oil labeled with API SN servicecategory unless the label also displays theAPI certification mark.

E142732

An oil that displays this symbol conformsto current engine, emission system andfuel economy performance standards ofthe International Lubricants SpecificationAdvisory Committee (ILSAC).Do not use supplemental engine oiladditives because they are unnecessaryand could lead to engine damage that maynot be covered by your vehicle warranty.Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 LowViscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluidor equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Useof any fluid other than the recommendedfluid may cause degraded brakeperformance and not meet the Fordperformance standards. Keep brake fluidclean and dry. Contamination with dirt,water, petroleum products or othermaterials may result in brake systemdamage and possible failure.

391



Note: Automatic transmissions that requireMERCON LV transmission fluid should onlyuse MERCON LV transmission fluid. Theuse of any other fluid may causetransmission damage.

CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5LCapacities


CapacityItem

6.3 qt (6 L)Engine oil (with oil filter)













392




SpecificationName


WSS-M2C945-ARecommended motor oil (Canada):Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor OilCXO-5W20-LSP12



WSS-M2C945-AOptional motor oil (Canada):Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor OilCXO-5W20-LFS12







393



SpecificationName



CXT-10-LV12


XT-10-QLVC


CXT-10-LV12








394



SpecificationName

--Lock cylinders (U.S. and Mexico):Penetrating and Lock LubricantXL-1





E142732


395




CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™Capacities


CapacityItem














396




SpecificationName


WSS-M2C946-ARecommended Motor oil (Canada):Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor OilCXO-5W30-LSP12



WSS-M2C946-AOptional Motor oil (Canada):Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor OilCXO-5W30-LFS12






WSS-M2C94-AAutomatic transmission fluid:

397



SpecificationName

MERCON ULVMotorcraft MERCON ULV Automatic Transmission FluidXT-12-ULV


XT-10-QLVC


CXT-10-LV12








398



SpecificationName






E142732


399




CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 5.0LCapacities


CapacityItem


15.9 qt (15 L)Engine coolant












400




SpecificationName


WSS-M2C945-ARecommended motor oil (Canada):Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor OilCXO-5W20-LSP12



WSS-M2C945-AOptional motor oil (Canada):Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor OilCXO-5W20-LFS12







401



SpecificationName



CXT-10-LV12


XT-10-QLVC


CXT-10-LV12








402



SpecificationName






E142732


403




404



GENERAL INFORMATIONRadio Frequencies and ReceptionFactors

AM and FM frequencies are established bythe Federal Communications Commission(FCC) and the Canadian Radio andTelecommunications Commission (CRTC).Those frequencies are:• AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz• FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz

Radio Reception Factors

The further you travel from an AM or FM station, theweaker the signal and the weaker the reception.

Distance and strength

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freewayoverpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage andthunderstorms can interfere with the reception.

Terrain

When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeatingtower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one andresult in the audio system muting.

Station overload

CD and CD Player InformationNote: CD units play commercially pressed4.7 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Dueto technical incompatibility, certainrecordable and re-recordable compact discsmay not function correctly when used inFord CD players.Note: Do not insert CDs with homemadepaper (adhesive) labels into the CD playeras the label may peel and cause the CD tobecome jammed. You should use apermanent felt tip marker rather thanadhesive labels on your homemade CDs.Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Pleasecontact an authorized dealer for furtherinformation.Note: Do not use any irregularly shapeddiscs or discs with a scratch protection filmattached.Always handle discs by their edges only.Clean the disc with an approved CDcleaner only. Wipe it from the center of thedisc toward the edge. Do not clean in acircular motion.

Do not expose discs to direct sunlight orheat sources for extended periods.

MP3 and WMA Track and FolderStructureAudio systems capable of recognizing andplaying MP3 and WMA individual tracksand folder structures work as follows:• There are two different modes for MP3

and WMA disc playback: MP3 andWMA track mode (system default) andMP3 and WMA folder mode.

• MP3 and WMA track mode ignores anyfolder structure on the MP3 and WMAdisc. The player numbers each MP3and WMA track on the disc (noted bythe MP3 or WMA file extension) fromT001 to a maximum of T255. Themaximum number of playable MP3 andWMA files may be less depending onthe structure of the CD and exactmodel of radio present.

405


Audio System

• MP3 and WMA folder mode representsa folder structure consisting of onelevel of folders. The CD player numbersall MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc(noted by the MP3 or WMA fileextension) and all folders containingMP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder)T001 (track) to F253 T255.

• Creating discs with only one level offolders helps with navigation throughthe disc files.

If you are burning your own MP3 and WMAdiscs, it is important to understand howthe system reads the structures you create.While various files may be present (fileswith extensions other than MP3 andWMA), only files with the MP3 and WMAextension are played; other files areignored by the system. This enables you touse the same MP3 and WMA disc for avariety of tasks on your work computer,home computer and your in-vehiclesystem.

In track mode, the system displays andplays the structure as if it were only onelevel deep (all MP3 and WMA files play,regardless of being in a specific folder). Infolder mode, the system only plays theMP3 and WMA files in the current folder.

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:AM/FM



Note: Your audio system may not beequipped with a CD player.

406


Audio System

E176101

Display screen: View audio and SYNC options.ANumber block: Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio station, tuneto the station, then press and hold a preset button until sound returns.

B

Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system dependingon which mode you are in (such as Radio mode).

C

Cursor arrows and OK: Use the up and down arrow buttons to select thevarious settings. When you make your selection, press the left and right arrowbuttons to change the settings.

D

Press OK to set or press MENU to exit.TUNE: Turn to search the frequency band in individual increments.ESeek: Select a frequency band and press these buttons. The system stops atthe first station up or down the band. Press and hold the button to move quicklyto the next strong radio station or memory preset.

F

VOL and Power: Press this button to switch the system off and on. Turn it toadjust the volume.

G

407


Audio System

MEDIA: Press this button to access your auxiliary input jack or switch betweendevices you plug into the input jack or USB port.

H

MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features.IRADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequency bands.Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different radiofunctions.

J

Clock: Press this button to access the clock setting. Use the center arrowcontrols to change the hours and minutes.

K

You can also set the clock by pressing the MENU button and scrolling to ClockSettings.Mute: Press this button to mute the playing media.LSound: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fadeand Balance.

M

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:AM/FM/CD



408


Audio System

E176104

Display screen: View audio and SYNC options.ANumber block:BIn radio mode, store your favorite stations for later access. When tuned to anystation, press and hold a preset button until sound returns.In CD mode, press a button to select a track. In phone mode, press the buttonsto enter a phone number.Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system dependingon which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).

C


D

Press OK to set or press MENU to exit.TUNE: Turn to search the frequency band in individual increments.ESeek:F

409


Audio System

In radio mode, select a frequency band and press these buttons. The systemstops at the first station up the band. Press and hold the button to move quicklyto the next strong radio station or memory preset.In CD mode, press this button to select the next track. Press and hold the buttonto move quickly forward through the current track.CD slot: Insert a CD.GEject: Press this button to eject a CD.HVOL and Power: Press this button to switch the system off and on. Turn it toadjust the volume.

I

MEDIA: Press this button to access your auxiliary input jack or switch betweendevices you plug into the input jack or USB port.

J

MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features.KRADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequency bands.Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different radiofunctions.

L


M

You can also set the clock by pressing the MENU button and scrolling to ClockSettings.CD: Press this button to listen to a CD. Press the function buttons below theradio screen to select on-screen options of Repeat or Shuffle.

N

Sound: Press this button to access settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fadeand Balance.

O

410


Audio System

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:AM/FM/SYNC



E176102

Display screen: View audio and SYNC options.ANumber block:BIn radio mode, store your favorite stations for later access. When tuned to anystation, press and hold a preset button until sound returns.

411


Audio System

In phone mode, press the buttons to dial a phone number.Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system dependingon which mode you are in (such as Radio mode).

C


D

Press OK to set or press MENU to exit.TUNE: Turn to search the frequency band in individual increments.ESeek: Select a frequency band and press these buttons. The system stops atthe first station up the band. Press and hold the button to move quickly to thenext strong radio station or memory preset.

F


G

PHONE: Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC system.See SYNC™ (page 423).

H

MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features.IMEDIA: Press this button to access your auxiliary input jack or switch betweendevices you plug into the input jack or USB port.

J


K

You can also set the clock by pressing the MENU button and scrolling to ClockSettings.RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequency bands.Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different radiofunctions.

L


M

412


Audio System

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:AM/FM/CD/SYNC/SATELLITERADIO


you use extreme caution when using anydevice that may take your focus off theroad. Your primary responsibility is the safeoperation of your vehicle. We recommendagainst the use of any handheld devicewhile driving and encourage the use ofvoice-operated systems when possible.Make sure you are aware of all applicablelocal laws that may affect the use ofelectronic devices while driving.

Note: Some features, such as Sirius satelliteradio, may not be available in your location.Check with an authorized dealer.

E176103

413


Audio System

Display screen: View audio and SYNC options.ANumber block:BIn radio mode, store your favorite stations for later access. When tuned to anystation, press and hold a preset button until sound returns.In CD mode, press a button to select a track.In phone mode, press the buttons to dial a phone number.Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system dependingon which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).

C


D

Press OK to set or press MENU to exit.TUNE: Turn to search the frequency band in individual increments.ESeek:FIn radio mode, select a frequency band and press these buttons. The systemstops at the first station up the band. Press and hold the button to move quicklyto the next strong radio station or memory preset.In CD mode, press this button to select the next track. Press and hold the buttonto move quickly forward through the current track.CD slot: Insert a CD.GEject: Press this button to eject a CD.HVOL and Power: Press this button to switch the system off and on. Turn it toadjust the volume.

I

PHONE: Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC system.See SYNC™ (page 423).

J

MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features.KMEDIA: Press this button to access your auxiliary input jack or switch betweendevices you plug into the input jack or USB port.

L


M

You can also set the clock by pressing the MENU button and scrolling to ClockSettings.RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequency bands.Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different radiofunctions.

N

414


Audio System

SIRIUS or MUTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Sirius satellite radio, pressthis button to listen to Sirius satellite radio. If your vehicle is not equipped withSirius satellite radio, press the button to mute the playing media.

O

CD: Press this button to listen to a CD. Press the function buttons below theradio screen to select on-screen options of Repeat or Shuffle.

P


Q

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:SONY AM/FM/CD



Note: The SYNC system controls most of the audio features. See Entertainment (page 480).

415


Audio System

E176105


A

Seek, Reverse and Fast Forward:BIn radio mode, select a frequency band and press one of these buttons. Thesystem stops at the first station it finds in that direction.In CD mode, press these buttons to select the previous or next track.Memory presets: Store your favorite radio stations. To store a radio station,tune to the station, then press and hold a preset button until sound returns.

C

TUNE: Turn to search the frequency band in individual increments.DMEDIA: Press this button to access different audio modes, such as AM, FM andLine In.

E

CD slot: Insert a CD.FEject: Press this button to eject a CD.G

416


Audio System

DIGITAL RADIONote: HD Radio broadcasts are notavailable in all markets.HD Radio technology is the digitalevolution of analog AM/FM radio. Yoursystem has a special receiver that allowsit to receive digital broadcasts (whereavailable) in addition to the analogbroadcasts, it already receives. Digitalbroadcasts provide a better sound qualitythan analog broadcasts with free,crystal-clear audio and no static ordistortion. For more information, and aguide to available stations andprogramming, please visitwww.hdradio.com.When HD Radio is on and you tune to astation broadcasting HD Radio technology,you may notice the HD Radio logo on yourscreen. When this logo is available, youmay also see Title and Artist fieldson-screen.

The multicast indicator appears in FMmode (only) if the current station isbroadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.The highlighted numbers signify availabledigital channels where new or differentcontent is available. HD1 signifies the mainprogramming status and is available inanalog and digital broadcasts. Othermulticast stations (HD2 through HD7) areonly available digitally.When HD Radio broadcasts are active, youcan access the following functions:• Scan allows you to hear a brief

sampling of all available stations. Thisfeature still works when HD Radioreception is on, although it does notscan for HD2-HD7 channels. You maysee the HD logo appear if the stationhas a digital broadcast.

• Memory presets allow you to save anactive channel as a memory preset.Touch and hold a memory preset slotuntil the sound returns. There is a briefmute while the radio saves the station.Sound returns when finished. Whenswitching to an HD2 or HD3 memorypreset, the sound mutes before thedigital audio plays, because the systemhas to reacquire the digital signal.

Note: As with any saved radio station, youcannot access the saved station if yourvehicle is outside the station’s receptionarea.

417


Audio System

HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting

Potential reception issues

If you are listening to a multicast station and you are onthe fringe of the reception area, the station may mute dueto weak signal strength.

Reception area

If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back tothe analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is availableagain. However, if you are listening to any of the possibleHD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and staysmuted unless it is able to connect to the digital signalagain.

When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in theanalog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is anHD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Dependingon the station quality, you may hear a slight sound changewhen the station changes from analog to digital. Blendingis the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back toanalog sound.

Station blending

In order to provide the best possibleexperience, use the contact form to reportany station issues found while listening toa station broadcasting with HD Radiotechnology. Independent entities own andoperate each station. These stations areresponsible for ensuring all audio streamsand data fields are accurate.

418


Audio System

Potential station issues

ActionCauseIssues

No action required. This is abroadcast issue.

This is poor time alignmentby the radio broadcaster.

Echo, stutter, skip or repeatin audio.Increase or decrease inaudio volume.

No action required. Thereception issue may clear upas you continue to drive.

The radio is shifting betweenanalog and digital audio.

Sound fading or blending inand out.

No action required. This isnormal behavior. Wait untilthe audio is available.

The digital multicast is notavailable until the HD Radiobroadcast is decoded. Oncedecoded, the audio is avail-able.

There is an audio mutedelay when selecting HD2 orHD3, multicast preset orDirect Tune.

No action required. Thestation is not available inyour current location.

The previously storedmulticast preset or directtune is not available in yourcurrent reception area.

Cannot access HD2 or HD3multicast channel whenrecalling a preset or from adirect tune.

Fill out the station issueform at website listedbelow.*

Data service issue by theradio broadcaster.

Text information does notmatch currently playingaudio.

Fill out the station issueform at website listedbelow.*

Data service issue by theradio broadcaster.

There is no text informationshown for currently selectedfrequency.

No action required. This isnormal behavior.

Pressing Scan disablesHD2-HD7 channel search.

HD2-HD7 stations not foundwhen Scan is pressed.

* http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences

HD Radio Technology manufactured underlicense from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. andforeign patents. HD Radio and the HD andHD Radio logos are proprietary trademarksof iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford MotorCompany and iBiquity Digital Corp. are notresponsible for the content sent using HDRadio technology. Content may bechanged, added or deleted at any time atthe station owner's discretion.

SATELLITE RADIO (If Equipped)

SIRIUS® broadcasts a variety of music,news, sports, weather, traffic andentertainment satellite radio channels. Formore information and a complete list ofSIRIUS satellite radio channels, visitwww.siriusxm.com in the United States,www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUSat 1-888-539-7474.

419


Audio System

Note: This receiver includes the eCosreal-time operating system. eCos ispublished under the eCos License.

Satellite Radio Reception Factors

Potential satellite radio reception issues

For optimal reception performance, keep the antennaclear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and othermaterial as far away from the antenna as possible.

Antenna obstructions

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freewayoverpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage andthunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

Terrain

When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeatingtower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one andthe audio system may mute.

Station overload

Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate theinterference and the audio system may mute.

Satellite radio signal interfer-ence

SIRIUS® Satellite Radio ServiceNote: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted rightto change, rearrange, add or deleteprogramming including canceling, movingor adding particular channels, and its prices,at any time, with or without notice to you.Ford Motor Company shall not beresponsible for any such programmingchanges.

E208625

SIRIUS satellite radio is asubscription-based satellite radio servicethat broadcasts a variety of music, sports,news, weather, traffic and entertainmentprogramming. Your factory-installedSIRIUS satellite radio system includeshardware and a limited subscription term,which begins on the date of sale or leaseof your vehicle. See an authorized dealerfor availability.For more information on extendedsubscription terms (a service fee isrequired), the online media player and acomplete list of SIRIUS satellite radiochannels, and other features, please visitwww.siriusxm.com in the United States,www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUSat 1-888-539-7474.

Satellite Radio Electronic SerialNumber (ESN)You need your ESN to activate, modify ortrack your satellite radio account. When insatellite radio mode, tune to channel 0.

420


Audio System

Troubleshooting

ActionConditionMessage

No action required. Thismessage should disappearshortly.

Radio requires more thantwo seconds to produceaudio for the selectedchannel.

Acquiring…

If this message does notclear shortly, or with an igni-tion key cycle, your receivermay have a fault. See anauthorized dealer for service.

There is an internal moduleor system failure present.

Satellite antenna fault

SIRIUS system failure

Tune to another channel orchoose another preset.

The channel is no longeravailable.

Invalid Channel

Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474 to subscribe tothe channel, or tune toanother channel.

Your subscription does notinclude this channel.

Unsubscribed Channel

The signal is blocked. Whenyou move into an open area,the signal should return.

The signal is lost from theSIRIUS satellite or SIRIUStower to your vehicleantenna.

No Signal

No action required. Theprocess may take up tothree minutes.

Update of channelprogramming in progress.

Updating…

Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474 to resolvesubscription issues.

Your satellite service is nolonger available.

Questions? Call

1-888-539-7474

Use the channel guide toturn off the Lock or Skipfunction on that station.

All the channels in theselected category are eitherskipped or locked.

None found

Check Channel Guide

No action required.SIRIUS has updated thechannels available for yourvehicle.

Subscription Updated

421


Audio System

USB PORT (If Equipped)



E201595

The USB port allows you to plug in mediaplaying devices, memory sticks and chargedevices (if supported). See UsingSYNC™ With Your Media Player (page444).

MEDIA HUBThe media hub may be located on theinstrument panel or center console.

E207805

See your SYNC information.

422


Audio System

GENERAL INFORMATION

E198355

SYNC is an in-vehicle communicationssystem that works with yourBluetooth-enabled cellular phone andportable media player. This allows you to:• Make and receive calls.• Access and play music from your

portable music player.• Use 911 Assist and applications, such

as Spotify and Glympse, via SYNCAppLink.*

• Access phonebook contacts and musicusing voice commands.

• Stream music from your connectedphone.

• Text message.

• Use the advanced voice recognitionsystem.

• Charge your USB device (if your devicesupports this).

*These features are not available in allmarkets and may require activation.Available AppLink enabled apps vary bymarket.Make sure that you review your device'smanual before using it with SYNC.

SupportThe SYNC support team is available tohelp you with any questions you cannotanswer on your own.Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.

423


SYNC™ (If Equipped)

Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST.In the United States, call 1-800-392-3673.In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673.Times are subject to change due toholidays.

SYNC Owner AccountWhy do I need a SYNC owner account?• Essential for keeping up with the latest

software downloads available forSYNC.

• Access to customer support for anyquestions you may have.

Driving RestrictionsFor your safety, certain features arespeed-dependent and restricted when yourvehicle is traveling over 3 mi (5 km).

Safety InformationWARNING

Driving while distracted can result inloss of vehicle control, crash andinjury. We strongly recommend that


When using SYNC:• Do not operate playing devices if the

power cords or cables are broken, splitor damaged. Place cords and cablesout of the way, so they do not interferewith the operation of pedals, seats,compartments or safe driving abilities.

• Do not leave playing devices in yourvehicle during extreme conditions as itcould cause them damage. See yourdevice's manual for further information.

• Do not attempt to service or repair thesystem. See an authorized dealer.

Privacy InformationWhen a cellular phone is connected toSYNC, the system creates a profile withinyour vehicle that is linked to that cellularphone. This profile is created in order tooffer you more cellular features and tooperate more efficiently. Among otherthings, this profile may contain data aboutyour cellular phone book, text messages(read and unread), and call history,including history of calls when your cellularphone was not connected to the system.In addition, if you connect a media device,the system creates and retains an index ofsupported media content. The system alsorecords a short development log ofapproximately 10 minutes of all recentsystem activity. The log profile and othersystem data may be used to improve thesystem and help diagnose any problemsthat may occur.The cellular profile, media device index,and development log will remain in thevehicle unless you delete them and aregenerally accessible only in the vehiclewhen the cellular phone or media playeris connected. If you no longer plan to usethe system or the vehicle, we recommendyou perform a Master Reset to erase allstored information.

424



System data cannot be accessed withoutspecial equipment and access to thevehicle's SYNC module. Ford MotorCompany and Ford of Canada will notaccess the system data for any purposeother than as described absent consent, acourt order, or where required by lawenforcement, other governmentauthorities, or other third parties actingwith lawful authority. Other parties mayseek to access the informationindependently of Ford Motor Company andFord of Canada. For further privacyinformation, see the section on 911 Assist.See SYNC™ Applications and Services(page 439).

USING VOICE RECOGNITIONThis system helps you control manyfeatures using voice commands. Thisallows you to keep your hands on thewheel and focus on what is around you.

Initiating a Voice Session

E142599

Press the voice button. A list ofavailable voice commandsappears in the display.

Global Voice CommandsThese voice commands are alwaysavailable. You can say them at any time.

Global voice commands

This command ends the voice session. Youcan also cancel a session by holding thevoice button for two or more seconds.

(cancel | exit)

This command provides you with hints,examples and instructions.

help

This command restarts the voice sessionfrom the initial starting point.

(main menu | start again)

You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets thatare separated by |. For example, where; (cancel | exit) appears you say; cancel or exit.

Helpful Hints• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is

as quiet as possible. Wind noise fromopen windows and road vibrations mayprevent the system from correctlyrecognizing spoken commands.

• Before giving a voice command, waitfor the system announcement to finish,followed by a single tone. Anycommand spoken before this does notregister with the system.

• Speak naturally, without long pausesbetween words.

• You can interrupt the system at anytime while it is speaking by pressing thevoice button. You can cancel a voicesession by pressing and holding thevoice button.

425



System Interaction and FeedbackThe system provides feedback throughaudible tones, prompts, questions andspoken confirmations depending on thesituation and the chosen level ofinteraction. You can customize the voicerecognition system to provide more or lessinstruction and feedback.

The default setting is to a higher level ofinteraction in order to help you learn to usethe system. You can change these settingsat any time.

Adjusting the Interaction Level

E142599

Press the voice button. Whenprompted, say:

Action and DescriptionVoice Command

voice settings

Then either of the following:

Provides more detailed interaction andguidance. (Recommended for first timeusers.)

interaction mode novice

Provides less audible interaction and guid-ance.

interaction mode advanced

Confirmation PromptsConfirmation prompts are short questionsthe system asks when it is not sure of yourrequest or when there is more than onepossible response to your request.

To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:


voice settings

Then either of the following:

Make a best guess from the command; youmay still occasionally be asked to confirmsettings.

confirmation prompts off

Clarify your voice command with a shortquestion.

confirmation prompts on

Phone ConfirmationUsing phone confirmations the systemasks you to verify before placing any calls.

426



To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:


voice settings

Then any of the following:

When enabled, this feature will prompt youto confirm any voice initiated call commandprior to the call being placed.

phone confirmation on

The system will make a best guess; youmay still occasionally be asked to confirmsettings.

phone confirmation off

Changing the Voice SettingsIn addition to using voice commands tochange the voice settings, you can also usethe menu in the audio display.

To change the voice settings press theMenu button then select:

Menu Item

SYNC-Settings

Voice settings

Note: Depending on the current climatecontrol settings, the fan speed mayautomatically go down while issuing voicecommands or while making and receivingphone calls via SYNC to reduce the amountof background noise in the vehicle. The fanspeed will automatically return to normaloperation once the voice session ends. Fanspeed can also be adjusted normally duringa voice session, simply press fan buttons (orturn fan knob) to increase or decrease fanspeed to desired setting.

To disable this automatic fan speedreduction feature during voice sessions,press and hold the climate control AC andRecirculated air buttons simultaneously,release and then increase fan speed within2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeatthe above sequence.

USING SYNC™ WITH YOURPHONEHands-free calling is one of the mainfeatures of SYNC. While the systemsupports a variety of features, many aredependent on your cellular phone'sfunctionality. At a minimum, most cellularphones with Bluetooth wireless technologysupport the following functions:• Answering an incoming call.• Ending a call.• Using privacy mode.• Dialing a number.• Redialing.• Call waiting notification.• Caller ID.

427



Other features, such as text messagingusing Bluetooth and automatic phonebookdownload, are phone-dependent features.To check your phone's compatibility, seeyour phone's manual and visitwww.SYNCMyRide.com,www.SYNCMyRide.ca orwww.syncmaroute.ca.

Pairing a Phone for the First TimeWirelessly pairing your phone with SYNCallows you to make and receive hands-freecalls.Note: SYNC can support downloading upto approximately 4000 entries perBluetooth-enabled cellular phone.Note: Make sure to switch on the ignitionand the radio. Shift the transmission intopark (P) for automatic transmission or firstgear for manual transmission.

Using the Audio SystemNote: To scroll through the menus, pressthe up and down arrows on your audiosystem.1. Make sure to switch on your phone's

Bluetooth feature before starting thesearch. See your device's manual ifnecessary.

2. Press the PHONE button. When theaudio display indicates there is nopaired phone, select the option to add.

3. When a message to begin pairingappears in the audio display, search forSYNC on your phone to start the pairingprocess.

4. When prompted on your cell phone’sdisplay, confirm that the PIN providedby SYNC matches the PIN displayedon your cell phone. Your phone is nowpaired and the display indicates thatthe pairing was successful. If you areprompted to enter a PIN on your device,enter the PIN displayed on the screen.The display indicates when the pairingis successful.

Depending on your phone's capability andyour market, the system may prompt youwith questions, such as setting the currentphone as the primary phone (the phoneSYNC automatically tries to connect withfirst upon vehicle start-up) anddownloading your phonebook.

Using Voice Commands

E142599

Make sure to switch on yourphone's Bluetooth featurebefore starting the search. See

your device's manual if necessary.

Press the voice and when promptedsay:

Action and Descrip-tion

Voice Command

Follow the instruc-tions on the audiodisplay.

(pair ([Bluetooth]device | phone |Bluetooth audio) |add phone)

You can say any of the voice commandsthat appear within open and close bracketsthat are separated by |. For example,where; (what's | what is) appears you say;what's or what is.The commands that have [ ] around theword means that the word is optional.

428



Depending on your phone's capability andyour market, the system may prompt youwith questions, such as setting the currentphone as the primary phone (the phoneSYNC automatically tries to connect withfirst upon vehicle start-up) anddownloading your phonebook.

Pairing Subsequent PhonesNote: Make sure to switch on the ignitionand the radio. Shift the transmission intopark (P) for automatic transmission or firstgear for manual transmission.Note: To scroll through the menus, pressthe up and down arrows on your audiosystem.1. Make sure to switch on your phone's

Bluetooth feature before starting thesearch. See your device's manual ifnecessary.

2. Press the PHONE button.3. Select the option for Bluetooth

Devices.4. Press the OK button.5. Select the option to add. This starts

the pairing process.6. When a message to begin pairing

appears in the audio display, search forSYNC on your device.

7. When prompted on your cell phone’sdisplay, confirm that the PIN providedby SYNC matches the PIN displayedon your cell phone. Your phone is nowpaired and the display indicates thatthe pairing was successful. If you areprompted to enter a PIN on your device,enter the PIN displayed on the screen.The display indicates when the pairingis successful.

SYNC may prompt you with more cellphone options. Your cell phone may alsoprompt you to give SYNC permission toaccess information. For more informationon your cell phone’s capability, see yourcell phone’s manual and visit the website.

Phone Voice Commands

E142599

Press the voice button. Whenprompted, say any of thefollowing:

Voice Command

(phone | Blackberry | iPhone)

Then say any of the following:

call (___)

call ___ at home

call ___ ((in|at) [the] office | at work)

call ___ on (cell | mobile)

call ___ on other1dial [[a] number]

2([go to] privacy | transfer to phone| privacy on)

2(hold call [on] | place call on hold)

2join (calls | call)

2mute call [on]

2(mute call off | un-mute call)

(turn ringer on | silent mode off)

(turn ringer off | silent mode [on])

429



Voice Command

3[text] (messages | message)

help

___ is a dynamic listing that should be thename of a contact in your phonebook. Forexample you could say "Call Home".1 See Dial table below.2 These commands are only valid while ina phone call.3 See the text message table below.

Dial CommandsPress the voice button and when promptedsay any of the following commands:

Voice Commands

411 (four-one-one), 911 (nine-one-one)

700 (seven hundred)

800 (eight hundred)

900 (nine hundred)

Clear (deletes all entered digits)

Delete (deletes last set of digits entered)

Number <0-9>

Plus

Pound (#)

Star (*)

Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold thephone button or press any button on theaudio system.

To access text messages say:

Voice Command

[text] (messages | message)

Then say any of the following:

(listen to | read) ([text] message)

forward (text | [text] message)

reply to (text | [text] message)

call [sender]

Phonebook HintsTo hear how the SYNC system speaks aname browse phonebook, select a contactand press:

Menu Item

Hear it

Changing Devices Using VoiceCommandsUsing SYNC, you can easily access multiplephones, ipods, or USB devices. to switchdevices say:

430



Voice Command

You can state the name ofthe desired device, such as“My iPhone”,“My Galaxy”or“My iPod”. SYNC may

ask you to confirm the typeof device (Phone, USB, or

Bluetooth Audio).

(connect |device) ___

Making Calls

E142599

Press the voice button. Whenprompted, say:

Voice Command

call [[a] name]

SYNC prompts you to saythe numbers that you wishto dial. After you say thenumbers, the systemconfirms it. You can thensay:

dial [[a]number]

When the system has stated thenumber, you say any of the following:

Voice Command

This initiates the call.(dial | send)

This erases the spokendigits.

(delete |correct)

To end the call, press the end call button

on the steering wheel or select the end calloption in the audio display.

Receiving CallsAccepting callsWhen receiving a call, you can answer thecall by pressing the accept call button onthe steering wheel or use the screen.

To use the screen to accept a callselect:

Menu Item

Accept

Rejecting CallsWhen receiving a call, you can reject thecall by pressing the reject call button onthe steering wheel or use the screen.

To use the screen to reject a call select:

Menu Item

Reject

Ignore the call by doing nothing.

Phone Options during an ActiveCallDuring an active call, you have more menufeatures that become available, such asputting a call on hold or joining calls.To access this menu, choose one of theoptions available at the bottom of theaudio display or select More to choosefrom the following options:

431



Description and actionMenu Item

Switch your vehicle's microphone off. To switch themicrophone on, select the option again.

Mic. off

Switch a call from an active hands-free environment toyour cellular phone for a more private conversation. Whenselected, the audio display indicates the call is private.

Privacy

Put an active call on hold. When selected, the audio displayindicates the call is on hold.

Hold

Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad(for example, numbers for passwords).

Dial a number

Join two separate calls. The system supports a maximumof three callers on a multiparty or conference call.

Join calls

1. Select the More option.2. Access the desired contact through the system or usevoice commands to place the second call. Once activelyin the second call, select the More option.3. Scroll to the option to join calls and press the OK button.

Access your phonebook contacts.Phonebook1. Select the More option.2. Scroll to the option for phonebook and press the OKbutton.3. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.4. Press the OK button again when the desired contactappears in the audio display.5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.

Access your call history log.Call History1. Select the More option.2. Scroll to the option for call history and press the OKbutton.3. Scroll through your call history options (incoming,outgoing or missed).4. Press the OK button again when the desired selectionappears in the audio display.5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.

Accessing Features through thePhone MenuYou can access your call history,phonebook, sent text messages, as wellas access phone and system settings.

1. Press the PHONE button to enter thephone menu.

2. Select one of the options available.

432



Description and actionDisplay

Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad.Dial a number

Access your downloaded phonebook.Phonebook1. Press the OK button to confirm and enter. You can usethe options at the bottom of the screen to access analphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letterson the audio system's numeric keypad to jump in the list.2. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.3. Press the OK button again when the desired selectionappears in the audio display.4. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.

Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls.Call History1. Press the OK button to select.2. Scroll to select incoming, outgoing or missed calls. Pressthe OK button to make your selection.3. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.

Select 1 of 10 speed dial entries. To set a speed dial entry,go to the phonebook and then press and hold one of thenumbers on the audio system's numeric keypad.

Speed Dial

Send, download and delete text messages.Text messaging

Access the option for Bluetooth Device menu listings (add,connect, set as primary, on or off, delete).

BT Devices

View various settings and features on your phone.Phone settings

Text MessagingNote: This is a phone-dependent feature.SYNC allows you to receive, send,download and delete text messages. Thesystem can also read incoming textmessages to you so that you do not haveto take your eyes off the road.

Receiving a Text MessageNote: This is a phone-dependent feature.Your phone must support downloading textmessages using Bluetooth to receiveincoming text messages.

Note: This is a speed-dependent featureand is only available when your vehicle istraveling at 3.1 mph (5 km/h) or less.When a new message arrives, an audibletone sounds and the audio displayindicates you have a new message.

To hear the message you can say:

Description andaction

Voice command

Select this optionto have the systemread the messageto you.

(listen to | read)([text] message)

433



Using the screen you also have the following options:

Description and actionMenuItem

Select this option, or do nothing, and the message goes into your text messageinbox.

Ignore

Select the view option to open the text message. Once selected, you havethe ability to have the message read to you, to view other messages. Foradditional options select:

View

If you select this option, use the arrow button to scroll through thefollowing options:

More...

Press the OK button to access, and then scrollthrough a list of pre-defined messages to send.

Reply tosender

Press the OK button to call the sender of themessage.

Call sender

Press the OK button to forward the message toanyone in your phonebook or call history. You canalso choose to enter a number.

Forwardmsg.

Sending, Downloading and DeletingYour Text Messages1. Press the PHONE button.

2. Select the text messaging option, andthen press the OK button.

Choose from the following options:

Description and actionMenuItem

Allows you to send a new text message based on a pre-defined set of 15messages.

New

Allows you to read the full message and, in addition, provides the option tohave the system read the message to you. To go to the next message, selectthe More option. This allows you to reply to the sender, call the sender orforward the message.

View

Allows you to delete current text messages from the system (not your cellularphone). The audio display indicates when the system has deleted all yourtext messages.

Delete

Allows you to delete all messages or manually trigger a download of allunread messages from your cellular phone.

More...

434



Sending a Text MessageNote: You can only send a text message toone recipient at a time.1. Select the send option when the

desired selection highlights in the audiodisplay.

2. Select the confirmation option whenthe contact appears.

3. Press the OK button again to confirmwhen the system asks if you want tosend the message. A pre-definedsignature appears on each textmessage.

Note: You can send text messages eitherby choosing a contact from the phonebookand selecting the text option from the audiodisplay or by replying to a received messagein the inbox.

Accessing Your Phone SettingsThese are phone-dependent features. Yourphone settings allow you to access andadjust features such as your ring tone andtext message notification, modify yourphonebook, and set up automaticdownload.1. Press the PHONE button.2. Scroll until the phone settings option

appears, and then press the OK button.

Scroll to select from the following options:


If this option is checked, the system uses the cellular phoneas the master when there is more than one cellular phonepaired to the system. This option can be changed for allcellular phones (not only the active phone) using theBluetooth Devices menu.

Set as master

See the cellular phone name, provider name, cellularphone number, and signal level. When done, press the leftarrow buttons to return to the phone status menu.

Phone status

Select which ringtone sounds during an incoming call (oneof the system's tones or your cellular phone's). If yourphone supports in-band ringing, your phone's ringtonesounds when you choose the cellular phone ringtoneoption.

Set ringtone

1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to hear eachringtone.2. Press the OK button to select a ringtone.

Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify youwhen a text message arrives. Press the OK button toswitch the audible tone off or on.

Text msg notify

Modify the contents of your phonebook (such as add,delete or download). Press the OK button to select andscroll between the choices in the phonebook preferencestable below.

Phonebook pref.

435



Phonebook preferencesMenu Item

Push the desired contacts on your cellular phone. See yourdevice's manual on how to push contacts. Press the OKbutton to add more contacts from your phonebook.

Add contacts

When a message asking you to delete appears, select theoption to confirm. Press the OK button to delete thecurrent phonebook and call history. The system takes youback to the menu for phone settings.

Delete

Press the OK button to select and download your phone-book to the system.

Download now

When automatic download is on, the system deletes anychanges (additions or deletions) saved in the system sinceyour last download.

Auto-download

When automatic download is off, the system does notdownload your phonebook when your cellular phoneconnects to SYNC.

You can only access your phonebook, call history and textmessages when your paired cellular phone connects tothe system. Check or uncheck this option to downloadyour phonebook automatically each time your phoneconnects to the system. Download times are phone-dependent and quantity-dependent.

Enabling this feature allows you to select how yourcontacts are displayed. You can select:

Sorting Pref.

Last/First nameFirst/Last name

Bluetooth DevicesThe Bluetooth Devices menu allows youto add, connect and delete devices as wellas set a phone as primary.

1. Press the PHONE button.2. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears,

and then press the OK button.

Select from the following options:


Pair additional phones to the system.Add1. Select the option to add to start the pairing process.

436




2. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audiodisplay, search for SYNC on your phone. See your phone'smanual if necessary.3. When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirmthat the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayedon your cell phone. Skip the next step. If you are promptedto enter a PIN on your device, it does not support SecureSimple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN displayed on thescreen. The display indicates when the pairing issuccessful.4. When the option to set the phone as primary appears,select either yes or no.5. SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options.Your cell phone may also prompt you to give SYNCpermission to access information. For more informationon your cell phone’s capability, see your cell phone’smanual and visit the website.

Select the delete option and confirm when the systemasks to delete the selected device. After deleting a phonefrom the list, you have to repeat the pairing process to pairit again.

Delete

The system attempts to connect with the primary cellularphone each time you switch on the ignition. When youselect a cellular phone as primary, it appears first in thelist, marked with an asterisk. Set a previously paired phoneas master by selecting the master option and confirmingit as the primary.

Master

Connect a previously connected phone. You can only haveone phone connected at a time to use the phone's func-tionality. When you connect another phone, the previousphone disconnects from the telephone services. Thesystem allows you to use different Bluetooth devices forthe cellular phone functionality and the Bluetooth audiomusic playback feature at the same time.

Conn.

Disconnects the selected cellular phone. Select this optionand confirm when asked. After disconnecting a phone,you can reconnect it again without repeating the full pairingprocess.

Discon.

System Settings1. Press the MENU button.

2. Select the SYNC settings option, andthen press the OK button.

437



Scroll to select from the following options:

Description and actionDisplay

Check or uncheck this option to switch the system'sBluetooth interface off or on. Select this option, and thenpress the OK button to change the option's status.

Bluetooth on

Return to the factory default settings without erasing yourindexed information (such as phonebook, call history, textmessages and paired devices). Select this option andconfirm when prompted in the audio display.

Set defaults

Completely erase all information stored in the system(such as phonebook, call history, text messages and paireddevices) and return to factory default settings.

Master reset

Install downloaded applications or software updates.Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audiodisplay. There must be a valid SYNC application or updateavailable on the USB drive in order to finish an installationsuccessfully.

Install on SYNC

Display the system's version numbers as well as its serialnumber. Press the OK button to select.

System info

The voice settings submenu contains various options. SeeUsing Voice Recognition (page 425).

Voice settings

Browse the actual menu structure of the connected USBdevice. Press the OK button and use the up and downarrow buttons to scroll through the folders and files. Usethe left or right arrow buttons to enter or leave a folder.You can select media content for playback from this menu.

Browse USB

438



SYNC™ APPLICATIONS ANDSERVICES (If Equipped)

In order for the following features to work,your cellular phone must be compatiblewith SYNC. To check your phone'scompatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,www.SYNCMyRide.ca orwww.syncmaroute.ca.• 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of

an emergency.• SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect

to and use certain applications such asSpotify and Glympse (if your phone iscompatible).

These features may require activation.Available AppLink enabled apps vary bymarket.

911 AssistWARNINGS

Unless the 911 Assist setting is set onbefore a crash, the system will notdial for help which could delay

response time, potentially increasing therisk of serious injury or death after a crash.

Do not wait for 911 Assist to make anemergency call if you can do ityourself. Dial emergency services

immediately to avoid delayed responsetime which could increase the risk ofserious injury or death after a crash. If youdo not hear 911 Assist within five secondsof the crash, the system or phone may bedamaged or non-functional.

Always place your phone in a securelocation in your vehicle so it does notbecome a projectile or get damaged

in a crash. Failure to do so may causeserious injury to someone or damage thephone which could prevent 911 Assist fromworking properly.

Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must beset on before the incident.Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature onlyoperates in the U.S., Canada or in a territoryin which 911 is the emergency number.Note: Before setting this feature on, makesure that you read the 911 Assist PrivacyNotice later in this section for importantinformation.Note: If any user switches 911 Assist to onor off, that setting applies for all pairedphones. If 911 Assist is switched off, eithera voice message plays or a display messageor an icon comes on when your vehicle isstarted and after a previously paired phoneconnects.Note: Every phone operates differently.While SYNC 911 Assist works with mostcellular phones, some may have troubleusing this feature.If a crash deploys an airbag (excludingknee airbags and rear inflatable safetybelts [if equipped]) or activates the fuelpump shut-off, your SYNC-equippedvehicle may be able to contact emergencyservices by dialing 911 through a paired andconnected Bluetooth-enabled phone. Youcan learn more about the 911 Assistfeature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,www.SYNCMyRide.ca orwww.syncmaroute.ca.See Supplementary Restraints System(page 45). Important information aboutairbag deployment is in this chapter.See Roadside Emergencies (page 293).Important information about the fuel pumpshut-off is in this chapter.

439



Setting 911 Assist On or Off

Press Menu then select

Action and DescriptionMenuItem

SYNC-Applications

Select desired option, on oroff.

911 Assist

If you choose not to activate thisfeature you will have the followingoptions:


Provides a display and voicereminder at phone connectionat vehicle start.

VoiceReminderON

Provides a display reminderonly without a voice reminderat phone connection.

VoiceReminderOFF

To make sure that 911 Assist worksproperly:• SYNC must be powered and working

properly at the time of the incident andthroughout feature activation and use.

• The 911 Assist feature must be set onbefore the incident.

• You must pair and connect aBluetooth-enabled and compatiblecell phone to SYNC.

• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phonemust have the ability to make andmaintain an outgoing call at the timeof the incident.

• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phonemust have adequate network coverage,battery power and signal strength.

• The vehicle must have battery powerand be located in the U.S., Canada orin a territory in which 911 is theemergency number.

In the Event of a CrashNot all crashes deploy an airbag or activatethe fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911Assist). If a connected cell phone sustainsdamage or loses its connection to SYNCduring a crash, SYNC searches for and triesto connect to a previously paired cellphone; SYNC then attempts to call theemergency services.Before making the call:• SYNC provides a short window of time

(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.If you fail to cancel the call, SYNCattempts to dial 911.

• SYNC says the following, or a similarmessage: "SYNC will attempt to call911, to cancel the call, press Cancel onyour screen or press and hold thephone button on your steering wheel".

If you do not cancel the call, and SYNCmakes a successful call, a pre-recordedmessage plays for the 911 operator, andthen the occupant(s) in your vehicle is ableto talk with the operator. Be prepared toprovide your name, phone number andlocation immediately, because not all 911systems are capable of receiving thisinformation electronically.

911 Assist May Not Work If• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist

hardware sustains damage in a crash.• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC

system has no power.• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle

are the ones paired and connected tothe system.

440



911 Assist Privacy NoticeWhen you switch on 911 Assist, it maydisclose to emergency services that yourvehicle has been in a crash involving thedeployment of an airbag or activation ofthe fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions orupdates to 911 Assist may also be capableof electronically or verbally disclosing to911 operators your vehicle location or otherdetails about your vehicle or crash to assist911 operators to provide the mostappropriate emergency services. If you donot want to disclose this information, donot switch the feature on.

SYNC Mobile AppsThe system enables voice and steeringwheel control of SYNC AppLink enabledsmartphone apps. When an app is runningthrough AppLink, you can control mainfeatures of the app through voicecommands and steering wheel controls.Note: You must pair and connect yoursmartphone to SYNC to access AppLink.Note: iPhone users need to connect thephone to the USB port.Note: Android users need to connect thephone to SYNC using Bluetooth.Note: For information on available apps,supported smartphone devices andtroubleshooting tips please visit the Fordwebsite.Availability of SYNC AppLink enabled Appswill vary by region.

Note: Make sure you have an active accountfor the app that you have downloaded.Some apps work automatically with nosetup. Other apps want you to configureyour personal settings and personalize yourexperience by creating stations or favorites.We recommend you do this at home oroutside of your vehicle.Note: AppLink is not available if yourvehicle is equipped with the MyFordTouchsystem.

To Access Using the SYNC Menu

Press the MENU button to access themenu on-screen. Then select:


SYNC-Apps

Scroll through the list ofavailable applications andselect a particular app orselect:

MobileApps

Find New Apps

Note: If you cannot find a compatible SYNCAppLink app, make sure the required app isrunning on the mobile device.

Accessing an App's MenuWhen an app is running through SYNC,press the right arrow button on the steeringwheel control to access the app menu.You can access various app features fromhere, for example thumbs up and thumbsdown.Press the left arrow button on the steeringwheel control to exit the app menu.

441



To Access Using Voice Commands

Press the voice button then when prompted say:

Action and DescriptionMenu Item

Say the name of the application after the tone.The app should start. When an app is running through SYNC, youcan press the voice button and speak commands specific to the

app, for example "Play Playlist Road Trip".

mobile (apps |applications)

Use this command to discover the available voice commands.help

SYNC Mobile App Voice Commands

The following voice commands are always available:


SYNC prompts you to say the name of anapp to start it on SYNC.

mobile (apps | applications)

SYNC lists all of the currently availablemobile apps.

list [mobile] (apps | applications)

Searches your connected mobile device forSYNC-compatible mobile apps.

find [new] [mobile] (apps | applications)

help

You can say the name of a mobile app at any time to start the mobile app on SYNC.

App PermissionsApp permissions are organized by groups.You can grant these group permissionsindividually. You can change a permissiongroup status any time when not driving, byusing the settings menu.

When you launch an app using SYNC, thesystem may ask you to grant certainpermissions, for example:• To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle

information to the app such as, but notlimited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuelconsumption, engine speed, rainsensor, odometer, VIN, externaltemperature, gear position, tirepressure, and head lamp status.

• To allow your vehicle to provide drivingcharacteristic information such as, butnot limited to: MyKey, seat belt status,engine revolutions per minute, gearposition, braking events, steering wheelangle, and accelerator pedal position.

442



• To allow your vehicle to providelocation information, including: GPSand speed.

• To allow the app to send pushnotifications using the vehicle displayand voice capabilities while running ina background state. Push notificationsmay be particularly useful for news or

location based apps.Note: You only need to grant permissionsthe first time you use an app with SYNC.Note: Ford is not responsible or liable forany damages or loss of privacy relating tousage of an app, or dissemination of anyvehicle data that you approve Ford toprovide to an app.

Enabling and Disabling App Permissions Using the SYNC Menu

Press the MENU button to access the SYNC menu then select:


SYNC-Apps

Mobile Apps

You can also select a specific app.If the app supports push notifications, thissetting is listed. Select to enable or disable

the feature as required.

All Apps

Enabling SYNC Mobile AppsIn order to enable mobile apps, SYNCrequires user consent to send and receiveapp authorization information and updatesusing the data plan associated with theconnected device.Data is sent to Ford in the United Statesthrough the connected device. Theinformation is encrypted and includes yourVIN, SYNC module number, anonymoususage statistics and debugginginformation. Updates may take placeautomatically.

Note: You must enable mobile apps foreach connected device the first time youselect a mobile app using the system.Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford isnot responsible for any additional chargesyou may receive from your service provider,when your vehicle sends or receives datathrough the connected device. This includesany additional charges incurred due todriving in areas when roaming out of a homenetwork.

App StatusYou can view the current status of an appin the settings menu.

443



There are three possible statuses:


The system has detected a new apprequiring authorization or a general

permissions update is required.

Update Needed

No update is required.Up-To-Date

The system is trying to receive an update.Updating...

Update settings


Select this option from the settings menuto manually preform a needed update.

Request Update

Select this option from the settings menuto disable automatic updates.

Disable Updates

Doing so also disables the use of MobileApps on SYNC.

USING SYNC™ WITH YOURMEDIA PLAYERYou can access and play music from yourdigital music player over your vehicle'sspeaker system using the system's mediamenu or voice commands. You can alsosort and play your music by specificcategories, such as artist and album.Note: The system is capable of indexing upto 15,000 songs.SYNC is capable of hosting nearly anydigital media player including: iPod, Zune,plays from device players, and most USBdrives. SYNC also supports audio formats,such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC.

Confirm that the USB device has beenformatted correctly and has the followingspecifications:• USB 2.0.• File format must be FAT16/32.The format of the audio files on the USBdevice must be:• MP3.• Non DRM protected WMA.• WAV.• AAC.

Connecting Your Digital MediaPlayer to the USB PortNote: If your digital media player has apower switch, make sure you switch it onbefore plugging it in.

444



To Connect Using Voice CommandsPlug the device into one of the vehicle'sUSB ports.

Press the voice button and whenprompted, say:


Voice Command

You can now playmusic by saying anyof the appropriatevoice commands.See the mediavoice commands.

(USB [stick] | iPod| MP3 [player])

Words in brackets [ ] are optional and donot have to be spoken for the system tounderstand the command. For example,for where (USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3[player]) appears, you can say USB or USBstick.

To Connect Using the System Menu1. Plug the device into one of the vehicle's

USB ports.2. Press the MEDIA button and select

either USB 1 or USB 2 from the mediasource list in the audio display.

To view USB content select:

Description and ActionMessage

Depending on how many media files are on your connecteddevice, an indexing message may appear in the display. Whenindexing is complete, the selected source starts to playbackaudio automatically.

Browse USB

You can browse the files on the USBdevice in categories. Select BROWSEfrom the buttons at the bottom of theaudio display and choose from thefollowing:

Message

Play all

Playlists

Songs

Artists

Message

Albums

Genres

Browse USB

Reset USB

Media Voice Commands

E142599

Press the voice button and whenprompted say:

445



Description and ActionVoice Command

You can now play music by saying any of the appropriatevoice commands.

(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3[player])

You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets thatare separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's orwhat is.You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.For example, where; (what's | what is) playing, you must say either "what's playing" or"what is playing".

Description and ActionCommand

Pauses device playback.pause

Resumes device playback.play

play [album] ___

Play all media on the device from the firsttrack to the last.

play all

play [artist] ___

play [genre] ___

play [playlist] ___

Plays the next track on the current media.next [track | title | song | file | podcast |chapter | episode]

Plays the previous track on current media.previous [track | title | song | file |podcast | chapter | episode]

Creates a playlist with a similar genre to theone currently playing.

[play] (similar music | more like this)

play [song | track | title | file] ___

repeat off

Repeats the current track.repeat (one | track) [on]

446



Description and ActionCommand

Plays the current playlist in a random order.(Not all devices support this command.)

shuffle [all] [on]

shuffle off

At any time during playback, you can pressthe voice button and ask the system what isplaying. The system reads the metadata tags(if populated) of the current track.

((who's | who is) this | who plays this |(what's | what is) playing [now] | (what

| which) (song | track | artist) is this |(who's | who is) playing | (what's | what

is) this)

___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that itcould be the name of anything, such as agroup, artist or song. For example youcould say "Play artist The Beatles".

Examples of USB CommandsSYNC provides the user with many intuitiveways to find and play a song using voice.For example, if we have a song called"Penny Lane" from the album "MagicalMystery Tour" we can say the following toplay this song:• Play song "Penny Lane".• Play "Penny Lane".If we wanted to play the entire album, wecan say:

• Play album "Magical Mystery Tour".• Play "Magical Mystery Tour".

Bluetooth AudioThe system is also capable of playingmusic from your cellular phone throughBluetooth.To switch the Bluetooth Audio on, pressthe MEDIA button and select:

Menu Item

BT audio


Voice Command

pause

play

next [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode]

previous [track | title | song | file | podcast | chapter | episode]

Media Menu FeaturesThe media menu allows you to select howto play your music (such as by artist, genre,shuffle or repeat), find similar music orreset the index of your USB devices.

Press the MEDIA button and select eitherUSB 1 or USB 2 from the media source listin the audio display to start USB playback.

447




This will enter the media menu.Options



Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make yourchoice, it remains on until you switch it off.

Shuffle

Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make yourchoice, it remains on until you switch it off.

Repeat track

You can play similar types of music to the current playlistfrom the USB port. The system uses the metadata informa-tion of each track to compile a playlist. The system thencreates a new list of similar tracks and then begins playing.Each track must have the metadata tags populated for thisfeature. With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags

Similar music

are not populated, the tracks will not be available in voicerecognition, the play menu or this option. However, if youplace these tracks onto your playing device in mass storagedevice mode they are available in voice recognition, the playmenu or this option. The system places unknowns into anyunpopulated metadata tag.

Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is completeyou can choose what to play from the USB song library.

Reset USB

Accessing Your USB Song Library1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB

port.

2. Press the MEDIA button (next to theaudio display) to select USB playback.


This menu allows you to select and play your media files byartist, album, genre, playlist or track.

Browse USB

If there are no media files to access, thedisplay indicates there is no media.

448



If there are media files, you have the following options:

Description and ActionDisplay

Play all indexed media files from your device one at a timein numerical order.*

Play all

Press the OK button to select. The first track title appearsin the display.

Access your playlists (from formats like ASX, M3U, WPL,or MTP).*

Playlists

1. Press the OK button to select.2. Scroll to select the desired playlist, and then press theOK button.

Search for and play a specific indexed track.*Songs1. Press the OK button to select.2. Scroll to select the desired track, and then press the OKbutton.

Sort all indexed media files by artist. The system then listsand plays all artists and tracks alphabetically.*

Artists

1. Press the OK button to select.2. Scroll to select the desired artist, and then press the OKbutton.

Sort all indexed media files by album.*Albums1. Press the OK button to select.2. Scroll to select the desired album, and then press theOK button.

Sort all indexed media files by genre (category) type.*Genres1. Press the OK button to select.2. Scroll to select the desired genre, and then press theOK button.

Browse all supported media files on your media playerconnected to the USB port. You can only view media filesthat are compatible with SYNC. (Other files are notvisible.)

Browse USB

1. Press the OK button to select.

449



Description and ActionDisplay

2. Scroll to browse indexed media files on the device, andthen press the OK button.

Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete,you can choose what to play from the USB song library.

Reset USB

*You can use the buttons at the bottom of the audio display to jump to a certainalphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the audio system's numerickeypad to jump in the list.

Using Voice CommandsYou can access and view your USB songsusing voice commands.Plug the device into your vehicle's USBport.

Press the voice button and whenprompted, say any of the followingcommands:

Accessing and Viewing USB Media

(browse | search | show) all (album |albums)

(browse | search | show) all (artist |artists)

(browse | search | show) all (genre |genres)

(browse | search | show) all (playlist |playlists)

(browse | search | show) all (song | songs| title | titles | file | files | track | tracks)

(browse | search | show) album ___

(browse | search | show) artist ___

(browse | search | show) genre ___

(browse | search | show) playlist ___

USB 2 (If Equipped)

Your vehicle may come equipped with anadditional USB port. If so, USB 1 is locatedat the front of the vehicle at the bottom ofthe instrument panel. USB 2 is locatedinside the storage compartment of thevehicle's center console.You can plug in an additional USB deviceinto the second USB port.You can access both USB devices by usingvoice commands.

To access a USB device press the voicebutton and when prompted say:

Voice command

USB 1

USB 2

Note: SYNC only supports one connectediOS (Apple) devices at a time (whicheverone you plug in first). When you connect asecond iOS device, the systems charges it,but does not support playback from it.

Bluetooth Devices and SystemSettingsYou can access these menus using theaudio display. See Using SYNC™ WithYour Phone (page 427).

450



Voice Commands for AudioSourcesYour voice system allows you to changeaudio sources with a simple voicecommand.

E142599

Press the voice button and whenprompted say:

Voice Command

(music | audio | entertainment) [system]

Below are a few examples of voicecommands you can use.

[tune [to]] AM

[tune [to]] AM1

[tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST |autoset)

[tune [to]] AM 2

Bluetooth (audio | stereo)

(disc | CD [player]) play

[tune [to]] FM

[tune [to]] FM1

[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |autoset)

[tune [to]] FM 2

Radio*tune [to] SAT

*Sirius

(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player])

Voice Command

((who's | who is) this | who plays this |(what's | what is) playing [now] | (what| which) (song | track | artist) is this |(who's | who is) playing | (what's | whatis) this)

help* If equipped.

Radio Voice Commands

E142599

If you are listening to the radio,press the voice button, and thensay any of the commands in the

following table.

If you are not listening to the radio,press the voice button and, after thetone, say:

Voice Command

Radio

You can then say any of the followingcommands.

[tune [to]] AM

[tune [to]] AM1

[tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST |autoset)

[tune [to]] AM 2

[tune [to]] (AM ___ | ___ [AM])

[tune [to]] AM preset ___

[tune [to]] AM1 preset ___

[tune [to]] FM

[tune [to]] FM1

[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |autoset) preset ___

451



Voice Command

[tune [to]] FM 2

[tune [to]] (FM ___ | ___ [FM])

[tune [to]] FM preset ___*FM ___ HD ___

[tune [to]] FM 2 preset ___*HD ___

[tune [to]] preset ___

Tune

help* If equipped.

Sirius Satellite Radio Voice Commands(If equipped)

E142599

To listen to Sirius satellite radio,press the voice button and, afterthe tone, say:

Voice Commands

Sirius

When you are listening to Siriussatellite radio, you can press the voicebutton, and say any of the commandsin the following table.

Voice Commands

tune [to] SAT

[tune [to]] SAT 1

[tune [to]] SAT 2

[tune [to]] SAT 3

[tune [to]] preset ___

[tune [to]] SAT 1 preset ___

Voice Commands



tune [to] [Sirius]

Help

You can say thechannel number (0-233) to listen to that

Sirius station.

[tune [to]] Sirius[channel] ___

CD Voice Commands

E142599

If you are listening to a CD, pressthe voice button, and then sayany of the commands in the

following table.

If you are not listening to a CD, pressthe voice button and, after the tone,say:

Voice Command

(disc | CD [player]) play

You can then say any of the followingcommands.

pause

play

[play] next track

[play] previous track

[play | change to] track [number] ___

repeat (track | song) [on]

repeat folder [on]

repeat off

(shuffle | random | mix) [on | (tracks |songs) [on]]

452



Voice Command

(shuffle | random | mix) (CD [player] |disc) [on]

(shuffle | random | mix) folder [on]

shuffle off

SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTINGYour SYNC system is easy to use. However,should questions arise, see the tablesbelow.

Use the website at any time to check yourphone's compatibility, register youraccount and set preferences as well asaccess a customer representative via anonline chat (during certain hours). Visitwww.SYNCMyRide.com,www.SYNCMyRide.ca orwww.syncmaroute.ca for moreinformation.

Phone issues

Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue

Review your phone's manualabout audio adjustments.

The audio control settingson your phone may be

affecting SYNC perform-ance.

There is excessive back-ground noise during a phone

call.

Try turning off the device,resetting the device,

removing the device'sbattery, then trying again.

This may be a possiblephone malfunction.

During a call, I can hear theother person but they

cannot hear me.

Go to the website to reviewyour phone's compatibility.

This is a phone-dependentfeature.

SYNC is not able to down-load my phonebook.

Try turning off the device,resetting the device orremoving the device's

battery, then trying again.

Try pushing your phonebookcontacts to SYNC by usingthe Add Contacts feature.This may be a possible

phone malfunction. Use the SYNCmyphonefeature available on the

website.

Try pushing your phonebookcontacts to SYNC by usingthe Add Contacts feature.

This may be a limitation onyour phone's capability.

The system says PhonebookDownloaded but the

phonebook in SYNC isempty or missing contacts.

453



Phone issues


If the missing contacts arestored on your SIM card, trymoving them to the device

memory.

Remove any pictures orspecial ring tones associ-

ated with the missingcontact.

Depending upon your phone,you may have to grant SYNCpermission to access your

phonebook contacts. Makesure to confirm when

prompted by your phoneduring the phonebook

download.



I am having troubleconnecting my phone to

SYNC.

Try turning off the device,resetting the device orremoving the device's


Try deleting your devicefrom SYNC, deleting SYNCfrom your device and trying

again.

Check the security and autoaccept and prompt alwayssettings relative to the SYNC

Bluetooth connection onyour phone.


Update your device's firm-ware.

454



Phone issues


Turn off the Auto phone-book download setting.



Text messaging is notworking on SYNC. Try turning off the device,

resetting the device orremoving the device's



USB and media issues


Try turning off the device,resetting the device,

removing the device'sbattery, then trying again.

This may be a possibledevice malfunction.

I am having troubleconnecting my device.

Make sure you are using themanufacturer's cable.

Make sure you insert theUSB cable correctly into the

device and the USB port.

Make sure that the devicedoes not have an auto-

install program or activesecurity settings.

Make sure you are notleaving the device in yourvehicle during very hot or

cold temperatures.This is a device limitation.

SYNC does not recognizemy device when I turn on the

car.

Review the device compatib-ility chart on the SYNC

website to confirm yourphone supports the

Bluetooth audio streamingfunction.


Bluetooth audio does notstream.

455



USB and media issues


Make sure you correctlyconnect the device to SYNC,and that you have pressed

play on your device.The device is not connected.

Make sure that all songdetails are populated.

Your music files may notcontain the correct artist,song title, album or genre

information.SYNC does not recognize

music that is on my device. The file may be corrupted.

Some devices require you tochange the USB settings

from mass storage to MTPclass.

The song may have copy-right protection, which does

not allow it to play.

Voice command issues


Review the phone voicecommands and the media

voice commands at thebeginning of their respective

sections.

You may be using the wrongvoice commands.

SYNC does not understandwhat I am saying. After pressing the voice icon,

wait until after the tonesounds and Listening

appears before saying acommand. Any command

spoken before this does notregister with the system.

You may be speaking toosoon or at the wrong time.

Review the media voicecommands at the beginning

of the media section.You may be using the wrong

voice commands.SYNC does not understandthe name of a song or artist.

456





Say the song or artistexactly as listed. If you say

"Play Artist Prince", thesystem does not play musicby Prince and the Revolution

or Prince and the NewPower Generation.

You may be saying thename differently than the

way you saved it.Make sure you are saying the

complete title, such as"California remix featuring

Jennifer Nettles".

If the song titles are in allCAPS, you have to spell

them. LOLA requires you tosay "L-O-L-A".The system may not be

reading the name the sameway you are saying it. Do not use special charac-

ters in the title. The systemdoes not recognize them.

Review the Phone voicecommands at the beginning

of the phone section.

You may be using the wrongvoice commands.

SYNC does not understandor is calling the wrong

contact when I want tomake a call.

Make sure you are saying thecontacts exactly as they are

listed. For example, if yousave a contact as JoeWilson, say "Call Joe

Wilson".

Using the SYNC phonemenu, open the phonebook

and scroll to the nameSYNC is having trouble

understanding. SYNC willread the name to you, giving

you some idea of thepronunciation SYNC is

expecting.

You may be saying thename differently than the

way you saved it.

457





The system works better ifyou list full names, such as

"Joe Wilson" rather than"Joe".

The system may not bereading the name the same

way you are saying it.

Do not use special charac-ters, such as 123 or ICE, as

the system does not recog-nize them.

Contacts in your phonebookmay be very short and

similar, or they may containspecial characters.

If a contact is in CAPS, youhave to spell it. JAKE

requires you to say "Call J-A-K-E".

Your phonebook contactsmay be in CAPS.

AppLink issues


Ensure you have a compat-ible smartphone; an Androidwith OS 2.3 or higher or aniPhone 3GS or newer with

iOS 5.0 or higher. Addition-ally, ensure your phone isAn AppLink capable phone

is not connected to SYNC.

AppLink Mobile Applica-tions: When I select "Find

New Apps," SYNC does notfind any applications.

paired and connected toSYNC in order to find

AppLink-capable apps onyour device. iPhone users

must also connect toSYNC's USB port with an

Apple USB cable.

Ensure you have down-loaded and installed thelatest version of the app

from your phone's app store.Ensure the app is running on

your phone. Some apps

AppLink-enabled apps arenot installed and running on

your mobile device.My phone is connected, butI still cannot find any apps.

require you to register or

458



AppLink issues


login on the app on thephone before using themwith AppLink. Also, somemay have a "Ford SYNC"

setting, so check the app'ssettings menu on the phone.

Closing and restarting appsmay help SYNC find theapplication if you cannot

discover it inside the vehicle.On an Android device, if

apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit'

Sometime apps do notproperly close and re-opentheir connection to SYNC,

over ignition cycles, forexample.

My phone is connected, myapp(s) are running, but I still

cannot find any apps.

option, select that thenrestart the app. If the appdoes not have that option,

you can also manually"Force Close" the app by

going to the phone's settingsmenu, selecting 'Apps.' then

finding the particular appand choosing 'Force stop.'Don't forget to restart the

app afterwards, then select"Find New Apps" on SYNC.

On an iPhone with iOS7+, toforce close an app, doubletab the home button then

swipe up on the app to closeit. Tab the home button

again, then select the appagain to restart it. After a

few seconds, the app shouldthen appear in SYNC's

Mobile App's Menu.

Reset the Bluetooth on yourphone by turning it off and

then turning Bluetooth backon. If you are in your vehicle,

SYNC should be able toautomatically re-connect toyour phone if you press the

"Phone" button.

There is a Bluetooth bug onsome order versions of theAndroid operating systemthat may cause apps that

were found on your previousvehicle drive to not be foundagain if you have not turned

off Bluetooth.

My Android phone isconnected, my app(s) arerunning, I restarted them,but I still cannot find any

apps.

459



AppLink issues


Unplug the USB cable fromthe phone, wait a moment,

and plug the USB cableback in to the phone. After afew seconds, the app should

appear in SYNC's MobileApps Menu. If not, "Force

Close" the application andrestart it.

The USB connection toSYNC may need to be reset.

My iPhone phone isconnected, my app is

running, I restarted the appbut I still cannot find it on

SYNC.

Try increasing the Bluetoothvolume of the device by

using the device's volumecontrol buttons which aremost often found on the

side of the device.

The bluetooth volume onthe phone may be low.

I have an Android phone. Ifound and started my mediaapp on SYNC, but there is nosound or the sound is very

low.

Force close or uninstall theapps you do not want SYNCto find. If the app has a "FordSYNC" setting, disable thatsetting in the app's settings

menu on the phone.

Some Android devices havea limited number of

bluetooth ports apps canuse to connect. If you havemore AppLink apps on yourphone than the number ofavailable Bluetooth ports,you will not see all of your

apps listed in SYNC's mobileapps menu.

I can only see some of theAppLink apps running on my

phone listed in SYNC'sMobile Apps Menu.

SYNC System Reset

The SYNC system in your vehicle has System Reset feature that can be performed ifthe function of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality andwill not erase any information previously stored in the system (Such as paired devices,phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset,press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Powerbutton. Release both buttons after 2-3 seconds. Please allow a few minutes for thereset to complete. After a few minutes has passed you can resume using the SYNC

system.

460



GENERAL INFORMATION



Getting to Know Your SystemThe SYNC 3 system allows you to interactwith a variety of features using thetouchscreen and voice commands. Byintegrating with your Bluetooth-enabledphone, the touchscreen provides easyinteraction with audio, multimedia, climatecontrol, navigation, and your phone's SYNC3 compatible apps.

Using the TouchscreenTo operate the touchscreen, you cansimply touch the item or option that youwant to select. The button changes colorwhen you select it.The SYNC 3 layout allows you to quicklyselect the feature you wish to use.

E205444

461


SYNC™ 3 (If Equipped)

Action and DescriptionMenu ItemItem

This bar displays icons and messages pertaining to currentsystem activities including climate settings, voicecommands and phone functions such as text messages.

Status BarA

This button is available on the main screens. Pressing ittakes you to the home screen view.

HomeB

This shows the current time. You can set the clock manuallyor have it controlled by the vehicle's GPS location. SeeSettings (page 509).

ClockC

This displays the current outside temperature.OutsideTemperature

D

You can touch any of the buttons on this bar to select afeature.

Feature BarE

The touchscreen allows you quick accessto all of your comfort, navigation,communication and entertainmentoptions. Using the status and feature baryou can quickly select the feature you wantto use.Note: Your system is equipped with afeature that allows you to access andcontrol audio features for 10 minutes afteryou switch the ignition off (and no doorsopen).

The Status BarAdditional icons also display in the statusbar depending on market, vehicle optionsand current operation. If a feature is notactive, the icon does not display. Certainicons may move to the left or rightdepending on what options are active.

462



E223130

DescriptionItemCallout

This shows the temperature the driver selects throughthe climate control system.

Driver Temper-ature

A

When you activate the heated steering wheel optionon the touch screen, this icon displays. It only displayswhen there is not a physical button for the heatedsteering wheel.

Heated steeringwheel

B

(If equipped)

When the passenger's temperature has beenadjusted and is no longer linked to the driver'stemperature, it displays here. If Dual is turned off andthe temperatures are linked, the passenger'stemperature does not display.

PassengerTemperature

C

This icon displays when your phone's microphone ismuted. A caller cannot hear you.

Microphone MuteD

This icon displays when the audio system is muted.MuteE

463



DescriptionItemCallout

This icon appears when SYNC 3 receives a softwareupdate. Pressing the icon shows more details aboutthe new software.

DownloadF

This icon appears if a Wi-Fi network is connected.Wi-FiG

An available Wi-Fi network is within range.Wi-Fi in RangeH

This icon displays when your cell phone is roaming.RoamingI

This icon displays when you receive a text messageon your phone.

Text MessageJ

This icon displays when 911 Assist is set to off andyour phone is connected to SYNC.

911 Assist OffK

The Bluetooth alert icon displays when there is anactive Bluetooth alert.

Bluetooth AlertL

This icon displays to show an active Bluetoothconnection.

BluetoothM

Messages may also appear in the statusbar to provide you with notifications. Youcan select the message to view theassociated feature.

Feature Bar

FunctionsFeature Bar Item

Allows you to control the media playing inyour vehicle. You can control all audiofeatures including AM, FM and satelliteradio, CDs, and media streaming over aBluetooth device or through a USBconnection.

Audio

Allows you to adjust the temperature, fanspeed and airflow within the vehicle.

Climate

Allows you to make calls, receive calls, andaccess the phonebook of your connecteddevice.

Phone

464



FunctionsFeature Bar Item

Allows you to see your vehicle's location ona virtual road map, get driving directions toyour destination and find points of interestalong your route.

Navigation

(If equipped)

Connect and control SYNC 3 compatibleapps running on your iphone or androiddevice. Also, access built-in additionalfeatures such as SiriusXM Traffic and TravelLink (if equipped).

Apps

You can customize your system withvarious settings for the touchscreen display,feature preferences, and how you want tointeract with your vehicle.

Settings

Cleaning the TouchscreenYou can remove fingerprints with a dry,clean, soft cloth.If dirt or fingerprints are still on the screen,apply a small amount of alcohol to thecloth and try to clean it again.Note: Do not use detergent or any type ofsolvent to clean the touchscreen.Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto thetouchscreen.

Using Voice RecognitionUsing voice commands allows you to keepyour hands on the wheel and focus onwhat is in front of you. The system providesfeedback through audible tones, prompts,questions and spoken confirmationsdepending on the situation and the chosenlevel of interaction (voice settings).The system also asks short questions(confirmation prompts) when it is not sureof your request or when there are multiplepossible responses to your request.

When using voice commands, words andicons may appear in the status barindicating the status of the voice commandsession. See Using Voice Recognition(page 473).

Using the Steering Wheel ControlsDepending on your vehicle and optionpackage, you can use different controls onyour steering wheel to interact with thetouchscreen system in different ways.VOL: Control the volume of audio output.Mute: Mute the audio output.Voice: Press to start a voice session. Pressagain to stop the voice prompt andimmediately begin speaking. Press andhold to end a voice session.SEEK NEXT:• While in radio mode, press to seek

between memory presets.• While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD

mode, press to seek between songs orpress and hold to fast seek.

465



SEEK PREVIOUS:• While in radio mode, press to seek

between memory presets.• While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD

mode, press to seek between songs orpress and hold to fast seek.

PHONE ACCEPT: Press to answer a callor switch between calls.PHONE REJECT: Press to end a call orreject an incoming call.Note: On some models, SEEK NEXT maybe combined with PHONE REJECT andSEEK PREVIOUS may be combined withPHONE ACCEPT.M:Touch the control repeatedly to switchbetween media sources (modes).See Steering Wheel (page 80).

Using Your Bezel ControlsDepending on your vehicle and optionpackage, you may also have these controlson your instrument panel:• Power: Switch the audio system on

and off.• VOL: Control the volume of playing

audio.• Seek and Tune: Use as you normally

would in audio modes.• Eject: Eject a CD from the audio

system.• SOURCE or MEDIA: Press repeatedly

to advance through available mediamodes.

• SOUND: Press to access the Soundmenu where you can adjust sound andother audio settings.

• 1-6: Press and hold to store or press toselect an AM, FM or SIRIUS memorypreset. See Audio System (page 405).

• DISP: Switch the display on or off. Youcan also touch the screen to switch thedisplay back on.

• Temperature, fan and climatecontrol buttons: Control thetemperature, fan speed or settings ofthe climate control system. SeeClimate Control (page 141).

911 AssistWARNINGS

Unless the 911 Assist setting is set onbefore a crash, the system will notdial for help which could delay

response time, potentially increasing therisk of serious injury or death after a crash.setting is set on before a crash, the systemwill not dial for help which could delayresponse time, potentially increasing therisk of serious injury or death after a crash.

Do not wait for 911 Assist to make anemergency call if you can do ityourself. Dial emergency services

immediately to avoid delayed responsetime which could increase the risk ofserious injury or death after a crash. If youdo not hear 911 Assist within five secondsof the crash, the system or phone may bedamaged or non-functional.

Always place your phone in a securelocation in your vehicle so it does notbecome a projectile or get damaged

in a crash. Failure to do so may causeserious injury to someone or damage thephone which could prevent 911 Assist fromworking properly.

Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must beset on before the incident.Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature onlyoperates in the U.S., Canada or in a territoryin which 911 is the emergency number.

466



Note: Before setting this feature on, makesure that you read the 911 Assist PrivacyNotice later in this section for importantinformation.Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off,that setting applies for all paired phones. If911 Assist is switched off and the phone isconnected to SYNC, an icon displays on thestatus bar.Note: Every phone operates differently.While SYNC 911 Assist works with mostcellular phones, some may have troubleusing this feature.If a crash deploys an airbag (excludingknee airbags and rear inflatable safetybelts [if equipped]) or activates the fuelpump shut-off, your SYNC-equippedvehicle may be able to contact emergencyservices by dialing 911 through a paired andconnected Bluetooth-enabled phone. Youcan learn more about the 911 Assistfeature, by visiting:

Website

www.owner.ford.comwww.syncmyride.cawww.syncmaroute.ca

See Supplementary Restraints System(page 45). Important information aboutairbag deployment is in this chapter.See Roadside Emergencies (page 293).Important information about the fuel pumpshut-off is in this chapter.To switch 911 Assist on and off please viewthe settings information. See Settings(page 509).

To make sure that 911 Assist workscorrectly:• SYNC must be powered and working

properly at the time of the incident andthroughout feature activation and use.

• The 911 Assist feature must be set onbefore the incident.

• You must pair and connect aBluetooth-enabled and compatiblecell phone to SYNC.

• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phonemust have the ability to make andmaintain an outgoing call at the timeof the incident.

• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phonemust have adequate network coverage,battery power and signal strength.

• The vehicle must have battery powerand be located in the U.S., Canada orin a territory in which 911 is theemergency number.

In the Event of a CrashNot all crashes will deploy an airbag oractivate the fuel pump shut-off (thetriggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cellphone sustains damage or loses itsconnection to SYNC during a crash, SYNCwill search for and try to connect to apreviously paired cell phone; SYNC willthen attempt to call the emergencyservices.Before making the call:• SYNC provides a short window of time

(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.If you fail to cancel the call, SYNCattempts to dial 911.

• SYNC says the following, or a similarmessage: "SYNC will attempt to call911, to cancel the call, press Cancel onyour screen or press and hold thephone button on your steering wheel."

467



If you do not cancel the call, and SYNCmakes a successful call, a pre-recordedmessage plays for the 911 operator, andthen the occupant(s) in your vehicle is ableto talk with the operator. Be prepared toprovide your name, phone number andlocation immediately, because not all 911systems are capable of receiving thisinformation electronically.

911 Assist May Not Work If• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist

hardware sustains damage in a crash.• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC

system has no power.• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle

are the ones paired and connected tothe system.

911 Assist Privacy NoticeWhen you switch on 911 Assist, it maydisclose to emergency services that yourvehicle has been in a crash involving thedeployment of an airbag or activation ofthe fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions orupdates to 911 Assist may also be capableof electronically or verbally disclosing to911 operators your vehicle location or otherdetails about your vehicle or crash to assist911 operators to provide the mostappropriate emergency services. If you donot want to disclose this information, donot switch the feature on.

Safety InformationWARNING

Driving while distracted can result inloss of vehicle control, crash andinjury. We strongly recommend that


• Do not attempt to service or repair thesystem. Have an authorized dealercheck your vehicle.

• Do not operate playing devices if thepower cords or cables are broken, splitor damaged. Place cords and cablesout of the way, so they do not interferewith the operation of pedals, seats,compartments or safe driving abilities.

• Do not leave playing devices in yourvehicle during extreme conditions as itcould cause them damage. See yourdevice's user guide for furtherinformation.

• For your safety, some SYNC 3 functionsare speed-dependent. Their use islimited to when your vehicle is travelingat speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h). Makesure that you review your device'smanual before using it with SYNC 3.

Speed-restricted FeaturesSome features of this system may be toodifficult to use while your vehicle is movingso they are restricted from use unless yourvehicle is stationary.

468



• Screens crowded with information,such as Point of Interest reviews andratings, SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Linksports scores, movie times or skiconditions.

• Any action that requires you to use akeyboard is restricted, such as enteringa navigation destination or editinginformation.

• All lists are limited so the user can viewfewer entries (such as phone contactsor recent phone call entries).

See the following chart for more specificexamples.

Restricted features

Pairing a Bluetooth phone.Cellular Phone

Browsing of list entries is limited for phone contacts andrecent phone calls.

Editing the keypad code.System Functionality

Enabling Valet Mode.

Editing settings while the rear view camera or active parkassist are active.

Editing Wi-Fi settings.Wi-Fi

Editing the list of wireless networks.

Connecting to a new Wi-Fi network.

Viewing received text messages.Text Messages

Using the keyboard to enter a destination.Navigation

Adding or editing Navigation Favorites entries or AvoidAreas.

Creating a SYNC Owner AccountWhy do I need a SYNC owner account?• Essential for keeping up with the latest

software and connected features.• Access to customer support for any

questions you may have.• Maintain account permissions.Visit the website to sign up and register.

Website

www.owner.ford.comwww.syncmyride.ca

469



Website

www.syncmaroute.ca

SYNC Connect (If Equipped)

With a SYNC® Connect-equipped vehicle,you can use FordPass® to track yourvehicle’s location and remotely accessvehicle features such as start, lock andunlock and vehicle status including fuellevel and approximate mileage. You canalso schedule specific times to remotelystart your vehicle so it’s ready to hit theroad as soon as you are. SYNC Connect isan optional feature on select 2017 MYvehicles. FordPass® is available througha free download via the Apple App Store®or Google Play™. Message and data ratesmay apply. Services may be limited bymobile phone network coverage area.• FCC: LHJ-FAN• IC: 2807E-FAN

Updating Your SystemYou can choose to download the updateonto a USB drive or use Wi-Fi to deliverautomatic updates.

USB UpdatesTo use the USB update you need to loginto your owner account and visit the SYNCsoftware update page.

Website

www.owner.ford.comwww.syncmyride.cawww.syncmaroute.ca

The website notifies you if an update isavailable. You can then select to downloadthe update.

You will need an empty USB drive. Pleasecheck the website for minimumrequirements. Once you have inserted theUSB drive into your computer, choose tostart the download. Follow the instructionsprovided to download the files to the USBdrive.The installation of most files occurs in thebackground, and does not interrupt youruse of the system. Navigation updatescannot be installed in the background,because the files are too large.To install the update in your vehicle,remove anything that is plugged in the USBports on the media hub and plug in theUSB drive containing the update. Whenthe USB drive is plugged in, the installationshould begin immediately. After asuccessful installation, the update isavailable the next time the vehicle isstarted.Please refer to the website for any furtheractions.

Updating Over Wi-FiTo update your System over Wi-Fi yourvehicle must be within the range of a Wi-Fiaccess point. Data rates may apply.

To connect your system to Wi-Fi,select:

Menu Item

Settings

Wi-Fi

You can then select yourWi-Fi network. You mayhave to enter the securitycode if the network issecured. The systemconfirms when it hasconnected to the network.

AvailableWi-FiNetworks

470



You must also give the system permissionto update automatically. Upon vehicledelivery, the System asks you if you wouldlike to use the automatic update feature.If you agree to automatic updates, you canpress OK to confirm. If this selection doesnot appear upon vehicle delivery you canaccess it through the General Settings. SeeSettings (page 509). You can also performa master reset. See SYNC™ 3Troubleshooting (page 521).

If you would like to switch this featureon later, select:

Menu Item

Settings

General

From this menu, you canenable automatic updates.If you have not done soalready, the systemprompts you to set up aWi-Fi connection when youenable this feature.

AutomaticSystemUpdates

When Wi-Fi and automatic updates areenabled, your system checks for softwareupdates periodically. If a new version isavailable, it downloads at that time.Software downloads can take place for upto 30 minutes after you have switched yourvehicle off. The updates do not interruptthe normal use of your SYNC 3 system. Ifa download does not complete for anyreason, the download continues where itleft off at the next Wi-Fi connectedopportunity. Upon activation of an update,a banner displays on the touchscreenindicating the system update. Select theicon to see more detail. This icon displaysfor two ignition cycles.

To switch this feature off:

Menu Item

Settings

General

In this menu selection, youcan change the selectionfor automatic updates toOFF.

AutomaticSystemUpdates

SupportThe SYNC support team is available tohelp you with any questions you are notable to answer on your own.Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST.For Ford:United States: 1-800-392-3673.Canada: 1-800-565-3673.Times are subject to change due toholidays.

Privacy InformationWhen you connect a cellular phone toSYNC 3, the system creates a profile withinyour vehicle that links to that cellularphone. This profile helps in offering youmore cellular features and operating moreefficiently. Among other things, this profilemay contain data about your cellularphone book, text messages (read andunread), and call history, including historyof calls when your cell phone was notconnected to the system. In addition, if youconnect a media device, the systemcreates and retains an index of supportedmedia content. The system also records ashort diagnostic log of approximately 10minutes of all recent system activity. Thelog profile and other system data may beused to improve the system and helpdiagnose any problems that may occur.

471



The cellular profile, media device index,and diagnostic log remain in your vehicleunless you delete them and are generallyaccessible only in your vehicle when thecellular phone or media player isconnected.If you no longer plan to use the system oryour vehicle, we recommend you performa Master Reset to erase all storedinformation. You can find more informationabout the Master Reset in GeneralSettings. See Settings (page 509). System

data cannot be accessed without specialequipment and access to your vehicle'sSYNC 3 module. Ford Motor Company andFord of Canada do not access the systemdata for any purpose other than asdescribed absent consent, a court order,or where required by law enforcement,other government authorities, or other thirdparties acting with lawful authority. Otherparties may seek to access the informationindependently of Ford Motor Company andFord of Canada.

HOME SCREEN

E205446

Home screen displayTileItem

Shows the active media source.AudioA

472



Home screen displayTileItem

If your vehicle does not have navigation, this spacecontains the compass.

The name of the connected phone appears on thescreen. The status of the phone features alsoappear. This includes signal strength, battery charge,911 assist setting state (On or Off), text messagingand roaming.

PhoneB

This map displays your current location or currentroute in real time.

Navigation *C

When you have navigation active, you also see thenext turn and the length of time and distance toyour destination.If your vehicle does not have navigation, this spacecontains the audio information.

* If equipped.

You can touch any of the feature displaysto access that feature.Anytime you select the home button, thesystem returns you to this screen.

USING VOICE RECOGNITIONThe SYNC 3 system allows you to use voicecommands, to control features like audioand climate controls. By using voicecommands, you can keep your hands onthe wheel and your eyes on the road.

You can access each feature controlled bySYNC 3 through a variety of commands.

E142599

To activate the SYNC 3 voicecommands push the voicebutton on the steering wheel and

wait for the prompt.

___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it canbe the name of anything, such as artist, thename of contact or number. The contextand the description of the command tellyou what to say for this dynamic option.There are some commands that work forevery feature, these commands are:


Brings you to the main menu.Main Menu

Returns you to the previous screen.Go back

Ends the voice session.Cancel

Gives you a list of possible voice commands.List of Commands

You can name any feature and the system gives a list ofcommands available for the feature. For example, you couldsay:

___ List of Commands

473




Phone List of Commands

Navigation List of Commands

You can use this command to view the next page of options onany screen where multiple pages of choices are given.

Next Page

You can use this command to view the previous page of optionson any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.

Previous Page

Gives you available commands you can use on the currentscreen.

Help

Included here are some of the mostpopular commands for each SYNC 3feature.

Audio Voice Commands___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that foraudio voice commands it can be the nameof a Sirius channel or a channel number, aradio frequency number, or the name of anartist, album, song or a genre.

To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say:

DescriptionVoice command

You can say the Sirius channel name or numbersuch as "Sirius channel 16".

1Sirius Channel ___

You can also turn to a Sirius channel by saying the channel's name, such as "The Pulse".

Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AMfrequency such as "88.7 FM" or "1580 AM".

AM ___

FM ___

Allows you to tune to a specific HD frequencysuch as “88.7 FM HD 1”.

1FM ___ HD ___

Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetooth-connected device.

Bluetooth Audio

Allows you to listen to music on your USBconnected device.

USB

For USB audio only, you can say the name of anartist, album, song or a genre to listen to thatselection. Your system must finish indexingbefore this option is available. For example, youcould say "Play artist, The Beatles" or "Play song,Penny Lane".

Play Genre ___

Play Playlist ___

Play Artist ___

Play Album ___

474




Play Podcast ___

Play Song ___

Play Audiobook ___

For USB audio only, you can say the name of anartist, album, or a genre to browse by that selec-tion. Your system must finish indexing before thisoption is available. For example you can say"Browse The Beatles" or "Browse folk".

Browse ___

1 This option may not be available in all markets or may require a subscription.

Climate Voice CommandsYou can control the temperature of thevehicle using voice commands.

___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that forclimate voice commands it can be thedesired degrees for the temperaturesetting.

To adjust the temperature, say:


Adjust the temperature between 59°F (15°C)-86°F(30°C).

Climate Set Temperature ___

Climate Help

Phone Voice CommandsPairing a PhoneYou can use voice commands to connectyour Bluetooth-enabled phone to thesystem.

To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say:


Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairingprocess. See Settings (page 509).

Pair Phone

475



Making Calls___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for

phone voice commands it can be the nameof the contact you wish to call or the digitsyou want to dial.

Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following:


Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebooksuch as "Call Jenny".

Call ___

Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebookat a specific location such as "Call Jenny at Home".

Call ___ at ___

Allows you to dial a specific number such as “Dial 867-5309”.Dial ___

Please make sure that you are saying thecontact name exactly as it appears in yourcontact list.

Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the followingcommands:

DescriptionVoice Command

If the full number was not entered with the first command, youcan continue saying the number.

<0-9>

Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call.Dial

Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits stated.Delete

Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number.Clear

Text Message Voice Commands

To access text message options, press the voice button and say:


Listen to Message

You can say the number of the message youwould like to hear.

Listen to text message ___

Reply to Message

476



Navigation Voice Commands (If

Equipped)

Setting a DestinationYou can use any of the following

commands to set a destination or find apoint of interest.___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that fornavigation voice commands it can be a POIcategory or an address.

You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interestby category:


Allows you to enter the address search functionality.Find an Address

State the name of the POI category you would like to search forsuch as "Find restaurants".

Find a ___

Allows you to enter the POI search functionality.Find POI

Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality.Find Intersection

State the name of the POI category you would like to search fornearby such as "Destination nearest restaurants".

Destination Nearest___

Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations.Destination PreviousDestination

Allows you to route to your home address.Destination Home

In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active:


Cancels the current route.Cancel Route

Allows you to select an alternate route.Detour

Repeats the last guidance prompt.Repeat Instruction

Displays the active route.Show Route

Provides current location.Where Am I

Allows you to zoom in on the map.Zoom in

Allows you to zoom out from the map.Zoom out

477



Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped)

The following voice commands are always available:


SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it onSYNC 3.

Mobile Apps

SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps.List Mobile Apps

SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running onyour mobile device.

Find New Apps

There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected toSYNC 3:


At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start themobile app on SYNC 3.

Say the name of anapp

SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specifiedapp if the app is running on SYNC 3.

Say the name of anapp, followed byhelp

SiriusXM Traffic and Travel LinkVoice Commands (If Equipped)

SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may notbe available in all markets. Activation anda subscription are required.

You can say the following commands to access SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link:


Displays a list of traffic incidents.Show Traffic

Displays the current weather map.Show Weather Map

Displays a list of fuel prices.Show Fuel Prices

Displays the 5 day weather forecast.Show 5 Day Fore-cast

Help

478



Voice Settings CommandsYou can say the following commands to access the voice settings:


Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality.Voice Settings

Sets standard prompting with longer prompts.Interaction ModeStandard

Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts.Interaction ModeAdvanced

Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call.Phone Confirmation On

The system does not confirm before placing a call.Phone Confirmation Off

The system displays a short list of available commands.Voice Command Lists On

The system does not display the list of commands.Voice Command Lists Off

You can use the volume control to adjustthe volume of the system voice prompts.While prompt is active, adjust the volumecontrol up or down to your desired setting.Note: Depending on the current climatecontrol settings, the fan speed mayautomatically go down while issuing voicecommands or while making and receivingphone calls via SYNC to reduce the amountof background noise in the vehicle. The fanspeed will automatically return to normaloperation once the voice session ends. Fanspeed can also be adjusted normally duringa voice session, simply press fan buttons (orturn fan knob) to increase or decrease fanspeed to desired setting.

To disable this automatic fan speedreduction feature during voice sessions,press and hold the climate control AC andRecirculated air buttons simultaneously,release and then increase fan speed within2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeatthe above sequence.

479



ENTERTAINMENT

E205443

Message and descriptionMessage

SourcesA

Direct TuneB

PresetsC

You can access these options using thetouchscreen or voice commands.

SourcesPress this button to select the source ofmedia you want to listen to.

480



Menu item

AM

FM1SIRIUS

1CD

The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here.USB

Bluetooth Stereo

If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, theydisplay here as individual source selections.

Apps

1 This feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription.

AM/FM RadioTuning a StationYou can use the tune or seek controls onthe radio bezel to select a station.

To tune a station using thetouchscreen, select:

Menu item

Direct Tune

A pop up appears, allowing you to type inthe frequency of a station. You can onlyenter a valid station for the source you arecurrently listening to.You can press the backspace button todelete the previously entered number.

Once you have entered the station'scall numbers, you can select:

Action and descrip-tion

Menu item

Press to beginplaying the stationyou have entered.

Enter

Press to exitwithout changingthe station.

Cancel

PresetsTo set a new preset, tune to the stationand then press and hold one of thememory preset buttons. The audio mutesbriefly while the system saves the stationand then returns.There are two preset banks available forAM and three banks for FM. To accessadditional presets, tap the preset button.The indicator on the preset button showswhich bank of presets you are currentlyviewing.

481



SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (IfActivated)Note: This feature may not be available inall markets and requires an activesubscription.

E234451

SIRIUS satellite radio is asubscription-based satellite radio servicethat broadcasts a variety of music, sports,news, weather, traffic and entertainmentprogramming. Your factory-installedSIRIUS satellite radio system includeshardware and a limited subscription termthat begins on the date of sale or lease ofyour vehicle. See an authorized dealer foravailability.

For more information on extendedsubscription terms (a service fee isrequired), the online media player and alist of SIRIUS satellite radio channels, andother features, please visitwww.siriusxm.com in the United States,www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUSat 1-888-539-7474.Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted rightto change, rearrange, add or deleteprogramming. This includes canceling,moving or adding particular channels, andits prices, at any time, with or without noticeto you. Ford Motor Company shall not beresponsible for any such programmingchanges.Note: This receiver includes the eCosreal-time operating system. eCos ispublished under the eCos License.

The following buttons are available for Sirius:

Action and descriptionMenu item

Touch this button to see a list of available stations.Browse

A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers ofa station.

Direct Tune

Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select:

The system tunes to the station you select.Enter

You exit the pop-up and the current stationcontinues to play.

Cancel

You can press the backspace button to delete the previousnumber.

482



Action and descriptionMenu item

Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approx-imately 45 minutes of audio as long as you remain tuned tothe current station. Changing stations erases the previousaudio.

Replay

When you are in replay mode, you are notable to select a different preset until youreturn to live audio. Pressing this buttonreturns you to the live broadcast.

Live

Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The systemalerts you when it plays again on any channel.

ALERT

Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts. SeeSettings (page 509).

Memory PresetsTo set a preset, tune to the station thenpress and hold one of the memory presetbuttons. The audio mutes briefly while thesystem saves the station and returns oncethe station is stored.

There are three preset banks available forSIRIUS. To access additional presets, tapthe preset button. The indicator on thepreset button shows which bank of presetsyou are currently viewing.

Satellite Radio Electronic SerialNumber (ESN)You need your ESN to activate, modify ortrack your satellite radio account. SeeSettings (page 509).

SIRIUS Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting


For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clearof snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and othermaterials as far away from the antenna as possible.

Antenna obstructions

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freewayoverpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunder-storms can interfere with your reception.

Terrain

When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower,a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audiosystem may mute.

Station overload

Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interfer-ence and the audio system may mute.

Satellite radio signalinterference

483



Troubleshooting tips

ActionCauseMessage

No action required. Thismessage should disappearshortly.

Radio requires more than twoseconds to produce audio forthe selected channel.

Acquiring Signal

If this message does not clearshortly, or with an ignition keycycle, your receiver may havea fault. See an authorizeddealer for service.

There is an internal module orsystem failure present.

Satellite antenna fault

SIRIUS system failure

Tune to another channel orchoose another preset.

The channel is no longer avail-able.

Invalid Channel

Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474 to subscribe to thechannel, or tune to anotherchannel.

Your subscription does notinclude this channel.

Unsubscribed Channel

The signal is blocked. Whenyou move into an open area,the signal should return.

The signal is lost from theSIRIUS satellite or SIRIUStower to your vehicle antenna.

Satellite acquiringsignal…

No action required. Theprocess may take up to threeminutes.

Update of channel program-ming in progress.

Updating…

Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474 to resolve subscriptionissues.

Your satellite service is nolonger available.

Questions? Call 1-888-539-7474

Use the channel guide to turnoff the Lock or Skip function onthat station.

All the channels in the selectedcategory are either skipped orlocked.

None found. Checkchannel guide.

No action required.SIRIUS has updated the chan-nels available for your vehicle.

SIRIUS Subscriptionupdated

HD Radio™ Information (IfAvailable)Note: This feature may not be available inall markets.

To activate HD radio, please see the RadioSettings in the Settings Chapter. SeeSettings (page 509).Note: HD Radio broadcasts are notavailable in all markets.

484



HD Radio technology is the digitalevolution of analog AM/FM radio. Yoursystem has a special receiver that allowsit to receive digital broadcasts (whereavailable) in addition to the analogbroadcasts, it already receives. Digitalbroadcasts provide a better sound qualitythan analog broadcasts with free,crystal-clear audio and no static ordistortion. For more information, and aguide to available stations andprogramming, please visit:

Website

www.hdradio.com

When HD Radio is on and you tune to astation broadcasting HD Radio technology,you may notice the following indicators onyour screen:

E142616

The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digitalstation, and then changes to orange whendigital audio is playing. When this logo isavailable, you may also see Title and Artistfields on-screen.The multicast indicator appears in FMmode (only) if the current station isbroadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.The highlighted numbers signify availabledigital channels where new or differentcontent is available. HD1 signifies the mainprogramming status and is available inanalog and digital broadcasts. Othermulticast stations (HD2 through HD7) areonly available digitally.Note: There is also an additional featurefor stations that have more than 1 HDmulticast (For example, HD1 or HD2). TheHD logo and Radio text appears as a button.Pressing this button allows you cyclethrough all of the HD stations on thatspecific frequency. For example, if you areon 101.1 and it has HD1, HD2, HD3, pressingthe button repeatedly causes the radio tocycle through the HD stations in a cyclicincreasing order.

When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:

Action and descriptionMessage

Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset.Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns.There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Soundreturns when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digitalaudio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digitalsignal.

Presets

Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle isoutside the station’s reception area.

485



HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting


If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on thefringe of the reception area, the station may mute due toweak signal strength.

Reception area

If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to theanalog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again.However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unlessit is able to connect to the digital signal again.

When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analogversion. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radiostation, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the stationquality, you may hear a slight sound change when the stationchanges from analog to digital. Blending is the shift fromanalog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.

Station blending

In order to provide the best possibleexperience, use the contact form to reportany station issues found while listening toa station broadcasting with HD Radiotechnology. Independent entities own andoperate each station. These stations areresponsible for ensuring all audio streamsand data fields are accurate.


ActionCauseIssues

No action required. This is abroadcast issue.

This is poor time alignment bythe radio broadcaster.

Echo, stutter, skip orrepeat in audio.Increase or decrease inaudio volume.

No action required. The recep-tion issue may clear up as youcontinue to drive.

The radio is shifting betweenanalog and digital audio.

Sound fading orblending in and out.

No action required. This isnormal behavior. Wait until theaudio is available.

The digital multicast is notavailable until the HD Radiobroadcast is decoded. Oncedecoded, the audio is available.

There is an audio mutedelay when selectingHD2 or HD3, multicastpreset or Direct Tune.

486




ActionCauseIssues

No action required. The stationis not available in your currentlocation.

The previously stored multicastpreset or direct tune is notavailable in your current recep-tion area.

Cannot access HD2 orHD3 multicast channelwhen recalling a presetor from a direct tune.

Fill out the station issue form.1Data service issue by the radiobroadcaster.

Text information doesnot match currentlyplaying audio.

Fill out the station issue form.1

Data service issue by the radiobroadcaster.

There is no textinformation shown forcurrently selectedfrequency.

1 You can find the form here:

Website

http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences

HD Radio Technology manufactured underlicense from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. andforeign patents. HD Radio and the HD andHD Radio logos are proprietary trademarksof iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford MotorCompany and iBiquity Digital Corp. are notresponsible for the content sent using HDRadio technology. Content may bechanged, added or deleted at any time atthe station owner's discretion.

CD (If equipped)Once you select this option, the systemreturns you to the main audio screen.The current audio information appears onthe screen.

The following buttons are also available:

FunctionButton

You can use the browse button to select a track.Browse

Select this button and a small number one displays to indicatethe track is set to repeat.

Repeat

487



FunctionButton

For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeatoff, repeat one track (a small number one displays), and repeatcurrent folder (a small folder displays).

Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk playin random order.

Shuffle

You can use the forward, reverse, pause orplay buttons to control the audio playback.

Bluetooth Stereo or USBBluetooth Stereo and USB allow you toaccess media that you store on yourBluetooth device or USB device such asmusic, audio books or podcasts.

The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB:

FunctionButton

Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting throughthree modes: repeat off (button not highlighted), repeat all(button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted witha small number one).

Repeat

Play the tracks in random order.Shuffle

You can use the forward, reverse, pause orplay buttons to control the audio playback.To get more information about thecurrently playing track, press the cover artor Info button.

For some devices, SYNC 3 is able toprovide 30-second skip buttons when youlisten to audio books or podcasts. Thesebuttons allow you to skip forward orbackward within a track.While playing audio from a USB device youcan look for certain music by selecting thefollowing:

FunctionButton

If available, displays the list of tracks in theNow Playing playlist.

Browse

This option, which is available underbrowse, allows you to play all tracks or tofilter the available media into one of thebelow categories.

New Search

Play All

488



FunctionButton

Playlists

Artists

Albums

Songs

Genres

Podcasts

Audio books

Composers

This button allows you to choose a specificletter to view within the category you arebrowsing.

A-Z Jump

If available, this allows you to browse thefolders and files on your USB device.

Explore Device

USB Ports

E211463

The USB ports are in the center console orbehind a small access door in theinstrument panel.This feature allows you to plug in USBmedia devices, memory sticks, flash drivesor thumb drives, and charge devices if theysupport this feature.

Select this option to play audio from yourUSB device.

AppsThe system supports the use of certainaudio apps such as iHeartRadio through aUSB or bluetooth-enabled device.Each app gives you different on-screenoptions depending on the app's content.See Apps (page 506).

Supported Media Players, Formatsand Metadata InformationThe system is capable of hosting nearlyany digital media player, including iPod,iPhone, and most USB drives.Supported audio formats include MP3,WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC.Supported audio file extensions includeMP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, andFLAC.

489



Supported USB file systems include: FAT,exFAT, and NTFS.SYNC 3 is also able to organize the mediafrom your USB device by metadata tags.Metadata tags, which are descriptivesoftware identifiers embedded in themedia files, provide information about thefile.If your indexed media files contain noinformation embedded in these metadatatags, SYNC 3 may classify the emptymetadata tags as unknown.SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10devices.

CLIMATETouch the climate button on thetouchscreen to access your climate controlfeatures. Depending on your vehicle lineand option package, your climate screenmay look different from one of the screensshown below. Your screen may not containall of the features shown.Note: You can switch temperature unitsbetween Fahrenheit and Celsius. SeeSettings (page 509).

E206820

490



Driver temperature: Touch up or down to adjust the temperature.AHeated steering wheel: Touch this icon to switch the heated steering wheelon and off. It takes about 5 minutes to warm the steering wheel to 74°F (23.3°C)in temperatures as low as -4°F (-21.7°C). The wheel maintains an approximatetemperature of 90°F (32.2°C) and operates independently from the heatedseats and other climate-control functions. The heating element is in betweenthe leather covering and foam core to help provide maximum heat withoutadversely affecting the feel of the steering wheel.

B

Note: This feature only functions when you switch the engine on.Note: The heated steering wheel may remain on after remote starting thevehicle, based on your remote start settings. The heated steering wheel mayalso turn on when you start your vehicle, if it was on when you switched yourvehicle off.Note: For steering wheels with wood trim, the heating feature will not heat thewheel between the 10 and 2 o'clock positions.Defrost: A pop up appears on the screen to display the defrost options.CMAX Defrost: Touch the button to maximize defrosting. Air flows through thewindshield vents, the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed and thedriver and passenger temperatures are set to HI. You can use this setting todefog or clear a thin covering of ice from the windshield. The heated rear windowalso automatically turns on when you select MAX Defrost.Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and demistervents.AUTO: Touch the button to switch on automatic operation. Select the desiredtemperature using the temperature control. The system adjusts fan speed, airdistribution, air conditioning operation, and selects outside air or recirculatedair to heat or cool the vehicle in order to maintain the desired temperature.

D

Power: Touch the button to switch the system on and off. Switching off theclimate control system prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.

E

DUAL: This button lights up when the passenger controls are active. To switchit off and link the passenger temperature to the driver temperature, touch theDUAL button.

F

Note: the passenger side temperature and the DUAL indication automaticallyturn on when you or your passenger adjust the passenger temperature.Passenger temperature: Touch up or down to adjust the temperature.GFan speed: Touch up or down to increase or decrease the volume of air thatcirculates in your vehicle.

H

Note: You cannot adjust the fan speed when the system is set to AUTO or MAXA/C.A/C: A pop-up appears on the screen to display the air conditioning options.I

491



MAX A/C: Touch the button to activate and maximize cooling. The driver andpassenger temperatures are set to LO, recirculated air flows through theinstrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and the fanautomatically adjusts to the highest speed.A/C: Touch to switch the air conditioning on or off. Use A/C with recirculatedair to improve cooling performance and efficiency.Note: In certain conditions (for example, Max Defrost), the air conditioningcompressor may continue to operate even when you switch the air conditioningA/C button off.Recirculated air: Touch to switch the recirculated air on or off. Whenrecirculated air is on, it may reduce the amount of time needed to cool downthe interior (when used with A/C) and help reduce odors from reaching theinterior.Note: Recirculatied air may turn off automatically (or the system may not allowrecirculatied air to turn on) in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce riskof fogging. It may also turn on and off automatically in Panel or Panel/Floorairflow modes during hot weather in order to improve cooling efficiency.Manual airflow distribution controls: Select these controls individually,together, or with Defrost to direct the air flow to the area you desire.

J

Panel: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.Floor: Distributes air through the demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floorvents.

PHONE



Hands-free calling is one of the mainfeatures of the system. Once you pair yourcell phone, you can access many optionsusing the touchscreen or voice commands.While the system supports a variety offeatures, many are dependent on your cellphone’s functionality.

Pairing Your Cell Phone for theFirst TimePair your Bluetooth-enabled phone withthe system before using the functions inhands-free mode.Switch on Bluetooth on your device tobegin pairing. See your phone’s manual ifnecessary.

492



To add a phone, select:

Menu Item

Add Phone

1. Follow the on-screen instructions.2. A prompt alerts you to search for the

system on your phone.3. Select your vehicle's make and model

as it displays on your phone.4. Confirm that the six-digit number

appearing on your phone matches thesix-digit number on the touchscreen.

5. The touchscreen indicates when thepairing is successful.

6. Your phone may prompt you to givethe system permission to accessinformation. To check your phone’scompatibility, see your phone’s manualor visit the website.

Alternatively, to add a phone, select:

Menu Item

Add Phone

Then select:

Discover Other Bluetooth Devices

1. Follow the on-screen instructions.2. Select your phone's name when it

appears on the touchscreen.

3. Confirm that the six-digit numberappearing on your phone matches thesix-digit number on the touchscreen.



At a minimum, most cell phones withBluetooth wireless technology support thefollowing functions:• Answering an incoming call.• Ending a call.• Dialing a number.• Call waiting notification.• Caller identification.Other features, such as text messagingusing Bluetooth and automatic phonebookdownload, are phone-dependent features.

To check your phone’s compatibility,see your phone’s manual or visit thewebsite:

Websites

owner.ford.comwww.syncmyride.ca

www.syncmaroute.ca

Phone MenuThis menu becomes available after pairinga phone.

493



E205447


Displays your recent calls.Recent CallList

AYou can place a call by selecting an entry from this list.You can also sort the calls by selecting the drop down menu atthe top of the screen. You can choose:

MissedOutgoingIncomingAll

All of your contacts from your phone display in alphabeticalorder.

ContactsB

Selecting this button allowsyou to choose a specific letterto view.

A-Z Jump

Displays the name of your phone and takes you to the phonesettings options.

PhoneSettings

C

From this menu, you can pair subsequent devices, set ring tonesand alerts. See Settings (page 509).

494




Displays all recent text messages.TextMessages

D

Use this keypad to dial in a phone number.PhoneKeypad

EUse the backspace button to delete numbers.

Press this button to begin acall.

Call

Touch this button to send all calls directly to your voicemail.New text message notifications are not displayed on the screenand all ringtones and alerts are set to silent.

Do NotDisturb

F

Users with phones having voice servicesmay see a button to access the feature.For example, iPhone users see a Siri button.A press and hold of the voice button on thesteering wheel also accesses this feature.

Making CallsThere are many ways to make calls fromthe SYNC 3 system, including using voicecommands. See Using VoiceRecognition (page 473). You can use thetouchscreen to place calls as well.

495



To call a number in your contacts,select:


You can then select thename of the contact youwant to call. Any numbersstored for that contactdisplay along with anystored contact photos. Youcan then select thenumber that you want tocall. The system begins thecall.

Contacts

To call a number from your recent calls,select:


You can then select anentry that you want to call.The system begins the call.

Recent CallList

To call a number that is not stored inyour phone, select:


Select the digits of thenumber you wish to call.

PhoneKeypad

The system begins the call.Call

Pressing the backspace button deletes thelast digit you typed.

Receiving CallsDuring an incoming call, an audible tonesounds. Caller information appears in thedisplay if it is available.

To accept the call, select:

Menu Item

AcceptNote: You can also accept the call bypressing the phone button on the steeringwheel.

To reject the call, select:

Menu Item

RejectNote: You can also reject the call bypressing the phone button on the steeringwheel.

Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC 3logs it as a missed call.

During a Phone CallDuring a phone call, the contacts nameand number display on the screen alongwith the call duration.The phone status items are also visible:• Signal Strength.• Battery.• 911 Assist (United States and Canada

Only). See Settings (page 509).You can select any of the following duringan active phone call:

496



Item

Immediately end aphone call. You canalso press thebutton on thesteering wheel.

End Call

Press this to accessthe phone keypad.

Keypad

You can switch themicrophone off sothe caller does nothear you.

Mute

Item

Privacy Transfer the call tothe cell phone orback to SYNC 3.

Text MessagingNote: Downloading and sending textmessages using Bluetooth are cellphone-dependent features.Note: Certain features in text messagingare speed-dependent and not availablewhen your vehicle is traveling at speeds over3 mph (5 km/h).

Receiving a Text Message

When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays apop-up with the caller name and ID, if supported by your cell phone. You can select:


Have SYNC 3 read the message to you.Hear It

View the text on the touchscreen.View

To call the sender.Call

You can select from 15 preset messages. Press the messagethat you would like to use and confirm to send the message.SYNC 3 confirms when the message is sent successfully.

Reply

To exit the screen.Close

Smartphone Connectivity (If Equipped)

SYNC 3 allows you to use Apple CarPlayand Android Auto to access your phone.When you use Apple CarPlay or AndroidAuto, you can:• Make calls.• Send and receive messages.• Listen to music.• Use your phone's voice assistant.

Apple CarPlay and Android Auto disablesome SYNC 3 features.Most Apple CarPlay and Android Autofeatures use mobile data.

Apple CarPlayApple CarPlay requires an iPhone 5 ornewer with iOS 7.1 or newer. Updating tothe latest iOS version is recommended.1. Plug your phone into a USB port. See

USB Port (page 422).

497



2. Select Apple CarPlay on thetouchscreen.

To disable this feature from theSettings screen, select:

Menu Item

Apple CarPlay Preferences

Your device is listed if SYNC detectsApple CarPlay. Select the name of yourdevice and select:

Disable

To return to SYNC 3, go to the AppleCarPlay home screen and select the SYNCapp.Note: Contact Apple for Apple CarPlaysupport.

Android AutoAndroid Auto is compatible with mostdevices with Android 5.0 or newer.1. Download the Android Auto app to

your device from Google Play toprepare your device (this may requiremobile data usage).

Note: The Android Auto App may not beavailable within your current market.2. To switch this feature on from the

Settings screen, scroll left on thescreen and select:

Menu Item

Android Auto Preferences

Enable Android Auto

Note: Android Auto must be switched onprior to plugging your device.You can then plug your device into a USBport. See USB Port (page 422).

To disable this feature from theSettings screen, select:

Menu Item

Android Auto Preferences

Your device is listed if SYNC detectsAndroid Auto. Select the name of yourdevice and select:

Disable

Note: You may need to slide your Settingsscreen to the left to select Apple CarPlayPreferences or Android Auto Preferences.To return to SYNC 3, select thespeedometer icon in the Android Automenu bar at the bottom of thetouchscreen, and then touch the option toreturn to SYNC.Note: Contact Google for Android Autosupport.

NAVIGATIONYour navigation system is comprised oftwo main features, destination mode andmap mode.

Map ModeMap mode shows advanced viewingcomprised of 2D city maps, 3D landmarksand 3D city models (when available). 2Dcity maps show detailed outlines ofbuildings, visible land use, landscapefeatures, and detailed railroadinfrastructure for the most essential citiesaround the globe.3D landmarks appear as clear, visibleobjects that are typically recognizable andhave a certain tourism value.

498



3D city models are complete 3D modelsof entire city areas including navigableroads, parks, rivers and rendered buildings.3D landmarks and city models appear in3D map mode only. Coverage of thesevaries and improves with updated mapreleases.

E207752

Select the zoom in icon to see acloser view of the map.

E207753

Select the zoom out icon to seea farther away view of the map.

You can adjust the view in presetincrements. You can also pinch to zoom inor out of the map.The information bar tells you the namesof streets, cities or landmarks as you hoverover them with the crosshair curser.You can change your view of the map bytapping on the location indicator icon onthe right hand side of the screen. You canchoose from the following options:

E207750

Heading up (2D map) Thisalways shows the direction offorward travel to be upward onthe screen. This view is availablefor map scales up to 3 mi (5 km).

E207749

North up (2D map) alwaysshows the northern direction tobe upward on the screen.

E207748

3D map mode provides anelevated perspective of the map.Adjust this viewing angle androtate the map 180 degrees bytouching the map twice, and

then dragging your finger along the shadedbar with arrows at the bottom of the map.

E207751

Re-center the map by pressingthis icon whenever you scroll themap away from your vehicle’scurrent location.

E207754

Points of Interest (POI)grouping icon: You can chooseup to three POI icons to displayon the map. If the chosen POIsare located close together or are

at the same location a box is used todisplay a single category icon instead ofrepeating the same icon, in order to reduceclutter. When you select the box on themap, a pop-up appears indicating howmany POIs are in this location. Select thepop up to see a list of the available POIs.You can scroll through and select POIsfrom this list.

If your vehicle is low on charge or fuel,station icons automatically display on themap.If you have subscribed to SiriusXM Trafficand Travel Link (where available), trafficflow will be indicated on the map by green(clear), yellow (slowing), and red(stopped) road highlights. Traffic flow isindicated where the information isavailable and varies across the US.You can choose to display traffic icons onthe map representing twelve differenttypes of incidents. See Settings (page509).You can set a destination by hoveringabove a location and selecting:

Button

Start

499



Destination ModeTo set a destination, press:

DescriptionMenu Item

Destination

Enter a navigation destination in any of the following formats:

Street AddressSearch

(number, street, city, state)

For example "12 Mainstreet Dearborn MI"

Partial Address(number, street) if searching in current state(number, street and zip code (or postal code in Canada)) if searchingout of stateYou can enter unique addresses that contain door number prefixeswith or without the prefix. For example, you could enter "6N340Fairway Lane" or "340 Fairway Lane".

City

(name or zip code)

Point of Interest

(name or category)

Intersection

(street 1 / street 2)(street 1 and street 2)(street 1 & street 2)(street 1 @ street 2)(street 1 at street 2)

Latitude and Longitude

(##.###### , ##.######)This is in a decimal degrees format, one to six decimal places areaccepted.

You are given autocomplete options below the address bar to selectas you type.If you do not give an exact destination, a menu displays with yourpossible selections.

Collections of your last 40 navigation destinations display here.Previous Destina-tions You can select any option from the list to select it as your destination.

500




Select this option to remove all previous destinations.DeleteAll

Select to navigate to your set Home destination.HomeThe time it takes to travel from your current location to Home displays.To set your Home, press:

A prompt appears asking if you would like to create afavorite for home. Select:

Home

Enter a location into the search bar and press:Yes

Save

Select to navigate to your set Work destination.WorkThe time it takes to travel from your current location to Work displays.To set your Work:

A prompt appears asking if you would like to create afavorite for work. Select:

Work

Enter a location into the search bar and press:Yes

Save

Favorites include any location you have previously saved.FavoritesTo add Favorites:

Select this button and enter a location into the destinationbar.

Add aFavorite

Select this option to have the system locate the addressyou have entered.

Search

Select this button when the address you have enteredappears on the screen.

Save

The address saves as a favorite and you see the favorites screen. Youcan now select this address from the favorites screen.

POI categories that may display (based on market and vehicleconfiguration):

Point of Interest(POI) Categories

Food

Fuel

Hotel

ATM

501




Press to view additional categories. Once you have selecteda category, follow the menus to find what you are lookingfor.

See All

Inside of these categories you can search by:

Nearby

Along Route

Near Destination

In a City

Once you have chosen your destination, press:


This saves the destination to your favorites.Save

This shows you a map of your entire route. You can then choose yourroute from three different options.

Start

Uses the fastest moving roadspossible.

Fastest

Uses the shortest distance possible.Shortest

Uses the most fuel-efficient route.Economical Route

The time and distance for each route also displays.

On the route screen, you can choose to cancel the current navigation.The system asks for confirmation then returns you to the map modescreen.

Cancel

Once you have chosen you destination, press:


The system uses a variety of screens and prompts to guide you to yourdestination.

Start

During Route guidance, you can press the maneuver arrow icon on themap if you want the system to repeat route guidance instructions.When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, it updates thedistance to the next guidance instruction, since it detects that thevehicle is moving.

502




The navigation map shows your estimated time of arrival, remainingtravel time and the distance to your destination.SYNC 3 may not always announce vehicle arrival at the exact pointof your destination and you may have to cancel a route manually.

Navigation MenuIn map mode and during active navigationyou can access the navigation menu.

During active navigation, touch the bottomof the screen to view the menu and otherbuttons.

To access the Navigation menu, press:

Button

Menu

You can then select:

A full screen map displays during navigation.Full MapScreen View

Highway exit information displays on the right hand sideof the screen during navigation.

HighwayExit Info

Points of interest icons display for restaurants, hotels,fuel stations and ATMs when they are present at theexit. You can select the POI icons to receive a listing ofspecific locations. You can select the POI location as awaypoint or destination if desired.

Only available during an active route. Displays all of theturns on the current route.

Turn List

You can choose to avoid any road on the turn list byselecting the road from the list. A screen then appearsand you can press:

Avoid

The system calculates a new route and displays a newturn list.

You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information bypressing this button. This information requires an active subscriptionto SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.

Traffic List

When a route is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays(if any are present).When a route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearbyor on the route.

503



Button

Press this button to adjust your preferences. See Settings (page 509).NavigationSettings

Provides your current location city and the nearest road.Where Am I?

The following are only available on the menu during an active navigation route:

The system asks for confirmation and then returns you to the mapmode screen.

Cancel Route

Selecting this option switches off the audio navigation guidance. Pressthe button again to un-mute guidance.

Mute Guidance

Press this to see a map of the full route.View Route

An alternate route displays in comparison with the current route.Detour

Only available if you have an active waypoint on your route. SeeWaypoints later in this section for information on how to setwaypoints.

Edit Waypoints

Use this button to re-order or remove your waypoints.

Optimize OrderYou canalso havethe systemset theorder foryou bypressing:

GoTo return toyour routepress:

WaypointsYou can add a waypoint to a navigationroute as a destination along your route.To add a waypoint:

1. Select the search icon (magnifyingglass) while on an active route. Thisbrings up the destination menu.

2. Set your destination using any of thegiven methods. Once the destinationhas been selected, the screen allowsyou to set the destination as awaypoint by selecting:

504



Menu Item

The waypoint list then appears and you areable to re-order all of your waypoints byselecting the menu icon on the right handside of the location. You can select up tofive waypoints.

Add Waypoint

Optimize OrderYou can also have the system set the orderfor you by pressing:

GoTo return to your route, press:

cityseeker (If Equipped)

Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI)information is limited to approximately 1,110cities (1,049 in the United States, 36 inCanada and 15 in Mexico).

E225487

cityseeker, when available, is a service thatprovides more information about certainpoints of interest such as restaurants,hotels and attractions.When you have selected a point of interest,the location and information appear, suchas address, phone number and a starrating.Press More Information to see a photo,a review, a list of services and facilities, theaverage room or meal price and the webaddress. This screen displays the point ofinterest icons.

For restaurants, cityseeker can provideinformation such as star rating, averagecost, review, handicap access, hours ofoperation, and website address.For hotels, cityseeker can provideinformation such as star rating, pricecategory, review, check-in and checkouttimes, hotel service icons and websiteaddress. Hotel service icons include:• Restaurant• Business center• Handicap facilities• Laundry• Refrigerator• 24 hour room service• Fitness center• Internet access• Pool• Wi-FiAttractions include nearby landmarks,amusement parks, historic buildings andmore. cityseeker can provide informationsuch as star rating, reviews, hour ofoperation and admission price.

505



SiriusXM Traffic and Travel LinkSiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is availableon vehicles equipped with navigation andonly in select markets. You must activateand subscribe to receive SiriusXM Trafficand Travel Link information. It helps youlocate the best gas prices, find movielistings, get current traffic alerts, view theweather map, get accurate ski conditionsand see current sports scores. See Apps(page 506).The system calculates a reasonableefficient route based on available speedlimits, traffic, and road conditions. You mayknow a local short cut that is more efficientat a given time than the route provided bySYNC 3, but you should expect a slightdifference in minutes or miles with theSYNC 3 route.

Navigation Map UpdatesAnnual navigation map updates areavailable for purchase through yourdealership, by calling 1-866-462-8837 inthe United States and Canada or01-800-557-5539 in Mexico. You can alsovisit:

Website

www.navigation.com/sync

You need to specify the make and modelof your vehicle to determine if there is anupdate available.HERE is the digital map provider for thenavigation application. If you find map dataerrors, you may report them directly toHERE by going towww.here.com/mapcreator. HEREevaluates all reported map errors andresponds with the result of theirinvestigation by e-mail.

Map coverage includes the USA (includingPuerto Rico and the US Virgin Islands),Canada and Mexico.

APPSThe system enables voice, steering wheel,and touch screen control of SYNC 3AppLink enabled smartphone apps. Oncean app is running through AppLink, you cancontrol main features of the app throughvoice commands and steering wheelcontrols.Note: Available AppLink enabled apps willvary by market.Note: You must pair and connect yoursmartphone via Bluetooth to SYNC 3 toaccess AppLink.Note: iPhone users need to connect thephone to the USB port.Note: For information on available apps,supported smartphone devices andtroubleshooting tips please visit:

Websites


www.syncmaroute.ca

Note: Make sure you have an active accountfor the app that you have downloaded.Some apps will work automatically with nosetup. Other apps will want you to configureyour personal settings and personalize yourexperience by creating stations or favorites.We recommend you do this at home oroutside of your vehicle.Note: We encourage you to review thesmartphone app’s terms of service andprivacy policies because Ford is notresponsible for your app or its use of data.

506



Note: AppLink is a native SYNC systemfeature. Accessing mobile apps throughAppLink is only possible when Android Autoor Apple CarPlay are disabled. Some appsmay only be accessible in the car throughApplink and others only through AndroidAuto or Apple CarPlay. Please refer to theSmartphone Connectivity information todisable Android Auto or Apple CarPlay.Note: In order to use an app with SYNC 3,the App needs to be running in thebackground of your phone. If you shut downthe app on your phone, it shuts down theapp on SYNC 3 as well.Note: If a SYNC 3 AppLink compatible appis not shown in the Apps Domain, make surethe required app is running on the mobiledevice.


Menu Item

SYNC 3 will searchand connect tocompatible app(s)running on yourmobile device.

Connect MobileApps

Enabling SYNC 3 Mobile AppsIn order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3requires user consent to send and receiveapp authorization information and updatesusing the data plan associated with theconnected device.The connected device sends data to Fordin the United States. The information isencrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC 3module number, odometer, usagestatistics and debugging information. Weretain this data for only as long asnecessary to provide this service,troubleshoot, and improve products andservices and to offer you products andservices that may interest you whereallowed by law.

Note: You must enable mobile apps foreach connected device the first time youselect a mobile app using the system.Note: Ford reserves the right to limitfunctionality or deactivate mobile apps atany time.Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford isnot responsible for any additional chargesyou may receive from your service provider,when your vehicle sends or receives datathrough the connected device. This includesany additional charges incurred due todriving in areas when roaming out of a homenetwork.You can enable and disable apps throughsettings. See Settings (page 509).

App PermissionsThe system organizes the App permissionsinto groups. You can grant these grouppermissions individually. You can changea permission group status any time whennot driving, by using the settings menu.While in the settings menu, you can alsosee the data included in each group.When you launch an app using SYNC 3,the system may ask you to grant certainpermissions, for example Vehicleinformation, Driving characteristics, GPSand Speed, and/or Push notifications. Youcan enable all groups or none of themduring the initial app permissions prompts.The settings menu offers individual grouppermission control.Note: You are only prompted to grantpermissions the first time you use an appwith SYNC 3.Note: If you disable group permissions,apps will still be enabled to work with SYNC3 unless you deactivate All Apps in thesettings menu.

507



SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If

Equipped)



Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link maynot be available in all markets.

Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic andTravel Link, your vehicle must havenavigation.Note: A paid subscription is required toaccess and use these features. Go towww.siriusxm.com/travellink for moreinformation.Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic andclick on Coverage map and details for acomplete listing of all traffic areas coveredby SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsiblefor any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXMTraffic and Travel Link services or its use invehicles.When you subscribe to SiriusXM Trafficand Travel Link, it can help you locate thebest gas prices, find movie listings, getcurrent traffic alerts, view the currentweather map, get accurate ski conditionsand see scores to current sports games.


Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route,near your vehicle’s current location or near any of your favoriteplaces, if programmed.

Traffic on Route

Traffic Nearby

Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to yourvehicle’s location or on an active navigation route.

Fuel Prices

Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and theirshow times, if available.

Movie Listings

Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather,or the five-day forecast for the chosen area.

Weather

Select to see the weather map,which can show storms, radarinformation, charts and winds.

Map

508




Select to choose from a listing ofweather locations.

Area

Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a varietyof sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easieraccess. The score automatically refreshes when a game is inprogress.

Sports Info

Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.Ski Conditions

SETTINGSUnder this menu, you can access andadjust the settings for many of the systemfeatures. To access additional settings,swipe the screen left or right.

SoundPressing this button allows you to adjustthe following:

Sound Settings

Returns Treble, Midrange, and Bass sound settings to factory levels.Reset All

Adjusts the high frequency level.Treble

Adjusts the middle frequency level.Midrange

Adjusts the low frequency level.Bass

Adjusts the sound ratio from side to side or front to back.Balance / Fade

Adjusts the amount the audio system volume increases with speed,or turns the feature off.

SpeedCompensatedVol.

Optimizes the sound based on the location of the listeners.Occupancy Mode

StereoSound Settings

Surround

Your vehicle might not have all of these features.

509



Media PlayerThis button is available when a mediadevice such as a Bluetooth Stereo or USB

device is the active audio source. Pressingthe button allows you to access thefollowing options for active devices only.


For some Apple devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed ofpodcasts. When a podcast is playing, you can choose:

Podcast Speed

FasterNormalSlower

For some Apple devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed ofaudiobooks. When an audiobook is playing, you can choose:

Audiobook Speed

FasterNormalSlower

Cover art displays from your device’s musicfiles. If no cover art for the files exists on thedevice, then the Gracenote Database providescover art.

Media PlayerCover Art Priority

The Gracenote Database supplied cover art isused for your music files. This overrides anycover art from your device.

Gracenote®

Switches on and off Gracenote® to provide metadata informationsuch as genre, artist, album.

Gracenote®Management

This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database.Gracenote® Data-base Info

This allows you to view the manufacturer and model number of yourmedia device.

Device Informa-tion

Erase the stored in media information in order to re-index.Update MediaIndex

ClockTo adjust the time, select the up and downarrows on either side of the screen. Thearrows on the left adjust the hour andarrows on the right adjust the minute. Youcan then select AM or PM.

You can adjust the following features:

510




Select how time displays.Clock Format

When active, the clock adjusts to time zone changes.Auto Time ZoneUpdate This feature is only available in vehicles with navigation.

When selected, the vehicle clock resets to GPS satellite time.Reset Clock toGPS Time

The system automatically saves anyupdates you make to the settings.

BluetoothPressing this button allows you to accessthe following:

ActionMenu Item

Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all devices and does not permitnew connections.

Bluetooth

You must activate Bluetooth to pair aBluetooth-enabled device.The processes of pairing a Bluetoothdevice is the same as pairing a phone. SeePairing a Device in Phone settings for howto pair a device and the available options.

PhonePair your Bluetooth-enabled phone withthe system before using the functions inhands-free mode.Switch on Bluetooth on your device tobegin pairing. See your phone’s manual ifnecessary.

To add a phone, select:

Menu Item

Add Phone

1. Follow the on-screen instructions.2. A prompt alerts you to search for the

system on your phone.

3. Select your vehicle's make and modelas it displays on your phone.




Alternatively, to add a phone, select:

Menu Item

Add Phone

Then select:

Discover Other Bluetooth Devices

1. Follow the on-screen instructions.2. Select your phone's name when it

appears on the touchscreen.

511






Other features, such as text messagingusing Bluetooth and automatic phonebookdownload, are phone-dependent features.

To check your phone’s compatibility,see your phone’s manual or visit thewebsite:

Website


www.syncmaroute.ca

Once you have paired a device you canadjust the following options.


View Devices


You can add a Bluetooth-enabled device by following the steps inthe previous table.

Add a BluetoothDevice

You can select a phone by touching the name of the phone on the screen. You thenhave the following options:

Depending on the status of the device, you can select either of theseoptions to interact with the selected device.

Connect

Disconnect

Allows you to see phone and device information.Device Informa-tion

Allows you to select this device to be your preferred device.Make Primary

Removes the selected device from the system.Delete


Manage Contacts


Enable this option to have SYNC 3 periodically re-download yourphonebook to keep your contact list up to date.

Auto-DownloadContacts

Choose how you would like the system to display your contacts. Youcan choose:

Sort By:

512




Last NameFirst Name

Select this option to re-download your contact list manually.Re-downloadContacts

Select this option to delete the in vehicle contact list. Deleting thein vehicle list does not erase the contact list on the connected phone.

Delete Contacts


Set Phone Ringtone


No sound plays when a call comes to your phone.No Ringtone

The currently selected ringtone on your phone plays when you receivea call. This option may not be available for all phones. If this optionis available, it is the default setting.

Use Phone Ring-tone

You can also select one of the three available ringers.


Text Messaging


No sound plays when a message comes to your phone.No Alert(Silence)

You can select one of the three available notification sounds.

When enabled, a voice prompt alerts you when you receive a newmessage.

Voice Readout

513



You can enable and disable the following options as well:


When enabled, vehicle audio (such as radio or apps) is muted for theduration of the phone call even when the phone call is in privacy.

Mute Audio inPrivacy

When enabled, an alert displays that your phone is roaming whenyou attempt to place a call.

RoamingWarning

When enabled, a message displays when the battery on your phoneis running low.

Low BatteryNotification

911 AssistNote: This service is only available in theUnited States and Canada.

Select this button to modify the on or offsetting for this feature. If the mobilephone’s contacts have been downloaded,you can adjust the following option:


You can select up to two numbers from your mobile device's phone-book as emergency contacts for quick access at the end of the 911Assist call process.

Set EmergencyContacts

RadioThis button is available if a Radio sourcesuch as AM or FM is the active mediasource. Pressing the button allows you toaccess the following features:

514




Activation of this feature allows you to listen to HD radio broadcasts.FM HD Radio

AM HD Radio

(Dependent oncurrent radiosource, If Avail-able)

This feature is available when FM Radio is your active media source.Activate this feature to have the system display radio text.

Radio Text

RefreshAutoset Presets(AST)

Selecting this option stores the six strongest stations in your currentlocation to the last preset bank of the currently tuned source.

NavigationYou can adjust many of the Navigationpreferences by selecting the followingmenus.

Map Preferences


Map Preferences

Then select any of the following:

When this option is active, the system shows 3D renderings of build-ings.

3D City Model

When enabled, your vehicle’s previously traveled route displays withwhite dots.

Breadcrumbs

Enable this feature to display up to 3 POI icons on the navigation map.POI Icons

Select POIsOnce this feature is activated you can selectthe icons you want displayed by selecting:

This menu allows you to choose which incident icons you would liketo have displayed on the navigation map.

Incident MapIcons

515



Route Preferences

Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item

Route Preferences


Choose to have the system display your chosen route type.Preferred Route

EcoFastestShortest

Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system onlycalculates one route based on your preferred route setting.

Always Use ___Route

When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculateonly one route to the desired destination.

The system selects High Occupancy Vehicle or car pool lanes whenproviding route guidance.

Use HOV Lanes

The system searches for and displays available parking locations asyou approach your destination.

AutomaticallyFind Parking

Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher thesetting, the longer the time allotment is for the route.

Eco TimePenalty

Enable or disable considering traffic information when planning aroute. The system can find a faster route based on heavy traffic flowinformation or detect a Road Closed incident and find a detour routeif possible.

Dynamic RouteGuidance

If selected, SYNC 3 avoids freeways when computing a navigationroute.

Avoid Freeways

If selected, SYNC 3 avoids Toll Roads when computing a navigationroute.

Avoid TollRoads

If selected, SYNC 3 avoids the use of Ferries or Trains when computinga navigation route.

AvoidFerries/CarTrains

516



Navigation Preferences


Navigation Preferences

You can adjust how the system provides prompts.GuidancePrompts


A tone sounds followed by voice instructions.Voice and Tones

Only voice instructions are given.Voice Only

Only a tone sounds to prompt you.Tones Only

Mobile AppsYou can enable the control of compatiblemobile apps running on your Bluetooth orUSB device on SYNC 3. In order to enablemobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consentto send and receive app authorizationinformation and updates using the dataplan associated with the connected device.The connected devices sends data to Fordin the United States. The encryptedinformation includes your VIN, SYNC 3module number, anonymous usagestatistics and debugging information.Updates may take place automatically.

Note: All Mobile Apps may not becompatible with the system.Note: Standard data rates will apply. Fordis not responsible for any additional chargesyou may receive from your service provider,when your vehicle sends or receives datathrough the connected device. This includesany additional charges incurred due todriving in areas when roaming out of a homenetwork.


Enable or disable the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3.Mobile AppsDisabling mobile apps in the settings menu disables automaticupdates and the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3.

You can view the status of mobile app permissions in the settingsmenu.

Once Mobile Apps is enabled, you have the following options:

This provides information on the current state of available appupdates.

Update MobileApps

There are three possible statuses:

517




Updating Mobile Apps…Up-To-DateUpdate Needed

The system is trying to receivean update.

No update isrequired.

The system hasdetected a new apprequiring authoriza-tion or a generalpermissions update isrequired.

Select this button if anupdate is required and youwant to request this updatemanually. For example, whenyour mobile device isconnected to a Wi-Fi hotspot,select:

Request Update

Request Update

Grant or deny permissions to all apps at once.All Apps

Grant or deny an individual app particular permissions. App permis-sions are organized into groups. By pressing the info book icon, youcan see which signals are included in each group.

There may alsobe SYNC 3enabled appslisted underthese options.

Note: Ford is not responsible or liable forany damages or loss of privacy relating tousage of an app, or dissemination of anyvehicle data that you approve Ford toprovide to an app.

GeneralAccess and adjust the system settings,voice features, as well as phone, navigationand wireless settings.

Menu Item

Select to have the touchscreen display in English,Spanish or French.

Language

Select to display units in kilometers or miles.Distance

Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.Temperature

Select to have the system beep to confirm choicesmade through the touchscreen.

Touch Screen Beep

518



Menu Item

When you activate this option, the system automatic-ally updates when you have an available Internetconnection through a Wi-Fi network or mobileconnection.

Automatic System Updates

Information pertaining to the system and its software.About

Documentation of the software license for the system.Software Licenses

Select to restore factory defaults. This erases allpersonal settings and personal data.

Master Reset

Wi-FiYou can adjust the following:


Enable this option to connect to Wi-Fi for SYNC 3 vehicle softwareupdates.

Wi-Fi

This provides you with a list of available Wi-Fi networks within range.View AvailableNetworks

Clicking on a network from the list allows you to connect or disconnectfrom that network. The system may require a security code toconnect.

When you click the information button next to a network, moreinformation about the network displays such as the signal strength,connection status and security type.

The system alerts you when your vehicle is parked and a Wi-Finetwork is within range if SYNC is not already connected.

Wi-Fi AvailableNotifications

Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)

Tap a color once to active ambient lighting.This sets the color to the highest intensity.You can drag the colors up and down toincrease or decrease the intensity.To switch ambient lighting off, press theactive color once or drag the active colorall the way down to zero intensity.

VehicleNote: You vehicle may not have all of thesefeatures.You can select the following features toupdate their settings.

519



Door Keypad CodeSelect this button to add or erase apersonal door keypad code. To add orerase a personal code, you first need to

enter the five-digit factory set code. Youcan find this code on the owner's walletcard in the glove box or from yourauthorized dealer.

Camera Settings

To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:

Action and DescriptionMessage

Camera Settings

Then select from the following:

You can enable or disable this option using the slider.Rear CameraDelay

You can find more information on the rear-view camera system in the parking aids chapterof your owner manual.

Onboard Modem Serial Number (ESN)Selecting this button on the settings menushows you the ESN number for yoursystem. You need this number for certainregistrations such as Satellite Radio.

DisplayTo make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:


Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.Brightness

You can select:Mode

The screen automatically switches between day andnight modes based on the outside light level.

Auto

The screen displays with a light background to enhancedaytime viewing.

Day

520




The screen displays with a darker background to makenighttime viewing easier.

Night

The screen goes black and does not display anything.To switch the screen back on, simply tap the screen.

Off

Enable this option to automatically dim the display brightness basedon ambient lighting conditions.

Auto Dim

Voice ControlYou can adjust the voice control settingsby selecting the following options.

Menu Item

Enable this option to remove additional voice promptsand confirmations.

Advanced Mode

Enable this option to have the system confirm a contactsname with you before making a call.

Phone Confirmation

Enable this option to have the system display a list ofavailable voice commands when the voice button ispressed.

Voice Command List

Valet ModeValet mode allows you to lock the system.No information is accessible until thesystem is unlocked with the correct PIN.When you select valet mode a pop upappears informing you that a four digitcode must be entered to enable anddisable valet mode. You can use any PINyou chose but you must use the same PINto disable valet mode. The system asksyou to input the code.Note: If the system is locked and youcannot remember the PIN, please contactthe Customer Relationship Center.United States: 1-800-392-3673Canada: 1-800-565-3673

To enable valet mode, enter your chosenPIN. The system then asks to confirm yourPIN by reentering it. The system then locks.To unlock the system, enter the same pinnumber. The system reconnects to yourphone and all of your options are availableagain.

SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTINGYour SYNC 3 system is easy to use.However, should questions arise, pleaserefer to the tables below.To check your cell phone's compatibility,visit the Ford website.

521



Website

owner.ford.com

Website

www.syncmyride.cawww.syncmaroute.ca

Cell phone issues

Possible solutionPossible causeIssue

Refer to your device's manual about audioadjustments.

The audio controlsettings on your cellphone may be affectingSYNC 3 performance.

There is back-ground noiseduring a phonecall.

Try switching your cell phone off, resettingit or removing the battery, then try again.

Possible cell phonemalfunction.

During a call, Ican hear theother personbut they cannothear me.

Make sure that the microphone for SYNC3 is not set to off. Look for the microphoneicon on the phone screen.

To restart your system, shut down theengine, open and close the door, and thenlock the door and wait for 2-3 minutes.Make sure that your SYNC 3 screen is blackand the lighted USB port is off.

The system may need tobe restarted.

During a call, Icannot hear theother personand they cannothear me.

Check your cell phone's compatibility.This is a cell phone-dependent feature.

SYNC 3 is notable to down-load my phone-book.

Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrievecontacts from your phone. Refer to yourcell manual.


You must switch on your cell phone andthe automatic phonebook downloadfeature on SYNC 3.


Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrievecontacts from your phone. Refer to yourcell manual.

Limitations on your cellphone's capability.

The systemsays "Phone-book down-loaded" but mySYNC 3 phone-book is empty oris missingcontacts.

If the missing contacts are stored on yourSIM card, move them to your cell phone'smemory.

522



Cell phone issues


You must switch on your cell phone andthe automatic phonebook downloadfeature on SYNC 3.


I am havingtroubleconnecting mycell phone toSYNC 3.



Try deleting your device from SYNC 3 anddeleting SYNC from your device, then tryingagain.

Always check the security and auto acceptprompt settings relative to the SYNC 3Bluetooth connection on your cell phone.

Update your cell phone's firmware.

Switch the auto download setting off.


Text messagingis not workingon SYNC 3.



iPhone • Go to your cell phone's Settings.• Go to the Bluetooth Menu.• Press the blue circle to the right of the

device named with your vehicle makeand model to enter the next menu.

• Turn Show Notifications on.• Disconnect then reconnect your iPhone

from the SYNC 3 system to activate thissettings update.

Your iPhone is now set up to forwardincoming text messages to SYNC 3.Repeat these steps for every other SYNC 3vehicle that you connect. Your iPhone willonly forward incoming text messages toSYNC 3 if the iPhone is not unlocked in themessaging application.

523



Cell phone issues


Replying to text messages using SYNC 3 isnot supported by iPhone.Text messages from WhatsApp and Face-book Messenger are not supported.

Your cell phone must support downloadingtext messages through Bluetooth to receiveincoming text messages.

This is a cell phone-dependent feature.

Audible textmessages donot work on mycell phone.

Because each cell phone is different, referto your device's manual for the specific cellphone you are pairing. In fact, there can bedifferences between cell phones due tobrand, model, service provider and softwareversion.

This is a cell phone limita-tion.

USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues


Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Tryswitching your device off, resetting it orremoving the battery, then reconnect it toSYNC 3.

Possible device malfunc-tion.I am having

troubleconnecting mydevice.

Make sure you are using the manufacturer'scable.

Make sure to correctly insert the USB cableinto the device and your vehicle's USB port.

Make sure that the device does not havean auto-install program or active securitysettings.

Make sure your device is unlocked beforeconnecting it to SYNC 3.

The device has a lockscreen enabled.

Make sure you are not leaving the device inyour vehicle during very hot or coldtemperatures.

This is a device limitation.

SYNC 3 doesnot recognizemy device whenI start myvehicle.

524



USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues


Make sure you connect the device to SYNC3 and that you have started the mediaplayer on your device.

This is a device-dependent feature.Bluetooth audio

does notstream. The device is not

connected.

Make sure that all song details are popu-lated.

Your music files may notcontain the correct artist,song title, album or genreinformation.

SYNC 3 doesnot recognizemusic that is onmy device.

Try replacing the corrupt file with a newversion.

The file may becorrupted.

Some devices require you to change theUSB settings from mass storage to mediatransfer protocol class.

The song may havecopyright protection thatdoes not allow it to play.

Convert the file to a supported format. SeeEntertainment (page 480).

The file format is notsupported by SYNC 3.

Update media index. See Settings (page509).

The device needs to bere-indexed.

Make sure your device is unlocked beforeconnecting it to SYNC 3.

The device has a lockscreen enabled.

Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Tryswitching your device off, resetting it orremoving the battery, then connect it backto SYNC 3.

This is a device limitation.

When I connectmy device, Isometimes donot hear anysound.

To listen to Apple devices through USB,select AirPlay from the devices ControlCenter, then select Dock Connector.

To listen to Apple devices throughBluetooth Stereo, select AirPlay from thedevices Control Center, then select SYNC.

525



Wi-Fi Issues


Verify password.Password error.Failed connection.

Check for a poor Wi-Fisignal.

Weak signal.

Use a unique name for yourSSID, don’t use the defaultname unless it contains aunique identifier, such aspart of the MAC address.

Multiple Access pointswithin range with the sameSSID.

Position the vehicle close tothe hotspot with the front ofthe vehicle facing thehotspot direction andremove obstacles ifpossible. Other Wi-Fi,Bluetooth, microwave andcordless phones may causeinterference.

Weak signal probably dueto distance from thehotspot, obstruction or highinterference.

Disconnecting aftersuccessful connection.

If the vehicle is equippedwith heated windshield, trypositioning the vehicle sothat the windshield is notfacing the hotspot. If youhave metallic window tinting

There may be an obstructionbetween SYNC 3 and thehotspot.

Poor signal seen by SYNC 3despite being near ahotspot.

but not on the windshield,position the vehicle to facethe hotspot. If all windowsare tinted, you can open thewindows in the direction ofthe hotspot if that is feas-ible.Try to remove otherobstructions that mayimpact signal quality suchas opening the garage door.

Please set the network tovisible and try again.

The hotspot was defined asa hidden network.

A hotspot is not listed in thelist of available networks.

526



Wi-Fi Issues


SYNC 3 currently does notprovide a hotspot

SYNC 3 does not currentlyprovide a hotspot.

SYNC 3 is not seen whensearching for Wi-Fi networksfrom your phone or otherdevices.

Check the signal quality(under network details), ifSYNC 3 indicates good orexcellent, test with anotherhigh-speed equippedhotspot where the environ-ment is more predictable.

Poor signal strength, too farfrom the hotspot, hotspot issupporting multipleconnections, slow Internetconnection or other prob-lems.

Software download takestoo long.

Test the connection withanother device, if thehotspot requires a subscrip-tion, you may contact theservice provider.

It is possible that there is nonew software. Theconnected hotspot may bea managed one and itrequires either a subscrip-tion or agreeing to the termsand conditions.

SYNC 3 seems to connectwith a hotspot and thesignal strength is excellentbut the software is not beingupdated.

AppLink issues


Make sure you have acompatible smartphone; anAndroid with OS 2.3 orhigher or an iPhone 3GS ornewer with iOS 5.0 or higher.Additionally, make sure you

You did not connect anApplink Compatible phoneto SYNC 3.

AppLink Mobile Applica-tions: When I select"Connect Mobile Apps,"SYNC 3 does not find anyapplications.

pair and connect your phone

527



AppLink issues


to SYNC 3 in order to findAppLink-capable apps onyour device. iPhone usersmust also connect to a USBport with an Apple USBcable.

Make sure you have down-loaded and installed thelatest version of the appfrom your phone's app store.Make sure the app is runningon your phone. Some appsAppLink-enabled apps are

not installed and running onyour mobile device.

My phone is connected, butI still cannot find any apps. require you to register or

login to the app on thephone before using themwith AppLink. Also, somemay have a "Ford SYNC"setting, so check the app'ssettings menu on the phone.

Closing and restarting appsmay help SYNC 3 find theapplication if you cannotdiscover it inside the vehicle.On an Android device, ifapps have an 'Exit' or 'Quit'

Sometimes apps do notproperly close and re-opentheir connection to SYNC 3,over ignition cycles, forexample.

My phone is connected, myapp(s) are running, but I stillcannot find any apps.

option, then select it andrestart the app. If the appdoes not have that option,select the phone's settingsmenu and select 'Apps',then find the particular appand choose 'Force stop.' Donot forget to restart the appafterward, then select"Connect Mobile Apps" onSYNC 3.

528



AppLink issues


On an iPhone with iOS7+, toforce close an app, doubletap the home button thenswipe up on the app to closeit. Tap the home buttonagain, then select the appagain to restart it. After afew seconds, the app shouldthen appear in SYNC 3'sMobile App's Menu.

Switch Bluetooth off andthen on to reset it on yourphone. If you are in yourvehicle, SYNC 3 should beable to automatically re-connect to your phone if youpress the "Phone" button.

There is a Bluetooth issueon some older versions ofthe Android operatingsystem that may cause appsthat were found on yourprevious vehicle drive to notbe found again if you did notswitch Bluetooth off.

My Android phone isconnected, my app(s) arerunning, I restarted them,but I still cannot find anyapps.

529



AppLink issues


Unplug the USB cable fromthe phone, wait a moment,and plug the USB cableback in to the phone. After afew seconds, the app shouldappear in SYNC 3's MobileApps Menu. If not, "ForceClose" the application andrestart it.

You may need to reset theUSB connection to SYNC 3.

My iPhone is connected, myapp is running, I restartedthe app but I still cannot findit on SYNC 3.

Increase the Bluetoothvolume of the device byusing the device's volumecontrol buttons which aremost often found on theside of the device.

The Bluetooth volume onthe phone may be low.

I have an Android phone. Ifound and started my mediaapp on SYNC 3, but there isno sound or the sound isvery low.

Force close or uninstall theapps you do not want SYNC3 to find. If the app has a"Ford SYNC" setting, disablethat setting in the app'ssettings menu on the phone.

Some Android devices havea limited number ofBluetooth ports that appscan use to connect. If youhave more AppLink apps onyour phone than the numberof available Bluetooth ports,you will not see all of yourapps listed in the SYNC 3mobile apps menu.

I can only see some of theAppLink apps running on myphone listed in the SYNC 3Mobile Apps Menu.



Review the cell phone voice commandsand the media voice commands at thebeginning of their respective sections.You may be using the

wrong voice commands.SYNC 3 doesnot understandwhat I amsaying.

Refer to the audio display during an activevoice session to find a list of voicecommands there.

Wait for the system to prompt you beforeyou state your command.

You may be speaking toosoon or at the wrongtime.

530





Review the media voice commands at thebeginning of the media section.

You may be using thewrong voice commands.

SYNC 3 doesnot understandthe name of asong or artist.

Say the song or artist name exactly as it isdisplayed on your device. For example, say"Play Artist Prince" or "Play song PurpleRain".

You may not be sayingthe name exactly as itappears on your device.

Make sure you are saying the complete titlesuch as "California remix featuring JenniferNettles".

If there are any abbreviations in the name,like ESPN or CNN, you have to spell those:"E-S-P-N" or "C-N-N".

Make sure that song titles, artists, album,and playlists names do not have any specialcharacters like *, - or +.

The song or artist namemay have some specialcharacters that are notbeing recognized bySYNC 3.

Make sure that you are saying the nameexactly as it appears on your phone. Forexample, if your contact is "Joe Wilson",say "Call Joe Wilson". If your contact nameis "Mom", say "Call Mom".

You may not be sayingthe name exactly as itappears on your phone-book.

SYNC 3 doesnot understandor is calling thewrong contactwhen I want tomake a call. Make sure that your contact names do not

have any special characters like *, - or +.The contact name maycontain special charac-ters.

SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciationrules of the selected language to thecontact names stored on your cell phone.

You may not be sayingthe name exactly as itappears on your phone-book.

The SYNC 3voice controlsystem is havingtrouble recog-nizing foreignnames storedon my cellphone.

Helpful Hint: You can select your contactmanually. Press PHONE. Select the optionfor phonebook and then contact name.Press the soft-key option to hear it. SYNC3 will read the contact name to you, givingyou some idea of the pronunciation it isexpecting.

531





SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciationrules of the selected language to the namesstored on your media player or USB flashdrive. It is able to make some exceptionsfor very popular artist names (for example,U2) such that you can always use theEnglish pronunciation for these artists.

You may be saying theforeign names using thecurrently selectedlanguage for SYNC 3.

The SYNC 3voice controlsystem is havingtrouble recog-nizing foreigntracks, artists,albums, genresand playlistnames from mymedia player orUSB flash drive.

SYNC 3 uses a synthetically generatedvoice rather than pre-recorded humanvoice.

SYNC 3 uses text-to-speech voice prompttechnology.

The systemgenerates voiceprompts andthe pronunci-ation of somewords may notbe accurate formy language.

SYNC 3 offers several new voice controlfeatures for a wide range of languages.Dialing a contact name directly from thephonebook without pre-recording (forexample, “call John Smith”) or selecting atrack, artist, album, genre or playlist directlyfrom your media player (for example, "playartist Madonna").

532



General


SYNC 3 only supports four languages in asingle module for text display, voice controland voice prompts. The country where youbought your vehicle dictates the fourlanguages based on the most popularlanguages spoken. If the selected languageis not available, SYNC 3 remains in thecurrent active language.

SYNC 3 does not supportthe currently selectedlanguage for the instru-ment cluster and inform-ation and entertainmentdisplay.

The languageselected for theinstrumentcluster andinformation andentertainmentdisplay does notmatch theSYNC 3 SYNC 3 offers several new voice control

features for a wide range of languages.Dialing a contact name directly from thephonebook without pre-recording (forexample, “call John Smith”) or selecting atrack, artist, album, genre or playlist directlyfrom your media player (for example, "playartist Madonna").

language(phone, USB,Bluetoothaudio, voicecontrol andvoice prompts).

SYNC 3 System Reset

The system has a System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC3 feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase anyinformation previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, callhistory, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and holdthe Seek Up (>>|) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. Afterapproximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow 1-2 minutes for the systemreset to complete. You may then resume using the SYNC 3 system.

For additional assistance with SYNC 3troubleshooting please call or visit the FordWebsite.

Ford Support

United States: 1-800-392-3673Customer Relation-ship Center

Canada: 1-800-565-3673

owner.ford.comWebsitewww.syncmyride.cawww.syncmaroute.ca

533



For a complete listing of the accessoriesthat are available for your vehicle, pleasecontact your authorized dealer or visit theonline store web site:

Web Address (United States)

www.Accessories.Ford.com

Web Address (Canada)

www.Accessories.Ford.ca

Ford Accessories are available for yourvehicle through an authorized Ford dealer.Ford Motor Company will repair or replaceany properly authorized dealer-installedFord Original Accessory found to bedefective in factory-supplied materials orworkmanship during the warranty period,as well as any component damaged by thedefective accessories.Ford Motor Company will warrant youraccessory through the warranty thatprovides the greatest benefit:• 24 months, unlimited mileage.• The remainder of your new vehicle

limited warranty.Contact an authorized dealer for detailsand a copy of the warranty.

Exterior style• Bed rails.• Chrome exhaust tips.• Custom graphics*.• Fender flares.• Hood deflector.• Running boards.• Side window deflectors.• Splash guards.• Tailgate dampener.

• Tow hooks.• Trim kits.

Interior style• Ambient lighting.• Floor mats.• Leather-trimmed interior seating*.• Tray floor liners.

Lifestyle• Bed extender.• Bedliners and bedmats.• Bed ramps.• Bed side step.• Ford Telematics™*.• Hitch balls and towbars.• Interior cargo organization and

management.• In-vehicle safe*.• Racks and carriers*.• Rear-seat entertainment*.• Smoker's package.• Sportliner cargo liner*.• Tonneau covers*.• Towing mirrors.• Trailer brake controller.• Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and

accessories.• Truck bed camping tent*.• Truck bed cargo organization and

management.• Wireless charging*.

Peace of mind• Back-up alarm*.• Bed hooks*.• Bumper- and hitch-mounted parking

sensors*.

534


Accessories

• Keyless entry keypad.• Protective seat covers*.• Remote start.• Roadside assistance kits.• Tool or cargo boxes*.• Vehicle security systems.• Wheel locks.• Wheel well liners.

Footnote

*Ford Licensed Accessory. The accessorymanufacturer designs, develops andtherefore warrants Ford LicensedAccessories, and does not design or testthese accessories to Ford MotorCompany engineering requirements.Contact an authorized Ford dealer for themanufacturer's limited warranty details,and request a copy of the Ford LicensedAccessories product limited warrantyfrom the accessory manufacturer.

For maximum vehicle performance, keepthe following information in mind whenadding accessories or equipment to yourvehicle:• When adding accessories, equipment,

passengers and luggage to yourvehicle, do not exceed the total weightcapacity of the vehicle or of the frontor rear axle (GVWR or GAWR asindicated on the Safety ComplianceCertification label). Ask an authorizeddealer for specific weight information.

• The Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) and CanadianRadio TelecommunicationsCommission (CRTC) regulate the useof mobile communications systemsthat are equipped with radiotransmitters, for example, two-wayradios, telephones and theft alarms.Any such equipment installed in yourvehicle should comply with FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)and Canadian RadioTelecommunications Commission(CRTC) regulations and should beinstalled only by an authorized dealer.

535


Accessories

• Mobile communications systems mayharm the operation of your vehicle,particularly if their manufacturer didnot design them specifically forautomotive use.

• If you or an authorized Ford dealer addany non-Ford electrical or electronicaccessories or components to yourvehicle, you may adversely affectbattery performance and durability,and may adversely affect theperformance of other electricalsystems in the vehicle.

536


Accessories

PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISINGCOST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORDPROTECT EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.

Ford Protect Extended ServicePlans (U.S. Only)Ford Protect Extended Service Plan meanspeace of mind. It’s the extended serviceplan backed by Ford Motor Company, andprovides more protection beyond the NewVehicle Limited Warranty coverage. Whenyou visit your Ford Dealer, Insist on genuineFord Protect extended service plans!

Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for ItselfOne trip to the Service Center could easilyexceed the price of your Ford ProtectExtended Service Plan. With Ford Protectyou minimize your risk for unexpectedrepair bills and rising repair costs.

Up to 1,000+ Covered VehicleComponentsThere are four mechanical Ford ProtectExtended Service Plans with differentlevels of coverage. Ask your authorizeddealer for details.1. PremiumCARE - Our most

comprehensive coverage. With over1,000 covered components, this planis so complete it’s probably easier tolist what’s not covered.

2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components,and includes many high-tech items.

3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical

components.Ford Protect Extended Service Plans arehonored by all authorized Ford dealers inthe U.S., Canada and Mexico.

That means you get:• Reliable, quality service at any Ford or

Lincoln dealership.• Repairs performed by factory trained

technicians, using genuine parts.

Rental Car Reimbursement

1st day Rental BenefitIf you bring your car into your dealer forservice, we’ll give you a loaner to use forthe day.

Extended Rental BenefitsIf your vehicle is kept overnight for coveredrepairs, you are eligible for rental carcoverage, including bumper to bumperwarranty repairs, and Field Service Actions.

Roadside AssistanceExclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,including:• Towing, flat-tire change and battery

jump starts.• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.• Travel expense reimbursement for

lodging, meals and rental car.• Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car

coverage or other transportation.

Transferable CoverageIf you sell your vehicle before your FordProtect Extended Service plan coverageexpires, you can transfer any remainingcoverage to the new owner. Which shouldgive you and your potential buyer a littlemore peace of mind.

537


Ford Protect

Less Cost to Properly Maintain YourVehicleFord Protect Extended Service Plan alsooffers a Premium Maintenance Plan thatcovers all scheduled maintenance, andselected wear items. The coverage isprepaid, so you never have to worry aboutthe cost of your vehicle’s maintenance.Covered maintenance includes:• Windshield wiper blades.• Spark plugs.• The clutch disc.• Brake pads and linings.• Shock absorbers.• Struts.• Engine Belts.• Engine coolant hoses, clamps and

o-rings.• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment.

Interest Free Finance OptionsJust a 10% down payment will provide youwith an affordable, no interest, no feepayment program allowing you all thesecurity and benefits Ford ProtectExtended Service Plan has to offer whilepaying over time. You are pre-approvedwith no credit check or hassles. To learnmore, call our Ford Protect ExtendedService Plan specialists at 800-367-3377.Ford Protect Extended Service PlanP.O. Box 321067Detroit, MI 48232

Ford Protect (CANADA ONLY)You can get more protection for yourvehicle by purchasing a Ford ProtectExtended Service Plan. Ford Protect is theonly service contract backed by Ford MotorCompany of Canada, Limited. Dependingon the plan you purchase, Ford ProtectExtended Service Plan provides benefitssuch as:• Rental reimbursement.• Coverage for certain maintenance and

wear items.• Protection against repair costs after

your New Vehicle Limited WarrantyCoverage expires.

• Roadside Assistance benefits.There are several Ford Protect ExtendedService Plans available in various time,distance and deductible combinations.Each plan is tailored to fit your own drivingneeds, including reimbursement for towingand rental. When you purchase FordProtect Extended Service Plan, you receiveadded peace-of-mind protectionthroughout Canada, the United States andMexico, provided by a network ofparticipating authorized Ford MotorCompany dealers.Note: Repairs performed outside ofCanada, the United States and Mexico arenot eligible for Ford Protect ExtendedService Plan coverage.This information is subject to change. Formore information; visit your local Ford ofCanada dealer or www.ford.ca to find theFord Protect Extended Service Plan thatis right for you.

538


Ford Protect

GENERAL MAINTENANCEINFORMATIONWhy Maintain Your Vehicle?Carefully following the maintenanceschedule helps protect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance and may help toincrease the value of your vehicle whenyou sell or trade it. Keep all receipts forcompleted maintenance with your vehicle.We have established regular maintenanceintervals for your vehicle based uponrigorous testing. It is important that youhave your vehicle serviced at the propertimes. These intervals serve two purposes;one is to maintain the reliability of yourvehicle and the second is to keep your costof owning your vehicle down.It is your responsibility to have allscheduled maintenance performed and tomake sure that the materials used meetthe specifications identified in this owner'smanual. See Capacities andSpecifications (page 381).Failure to perform scheduled maintenanceinvalidates warranty coverage on partsaffected by the lack of maintenance.

Why Maintain Your Vehicle at YourDealership?Factory-Trained TechniciansService technicians participate in extensivefactory-sponsored certification training tohelp them become experts on theoperation of your vehicle. Ask yourdealership about the training andcertification their technicians havereceived.

Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®Replacement PartsDealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft andFord-authorized branded re-manufacturedreplacement parts. These parts meet orexceed our specifications. Parts installedat your dealership carry a nationwide24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)parts and labor limited warranty.If you do not use Ford authorized parts theymay not meet our specifications anddepending on the part, it could affectemissions compliance.

ConvenienceMany dealerships have extended eveningand Saturday hours to make your servicevisit more convenient and they offer onestop shopping. They can perform anyservices that are required on your vehicle,from general maintenance to collisionrepairs.Note: Not all dealers have extended hoursor body shops. Please contact your dealerfor details.

Protecting Your InvestmentMaintenance is an investment that paysdividends in the form of improvedreliability, durability and resale value. Tomaintain the proper performance of yourvehicle and its emission control systems,make sure you have scheduledmaintenance performed at the designatedintervals.Your vehicle is equipped with theIntelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, whichdisplays a message in the informationdisplay at the proper oil change interval.This interval may be up to one year or10000 miles (16000 kilometers).

539


Scheduled Maintenance

When the oil change message appears inthe information display, it is time for an oilchange. Make sure you perform the oilchange within two weeks or 500 miles(800 kilometers) of the messageappearing. Make sure you reset theIntelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each oilchange. See General Information (page110).If your information display resetsprematurely or becomes inoperative, youshould perform the oil change interval atsix months or 5000 miles (8000kilometers) from your last oil change.Never exceed one year or 10000 miles(16000 kilometers) between oil changeintervals.Your vehicle is very sophisticated and builtwith multiple, complex, performancesystems. Every manufacturer developsthese systems using differentspecifications and performance features.That is why it is important to rely upon yourdealership to properly diagnose and repairyour vehicle.Ford Motor Company has recommendedmaintenance intervals for various partsand component systems based uponengineering testing. Ford Motor Companyrelies upon this testing to determine themost appropriate mileage for replacementof oils and fluids to protect your vehicle atthe lowest overall cost to you andrecommends against maintenanceschedules that deviate from the scheduledmaintenance information.We strongly recommend the use of onlygenuine Ford, Motorcraft orFord-authorized re-manufacturedreplacement parts engineered for yourvehicle.

Additives and ChemicalsThis owner's manual and the FordWorkshop Manual list the recommendedadditives and chemicals for your vehicle.We do not recommend using chemicals oradditives not approved by us as part ofyour vehicle’s normal maintenance. Pleaseconsult your warranty information.

Oils, Fluids and FlushingIn many cases, fluid discoloration is anormal operating characteristic and, byitself, does not necessarily indicate aconcern or that the fluid needs to bechanged. However, a qualified expert, suchas the factory-trained technicians at yourdealership, should inspect discolored fluidsthat also show signs of overheating orforeign material contaminationimmediately.Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils andfluids at the specified intervals or inconjunction with a repair. Flushing is aviable way to change fluid for many vehiclesub-systems during scheduledmaintenance. It is critical that systems areflushed only with new fluid that is the sameas that required to fill and operate thesystem or using a Ford-approved flushingchemical.

Owner Checks and ServicesMake sure you perform the following basicmaintenance checks and inspections everymonth or at six-month intervals.

540



Check every month

Engine oil level.

Function of all interior and exterior lights.

Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.

Windshield washer fluid level.

Check every six months

Battery connections. Clean if necessary.

Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.

Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.

Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.

Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.

Parking brake for proper operation.

Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.

Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.

Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.

Multi-Point InspectionIn order to keep your vehicle running right,it is important to have the systems on yourvehicle checked regularly. This can helpidentify potential issues and prevent majorproblems. We recommend having thefollowing multi-point inspection performedat every scheduled maintenance intervalto help make sure your vehicle keepsrunning great.

541



Multi-Point inspection

Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)

Horn operationBattery performance

Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioninghoses

Engine air filter

Suspension components for leaks ordamage

Exhaust system

Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation

Tires (including spare) for wear and properpressure**

Fluid levels*; fill if necessary

Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks

Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots* Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer**If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expirationUse By date on the canister. Replace as needed.

Be sure to ask your dealership serviceadvisor or technician about the multi-pointvehicle inspection. It is a comprehensiveway to perform a thorough inspection ofyour vehicle. Your checklist gives youimmediate feedback on the overallcondition of your vehicle.

NORMAL SCHEDULEDMAINTENANCEIntelligent Oil-Life MonitorYour vehicle is equipped with an IntelligentOil-Life Monitor that determines when youshould change the engine oil based on howyour vehicle is used. By using severalimportant factors in its calculations, themonitor helps reduce the cost of owningyour vehicle and reduces environmentalwaste at the same time.

This means you do not have to rememberto change the oil on a mileage-basedschedule. Your vehicle lets you know whenan oil change is due by displaying amessage in the information display.The following table provides examples ofvehicle use and its impact on oil changeintervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oilchange intervals depend on several factorsand generally decrease with severity ofuse.

542



When to expect the message prompting you to change your oil

Vehicle use and exampleInterval

Normal

7500-10000 miles(12000-16000 km)

Normal commuting with highway drivingNo, or moderate, load or towingFlat to moderately hilly roadsNo extended idling

Severe

5000-7499 miles(8000-11999 km)

Moderate to heavy load or towingMountainous or off-road conditionsExtended idlingExtended hot or cold operation

Extreme3000-4999 miles(4800-7999 km) Maximum load or towing

Extreme hot or cold operation

Normal Maintenance Intervals

At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display*

Change engine oil and filter.**

Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure tread depth.

Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).

Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level (if equipped with dipstick). Consult yourdealer for requirements.

Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings, hoses and parking brake.

Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.

Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.

Inspect front axle and U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with grease fittings (Four–wheeldrive vehicles).

Inspect the half-shaft boots.

543



At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display*

Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints. Lubricate any areas with grease fittings.

Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness ordrag.

* Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals.** Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes.

Other maintenance items 1

Replace cabin air filter.Every 20000 miles (32000km)

Replace engine air filter.Every 30000 miles (48000km)

Change engine coolant. 2At 100000 miles (160000km)

Replace spark plugs.Every 100000 miles(160000 km) Inspect accessory drive belt(s). 3

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter.

Every 150000 miles(240000 km)

Change front axle fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).

Change rear axle fluid.

Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).

Replace accessory drive belt(s).1 Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the lastengine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.2 Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every threeyears or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).3 After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.

544



SPECIAL OPERATINGCONDITIONS SCHEDULEDMAINTENANCEIf you operate your vehicle primarily in anyof the following conditions, you need toperform extra maintenance, as indicated.If you operate your vehicle occasionallyunder any of these conditions, it is notnecessary to perform the extramaintenance. For specificrecommendations, see your dealershipservice advisor or technician.

Perform the services shown in thefollowing tables when specified or within3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the OIL CHANGEREQUIRED message appearing in theinformation display.• Example 1: The OIL CHANGE

REQUIRED message comes on at28,751 mi (46,270 km). Perform the30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatictransmission fluid replacement.

• Example 2: The OIL CHANGEREQUIRED message has not comeon, but the odometer reads 30,000 mi(48,000 km) (for example, theIntelligent Oil-Life Monitor was resetat 25,000 mi (40,000 km)). Performthe engine air filter replacement.

Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier

Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the informationdisplay and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-uled Maintenance chart.

As required

Inspect and lubricate U-joints.Inspect frequently, serviceas required

See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.

Change transfer case fluid (Four-wheel drive vehicles).Every 60,000 mi(96,000 km)

Replace spark plugs.

Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use(such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery)

Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the informationdisplay and perform services listed in the Normal Sched-uled Maintenance chart.

As required

Replace engine air filter.Inspect frequently, serviceas required


Replace spark plugs.

545



Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)

Replace engine air filter.Inspect frequently, serviceas required

Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormalnoise, wear, looseness or drag.

Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)

Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure treaddepth.

Change engine oil and filter.*Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)or six months


*Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change.

Off-road operation

Inspect steering linkage, ball joints and U-joints. Lubricateif equipped with grease fittings.

Inspect frequently, serviceas required

Replace engine air filter.

Change engine oil and filter.*Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)or six months

Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormalnoise, wear, looseness or drag.

Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure treaddepth.

Replace front wheel bearing grease and grease seals ifnon-sealed bearings are used (Two-wheel drive vehicles).

Every 30,000 mi(48,000 km)


*Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after each engine oil and filter change.

Exclusive use of E85 (Flex fuel vehicles only)

If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regularunleaded fuel.

Every oil change interval

546



ExceptionsThere are several exceptions to the NormalSchedule.

Axle and Transfer Case MaintenanceAxle(s) and transfer case (4X4 only) fluidchanges or level checks are not requiredunless a leak is suspected or the assemblyhas been submerged in water. During longperiods of trailer towing with outsidetemperatures above 70°F (21°C) or atwide-open throttle for long periods above45 mph (72 km/h), change the rear axlefluid every 30,000 mi (48,000 km), if therear axle is filled with non-synthetic fluid.This interval can be waived and the150,000 mi (240,000km) service intervalcan continue if the rear axle is filled with75W85 synthetic gear fluid meeting Fordspecification WSS-M2C942-A, partnumber XY-75W85-QL, or equivalent. Addfriction modifier XL-3 (EST-M2C118-A) orequivalent for complete refill ofTraction-Lok rear axles.

California Fuel Filter ReplacementIf you register your vehicle in California, theCalifornia Air Resources Board hasdetermined that the failure to perform thismaintenance item does not nullify theemission warranty or limit recall liabilitybefore the completion of your vehicle'suseful life. Ford Motor Company, however,urges you to have all recommendedmaintenance services performed at thespecified intervals and to record all vehicleservice.

Hot Climate Oil Change IntervalsVehicles operating in the Middle East,North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa orlocations with similar climates using anAmerican Petroleum Institute (API)Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certificationmark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normaloil change interval is 3,000 mi (4,800 km).If the available API SM or SN oils are notavailable, then the oil change interval is1,800 mi (2,900 km).

Engine Air Filter ReplacementThe life of the engine air filter is dependenton exposure to dusty and dirty conditions.Vehicles operated in these conditionsrequire frequent inspection andreplacement of the engine air filter.

547



SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):Signature:

Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

548



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

549



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

550



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

551



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

552



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

553



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

554



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

555



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

556



E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

E146852

Repair Order #:

Distance:



Dealer stamp

557



END USER LICENSEAGREEMENTVEHICLE SOFTWARE END USERLICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable)

have acquired a vehicle having severaldevices, including SYNC ® and variouscontrol modules, ("DEVICES") thatinclude software licensed or owned byFord Motor Company and its affiliates("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Thosesoftware products of FORD MOTORCOMPANY origin, as well as associatedmedia, printed materials, and "online"or electronic documentation("SOFTWARE") are protected byinternational intellectual property lawsand treaties. The SOFTWARE islicensed, not sold. All rights reserved.

• The SOFTWARE may interface withand/or communicate with, or may belater upgraded to interface with and/orcommunicate with additional softwareand/or systems provided by FORDMOTOR COMPANY.

IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS ENDUSER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPYTHE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THESOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES,WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENTTO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OFANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: ThisEULA grants you the following license:• You may use the SOFTWARE as

installed on the DEVICES and asotherwise interfacing with systemsand/or services provide by or throughFORD MOTOR COMPANY or its thirdparty software and service providers.

Description of Other Rights andLimitations• Speech Recognition: If the

SOFTWARE includes speechrecognition component(s), you shouldunderstand that speech recognition isan inherently statistical process andthat recognition errors are inherent inthe process. Neither FORD MOTORCOMPANY nor its suppliers shall beliable for any damages arising out oferrors in the speech recognitionprocess. It is your responsibility tomonitor any speech recognitionfunctions included in the system.

• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,Decompilation and Disassembly:You may not reverse engineer,decompile, translate, disassemble orattempt to discover any source codeor underlying ideas or algorithms of theSOFTWARE nor permit others toreverse engineer, decompile ordisassemble the SOFTWARE, exceptand only to the extent that such activityis expressly permitted by applicablelaw notwithstanding this limitation orto the extent as may be permitted bythe licensing terms governing use ofany open source components includedwith the SOFTWARE.

• Limitations on Distributing,Copying, Modifying and CreatingDerivative Works: You may notdistribute, copy, make modificationsto or create derivative works based onthe SOFTWARE, except and only to theextent that such activity is expresslypermitted by applicable lawnotwithstanding this limitation or tothe extent as may be permitted by thelicensing terms governing use of anyopen source components included withthe SOFTWARE.

558


Appendices

• Single EULA: The end userdocumentation for the DEVICES andrelated systems and services maycontain multiple EULAs, such asmultiple translations and/or multiplemedia versions (e.g., in the userdocumentation and in the software).Even if you receive multiple EULAs, youare licensed to use only one (1) copy ofthe SOFTWARE.

• SOFTWARE Transfer: You maypermanently transfer your rights underthis EULA only as part of a sale ortransfer of the DEVICES, provided youretain no copies, you transfer all of theSOFTWARE (including all componentparts, the media and printed materials,any upgrades, and, if applicable, theCertificate(s) of Authenticity), and therecipient agrees to the terms of thisEULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,any transfer must include all priorversions of the SOFTWARE.

• Termination: Without prejudice to anyother rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANYmay terminate this EULA if you fail tocomply with the terms and conditionsof this EULA.

• Internet-Based ServicesComponents: The SOFTWARE maycontain components that enable andfacilitate the use of certainInternet-based services. Youacknowledge and agree that FORDMOTOR COMPANY, third partysoftware and service suppliers, itsaffiliates and/or its designated agentmay automatically check the versionof the SOFTWARE and/or itscomponents that you are utilizing andmay provide upgrades or supplementsto the SOFTWARE that may beautomatically downloaded to yourDEVICES.

• Additional Software/Services: TheSOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTORCOMPANY, third party software andservice suppliers, its affiliates and/orits designated agent to provide or makeavailable to you SOFTWARE updates,supplements, add-on components, orInternet-based services componentsof the SOFTWARE after the date youobtain your initial copy of theSOFTWARE ("SupplementalComponents".) SOFTWARE updatesmay cause you to incur additionalcharges from your wireless serviceprovider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANYor third party software and servicessuppliers provide or make available toyou Supplemental Components andno other EULA terms are providedalong with the SupplementalComponents, then the terms of thisEULA shall apply. FORD MOTORCOMPANY, its affiliates and/or itsdesignated agent reserve the right todiscontinue without liability anyInternet-based services provided toyou or made available to you throughthe use of the SOFTWARE.

559


Appendices

• Links to Third Party Sites: TheSOFTWARE may provide you with theability to link to third party sites. Thethird party sites are not under thecontrol of FORD MOTOR COMPANY,its affiliates and/or its designatedagent. Neither FORD MOTORCOMPANY nor its affiliates nor itsdesignated agent are responsible for(I) the contents of any third party sites,any links contained in third party sites,or any changes or updates to thirdparty sites, or (ii) webcasting or anyother form of transmission receivedfrom any third party sites. If theSOFTWARE provides links to thirdparty sites, those links are provided toyou only as a convenience, and theinclusion of any link does not imply anendorsement of the third party site byFORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliatesand/or its designated agent.

• Obligation to Drive Responsibly:You recognize your obligation to driveresponsibly and keep attention on theroad. You will read and abide with theDEVICES operating instructionsparticularly as they pertain to safetyand you agree to assume any riskassociated with the use of theDEVICES.

UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORDMOTOR COMPANY separate from theDEVICES on media such as a ROM chip,CD ROM disk(s) or via web download orother means, and is labeled "For UpgradePurposes Only" or "For Recovery PurposesOnly" you may install one (1) copy of suchSOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as areplacement copy for the existingSOFTWARE, and use it in accordance withthis EULA, including any additional EULAterms accompanying the upgradeSOFTWARE.

INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:All title and intellectual property rights inand to the SOFTWARE (including but notlimited to any images, photographs,animations, video, audio, music, text and"applets" incorporated into theSOFTWARE), the accompanying printedmaterials, and any copies of theSOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTORCOMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. TheSOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You maynot copy the printed materialsaccompanying the SOFTWARE. All titleand intellectual property rights in and tothe content which may be accessedthrough use of the SOFTWARE is theproperty of the respective content ownerand may be protected by applicablecopyright or other intellectual propertylaws and treaties. This EULA grants you norights to use such content outside itsintended use. All rights not specificallygranted under this EULA are reserved byFORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates,and third party software and serviceproviders and suppliers. Use of any on-lineservices which may be accessed throughthe SOFTWARE may be governed by therespective terms of use relating to suchservices. If this SOFTWARE containsdocumentation that is provided only inelectronic form, you may print one copy ofsuch electronic documentation.EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: Youacknowledge that the SOFTWARE issubject to U.S. and European Union exportjurisdiction. You agree to comply with allapplicable international and national lawsthat apply to the SOFTWARE, includingthe U.S. Export Administration Regulations,as well as end-user, end-use anddestination restrictions issued by U.S. andother governments.

560


Appendices

TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grantyou any rights in connection with anytrademarks or service marks of FORDMOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and thirdparty software and service providers.PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer toFORD MOTOR COMPANY instructionsprovided in the documentation for theDEVICES product support, such as thevehicle owner guide.Should you have any questions concerningthis EULA, or if you desire to contact FORDMOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,please refer to the address provided in thedocumentation for the DEVICES.No Liability for Certain Damages:EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORDMOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTYSOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NOLIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTALDAMAGES ARISING FROM OR INCONNECTION WITH THE USE ORPERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THISLIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANYREMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIALPURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIESOTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BEEXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEWVEHICLE.

SYNC® Automotive Important SafetyInformation Read and followinstructions:• Before using your SYNC® system, read

and follow all instructions and safetyinformation provided in this end usermanual ("Owner Guide".) Notfollowing precautions found in theOwner Guide can lead to an accidentor other serious injuries.

General Operation• Voice Command Control: Certain

functions within the SYNC® systemmay be accomplished using voicecommands. Using voice commandswhile driving helps you to operate thesystem without removing your handsfrom the wheel or eyes from the road.

• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do notaccess any function requiring aprolonged view of the screen while youare driving. Pull over in a safe and legalmanner before attempting to access afunction of the system requiringprolonged attention.

• Volume Setting: Do not raise thevolume excessively. Keep the volumeat a level where you can still hearoutside traffic and emergency signalswhile driving. Driving while unable tohear these sounds could cause anaccident.

• Navigation Features: Any navigationfeatures included in the system areintended to provide turn by turninstructions to get you to a desireddestination. Please make certain allpersons using this system carefullyread and follow instructions and safetyinformation fully.

• Distraction Hazard: Any navigationfeatures may require manual(non-verbal) setup. Attempting toperform such set-up or insert datawhile driving can distract your attentionand could cause an accident or otherserious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safeand legal manner before attemptingthese operations.

• Let Your Judgment Prevail: Anynavigation features are provided onlyas an aid. Make your driving decisionsbased on your observations of localconditions and existing trafficregulations. Any such feature is not a

561


Appendices

substitute for your personal judgment.Any route suggestions made by thissystem should never replace any localtraffic regulations or your personaljudgment or knowledge of safe drivingpractices.

• Route Safety: Do not follow the routesuggestions if doing so would result inan unsafe or illegal maneuver, if youwould be placed in an unsafe situation,or if you would be directed into an areathat you consider unsafe. The driver isultimately responsible for the safeoperation of the vehicle and therefore,must evaluate whether it is safe tofollow the suggested directions.

• Potential Map Inaccuracy: Mapsused by this system may be inaccuratebecause of changes in roads, trafficcontrols or driving conditions. Alwaysuse good judgment and common sensewhen following the suggested routes.

• Emergency Services: Do not rely onany navigation features included in thesystem to route you to emergencyservices. Ask local authorities or anemergency services operator for theselocations. Not all emergency servicessuch as police, fire stations, hospitalsand clinics are likely to be contained inthe map database for such navigationfeatures.

Your Responsibilities and Assumptions ofRisk• You agree to each of the following:(a)

Any use of the SOFTWARE whiledriving an automobile or other vehiclein violation of applicable law orotherwise driving in an unsafe mannerpresents a significant risk of distracteddriving and should not be attemptedunder any circumstances;(b) Use ofthe SOFTWARE at excessive volumeposes a significant risk of hearingdamage and should not be attemptedunder any circumstances;(c) TheSOFTWARE may not be compatiblewith new or different versions of anoperating system, third party software,or third party services, and theSOFTWARE may potentially cause acritical failure of an operating system,third party software, or third partyservice.(d) Any third party serviceaccessed by or third party softwareused with the SOFTWARE (I) maycharge an additional fee for access, (ii)may not work correctly, on anuninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii)may change streaming formats ordiscontinue operation, (iv) may containadult, profane or offensive content; and(v) may contain inaccurate, false ormisleading traffic, weather, financialor safety information or other content;and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE maycause you to incur additional chargesfrom your wireless service provider(WSP) and any data or minutecalculators that may be included in thesoftware program are for referenceonly, are not warranted in any way andshould not be relied upon in anyway.

• When using the SOFTWARE, you agreeto be responsible for and assume theentire risk to the items set forth inSection (a) – (e) above.

562


Appendices

Disclaimer of WarrantyYOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE ANDAGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES ANDSOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK ANDTHAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TOSATISFACTORY QUALITY,PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY,ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU.TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTEDBY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWAREAND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE ORTHIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED"AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALLFAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANYHEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIESAND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TOTHE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTYSOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTYSERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED ORSTATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOTLIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIESAND/OR CONDITIONS OFMERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORYQUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR ANARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY,OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, ANDNON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTYRIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOESNOT WARRANT (a) AGAINSTINTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENTOF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTYSOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES,(b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTYSOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICESWILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c)THAT THE OPERATION OF THESOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BEUNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d)OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, ORTHIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BECORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTENINFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BYFORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITSAUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL

CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THESOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVEDEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRECOST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOMEJURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THEDISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIESOR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLESTATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER,SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOTFULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLEWARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTORCOMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THEWARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDINGWITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THEEXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICTBETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTIONAND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THEWARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL.

Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction• The laws of the State of Michigan

govern this EULA and Your use of theSOFTWARE. Your use of theSOFTWARE may also be subject toother local, state, national, orinternational laws. Any litigation arisingout of or related to this EULA shall bebrought and maintained exclusively ina court of the State of Michiganlocated in Wayne County or in theUnited States District Court for theEastern District of Michigan. You herebyconsent to submit to the personaljurisdiction of a court in the State ofMichigan located in Wayne County andthe United States District Court for theEastern District of Michigan for anydispute arising out of or relating to thisEULA.

563


Appendices

Binding Arbitration and Class ActionWaiver(a) Application. This Section applies toany dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOTINCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TOCOPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THEENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OFFORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.Dispute means any dispute, action, or othercontroversy between You and FORDMOTOR COMPANY, other than theexceptions listed above, concerning theSOFTWARE (including its price) or thisEULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort,statute, regulation, ordinance, or any otherlegal or equitable basis.(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of aDispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANYmust give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,which is a written statement of the name,address, and contact information of theparty giving it, the facts giving rise to thedispute, and the relief requested. You andFORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt toresolve any dispute through informalnegotiation within 60 days from the datethe Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days,You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY maycommence arbitration.(c) Small claims court. You may alsolitigate any dispute in small claims courtin your county of residence or FORDMOTOR COMPANY’S principal place ofbusiness, if the dispute meets allrequirements to be heard in the smallclaims court. You may litigate in smallclaims court whether or not Younegotiated informally first.(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORDMOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve anydispute by informal negotiation or in smallclaims court, any other effort to resolvethe dispute will be conducted exclusivelyby binding arbitration. You are giving up

the right to litigate (or participate in as aparty or class member) all disputes in courtbefore a judge or jury. Instead, all disputeswill be resolved before a neutral arbitrator,whose decision will be final except for alimited right of appeal under the FederalArbitration Act. Any court with jurisdictionover the parties may enforce thearbitrator’s award.(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedingsto resolve or litigate any dispute in anyforum will be conducted solely on anindividual basis. Neither you nor FORDMOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have anydispute heard as a class action, as a privateattorney general action, or in any otherproceeding in which any party acts orproposes to act in a representativecapacity. No arbitration or proceeding willbe combined with another without theprior written consent of all parties to allaffected arbitrations or proceedings.(f) Arbitration procedure. Anyarbitration will be conducted by theAmerican Arbitration Association (the“AAA”), under its Commercial ArbitrationRules. If You are an individual and use theSOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, orif the value of the dispute is $75,000 orless whether or not You are an individualor how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAASupplementary Procedures forConsumer-Related Disputes will alsoapply. To commence arbitration, submit aCommercial Arbitration Rules Demand forArbitration form to the AAA. You mayrequest a telephonic or in-person hearingby following the AAA rules. In a disputeinvolving $10,000 or less, any hearing willbe telephonic unless the arbitrator findsgood cause to hold an in-person hearinginstead. For more information, see adr.orgor call 1-800-778-7879. You agree tocommence arbitration only in your countyof residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’Sprincipal place of business. The arbitrator

564


Appendices

may award the same damages to Youindividually as a court could. The arbitratormay award declaratory or injunctive reliefonly to You individually, and only to theextent required to satisfy Your individualclaim.(g) Arbitration fees and incentives.• I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.

FORD MOTOR COMPANY willpromptly reimburse your filing fees andpay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees andexpenses. If you reject FORD MOTORCOMPANY’S last written settlementoffer made before the arbitrator wasappointed (“last written offer”), yourdispute goes all the way to anarbitrator’s decision (called an“award”), and the arbitrator awardsyou more than the last written offer,FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give youthree incentives: (1) pay the greater ofthe award or $1,000; (2) pay twice yourreasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and(3) reimburse any expenses (includingexpert witness fees and costs) thatyour attorney reasonably accrues forinvestigating, preparing, and pursuingyour claim in arbitration. The arbitratorwill determine the amounts.

• ii. Disputes involving more than$75,000. The AAA rules will governpayment of filing fees and the AAA’sand arbitrator’s fees and expenses.

• iii. Disputes involving any amount. Inany arbitration you commence, FORDMOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAAor arbitrator’s fees and expenses, orYour filing fees it reimbursed, only if thearbitrator finds the arbitration frivolousor brought for an improper purpose. Inany arbitration FORD MOTORCOMPANY commences, it will pay all

filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees andexpenses. It will not seek its attorney’sfees or expenses from you in anyarbitration. Fees and expenses are notcounted in determining how much adispute involves.

(h) Claims or disputes must be filedwithin one year. To the extent permittedby law, any claim or dispute under thisEULA to which this Section applies mustbe filed within one year in small claimscourt (Section c) or in arbitration (Sectiond). The one-year period begins when theclaim or dispute first could be filed. If sucha claim or dispute is not filed within oneyear, it is permanently barred.(I) Severability. If the class action waiver(Section e) is found to be illegal orunenforceable as to all or some parts of adispute, then that portion of Section e willnot apply to those parts. Instead, thoseparts will be severed and proceed in a courtof law, with the remaining parts proceedingin arbitration. If any other provision of thatportion Section e is found to be illegal orunenforceable, that provision will besevered with the remainder of Section eremaining in full force and effect.

Telenav Software End User LicenseAgreementPlease read these terms and conditionscarefully before you use the TeleNavSoftware. Your use of the TeleNavSoftware indicates that you accept theseterms and conditions. If you do not acceptthese terms and conditions, do not breakthe seal of the package, launch, orotherwise use the TeleNav Software.TeleNav may revise this Agreement andthe privacy policy at any time, with orwithout notice to you. You agree to visithttp://www.telenav.com from time to timeto review the then current version of thisAgreement and of the privacy policy.

565


Appendices

1. Safe and Lawful UseYou acknowledge that devoting attentionto the TeleNav Software may pose a riskof injury or death to you and others insituations that otherwise require yourundivided attention, and you thereforeagree to comply with the following whenusing the TeleNav Software:(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwisedrive safely;(b) use your own personal judgment whiledriving. If you feel that a route suggestedby the TeleNav Software instructs you toperform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,places you in an unsafe situation, or directsyou into an area that you consider to beunsafe, do not follow such instructions;(c) do not input destinations, or otherwisemanipulate the TeleNav Software, unlessyour vehicle is stationary and parked;(d) do not use the TeleNav Software forany illegal, unauthorized, unintended,unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes,or in any manner inconsistent with thisAgreement;(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devicesand cables necessary for use of theTeleNav Software in a secure manner inyour vehicle so that they will not interferewith your driving and will not prevent theoperation of any safety device (such as anairbag).You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNavharmless against all claims resulting fromany dangerous or otherwise inappropriateuse of the TeleNav Software in any movingvehicle, including as a result of your failureto comply with the directions above.

2. Account InformationYou agree: (a) when registering theTeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav withtrue, accurate, current, and completeinformation about yourself, and (b) toinform TeleNav promptly of any changesto such information, and to keep it true,accurate, current and complete.

3. Software License• Subject to your compliance with the

terms of this Agreement, TeleNavhereby grants to you a personal,non-exclusive, non-transferable license(except as expressly permitted belowin connection with your permanenttransfer of the TeleNav Softwarelicense), without the right tosublicense, to use the TeleNavSoftware (in object code form only) inorder to access and use the TeleNavSoftware. This license shall terminateupon any termination or expiration ofthis Agreement. You agree that you willuse the TeleNav Software only for yourpersonal business or leisure purposes,and not to provide commercialnavigation services to other parties.

3.1 License Limitations• (a) reverse engineer, decompile,

disassemble, translate, modify, alteror otherwise change the TeleNavSoftware or any part thereof; (b)attempt to derive the source code,audio library or structure of theTeleNav Software without the priorexpress written consent of TeleNav;(c) remove from the TeleNavSoftware, or alter, any of TeleNav's orits suppliers' trademarks, trade names,logos, patent or copyright notices, orother notices or markings; (d)

566


Appendices

distribute, sublicense or otherwisetransfer the TeleNav Software toothers, except as part of yourpermanent transfer of the TeleNavSoftware; or (e) use the TeleNavSoftware in any manner that

I. infringes the intellectual property orproprietary rights, rights of publicity orprivacy or other rights of any party,ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance orregulation, including but not limited to lawsand regulations related to spamming,privacy, consumer and child protection,obscenity or defamation, oriii. is harmful, threatening, abusive,harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar,obscene, libelous, or otherwiseobjectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, orotherwise permit unauthorized access bythird parties to the TeleNav Softwarewithout advanced written permission ofTeleNav.

4. Disclaimers• To the fullest extent permissible

pursuant to applicable law, in no eventwill TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers,or agents or employees of any of theforegoing, be liable for any decisionmade or action taken by you or anyoneelse in reliance on the informationprovided by the TeleNav Software.TeleNav also does not warrant theaccuracy of the map or other data usedfor the TeleNav Software. Such datamay not always reflect reality due to,among other things, road closures,construction, weather, new roads andother changing conditions. You areresponsible for the entire risk arisingout of your use of the TeleNavSoftware. For example but withoutlimitation, you agree not to rely on theTeleNav Software for criticalnavigation in areas where thewell-being or survival of you or others

is dependent on the accuracy ofnavigation, as the maps or functionalityof the TeleNav Software are notintended to support such high riskapplications, especially in more remotegeographical areas.

• TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMSAND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES INCONNECTION WITH THE TELENAVSOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALLWARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISEFROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOMOR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOTLIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A PARTICULARPURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENTOF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITHRESPECT TO THE TELENAVSOFTWARE.

• Certain jurisdictions do not permit thedisclaimer of certain warranties, so thislimitation may not apply to you.

5. Limitation of Liability• TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER

APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NOCIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAVOR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERSBE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRDPARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOTLIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THEINABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENTOR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA,LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OFPROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTIONOR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THEUSE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THETELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IFTELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGESTHAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY

567


Appendices

REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGESREFERENCED HEREIN AND ALLDIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES INCONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDINGNEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THEENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV ANDOF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERSSHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNTACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THETELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATESAND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOTALLOW THE EXCLUSION ORLIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THEABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONSMAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

6. Arbitration and Governing Law• You agree that any dispute, claim or

controversy arising out of or relating tothis Agreement or the TeleNavSoftware shall be settled byindependent arbitration involving aneutral arbitrator and administered bythe American Arbitration Associationin the County of Santa Clara, California.The arbitrator shall apply theCommercial Arbitration Rules of theAmerican Arbitration Association, andthe judgment upon the award renderedby the arbitrator may be entered by anycourt having jurisdiction. Note thatthere is no judge or jury in an arbitrationproceeding and the decision of thearbitrator shall be binding upon bothparties. You expressly agree to waiveyour right to a jury trial. This Agreementand performance hereunder will begoverned by and construed inaccordance with the laws of the Stateof California, without giving effect toits conflict of law provisions. To theextent judicial action is necessary inconnection with the binding arbitration,both TeleNav and you agree to submit

to the exclusive jurisdiction of thecourts of the County of Santa Clara,California. The United NationsConvention on Contracts for theInternational Sale of Goods shall notapply.

7. Assignment• You may not resell, assign, or transfer

this Agreement or any of your rights orobligations, except in totality, inconnection with your permanenttransfer of the TeleNav Software, andexpressly conditioned upon the newuser of the TeleNav Software agreeingto be bound by the terms andconditions of this Agreement. Any suchsale, assignment or transfer that is notexpressly permitted under thisparagraph will result in immediatetermination of this Agreement, withoutliability to TeleNav, in which case youand all other parties shall immediatelycease all use of the TeleNav Software.Notwithstanding the foregoing,TeleNav may assign this Agreement toany other party at any time withoutnotice, provided the assignee remainsbound by this Agreement.

8. Miscellaneous

8.1This Agreement constitutes the entireagreement between TeleNav and you withrespect to the subject matter hereof.

8.2Except for the limited licenses expresslygranted in this Agreement, TeleNav retainsall right, title and interest in and to theTeleNav Software, including withoutlimitation all related intellectual propertyrights. No licenses or other rights which arenot expressly granted in this Agreementare intended to, or shall be, granted or

568


Appendices

conferred by implication, statute,inducement, estoppel or otherwise, andTeleNav and its suppliers and licensorshereby reserve all of their respective rightsother than the licenses explicitly grantedin this Agreement.

8.3By using the TeleNav Software, youconsent to receive from TeleNav allcommunications, including notices,agreements, legally required disclosuresor other information in connection with theTeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")electronically. TeleNav may provide suchNotices by posting them on TeleNav'sWebsite or by downloading such Noticesto your wireless device. If you desire towithdraw your consent to receive Noticeselectronically, you must discontinue youruse of the TeleNav Software.

8.4TeleNav's or your failure to requireperformance of any provision shall notaffect that party's right to requireperformance at any time thereafter, norshall a waiver of any breach or default ofthis Agreement constitute a waiver of anysubsequent breach or default or a waiverof the provision itself.

8.5If any provision herein is heldunenforceable, then such provision will bemodified to reflect the intention of theparties, and the remaining provisions ofthis Agreement will remain in full force andeffect.

8.6The headings in this Agreement are forconvenience of reference only, will not bedeemed to be a part of this Agreement,and will not be referred to in connectionwith the construction or interpretation ofthis Agreement. As used in this Agreement,the words "include" and "including" andvariations thereof, will not be deemed tobe terms of limitation, but rather will bedeemed to be followed by the words"without limitation".

9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions• The Telenav Software utilizes map and

other data licensed to Telenav by thirdparty vendors for the benefit of you andother end users. This Agreementincludes end-user terms applicable tothese companies (included at the endof this Agreement), and thus your useof the Telenav Software is also subjectto such terms. You agree to complywith the following additional terms andconditions, which are applicable toTelenav’s third party vendor licensors::

9.1 End User Terms Required by HERENorth America, LLCThe data (“Data”) is provided for yourpersonal, internal use only and not forresale. It is protected by copyright, and issubject to the following terms andconditions which are agreed to by you, onthe one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) andits licensors (including their licensors andsuppliers) on the other hand.© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.The Data for areas of Canada includesinformation taken with permission fromCanadian authorities, including: © HerMajesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada PostCorporation, GeoBase®, © Department ofNatural Resources Canada.

569


Appendices

HERE holds a non-exclusive license fromthe United States Postal Service® topublish and sell ZIP+4® information.©United States Postal Service® 2014.Prices are not established, controlled orapproved by the United States PostalService®. The following trademarks andregistrations are owned by the USPS:United States Postal Service, USPS, andZIP+4The Data for Mexico includes certain datafrom Instituto Nacional de Estadística yGeografía.

9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2(Shanghai) Co., LtdThe data (“Data”) is provided for yourpersonal, internal use only and not forresale. It is protected by copyright, and issubject to the following terms andconditions which are agreed to by you, onthe one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co.,Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (includingtheir licensors and suppliers) on the otherhand. 20xx. All rights reserved

Terms and ConditionsPermitted Use. You agree to use this Datatogether with the Telenav Software solelyfor the internal business and personalpurposes for which you were licensed, andnot for service bureau, time-sharing orother similar purposes. Accordingly, butsubject to the restrictions set forth in thefollowing paragraphs, you agree not tootherwise reproduce, copy, modify,decompile, disassemble, create anyderivative works of, or reverse engineer anyportion of this Data, and may not transferor distribute it in any form, for any purpose,except to the extent permitted bymandatory laws.

Restrictions. Except where you have beenspecifically licensed to do so by Telenav,and without limiting the precedingparagraph, you may not use this Data (a)with any products, systems, or applicationsinstalled or otherwise connected to or incommunication with vehicles, capable ofvehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,real time route guidance, fleetmanagement or similar applications; or (b)with or in communication with anypositioning devices or any mobile orwireless-connected electronic or computerdevices, including without limitationcellular phones, palmtop and handheldcomputers, pagers, and personal digitalassistants or PDAs.Warning. The Data may containinaccurate or incomplete information dueto the passage of time, changingcircumstances, sources used and thenature of collecting comprehensivegeographic data, any of which may lead toincorrect results.No Warranty. This Data is provided to you“as is,” and you agree to use it at your ownrisk. Telenav and its licensors (and theirlicensors and suppliers) make noguarantees, representations or warrantiesof any kind, express or implied, arising bylaw or otherwise, including but not limitedto, content, quality, accuracy,completeness, effectiveness, reliability,fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,use or results to be obtained from thisData, or that the Data or server will beuninterrupted or error-free.Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV ANDITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIRLICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIMANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

570


Appendices

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ORNON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,Territories and Countries do not allowcertain warranty exclusions, so to thatextent the above exclusion may not applyto you.Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV ANDITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIRLICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOTBE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANYCLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THECAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND ORACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY ORDAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICHMAY RESULT FROM THE USE ORPOSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; ORFOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANYOTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGESARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF ORINABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, ORTHE BREACH OF THESE TERMS ORCONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTIONIN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON AWARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITSLICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SomeStates, Territories and Countries do notallow certain liability exclusions ordamages limitations, so to that extent theabove may not apply to you.Export Control. You shall not export fromanywhere any part of the Data or any directproduct thereof except in compliance with,and with all licenses and approvalsrequired under, applicable export laws,rules and regulations, including but notlimited to the laws, rules and regulationsadministered by the Office of ForeignAssets Control of the U.S. Department ofCommerce and the Bureau of Industry andSecurity of the U.S. Department ofCommerce. To the extent that any such

export laws, rules or regulations prohibitHERE from complying with any of itsobligations hereunder to deliver ordistribute Data, such failure shall beexcused and shall not constitute a breachof this Agreement.Entire Agreement. These terms andconditions constitute the entire agreementbetween Telenav (and its licensors,including their licensors and suppliers) andyou pertaining to the subject matter hereof,and supersedes in their entirety any andall written or oral agreements previouslyexisting between us with respect to suchsubject matter.Governing Law. The above terms andconditions shall be governed by the lawsof the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”where European HERE Data is used],without giving effect to (i) its conflict oflaws provisions, or (ii) the United NationsConvention for Contracts for theInternational Sale of Goods, which isexplicitly excluded. You agree to submit tothe jurisdiction of the State of Illinois[insert “The Netherlands” where EuropeanHERE Data is used] for any and alldisputes, claims and actions arising fromor in connection with the Data provided toyou hereunder.Government End Users. If the Data isbeing acquired by or on behalf of theUnited States government or any otherentity seeking or applying rights similar tothose customarily claimed by the UnitedStates government, this Data is a“commercial item” as that term is definedat 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed inaccordance with these End-User Terms,and each copy of Data delivered orotherwise furnished shall be marked andembedded as appropriate with thefollowing “Notice of Use,” and shall betreated in accordance with such Notice:

571


Appendices

NOTICE OF USE

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425

West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois60606

This Data is a commercial item asdefined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to

these End-User Terms under which thisData was provided.

© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.

If the Contracting Officer, federalgovernment agency, or any federal officialrefuses to use the legend provided herein,the Contracting Officer, federalgovernment agency, or any federal officialmust notify HERE prior to seekingadditional or alternative rights in the Data.

I. US/Canada Territory

A. United States Data. The End-UserTerms for any Application containingData for the United States shall containthe following notices:

“HERE holds a non-exclusive licensefrom the United States PostalService® to publish and sell ZIP+4®information.”

“©United States Postal Service®20XX. Prices are not established,controlled or approved by the UnitedStates Postal Service®. The followingtrademarks and registrations areowned by the USPS: United StatesPostal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”

B. Canada Data. The following provi-sions apply to the Data for Canada,which may include or reflect data fromthird party licensors (“Third PartyData”), including Her Majesty the Queenin Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”),Canada Post Corporation (“CanadaPost”) and the Department of NaturalResources of Canada (“NRCan”):

1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Clientagrees that its use of the Third PartyData is subject to the following provi-sions:

a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Datais licensed on an “as is” basis. Thelicensors of such data, including HerMajesty, Canada Post and NRCan,make no guarantees, representa-tions or warranties respecting suchdata, either express or implied,arising by law or otherwise, includingbut not limited to, effectiveness,completeness, accuracy or fitnessfor a particular purpose.

b. Limitation on Liability: The ThirdParty Data licensors, including HerMajesty, Canada Post and NRCan,shall not be liable: (i) in respect ofany claim, demand or action, irre-spective of the nature of the causeof the claim, demand or actionalleging any loss, injury or damages,direct or indirect, which may resultfrom the use or possession of suchData; or (ii) in any way for loss ofrevenues or contracts, or any otherconsequential loss of any kindresulting from any defect in theData.

572


Appendices

2. Copyright Notice: In connection witheach copy of all or any portion of theData for the Territory of Canada, Clientshall affix in a conspicuous manner thefollowing copyright notice on at leastone of: (i) the label for the storagemedia of the copy; (ii) the packagingfor the copy; or (iii) other materialspackaged with the copy, such as usermanuals or end user license agree-ments: “This data includes informationtaken with permission from Canadianauthorities, including © Her Majestythe Queen in Right of Canada, ©Queen's Printer for Ontario, © CanadaPost Corporation, GeoBase®, © TheDepartment of Natural ResourcesCanada. All rights reserved.”

3. End-User Terms: Except as other-wise agreed by the parties, in connec-tion with the provision of any portionof the Data for the Territory of Canadato End-Users as may be authorizedunder the Agreement, Client shallprovide such End-Users, in a reason-ably conspicuous manner, with terms(set forth with other end user termsrequired to be provided under theAgreement, or as otherwise may beprovided, by Client) which shall includethe following provisions on behalf ofthe Third Party Data licensors,including Her Majesty, Canada Postand NRCan:

The Data may include or reflectdata of licensors, including HerMajesty the Queen in the Right ofCanada (“Her Majesty”), CanadaPost Corporation (“Canada Post”)and the Department of NaturalResources Canada (“NRCan”). Suchdata is licensed on an “as is” basis.The licensors, including Her Majesty,Canada Post and NRCan, make noguarantees, representations orwarranties respecting such data,

either express or implied, arising bylaw or otherwise, including but notlimited to, effectiveness, complete-ness, accuracy or fitness for aparticular purpose. The licensors,including Her Majesty, Canada Postand NRCan, shall not be liable inrespect of any claim, demand oraction, irrespective of the nature ofthe cause of the claim, demand oraction alleging any loss, injury ordamages, direct or indirect, whichmay result from the use or posses-sion of the data or the Data. Thelicensors, including Her Majesty,Canada Post and NRCan, shall notbe liable in any way for loss ofrevenues or contracts, or any otherconsequential loss of any kindresulting from any defect in the dataor the Data.End User shall indemnify and saveharmless the licensors, including HerMajesty, Canada Post and NRCan,and their officers, employees andagents from and against any claim,demand or action, irrespective ofthe nature of the cause of the claim,demand or action, alleging loss,costs, expenses, damages or injuries(including injuries resulting in death)arising out of the use or possessionof the data or the Data.

4. Additional Provisions: The termscontained in this Section are in addi-tion to all of the rights and obligationsof the parties under the Agreement.To the extent that any of the provi-sions of this Section are inconsistentwith, or conflict with, any other provi-sions of the Agreement, the provisionsof this Section shall prevail.

573


Appendices

II. Mexico. The following provision appliesto the Data for Mexico, which includescertain data from the Instituto Nacionalde Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):

A. Any and all copies of the Data and/orpackaging containing Data for Mexicoshall contain the following notice:“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional deEstadística y Geografía)”

III. Latin America Territory

A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copiesof the Data and/or packaging relatingthereto shall include the respective ThirdParty Notices set forth below and usedas described below corresponding tothe Territory (or portion thereof)included in such copy:

NoticeTerritory

“INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICOMILITAR DEL ECUADORAUTORIZACION N° IGM-2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DEENERO DE 2011”

Ecuador

“source: © IGN 2009 - BDTOPO ®”

“Fuente: INEGI (InstitutoNacional de Estadística yGeografía)”

Guade-loupe,FrenchGuianaandMarti-niqueMexico

IV. Middle East Territory


NoticeCountry

“© Royal JordanianGeographic Centre”. Theforegoing notice requirementfor Jordan Data is a materialterm of the Agreement. IfClient or any of its permitted

Jordan

sublicensees (if any) fail tomeet such requirement, HEREshall have the right toterminate Client’s licensewith respect to the JordanData.

B. Jordan Data. Client and its permittedsublicensees (if any) are restricted fromlicensing and/or otherwise distributingHERE’s database for the country ofJordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter-prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanianentities for use of the Jordan Data solelyin Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers.In addition, Client, its permitted subli-censees (if any) and End-Users arerestricted from using the Jordan Data inEnterprise Applications if such party is(i) a non-Jordanian entity using theJordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) aJordan-based customer. For purposesof the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica-tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic-ations, GIS applications, mobile businessasset management applications, callcenter applications, telematics applica-tions, public organization Internetapplications or for providing geocodingservices.

574


Appendices

V. Europe Territory

A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe

1. General Restrictions Applicable toTraffic Codes. Client acknowledgesand agrees that in certain countries ofthe Europe Territory, Client will needto obtain rights directly from thirdparty RDS-TMC code providers toreceive and use the Traffic Codes inthe Data and to deliver to End-UsersTransactions in any way derived fromor based on such Traffic Codes. Forsuch countries, HERE shall deliver theData incorporating Traffic Codes toClient only after receiving certificationfrom Client of its having obtained suchrights.

2. Display of Third Party RightsLegends for Belgium. Client shall, foreach Transaction that uses TrafficCodes for Belgium, provide thefollowing notice to the End-User:“Traffic Codes for Belgium areprovided by the Ministerie van deVlaamse Gemeenschap and theMinistèrie de l’Equipement et desTransports.”

B. Paper Maps. With respect to anylicense granted to Client relating tomaking, selling or distributing papermaps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper orpaper-like medium): (a) such licensewith respect to Data for the Territory ofGreat Britain is conditioned on Client’sentering into and complying with aseparate written agreement with theOrdnance Survey (“OS”) to create andsell paper maps, Client’s paying to theOS any and all applicable paper maproyalties, and Client’s complying withthe OS copyright notice requirements;(b) such license for selling or otherwisedistributing for charge with respect toData for the Territory of Czech Republic

is conditioned on Client’s obtaining priorwritten consent from Kartografie a.s.;(c) such license for selling or distributingwith respect to Data for the Territory ofSwitzerland is conditioned on Client’sobtaining a permit from Bundesamt fürLandestopografie of Switzerland; (d)Client is restricted from using Data forthe Territory of France to create papermaps with a scale between 1:5,000 and1:250,000; and (e) Client is restrictedfrom using any Data to create, sell ordistribute paper maps that are the sameor substantially similar, in terms of datacontent and specific use of color,symbols and scale, to paper mapspublished by the European nationalmapping agencies, including withoutlimitation, Landervermessungämter ofGermany, Topografische Dienst of theNetherlands, Nationaal GeografischInstituut of Belgium, Bundesamt fürLandestopografie of Switzerland,Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung-swesen of Austria, and the NationalLand Survey of Sweden.

C. OS Enforcement. Without limitingSection IV(B) above, with respect toData for the Territory of Great Britain,Client acknowledges and agrees thatthe Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bringa direct action against Client to enforcecompliance with the OS copyright notice(see Section IV(D) below) and papermap requirements (see Section IV(B)above) contained in this Agreement.

D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copiesof the Data and/or packaging relatingthereto shall include the respective ThirdParty Notices set forth below and usedas described below corresponding tothe Territory (or portion thereof)included in such copy:

NoticeCountry(ies)

575


Appendices

“© Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessungswesen”

Austria

“© EuroGeographics”

CroatiaCyprus,Estonia,Latvia,Lithuania,Moldova,Poland,Sloveniaand/orUkraine

“source: © IGN 2009 – BDTOPO ®”

France

“Die Grundlagendatenwurden mit Genehmigungder zuständigen Behördenentnommen”

Germany

“Contains OrdnanceSurvey data © Crowncopyright and databaseright 2010 Contains RoyalMail data © Royal Mailcopyright and databaseright 2010”

Great Britain

“Copyright GeomaticsLtd.”

Greece

“Copyright © 2003; Top-Map Ltd.”

Hungary

“La Banca Dati Italiana èstata prodotta usandoquale riferimento anchecartografia numerica edal tratto prodotta e fornitadalla Regione Toscana.”

Italy

“Copyright © 2000;Norwegian MappingAuthority”

Norway

“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”Portugal

“Información geográficapropiedad del CNIG”

Spain

“Based upon electronicdata © National LandSurvey Sweden.”

Sweden

“TopografischeGrundlage: © Bundesamtfür Landestopographie.

Switzerland

E. Respective Country Distribution. Clientacknowledges that HERE has notreceived approvals to distribute mapdata for the following countries in suchrespective countries: Albania, Belarus,Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.HERE may update such list from time totime. The license rights granted to Clientunder this TL with respect to the Datafor such countries are contingent uponClient’s compliance with all applicablelaws and regulations, including, withoutlimitation, any required licenses orapprovals to distribute the Applicationincorporating such Data in suchrespective countries.

VI. Australia Territory


Copyright. Based on data providedunder license from PSMA AustraliaLimited (www.psma.com.au).

576


Appendices

Product incorporates data which is ©20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GMHolden Limited, Intelematics AustraliaPty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.

B. Third Party Notices for Australia. Inaddition to the foregoing, the End-UserTerms for any Application containingRDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australiashall contain the following notice:“Product incorporates traffic locationcodes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora-tion Limited and its licensors.”

VII. China Territory

Personal Use OnlyYou agree to use this Data together with[insert name of Client Application] for thesolely personal, non-commercial purposesfor which you were licensed, and not forservice bureau, time-sharing or othersimilar purposes. Accordingly, but subjectto the restrictions set forth in the followingparagraphs, you may copy this Data onlyas necessary for your personal use to (i)view it, and (ii) save it, provided that youdo not remove any copyright notices thatappear and do not modify the Data in anyway. You agree not to otherwise reproduce,copy, modify, decompile, disassemble orreverse engineer any portion of this Data,and may not transfer or distribute it in anyform, for any purpose, except to the extentpermitted by mandatory laws.

RestrictionsExcept where you have been specificallylicensed to do so by NAV2 , and withoutlimiting the preceding paragraph, you maynot (a) use this Data with any products,systems, or applications installed orotherwise connected to or incommunication with vehicles, capable ofvehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,real time route guidance, fleetmanagement or similar applications; or (b)

with or in communication with anypositioning devices or any mobile orwireless-connected electronic or computerdevices, including without limitationcellular phones, palmtop and handheldcomputers, pagers, and personal digitalassistants or PDAs. You agree to ceaseusing this Data if you fail to comply withthese terms and conditions.

Limited WarrantyNAV2 warrants that (a) the Data willperform substantially in accordance withthe accompanying written materials for aperiod of ninety (90) days from the dateof receipt, and (b) any support servicesprovided by NAV2 shall be substantially asdescribed in applicable written materialsprovided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’ssupport engineers will make commerciallyreasonable efforts to solve any problemissues.

rigCustomer RemediesNAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability andyour exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’ssole discretion, either (a) return of the pricepaid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement ofthe Data that do not meet NAV2’s LimitedWarranty and that are returned to NAV2with a copy of your receipt. This LimitedWarranty is void if failure of the Data hasresulted from accident, abuse, ormisapplication. Any replacement Data willbe warranted for the remainder of theoriginal warranty period or thirty (30) days,whichever is longer. Neither these remediesnor any product support services offeredby NAV2 are available without proof ofpurchase from an authorized internationalsource.

577


Appendices

No Other Warranty:EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTYSET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENTPERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIRLICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIMANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP ORNON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warrantyexclusions may not be permitted underapplicable law, so to that extent the aboveexclusion may not apply to you.

Limited Liability:TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BYAPPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITSLICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIRLICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOTBE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANYCLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THECAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND ORACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY ORDAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICHMAY RESULT FROM THE USE ORPOSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; ORFOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANYOTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGESARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF ORINABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, ORTHE BREACH OF THESE TERMS ORCONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTIONIN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON AWARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITSLICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDERNO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s ORITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDEREXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liabilityexclusions may not be permitted underapplicable law, so to that extent the aboveexclusion may not apply to you.

Export ControlYou agree not to export to anywhere anypart of the Data provided to you or anydirect product thereof except incompliance with, and with all licenses andapprovals required under, applicableexport laws, rules and regulations.

IP ProtectionThe Data are owned by NAV2 or itssuppliers and are protected by applicablecopyright and other intellectual propertylaw and treaties. The Data are providedsolely on the basis of a license to use, notsale.

Entire AgreementThese terms and conditions constitute theentire agreement between NAV2(and itslicensors, including their licensors andsuppliers) and you pertaining to the subjectmatter hereof, and supersedes in theirentirety any and all written or oralagreements previously existing betweenus with respect to such subject matter.

Governing Law.The above terms and conditions shall begoverned by the laws of the People’sRepublic of China, without giving effect to(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) theUnited Nations Convention for Contractsfor the International Sale of Goods, whichis explicitly excluded. Any dispute arisingfrom or in connection with the Dataprovided to you hereunder shall besubmitted to the Shanghai InternationalEconomic and Trade ArbitrationCommission for arbitration.

Gracenote® CopyrightCD and music-related data fromGracenote, Inc., copyright©

578


Appendices

2000-2007 Gracenote. GracenoteSoftware, copyright © 2000-2007Gracenote. This product and service maypractice one or more of the following U.S.Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459;6,330,593 and other patents issued orpending. Some services supplied underlicense from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.Patent 6,304,523.Gracenote and CDDB are registeredtrademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenotelogo and logotype, and the "Powered byGracenote™" logo are trademarks ofGracenote.

Gracenote® End User License Agreement(EULA)This device contains software fromGracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell StreetEmeryville, California 94608("Gracenote").The software from Gracenote (the"Gracenote Software") enables this deviceto do disc and music file identification andobtain music-related information, includingname, artist, track, and title information("Gracenote Data") from online servers("Gracenote Servers"), and to performother functions. You may use GracenoteData only by means of the intended EndUser functions of this device. This devicemay contain content belonging toGracenote's providers. If so, all of therestrictions set forth herein with respect toGracenote Data shall also apply to suchcontent and such content providers shallbe entitled to all of the benefits andprotections set forth herein that areavailable to Gracenote. You agree that youwill use the content from Gracenote("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,the Gracenote Software, and GracenoteServers for your own personal,non-commercial use only. You agree notto assign, copy, transfer or transmit theGracenote Content, Gracenote Software

or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tagassociated with a music file) to any thirdparty. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OREXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTESOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTEDHEREIN.You agree that your non-exclusive licensesto use the Gracenote Content, GracenoteData, the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers will terminate if youviolate these restrictions. If your licensesterminate, you agree to cease any and alluse of the Gracenote Content, GracenoteData, the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers.Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rightsin Gracenote Data, the GracenoteSoftware, and the Gracenote Servers andGracenote Content, including all ownershiprights. Under no circumstances will eitherGracenote become liable for any paymentto you for any information that you provide,including any copyrighted material ormusic file information. You agree thatGracenote may enforce its respectiverights, collectively or separately, under thisagreement against you, directly in eachcompany's own name.Gracenote uses a unique identifier to trackqueries for statistical purposes. Thepurpose of a randomly assigned numericidentifier is to allow Gracenote to countqueries without knowing anything aboutwho you are. For more information, see theweb page at www.gracenote.com for theGracenote Privacy Policy.THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEMOF GRACENOTE DATA AND THEGRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSEDTO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTEMAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS ORWARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANYGRACENOTE DATA FROM THE

579


Appendices

GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTECONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELYAND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHTTO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENTFROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVESERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OFGRACENOTE, CHANGE DATACATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THATGRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NOWARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHERGRACENOTE CONTENT OR THEGRACENOTE SOFTWARE ORGRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREEOR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THEGRACENOTE SOFTWARE ORGRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BEUNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOTOBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANYENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPESTHAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TOPROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREETO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICESAT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALLWARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,IMPLIED WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, ANDNON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHERGRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTSTHAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USEOF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANYGRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILLGRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANYCONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTALDAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITSOR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASONWHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-LIC: 216B-SYNCG3-LThis device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and

(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

WARNINGChanges or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance could

void the user's authority to operate theequipment. The term "IC" before the radiocertification number only signifies thatIndustry Canada technical specificationswere met.

The antenna used for this transmitter mustnot be co-located or operating inconjunction with any other antenna ortransmitter.

SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMSAND CONDITIONSBy activating, using and/or accessing theSUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive orother content or material provided byIntelematics (together, SUNA Productsand/or Services), you must acceptcertain terms and conditions. The followingis a brief summary of the terms andconditions that apply to you. To view thefull terms and conditions relevant to youruse of the SUNA Products and/or Services,please consult:

Website

www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-ditions/

1. AcceptanceBy using SUNA Products and/or Services,you will be deemed to have accepted andagreed to be bound by the terms andconditions fully detailed at:

580


Appendices

Website

www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-ditions/

2. Intellectual PropertySUNA Products and/or Services are foryour personal use. You may not record, orretransmit the content, nor use the contentin association with any other trafficinformation or route guidance service ordevice not approved by Intelematics. Youobtain no right of ownership in anyIntellectual Property Rights (includingcopyright) in the data that is used toprovide SUNA Products and/or Services.3. Appropriate UseSUNA Products and/or Services areintended as an aid to personal motoringand travel planning, and do not providecomprehensive or accurate information onall occasions. On occasions, you mayexperience additional delay as a result ofusing SUNA Products and/or Services. Youacknowledge that it is not intended, orsuitable, for use in applications where timeof arrival or driving directions may impactthe safety of the public or yourself.4. Use of SUNA Products and Serviceswhile drivingYou, and other authorised drivers of thevehicle in which SUNA Products and/orServices are available or installed andactive, remain at all times responsible forobserving all relevant laws and codes ofsafe driving. In particular, you agree to onlyactively operate SUNA Products and/orServices when the Vehicle is at a completestop and it is safe to do so.5. Service Continuity and Reception ofthe SUNA Traffic Channel

We will use reasonable endeavours toprovide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hoursa day, 365 days a year. The SUNA TrafficChannel may occasionally be unavailablefor technical reasons or for plannedmaintenance. We will try to performmaintenance at times when congestion islight. We reserve the right to withdrawSUNA Products and/or Services at anytime.Also, we cannot assure the uninterruptedreception of the SUNA Traffic ChannelRDS-TMC signal at any particular location.6. Limitation of LiabilityNeither Intelematics (nor its suppliers orthe manufacturer of your device (the“Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or toany third party for any damages eitherdirect, indirect, incidental, consequentialor otherwise arising out of the use of orinability to use SUNA Products and/orServices even if Intelematics or a Supplierhas been advised of the possibility of suchdamages. You also acknowledge that theneither Intelematics nor any Supplierguarantees nor make any warranties thatrelate to the availability, accuracy orcompleteness of SUNA Products and/orServices, and to the extent which it islawful to do so, both Intelematics and eachSupplier excludes any warranties whichmight otherwise be implied by any Stateor Federal legislation in relation to SUNAProducts and/or Services.7. Please NoteGreat care has been taken in preparing thismanual. Constant product developmentmay mean that some information is notentirely up-to-date. The information in thisdocument is subject to change withoutnotice.

581


Appendices



TYPE APPROVALSRF Certification Logos for TirePressure Monitoring Sensor(s)

E207816

Argentina

E207817

Abu Dhabi, Dubai

E197509

E202555

Brazil

E207818

European Union EU

E207819

Jordan

582


Appendices

E207820

Malaysia

E197811

Moldova

E207821

Morocco

E198001

Philippines

E197844

Serbia

E207822

Singapore

E198002

South Africa

E203899

583


Appendices

E203679

Taiwan

E198009

Ukraine

584


Appendices

3360 Degree Camera....................................221

Camera Views......................................................221Front Camera.......................................................222Side Camera........................................................222

44WD

See: Four-Wheel Drive......................................193

AA/C

See: Climate Control..........................................141About This Manual...........................................7ABS

See: Brakes..........................................................203ABS driving hints

See: Hints on Driving With Anti-LockBrakes...............................................................203

Accessories....................................................534Exterior style........................................................534Interior style.........................................................534Lifestyle.................................................................534Peace of mind.....................................................534

AccessoriesSee: Replacement Parts

Recommendation............................................12ACC

See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control............225Active Park Assist.........................................214

Automatic Steering into ParkingSpace.................................................................216

Deactivating the Park Assist Feature..........216Troubleshooting the System...........................217Using Active Park Assist...................................215

Adjusting the Headlamps.........................332Horizontal Aim Adjustment...........................333Vertical Aim Adjustment.................................332

Adjusting the Pedals....................................84Adjusting the Steering Wheel...................80

Power Tilt and Telescope SteeringColumn...............................................................80

Airbag Disposal...............................................52Air Conditioning

See: Climate Control..........................................141

Air FilterSee: Changing the Engine Air Filter.............339

AlarmSee: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................76

Ambient Lighting...........................................94Anti-Theft Alarm............................................76

Arming the Alarm..................................................77Disarming the Alarm............................................77Full Guard ................................................................77Reduced Guard......................................................76

Appendices....................................................558Apps.................................................................506

.................................................................................506SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link..................508

Audible Warnings and Indicators...........108Airbag Secondary Warning............................108Beltminder Warning..........................................109Door Ajar Warning..............................................109Headlamps On Warning..................................109Key in Ignition Warning.....................................109Keyless Warning Alert.......................................109Parking Brake On Warning..............................109Rear Park Aid Warning.....................................109Service Advancetrac Warning.......................109

Audio Control...................................................81Media.........................................................................81Seek, Next or Previous.........................................81

Audio System...............................................405General Information.........................................405

Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/SYNC/Satellite Radio..............................413

Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD..................................................................408

Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/SYNC...............................................................411

Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM..................................................................406

Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/FM/CD............................................................415

Autolamps........................................................87Windshield Wiper Activated

Headlamps........................................................88Automatic Climate Control.......................143Automatic High Beam Control.................89

Activating the System........................................90Manually Overriding the System...................90

Automatic Transmission...........................186Brake-Shift Interlock.........................................190

585


Index

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud orSnow...................................................................192

Understanding the Shift Positions of yourAutomatic Transmission............................186

Understanding your SelectShift™Automatic transmission.............................188

Automatic Transmission FluidCheck.............................................................327

Auto-Start-Stop............................................174Disabling Auto StartStop.................................175Enabling Auto StartStop..................................174

Autowipers.......................................................85Auxiliary Power Points................................164

110 Volt - 400 Watt Capacity AC PowerOutlet.................................................................164

12 Volt DC Power Point.....................................164Locations...............................................................164

BBattery

See: Changing the 12V Battery.....................329Bed Access.....................................................252

Box Side Step......................................................252Bed Extender....................................................72

Grocery Mode.........................................................73Tailgate Mode.........................................................72

Bed Ramps.....................................................253Installing the Ramp Holder............................255Stowing the Bed Ramp...................................254Using the Bed Ramp.........................................253

Blind Spot Information System.............236Blind Spot Information System with Trailer

Tow.....................................................................238Switching the System Off and On..............240System Errors......................................................240Using the System...............................................236

Bonnet LockSee: Opening and Closing the Hood............317

Booster Seats..................................................29Types of Booster Seats......................................29

Brake Fluid Check........................................328Brakes..............................................................203

General Information.........................................203Breaking-In....................................................288Bulb Specification Chart...........................337

CCabin Air Filter................................................147California Proposition 65..............................11Capacities and Specifications - 2.7L

EcoBoost™................................................388Specifications.....................................................389

Capacities and Specifications -3.5L.................................................................392Specifications.....................................................393

Capacities and Specifications - 3.5LEcoboost™.................................................396Specifications......................................................397

Capacities and Specifications -5.0L...............................................................400Specifications......................................................401

Capacities and Specifications.................381Car Wash

See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................341Center Console..............................................166Changing a Bulb...........................................333

Accessing the Halogen High Beam, LowBeam and Direction IndicatorBulbs..................................................................334

Lamp Assembly Condensation....................333Replacing Brake, Rear, Direction Indicator

and Reverse Lamp Bulbs...........................336Replacing Cargo Lamp and High-mount

Brake Lamp Bulbs........................................336Replacing Exterior Mounted Mirror Direction

Indicator Lamp Bulbs..................................337Replacing Fog Lamp Bulbs............................335Replacing LED Brake, Rear, Direction

Indicator and Reverse LampBulbs..................................................................336

Replacing LED Cargo Lamp, Spot Lamp andHigh-mount Brake Lamp Bulbs...............337

Replacing LED Direction Indicator and SideMarker Bulbs..................................................336

Replacing LED Headlamp Bulbs..................336Replacing Side Marker Bulb...........................335Replacing the Halogen High Beam, Low

Beam and Direction IndicatorBulbs..................................................................334

Replacing the License Plate LampBulb....................................................................337

Changing a Fuse............................................315Fuses.......................................................................315

586


Index

Changing a Road Wheel............................372Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly

Information......................................................372Tire Change Procedure....................................373

Changing the 12V Battery.........................329Battery Management System......................330

Changing the Engine Air Filter................339Changing the Wiper Blades......................331Checking MyKey System Status................61Checking the Wiper Blades.......................331Child Restraint and Seatbelt

Maintenance.................................................42Child Restraint Positioning..........................31Child Safety.......................................................16

General Information.............................................16Child Safety Locks..........................................32

Left-Hand Side......................................................33Right-Hand Side...................................................33

Cleaning Leather Seats.............................344With King Ranch Edition.................................345Without King Ranch Edition..........................344

Cleaning Products......................................340Cleaning the Engine....................................342Cleaning the Exterior...................................341

Exterior Chrome Parts.......................................341Exterior Plastic Parts.........................................341Stripes or Graphics.............................................341Underbody...........................................................342Under Hood..........................................................342

Cleaning the Instrument Panel andInstrument Cluster Lens........................344

Cleaning the Interior...................................343Cleaning the Wheels..................................346Cleaning the Windows and Wiper

Blades...........................................................343Clearing All MyKeys......................................60Climate...........................................................490Climate Control..............................................141Climate Controlled Seats...........................157

Cooled Seats........................................................158Collision Warning System........................244

Principle Of Operation.....................................244Coolant Check

See: Engine Coolant Check............................323Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.........51Creating a MyKey...........................................60

Programming/Changing ConfigurableSettings..............................................................60

Cross Traffic Alert........................................240False Alerts...........................................................242Switching the System Off and On...............243System Errors......................................................243System Lights, Messages and Audible

Alerts..................................................................242System Limitations...........................................242Using the System..............................................240

Cruise Control..................................................82Principle of Operation......................................224Type 1........................................................................82Type 2.......................................................................82

Cruise controlSee: Using Cruise Control...............................224

Customer Assistance................................300

DData Recording..................................................9

Event Data Recording..........................................10Service Data Recording........................................9

Daytime Running Lamps............................89Type 1 - Conventional

(Non-Configurable).......................................89Type 2 - Configurable.........................................89

Digital Radio....................................................417HD Radio Reception and Station

Troubleshooting.............................................418Direction Indicators........................................91

Lane Change...........................................................91Doors and Locks.............................................64Drive Control.................................................246

Selectable Steering..........................................246Driver Alert......................................................232

Using Driver Alert...............................................232Driver and Passenger Airbags...................46

Children and Airbags..........................................46Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating

Adjustment.......................................................46Driving Aids.....................................................232Driving Hints..................................................288Driving Through Water..............................289DRL

See: Daytime Running Lamps........................89

EEconomical Driving.....................................288

587


Index

Electric Parking Brake................................204Applying the Electric Parking Brake...........204Applying the Electric Parking Brake When

the Vehicle is Moving...................................205Battery With No Charge..................................206Releasing the Electric Parking Brake..........205

Electronic Locking Differential................201Activating the Electronic Locking

Differential.......................................................201Electronic Tailgate.........................................69

With the Outside Control Button...................69With the Remote Control..................................69

Emission Control System..........................183On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)...................184Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance

(I/M) Testing...................................................185End User License Agreement.................558

VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSEAGREEMENT (EULA) .................................558

Engine Block Heater.....................................172Using the Engine Block Heater.......................173

Engine Coolant Check................................323Adding Coolant...................................................324Coolant Change.................................................326Engine Coolant Temperature

Management...................................................327Fail-Safe Cooling...............................................326Recycled Coolant...............................................325Severe Climates.................................................325

Engine ImmobilizerSee: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................74

Engine Oil Check..........................................322Adding Engine Oil...............................................322

Engine Oil Dipstick.......................................322Engine Specifications - 2.7L

EcoBoost™..................................................381Drivebelt Routing................................................381

Engine Specifications - 3.5LEcoboost™.................................................382Drivebelt Routing...............................................382

Engine Specifications - 3.5L.....................381Drivebelt Routing...............................................382

Engine Specifications - 5.0L...................383Drivebelt Routing...............................................383

Entertainment..............................................480AM/FM Radio.......................................................481Apps.......................................................................489Bluetooth Stereo or USB................................488

CD (If equipped)................................................487HD Radio™ Information (If

Available)........................................................484SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If

Activated)........................................................482Sources.................................................................480Supported Media Players, Formats and

Metadata Information................................489USB Ports.............................................................489

Environment......................................................15EPB

See: Electric Parking Brake............................204Essential Towing Checks..........................278

Before Towing a Trailer....................................283Hitches...................................................................279Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal

Watercraft (PWC)........................................284Safety Chains......................................................279Trailer Brakes......................................................280Trailer Lamps.......................................................283Trailer Towing Connector................................278Using a Step Bumper.......................................283When Towing a Trailer.....................................283

Event Data RecordingSee: Data Recording..............................................9

Export Unique Options.................................14Exterior Mirrors................................................96

360-Degree Camera..........................................98Auto-dimming Feature......................................98Blind Spot Information System......................99Clearance Lamps ................................................98Direction Indicator Mirrors ...............................98Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................96Heated Exterior Mirrors .....................................98Integrated Blind Spot Mirror............................98Memory Mirrors ...................................................98Power Exterior Mirrors........................................96Power-Folding Mirrors........................................97PowerScope™ Power Telescoping

Mirrors..................................................................97Puddle Lamps.......................................................98Spot Lamps...........................................................98Telescoping Mirrors..............................................97

FFastening the Seatbelts...............................35

Fastening the Cinch Tongue............................36

588


Index

Rear Inflatable Seatbelt....................................38Seatbelt Locking Modes....................................37Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy................36Using the Seatbelt with Cinch Tongue

(Front Center Seat)........................................35Floor Mats......................................................289Fog Lamps - Front

See: Front Fog Lamps.........................................91Foot Pedals

See: Adjusting the Pedals.................................84Ford Credit..........................................................11

US Only......................................................................11Ford Protect...................................................537

Ford Protect (CANADA ONLY).....................538Ford Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S.

Only)..................................................................537Four-Wheel Drive.........................................193Front Fog Lamps.............................................91Front Passenger Sensing System.............47Front Seat Armrest......................................159Fuel and Refueling........................................176Fuel Consumption........................................182

Calculating Fuel Economy..............................183Filling the Fuel Tank...........................................182

Fuel Filler Funnel Location - RegularCab..................................................................178

Fuel Filler Funnel Location - SuperCab/SuperCrew....................................................179

Fuel Filter........................................................329Fuel Quality - E85.........................................177

Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex FuelVehicles..............................................................177

Switching Between E85 andGasoline.............................................................178

Fuel Quality - Gasoline...............................178Choosing the Right Fuel...................................178

Fuel Shutoff...................................................294Fuses................................................................307Fuse Specification Chart..........................307

Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel.........312Power Distribution Box....................................307

GGarage Door Opener

See: Universal Garage Door Opener...........160Gauges..............................................................102

Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge..........104

Engine Oil Pressure Gauge.............................104Fuel Gauge............................................................104Information Display...........................................105Transmission Fluid Temperature

Gauge.................................................................104Type 1 and 2..........................................................102Type 3.....................................................................103

General Information on RadioFrequencies...................................................53Intelligent Access.................................................53

General Maintenance Information.......539Multi-Point Inspection......................................541Owner Checks and Services.........................540Protecting Your Investment...........................539Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.........................539Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your

Dealership?.....................................................539Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and

Canada.........................................................303Getting the Services You Need..............300

Away From Home.............................................300

HHandbrake

See: Parking Brake............................................204Hazard Warning Flashers.........................294Headlamp Adjusting

See: Adjusting the Headlamps.....................332Head Restraints............................................149

Adjusting the Head Restraint.........................150Heated Seats.................................................156

Rear Heated Seats..............................................157Heated Windows and Mirrors...................147

Heated Exterior Mirror.......................................147Heated Rear Window........................................147

HeatingSee: Climate Control..........................................141

Hill Descent Control.....................................212Principle of Operation.......................................212

Hill Start Assist............................................206Switching the System On and Off...............207Using Hill Start Assist.......................................207

Hints on Controlling the InteriorClimate..........................................................144Cooling the Interior Quickly............................146General Hints.......................................................144Heating the Interior Quickly............................145

589


Index

Recommended Settings for Cooling..........146Recommended Settings for Heating..........146Side Window Defogging in Cold

Weather.............................................................147Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock

Brakes...........................................................203Home Screen.................................................472Hood Lock

See: Opening and Closing the Hood............317

IIgnition Switch...............................................168In California (U.S. Only).............................301Information Display Control.......................83Information Displays....................................110

General Information...........................................110Information Messages................................126

4WD........................................................................140Active Park.............................................................127Adaptive Cruise Control....................................127AdvanceTrac and Traction Control..............128Airbag......................................................................128Alarm and Security............................................128Battery and Charging System........................129Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic

Alert System....................................................129Collision Warning System...............................130Doors and Locks.................................................130Driver Alert..............................................................131Drivetrain.................................................................131Engine.......................................................................131Fuel...........................................................................132Keys and Intelligent Access............................132Lane Keeping System........................................133Maintenance.........................................................133MyKey......................................................................134Off Road.................................................................134Park Aid..................................................................135Park Brake..............................................................135Power Steering....................................................136Pro Trailer Backup Assist.................................136Remote Start........................................................137Seats.......................................................................138Side-Wind.............................................................138Starting System .................................................138Tire Pressure Monitoring System..................139Trailer.......................................................................139

Installing Child Restraints.............................17Child Seats...............................................................17Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower

Anchors for Attaching Child SafetySeats....................................................................26

Front Seat Tether Strap Attachment(Regular Cab)....................................................27

Rear Seat Tether Strap Attachment (CrewCab and Super Cab)......................................28

Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from theOutboard Seating Positions (CenterSeating Use) .....................................................25

Using Inflatable Seatbelts (Rear SeatOutboard Positions).......................................22

Using Lap and Shoulder Belts (Except FrontCenter Position of Super Cab and CrewCab)......................................................................18

Using Lap and Shoulder Belts (Front CenterPosition of Super Cab and CrewCab).....................................................................20

Using Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren (LATCH)...........................................24

Using Tether Straps.............................................26Instrument Cluster.......................................102Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................88Interior Lamps.................................................92

Front Interior Lamps...........................................92Rear Interior Lamps.............................................94

Interior Mirror...................................................99Auto-Dimming Mirror.........................................99

Introduction.........................................................7

JJump Starting the Vehicle........................295

Connecting the Jumper Cables....................295Jump Starting.....................................................296Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................295Removing the Jumper Cables.......................296

KKeyless Entry...................................................66

SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRYKEYPAD..............................................................66

Keyless Starting............................................168Ignition Modes.....................................................169

Keys and Remote Controls.........................53

590


Index

LLane Keeping System.................................232

Switching the System On and Off...............233System Display...................................................234System Settings.................................................233Troubleshooting.................................................235

Lighting Control..............................................87Headlamp Flasher................................................87High Beam...............................................................87

Lighting...............................................................87Load Carrying.................................................247Load Limit......................................................248

Special Loading Instructions for Owners ofPick-up Trucks and Utility-typeVehicles.............................................................252

Vehicle Loading - with and without aTrailer................................................................248

Load Retaining Fixtures.............................247BoxLink™ Cleats.................................................247

Locking and Unlocking................................64Activating Intelligent Access...........................64Autolock and Autounlock.................................66Battery Saver.........................................................66Illuminated Entry..................................................66Power Door Locks................................................64Remote Control....................................................64Smart Unlock.........................................................65Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access

Keys......................................................................65Lug Nuts

See: Changing a Road Wheel........................372

MMaintenance...................................................317

General Information...........................................317Manual Climate Control..............................141Manual Seats..................................................151

Manual Lumbar ..................................................152Moving the Seat Backward and

Forward..............................................................151Recline Adjustment...........................................152

Manual Tailgate..............................................69Media Hub......................................................422Memory Function.........................................154

Easy Entry and Exit Feature............................155

Linking a PreSet Position to your RemoteControl or Intelligent Access Key.............155

Saving a PreSet Position..................................155Message Center

See: Information Displays................................110Mirrors

See: Heated Windows and Mirrors...............147See: Windows and Mirrors................................95

Mobile Communications Equipment.......13Moonroof........................................................100

Bounce-Back........................................................101Opening and Closing the Moonroof.............101

Motorcraft Parts - 2.7LEcoBoost™.................................................383

Motorcraft Parts - 3.5LEcoboost™.................................................385

Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L..............................384Motorcraft Parts - 5.0L.............................385MyKey Troubleshooting...............................62MyKey™.............................................................59

Principle of Operation........................................59

NNavigation......................................................498

cityseeker.............................................................505Destination Mode.............................................500Map Mode............................................................498Navigation Map Updates...............................506Navigation Menu...............................................503SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link..................506Waypoints............................................................504

Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........542Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor.............................542Normal Maintenance Intervals.....................543

OOil Change Indicator Reset.......................323Oil Check

See: Engine Oil Check.......................................322Opening and Closing the Hood................317Ordering Additional Owner's

Literature.....................................................304Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual.........305

Overhead Console........................................167

591


Index

PParking Aids....................................................213

Principle of Operation.......................................213Parking Brake................................................204Passive Anti-Theft System.........................74

SecuriLock™...........................................................74PATS

See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................74Pedals................................................................84Perchlorate.........................................................11Personal Safety System™..........................44

How Does the Personal Safety SystemWork?..................................................................44

Phone...............................................................492During a Phone Call.........................................496Making Calls........................................................495Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First

Time...................................................................492Phone Menu........................................................493Receiving Calls...................................................496Smartphone Connectivity..............................497Text Messaging...................................................497

Post-Crash Alert System...........................297Power Door Locks

See: Locking and Unlocking.............................64Power Running Boards.................................78Power Seats....................................................152

Multi-Contour Front Seats With ActiveMotion ...............................................................153

Power Lumbar.....................................................153Power Steering Fluid Check.....................328Power Windows.............................................95

Accessory Delay...................................................96Bounce-Back.........................................................95One-Touch Up or Down.....................................95Window Lock.........................................................96

Protecting the Environment........................15

RRear Axle..........................................................201Rear Parking Aid............................................213

Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................214Rear Seat Armrest........................................159Rear Seats.......................................................156

Folding Up the Rear Seat Cushion ..............156

Returning the Seat to the SeatingPosition.............................................................156

Rear View Camera.......................................218Camera guidelines.............................................219Manual Zoom......................................................220Obstacle Distance Indicator..........................220Rear Camera Delay...........................................220Using the Rear View Camera System.........218

Rear View CameraSee: Rear View Camera....................................218

Recommended Towing Weights............267Calculating the Maximum Loaded Trailer

Weight for Your Vehicle...............................277Refueling.........................................................180

System Warnings................................................182Remote Control..............................................53

Car Finder................................................................56Integrated Keyhead Transmitters ..................53Intelligent Access Key.........................................54Memory Feature...................................................56Remote Start..........................................................57Replacing the Battery.........................................54Sounding a Panic Alarm.....................................57

Remote Start.................................................148Automatic Settings............................................148

Removing the Tailgate.................................70Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............345Replacement Parts

Recommendation........................................12Collision Repairs....................................................12Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical

Repairs..................................................................12Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................12

Replacing a Lost Key or RemoteControl............................................................58

Reporting Safety Defects (CanadaOnly).............................................................305

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.Only).............................................................305

Roadside Assistance..................................293Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside

Assistance.......................................................293Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside

Assistance Program Coverage................294Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside

Assistance.......................................................294Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting

Roadside Assistance...................................293

592


Index

Vehicles Sold in the United States: UsingRoadside Assistance...................................293

Roadside Emergencies..............................293Running-In

See: Breaking-In.................................................288Running Out of Fuel.....................................179

Adding Fuel From a Portable FuelContainer...........................................................179

Filling a Portable Fuel Container...................179

SSafety Canopy™............................................50Safety Precautions.......................................176Satellite Radio...............................................419

Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number(ESN)................................................................420

Satellite Radio Reception Factors..............420SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service.................420Troubleshooting..................................................421

Scheduled Maintenance Record...........548Scheduled Maintenance..........................539Seatbelt Extension........................................42Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................39Seatbelt Reminder........................................40

Belt-Minder™.......................................................40Seatbelts...........................................................34

Principle of Operation........................................34Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator

Chime..............................................................39Conditions of operation....................................40

Seats.................................................................149Security...............................................................74Settings...........................................................509

911 Assist................................................................514Ambient Lighting................................................519Bluetooth................................................................511Clock.......................................................................510Display...................................................................520General...................................................................518Media Player.........................................................510Mobile Apps..........................................................517Navigation.............................................................515Phone.......................................................................511Radio.......................................................................514Sound....................................................................509Valet Mode............................................................521Vehicle....................................................................519

Voice Control........................................................521Wi-Fi........................................................................519

Side Airbags.....................................................49Sitting in the Correct Position..................149Sliding Windows..........................................100

Power Sliding Back Window.........................100Snow Chains

See: Using Snow Chains.................................366Snowplowing................................................290

Engine Temperature while Plowing............292Installing the Snowplow.................................290Operating the Vehicle with the Snowplow

Attached...........................................................291Outside Air Temperature While

Plowing.............................................................292Snowplowing with your Airbag Equipped

Vehicle...............................................................291Snowplow Mode.................................................291Transmission Operation while

Plowing.............................................................292Special Notices................................................12

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................12Special Instructions..............................................12

Special Operating Conditions ScheduledMaintenance..............................................545Exceptions............................................................547

Speed ControlSee: Cruise Control............................................224

Spot Lamps.......................................................91Cargo and Trailer Hookup Lamps..................92

Stability Control...........................................209Principle of Operation.....................................209

Starter SwitchSee: Ignition Switch...........................................168

Starting a Gasoline Engine.......................169Automatic Engine Shutdown..........................171Failure to Start.......................................................171Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes................172Important Ventilating Information...............172Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is

Moving................................................................172Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is

Stationary...........................................................171Vehicles with an Ignition Key..........................170Vehicles with Keyless Start.............................170

Starting and Stopping the Engine.........168General Information..........................................168

593


Index

Steering...........................................................243Electric Power Steering...................................243

Steering Wheel Lock...................................169Steering Wheel...............................................80Storage Compartments............................166Sunroof

See: Moonroof.....................................................100Sun Visors.......................................................100

Illuminated Vanity Mirror.................................100Supplementary Restraints System.........45

Principle of Operation........................................45Symbols Glossary.............................................7SYNC™ 3.........................................................461

General Information..........................................461SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting.......................521SYNC™ Applications and

Services........................................................439911 Assist...............................................................439SYNC Mobile Apps.............................................441

SYNC™............................................................423General Information.........................................423

SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................453

TTailgate Lock....................................................69Tailgate Step.....................................................71

Closing the Step.....................................................71Opening the Step...................................................71

Tailgate..............................................................69Technical Specifications

See: Capacities and Specifications.............381The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto

Line Program (U.S. Only).......................302Tire Care...........................................................351

Glossary of Tire Terminology.........................352Information About Uniform Tire Quality

Grading..............................................................351Information Contained on the Tire

Sidewall............................................................353Temperature A B C............................................352Traction AA A B C................................................351Treadwear..............................................................351

Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........367Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System.......................................368Understanding Your Tire Pressure

Monitoring System ......................................368

TiresSee: Wheels and Tires.....................................349

Towing a Trailer............................................256Load Placement.................................................257

Towing Points...............................................298Towing the Vehicle on Four

Wheels..........................................................285Emergency Towing............................................285Recreational Towing.........................................285

Towing.............................................................256Traction Control...........................................208

Principle of Operation.....................................208Trailer Reversing Aids..................................257

Principle of Operation......................................258Pro Trailer Backup Assist™............................257Setting Up Pro Trailer Backup Assist.........258Troubleshooting.................................................262Using Pro Trailer Backup Assist.....................261

Trailer Sway Control....................................267Transfer Case Fluid Check........................328Transmission Code Designation............387Transmission..................................................186Transmission

See: Transmission..............................................186Transporting the Vehicle...........................297Type Approvals............................................582

RF Certification Logos for Tire PressureMonitoring Sensor(s)..................................582

UUnder Hood Overview - 2.7L

EcoBoost™..................................................3182.7L EcoBoost......................................................318

Under Hood Overview - 3.5LEcoboost™.................................................320

Under Hood Overview - 3.5L....................319Under Hood Overview - 5.0L....................321Unique Driving Characteristics.................174Universal Garage Door Opener...............160

HomeLink Wireless Control System...........160USB Port..........................................................422Using Adaptive Cruise Control................225

Blocked Sensor..................................................230Changing the Set Speed.................................228Detection Issues.................................................229Disengaging the System.................................228Following a Vehicle...........................................226

594


Index

Hilly Condition and Trailer TowUsage.................................................................229

Low Speed Automatic Cancellation..........229Overriding the System.....................................228Resuming the Set Speed................................228Setting a Speed..................................................226Setting the Gap Distance................................227Switching the System Off..............................229Switching the System On...............................226Switching to Normal Cruise Control............231System Not Available......................................230

Using Cruise Control...................................224Switching Cruise Control Off.........................225Switching Cruise Control On and Off.........224

Using Four-Wheel Drive.............................1934WD Indicator Lights........................................193Driving Off-Road With Truck and Utility

Vehicles.............................................................196How Your Vehicle Differs From Other

Vehicles.............................................................196Using the 2-Speed Automatic 4WD

System...............................................................194Using the Electronic Shift on the Fly 4WD

system...............................................................193Using Hill Descent Control........................212

Hill descent modes............................................212Using MyKey With Remote Start

Systems..........................................................62Using Power Running Boards....................78

Automatic Power Deploy..................................78Automatic Power Stow......................................78Bounce-back..........................................................79Enabling and Disabling......................................78Manual Power Deploy........................................78

Using Snow Chains.....................................366Using Stability Control...............................210

AdvanceTrac™ with Roll Stability Control™(RSC™).............................................................210

Using SYNC™ With Your MediaPlayer............................................................444Accessing Your USB Song Library...............448Bluetooth Devices and System

Settings............................................................450Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the

USB Port..........................................................444Media Menu Features.......................................447Media Voice Commands................................445USB 2.....................................................................450

Voice Commands for Audio Sources..........451Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............427

Accessing Features through the PhoneMenu..................................................................432

Accessing Your Phone Settings...................435Bluetooth Devices.............................................436Making Calls.........................................................431Pairing a Phone for the First Time...............428Pairing Subsequent Phones..........................429Phone Options during an Active Call..........431Phone Voice Commands................................429Receiving Calls.....................................................431System Settings.................................................437Text Messaging...................................................433

Using Traction Control..............................208Switching the System Off .............................208System Indicator Lights and

Messages.........................................................208Using Voice Recognition...........................425

Audio Voice Commands..................................474Climate Voice Commands..............................475Initiating a Voice Session................................425Mobile App Voice Commands......................478Navigation Voice Commands........................477Phone Voice Commands................................475SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice

Commands.....................................................478System Interaction and Feedback..............426Voice Settings Commands............................479

Utilizing the Mediation/ArbitrationProgram (Canada Only)........................303

VVehicle Care..................................................340

General Information.........................................340Vehicle Certification Label.......................387Vehicle Identification Number...............386Vehicle Storage............................................346

Battery....................................................................347Body.......................................................................346Brakes.....................................................................347Cooling system...................................................347Engine.....................................................................347Fuel system..........................................................347General..................................................................346Miscellaneous......................................................347Removing Vehicle From Storage..................347

595


Index

Tires.........................................................................347Ventilation

See: Climate Control..........................................141VIN

See: Vehicle Identification Number............386Voice Control...................................................82

WWarning Lamps and Indicators...............105

Adaptive Cruise Control...................................105Anti-Lock Braking System..............................105Automatic High Beam......................................105Auto Start-stop...................................................105Battery....................................................................105Blind Spot Monitor.............................................105Brake System.......................................................105Check 4X4............................................................106Cruise Control......................................................106Direction Indicator.............................................106Door Ajar................................................................106Electric Park Brake.............................................106Electronic Locking Differential......................106Engine Coolant Temperature........................106Engine Oil..............................................................106Fasten Safety Belt.............................................106Four-Wheel Drive Indicators..........................106Front Airbag..........................................................107Front Fog Lamps.................................................107High Beam.............................................................107Hill Descent...........................................................107Low Fuel Level.....................................................107Low Tire Pressure Warning..............................107Parking Lamps.....................................................107Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced

Power/Electronic Throttle Control..........107Service Engine Soon.........................................108Sport Mode..........................................................108Traction and Stability Control.......................108Traction and Stability Control Off...............108Transmission Tow/Haul...................................108

Washer Fluid Check....................................329Washers

See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................341See: Wipers and Washers.................................85

Waxing.............................................................342Wheel Nuts

See: Changing a Road Wheel........................372

Wheels and Tires.........................................349General Information.........................................349Technical Specifications................................380

Windows and Mirrors...................................95Windshield Washers.....................................86Windshield Wipers........................................85

Speed dependent wipers (ifequipped)..........................................................85

Wiper BladesSee: Checking the Wiper Blades...................331

Wipers and Washers.....................................85

596


Index

2017 F-150 Owner's Manual - Dealer E Process

Documents

Transcript of 2017 F-150 Owner's Manual - Dealer E Process